This is a modern-English version of The American Empire, originally written by Nearing, Scott.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
THE AMERICAN
EMPIRE
By
SCOTT NEARING
Author of
"Wages in the United States"
"Income"
"Financing the
Wage-Earner's Family"
"Anthracite"
"Poverty and Riches," etc.
NEW YORK
THE RAND SCHOOL OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
7 EAST 15TH STREET
1921
All rights reserved
Copyright, 1921,
by the
Rand School of Social Science
First Edition, January, 1921
Second Edition, February, 1921
CONTENTS
PART I
WHAT IS AMERICA?
PART II
THE FOUNDATIONS OF EMPIRE.
A. The Colonization of America.
B. Wealth-based government.
PART III
MANIFEST DESTINY.
PART IV
THE UNITED STATES—A WORLD EMPIRE.
PART V
THE CHALLENGE TO IMPERIALISM.
INDEX
The American Empire
I. THE PROMISE OF 1776
1. The American Republic
The genius of revolution presided at the birth of the American Republic, whose first breath was drawn amid the economic, social and political turmoil of the eighteenth century. The voyaging and discovering of the three preceding centuries had destroyed European isolation and laid the foundation for a new world order of society. The Industrial Revolution was convulsing England and threatening to destroy the Feudal State. Western civilization, in the birthpangs of social revolution, produced first the American and then the French Republic.
The genius of revolution was present at the birth of the American Republic, which began amid the economic, social, and political chaos of the eighteenth century. The exploration and discovery of the previous three centuries had shattered European isolation and set the stage for a new world order. The Industrial Revolution was shaking up England and putting the Feudal State at risk. Western civilization, in the throes of social revolution, first produced the American Republic and then the French Republic.
Feudalism was dying! Divine right, monarchy, aristocracy, oppression, despotism, tyranny—these and all other devils of the old world order were bound for the limbo which awaits outworn, discredited social institutions. The Declaration of Independence officially proclaimed the new order,—challenging "divine right" and maintaining that "all men are created equal; that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable rights; that among these are life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness. That to secure these rights, governments are instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed."
Feudalism was fading away! Divine right, monarchy, aristocracy, oppression, despotism, tyranny—these and all the other demons of the old world order were headed for the oblivion reserved for outdated, discredited social institutions. The Declaration of Independence officially announced the new order, challenging "divine right" and asserting that "all men are created equal; that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable rights; that among these are life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness. To secure these rights, governments are established among men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed."
Life, liberty and happiness were the heritage of the human race, and "whenever any form of government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the right of the people to alter or abolish it, and to institute a new government laying its foundations on such principles, and organizing its[Pg 8] powers in such form, as to them shall seem likely to effect their safety and happiness."
Life, freedom, and happiness are the rights of all people, and whenever any form of government threatens these rights, it's the people's right to change or eliminate it and create a new government based on principles that they believe will best ensure their safety and happiness.
Thus the rights of the people were declared superior to the privileges of the rulers; revolution was justified; and the principles of eighteenth century individualism were made the foundation of the new political state. Aristocracy was swept aside and in its stead democracy was enthroned.
Thus the rights of the people were declared more important than the privileges of the rulers; revolution was justified; and the principles of eighteenth-century individualism became the foundation of the new political state. Aristocracy was eliminated, and in its place, democracy was established.
2. The Yearning for Liberty
The nineteenth century re-echoed with the language of social idealism. Traditional bonds were breaking; men's minds were freed; their imaginations were kindled; their spirits were possessed by a gnawing hunger for justice and truth.
The nineteenth century resonated with the language of social idealism. Traditional ties were falling apart; people's minds were liberated; their imaginations were ignited; their spirits were driven by a deep craving for justice and truth.
Revolting millions shouted: "Liberty, Equality, Fraternity!" Sages mused; philosophers analyzed; prophets exhorted; statesmen organized toward this end.
Revolting millions shouted: "Freedom, Equality, Brotherhood!" Wise people reflected; philosophers examined; prophets urged action; politicians worked towards this goal.
Men felt the fire of the new order burning in their vitals. It purged them. They looked into the eyes of their fellows and saw its reflection. Dreaming of liberty as a maiden dreams of her lover, humanity awoke suddenly, to find liberty on the threshold.
Men felt the intensity of the new order igniting within them. It cleansed them. They gazed into the eyes of their peers and saw its reflection. Dreaming of freedom like a young woman dreams of her partner, humanity suddenly awakened to find freedom at the door.
Through the ages mankind has sought truth and justice. Vested interests have intervened. The powers of the established order have resisted, but the search has continued. That eternal vigilance and eternal sacrifice which are the price of liberty, are found wherever human society has left a record. At one point the forces of light seem to be winning. At another, liberty and truth are being ruthlessly crushed by the privileged masters of life. The struggle goes on—eternally.
Through the ages, humanity has sought truth and justice. Those with their own interests have intervened. The powers of the established order have resisted, but the search has continued. That constant vigilance and sacrifice, which are the cost of freedom, can be found wherever human society has left its mark. At one moment, it seems like the forces of good are winning. At another, freedom and truth are being brutally suppressed by the privileged leaders of society. The struggle continues—forever.
Liberty and justice are ideals that exist in the human heart, but they are none the less real. Indeed, they are in a sense more potent, lying thus in immortal embryo, than they could be as tangible institutions. Institutions[Pg 9] are brought into being, perfected, kept past their time of highest usefulness and finally discarded. The hopes of men spring eternally, spontaneously. They are the true social immortality.
Liberty and justice are ideals that live in the human heart, but they are no less real. In fact, they are, in a way, more powerful in this timeless state than they could ever be as physical institutions. Institutions[Pg 9] are created, refined, maintained beyond their peak usefulness, and eventually thrown away. The hopes of people rise endlessly and spontaneously. They represent true social immortality.
3. Government of the People
Feudalism as a means of organizing society had failed. The newly declared liberties were confided to the newly created state. It was political democracy upon which the founders of the Republic depended to make good the promise of 1776.
Feudalism as a way of organizing society had collapsed. The newly established freedoms were entrusted to the newly formed government. It was political democracy that the founders of the Republic relied on to fulfill the promise of 1776.
The American colonists had fled to escape economic, political and religious tyranny in the mother countries. They had drunk the cup of its bitterness in the long contest with England over the rights of taxation, of commerce, of manufacture, and of local political control. They had their fill of a mastery built upon the special privilege of an aristocratic minority. It was liberty and justice they sought and democracy was the instrument that they selected to emancipate themselves from the old forms of privilege and to give to all an equal opportunity for life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness.
The American colonists had escaped to get away from economic, political, and religious oppression in their home countries. They had endured the harsh struggles with England over issues like taxation, trade, manufacturing, and local political authority. They were tired of being ruled by an elite minority with special privileges. They were after freedom and justice, and they chose democracy as the tool to break free from the old systems of privilege and to ensure everyone had an equal chance at life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness.
Political democracy was to place the management of community business in the hands of the people—to give them liberty in the control of public affairs. The highest interest of democracy was to be the interest of the people. There could be no higher interest because the people were supreme. The people were to select the public servants; direct their activities; determine public policy; prescribe the law; demand its enforcement; and if need be assert their superior authority over any part of the government, not excepting the constitution.[1]
Political democracy aimed to put the management of community affairs in the hands of the people, granting them the freedom to control public matters. The most important interest of democracy was to be the interest of the people. There was no higher interest because the people were supreme. The people were to choose public servants, guide their activities, shape public policy, establish laws, demand that they be enforced, and if necessary, assert their superior authority over any part of the government, including the constitution.[1]
Democracy, in politics, was based on the idea that public affairs could best be run by the public voice. However expert may be the hand that administers the laws, the hand and the heart that renders the final decision in large questions must belong to the public.[2]
Democracy in politics was founded on the belief that public matters should be managed by the voice of the people. No matter how skilled the person implementing the laws may be, the ultimate authority on major issues must rest with the public.[2]
The people who laid the foundations for democracy in France and the United States feared tyranny. They and their ancestors had been, for centuries, the victims of governmental despotism. They were on their guard constantly against governmental aggression in any form. And they, therefore, placed the strictest limitations upon the powers that governments should enjoy.
The individuals who established the foundations of democracy in France and the United States were afraid of tyranny. They and their ancestors had suffered as victims of government oppression for centuries. They were always vigilant against any form of government aggression. As a result, they imposed the strictest limits on the powers that governments should have.
Special privilege government was run by a special class,—the hereditary aristocracy—in the interest and for the profit of that class. They held the wealth of the nation—the land—and lived comfortably upon its produce. They never worked—no gentleman could work and remain a gentleman. They carried on the affairs of the court—sometimes well, sometimes badly; maintained an extravagant scale of social life; built up a vicious system of secret international diplomacy; commanded in time of war, and at all times; levied rents and taxes which went very largely to increase their own comfort and better their own position in life. The machinery of government and the profits from government remained in the hands of this one class.
Special privilege government was controlled by a specific class—the hereditary aristocracy—serving the interests and benefiting that class. They owned the country's wealth—the land—and lived comfortably off its resources. They never worked—no gentleman could work and still be considered a gentleman. They managed the affairs of the court—sometimes well, sometimes poorly; upheld a lavish social lifestyle; developed a corrupt system of secret international diplomacy; led in times of war, and at all times; imposed rents and taxes that mainly went to enhance their own comfort and improve their own status in life. The machinery of government and its profits remained in the hands of this single class.
Class government from its very nature could not be other than oppressive. "All hereditary government over a people is to them a species of slavery and representative government is freedom." "All hereditary government is in its nature tyranny.... To inherit a government is to inherit the people as if they were flocks and herds."[3]
Class government is inherently oppressive. "Any hereditary government over people is a form of slavery, while representative government is true freedom." "All hereditary government is essentially tyranny.... To inherit a government is to treat people as if they were livestock."[3]
4. The Source of Authority
The people were to be the source of authority in the new state. The citizen was to have a voice because he was an adult, capable of rendering judgment in the selection of public servants and in the determination of public policy.
The people were to be the source of authority in the new state. The citizen was to have a voice because he was an adult, capable of making decisions in choosing public servants and in determining public policy.
All through history there had been men into whose hands supreme power had been committed, who had carried this authority with an astounding degree of wisdom and integrity. For every one who had comported himself with such wisdom in the presence of supreme authority, there were a score, or more likely a hundred, who had used this power stupidly, foolishly, inefficiently, brutally or viciously.
Throughout history, there have been men who were given supreme power and who exercised that authority with remarkable wisdom and integrity. For every individual who handled such power wisely, there were countless others—perhaps a hundred or more—who used it foolishly, impractically, cruelly, or viciously.
Few men are good enough or wise enough to keep their heads while they hold in their hands unlimited authority over their fellows. The pages of human experience were written full of the errors, failures, and abuses of which such men so often have been guilty.
Few men are smart enough or wise enough to stay level-headed when they have unlimited power over others. The history of humanity is filled with the mistakes, failures, and abuses that such men have frequently committed.
The new society, in an effort to prevent just such transgressions of social well being, placed the final power to decide public questions in the hands of the people. It was not contended, or even hoped that the people would make no mistakes, but that the people would make fewer mistakes and mistakes less destructive of public well-being than had been made under class government. At least this much was gained, that the one who abused power must first secure it from those whom he proposed to abuse, and must later exercise it unrestrained to the detriment of those from whom the power was derived and in whom it still resided.
The new society, in an effort to prevent such violations of social well-being, put the final authority to decide public issues in the hands of the people. It was neither claimed nor expected that the people would never make mistakes, but rather that they would make fewer mistakes and that these mistakes would be less harmful to public well-being than those made under a class-based government. At the very least, it was achieved that anyone who abused power had to first gain it from those they intended to exploit, and later had to wield it freely to the detriment of those from whom the power originated and in whom it still resided.
The citizen was to be the source of authority. His word, combined with that of the majority of his fellows, was final. He delegated authority. He assented to laws which were administered over all men, including himself. He accepts the authority of which he was the source.
The citizen was to be the source of authority. His word, along with that of the majority of his peers, was final. He delegated authority. He agreed to laws that applied to everyone, including himself. He accepts the authority of which he was the source.
5. The American Tradition
This was the American tradition. This was the language of the new, free world. Life, liberty and happiness; popular sovereignty; equal opportunity. This, to the people of the old countries was the meaning of America. This was the promise of 1776.
This was the American tradition. This was the language of the new, free world. Life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness; popular sovereignty; equal opportunity. This, to the people of the old countries, was what America meant. This was the promise of 1776.
When President Wilson went to Europe, speaking the language of liberty that is taught in every American schoolroom, the plain people turned to him with supreme confidence. To them he was the embodiment of the spirit of the West.
When President Wilson went to Europe, speaking the language of freedom that is taught in every American classroom, the ordinary people looked to him with complete trust. To them, he represented the essence of the spirit of the West.
Native-born Americans hold the same idea. To them the Declaration of Independence was a final break with the old order of monarchical, imperial Europe. It was the charter of popular rights and human liberties, establishing once for all the principles of self-government and equal opportunity.
Native-born Americans share the same perspective. For them, the Declaration of Independence marked a definitive break from the old system of monarchical, imperial Europe. It was the foundation of popular rights and human freedoms, establishing once and for all the principles of self-governance and equal opportunity.
The Statue of Liberty, guarding the great port of entrance to America, symbolizes the spirit in which foreigners and natives alike think of her—as the champion of the weak and the oppressed; the guardian of justice; the standard-bearer of freedom.
The Statue of Liberty, standing watch over the main entry port to America, represents how both foreigners and locals view her—as a champion for the weak and oppressed, a protector of justice, and a symbol of freedom.
This spirit of America is treasured to-day in the hearts of millions of her citizens. To the masses of the American people America stands to-day as she always stood. They believe in her freedom; they boast of her liberties; they have faith in her great destiny as the leader of an emancipated world. They respond, as did their ancestors, to the great truths of liberty, equality, and fraternity that inspired the eighteenth century.
This spirit of America is cherished today in the hearts of millions of her citizens. For the American people, America represents what it always has. They believe in her freedom, they take pride in her liberties, and they have faith in her great destiny as the leader of a liberated world. They connect, just like their ancestors did, to the powerful ideals of liberty, equality, and brotherhood that inspired the eighteenth century.
The tradition of America is a hope, a faith, a conviction, a burning endeavor, centering in an ideal of liberty and justice for the human race.
The tradition of America is a hope, a belief, a conviction, a passionate effort, focusing on an ideal of freedom and justice for all humanity.
Patrick Henry voiced this ideal when, a passionate appeal for freedom being interrupted by cries of "Treason,[Pg 13] treason!" he faced the objector with the declaration, "If this be treason, make the most of it!"
Patrick Henry expressed this ideal when, during a passionate appeal for freedom, he was interrupted by shouts of "Treason,[Pg 13] treason!" He turned to the objector and stated, "If this is treason, then so be it!"
Eighteenth century Europe, struggling against religious and political tyranny, looked to America as the land of Freedom. America to them meant liberty. "What Athens was in miniature, America will be in magnitude," wrote Tom Paine. "The one was the wonder of the ancient world; the other is becoming the admiration, the model of the present." ("The Rights of Man," Part II, Chapter 3.) The promise of 1776 was voiced by men who felt a consuming passion for freedom; a divine discontent with anything less than the highest possible justice; a hatred of tyranny, oppression and every form of special privilege and vested wrong. They yearned over the future and hoped grandly for the human race.
Eighteenth-century Europe, battling against religious and political oppression, saw America as the land of freedom. To them, America represented liberty. "What Athens was in miniature, America will be in magnitude," wrote Tom Paine. "The one was the wonder of the ancient world; the other is becoming the admiration, the model of the present." ("The Rights of Man," Part II, Chapter 3.) The promise of 1776 was expressed by men who felt a deep passion for freedom; a divine dissatisfaction with anything less than the highest possible justice; a hatred of tyranny, oppression, and every form of special privilege and unjust practices. They envisioned a hopeful future and aspired grandly for humanity.
FOOTNOTES:
[1] "It is, Sir, the people's constitution, the people's government, made for the people, made by the people, and answerable to the people."—Daniel Webster's reply to Hayne, 1830. "Speeches and Orations." E. P. Whipple, Boston, Little, Brown and Co., p. 257.
[1] "It is, Sir, the constitution of the people, the government of the people, created for the people, created by the people, and accountable to the people."—Daniel Webster's response to Hayne, 1830. "Speeches and Orations." E. P. Whipple, Boston, Little, Brown and Co., p. 257.
[2] Tom Paine held ardently to this doctrine, "It is always the interest of a far greater number of people in a Nation to have things right than to let them remain wrong; and when public matters are open to debate, and the public judgment free, it will not decide wrong unless it decides too hastily!" "Rights of Man," Part II, Ch. 4.
[2] Tom Paine strongly believed in this idea: "It's always in the interest of a much larger group of people in a nation to get things right rather than to leave them wrong; and when public issues are up for discussion, and the public's opinion is free, it will only make the wrong choice if it rushes to a decision!" "Rights of Man," Part II, Ch. 4.
II. THE COURSE OF EMPIRE
1. Promise and Fulfillment
A vast gulf yawns between the inspiring promise that a handful of men and women made to the world in 1776, and the fulfillment of that promise that is embodied in twentieth century American life. The pre-war indifference to the loss of liberty; the gradual encroachments on the rights of free speech, and free assemblage and of free press; the war-time suppressions, tyrannies, and denials of justice; the subsequent activities of city, state, and national legislatures and executives in passing and enforcing laws that provided for military training in violation of conscience, the denial of freedom of belief, of thought, of speech, of press and of assemblage,—activities directed specifically to the negation of those very principles of liberty which have constituted so intimate a part of the American tradition of freedom,—form a contrast between the promise of 1776 and the twentieth century fulfillment of that promise which is brutal in its terrible intensity.
A huge gap exists between the inspiring promise that a few men and women made to the world in 1776 and how that promise has been realized in 20th-century American life. There was a lack of concern before the war over the loss of freedom; the slow erosion of the rights to free speech, assembly, and press; the oppressive actions during the war, including tyrannies and denials of justice; and the following actions by city, state, and national governments to create and enforce laws that mandated military training against people's beliefs, denying freedom of belief, thought, speech, press, and assembly—these activities specifically undermine the very principles of liberty that have been a core part of the American tradition of freedom. This creates a stark contrast between the promise of 1776 and the 20th-century reality of that promise, which is painfully intense.
Many thoughtful Americans have been baffled by this conflict between the aims of the eighteenth century and the accomplishments of the twentieth. The facts they admit. For explanation, either they may say, "It was the war," implying that with the cessation of hostilities and the return to a peace basis, the situation has undergone a radical change; or else they blame some individual or some organization for the extinction of American liberties.
Many thoughtful Americans have been confused by this conflict between the goals of the eighteenth century and the achievements of the twentieth. They acknowledge the facts. For an explanation, they might say, "It was the war," suggesting that with the end of hostilities and a return to peace, the situation has changed drastically; or they may blame a particular person or organization for the loss of American liberties.
Great consequences arise from great causes. A general break-down of liberties cannot be attributed to individual caprice nor to a particular legislative or judicial act.
Big consequences come from big causes. A widespread breakdown of freedoms can't be blamed on individual whims or a specific law or judicial action.
The denial of liberty in the United States is a matter of large import. No mayor, governor, president, legislature, court, magnate, banker, corporation or trust, and[Pg 15] no combination of these individuals and organizations could arbitrarily destroy the American Republic. Underneath personality and partisanship are working the forces which have stripped the American people of their essential liberties as the April sun strips the mountains of their snow.
The denial of freedom in the United States is a significant issue. No mayor, governor, president, legislature, court, businessman, banker, corporation, or trust, and[Pg 15] no group of these individuals and organizations can randomly destroy the American Republic. Beneath personal interests and party affiliations, there are forces that have taken away the American people's fundamental freedoms, just like the April sun melts the snow off the mountains.
No one can read the history of the United States since the drafting of the Declaration of Independence without being struck by the complete transformation in the forms of American life. The Industrial Revolution which had gripped England for half a century, made itself felt in the United States after 1815. Steam, transportation, industrial development, city life, business organization, expansion across the continent—these are the factors that have made of the United States a nation utterly apart from the nation of which those who signed the Declaration of Independence and fought the Revolution dreamed.
No one can look at the history of the United States since the writing of the Declaration of Independence without noticing the dramatic changes in American life. The Industrial Revolution, which had taken hold in England for fifty years, began to impact the United States after 1815. Steam power, transportation, industrial growth, urban living, business organization, and expansion across the continent—these are the factors that have transformed the United States into a nation completely different from what those who signed the Declaration of Independence and fought in the Revolution envisioned.
These economic changes have brought political changes. The American Republic has been thrust aside. Above its remains towers a mighty imperial structure,—the world of business,—bulwarked by usage and convention; safeguarded by legislation, judicial interpretation, and the whole power of organized society. That structure is the American Empire—as real to-day as the Roman Empire in the days of Julius Caesar; the French Empire under the Little Corporal, or the British Empire of the Great Commoner, William E. Gladstone.
These economic changes have led to political changes. The American Republic has been pushed aside. Above its remnants stands a powerful imperial structure—the business world—supported by traditions and norms; protected by laws, judicial interpretations, and the full force of organized society. That structure is the American Empire—just as real today as the Roman Empire in the days of Julius Caesar, the French Empire under the Little Corporal, or the British Empire of the Great Commoner, William E. Gladstone.
Approved or disapproved; exalted or condemned; the fact of empire must be evident even to the hasty observer. The student, tracing its ramifications, realizes that the structure has been building for generations.
Approved or disapproved; praised or criticized; the reality of empire must be clear even to a quick observer. The student, following its connections, understands that this structure has been developing for generations.
2. The Characteristics of Empire
Many minds will refuse to accept the term "empire" as applied to a republic. Accustomed to link "empire" with "emperor," they conceive of a supreme hereditary ruler as an essential part of imperial life. A little [Pg 16]reflection will show the inadequacy of such a concept. "The British Empire" is an official term, used by the British Government, although Great Britain is a limited monarchy, whose king has less power than the President of the United States. On the other hand, eastern potentates, who exercise absolute sway over their tiny dominions do not rule "empires."
Many people struggle to accept the word "empire" when it's used to describe a republic. They're used to thinking of "empire" as being linked to "emperor," and they believe a supreme hereditary ruler is a necessary part of an empire. A bit of thought will reveal that this idea is lacking. "The British Empire" is an official term used by the British Government, even though Great Britain is a limited monarchy, where the king has less power than the President of the United States. Meanwhile, eastern rulers who have total control over their small territories do not lead "empires."
Recent usage has given the term "empire" a very definite meaning, which refers, not to an "emperor" but to certain relations between the parts of a political or even of an economic organization. The earlier uses of the word "empire" were, of course, largely political. Even in that political sense, however, an "empire" does not necessarily imply the domain of an "emperor."
Recent usage has given the term "empire" a clear meaning, referring not to an "emperor" but to specific relationships between different parts of a political or even an economic organization. Earlier uses of the word "empire" were mostly political. Even in that political context, though, an "empire" doesn't necessarily mean the realm of an "emperor."
According to the definition appearing in the "New English Dictionary" wherever "supreme and extensive political dominion" is exercised "by a sovereign state over its dependencies" an empire exists. The empire is "an aggregation of subject territories ruled over by a sovereign state." The terms of the definition are political, but it leaves the emperor entirely out of account and makes an empire primarily a matter of organization and not of personality.
According to the definition found in the "New English Dictionary," an empire exists wherever a "sovereign state" exerts "supreme and extensive political control" over its dependencies. An empire is described as "a collection of subject territories governed by a sovereign state." The definition focuses on political terms, but it completely overlooks the emperor, making the concept of an empire primarily about organization rather than individual leadership.
During the last fifty years colonialism, the search for foreign markets, and the competition for the control of "undeveloped" countries has brought the words "empire" and "imperialism" into a new category, where they relate, not to the ruler—be he King or Emperor—but to the extension of commercial and economic interests. The "financial imperialism" of F. C. Howe and the "imperialism" of J. A. Hobson are primarily economic and only incidentally political.
During the last fifty years, colonialism, the pursuit of foreign markets, and the competition for control of "undeveloped" countries have pushed the terms "empire" and "imperialism" into a new category. Now, they relate not to the ruler—whether a King or Emperor—but to the expansion of commercial and economic interests. The "financial imperialism" of F. C. Howe and the "imperialism" of J. A. Hobson are mainly economic and only tangentially political.
"Empire" conveys the idea of widespread authority, dominion, rule, subjugation. Formerly it referred to political power; to-day it refers to economic power. In either case the characteristics of empire are,—
"Empire" conveys the idea of widespread authority, control, governance, and domination. In the past, it referred to political power; today, it refers to economic power. In either case, the characteristics of empire are—
1. Conquered territory.
1. Conquered land.
2. Subject peoples.
2. Subjugated populations.
3. An imperial or ruling class.
3. An imperial or governing elite.
4. The exploitation of the subject peoples and the conquered territory for the benefit of the ruling class.
4. The use of the people and the conquered land to benefit the ruling elite.
Wherever these four characteristics of imperial organization exist, there is an empire, in all of its essential features. They are the acid-test, by which the presence of empire may be determined.
Wherever these four traits of imperial organization are found, there is an empire in all its key aspects. They serve as the ultimate test for identifying the presence of an empire.
Names count for nothing. Rome was an empire, while she still called herself a republic. Napoleon carried on his imperial activities for years under the authority of Republican France. The existence of an empire depends, not upon the presence of an "emperor" but upon the presence of those facts which constitute Empire,—conquered territory; subject peoples; an imperial class; exploitation by and for this class. If these facts exist in Russia, Russia is an empire; if they are found in Germany, Germany is an empire; if they appear in the United States, the United States is an empire none the less surely,—traditions, aspirations and public conviction to the contrary notwithstanding.
Names don’t mean much. Rome was an empire, even while it called itself a republic. Napoleon operated as an emperor for years under the rule of Republican France. The reality of an empire doesn’t rely on the title of "emperor" but on the presence of certain factors that define an empire—conquered lands, subjected peoples, an imperial class, and the exploitation by and for that class. If these factors exist in Russia, then Russia is an empire; if they exist in Germany, then Germany is an empire; if they are present in the United States, the United States is an empire just the same—regardless of any traditions, hopes, or public beliefs to the contrary.
3. The Preservation of Empire
The first business of an imperial class is the preservation of the empire to which it owes its advantages and privileges. Therefore, in its very essence, imperialism is opposed to popular government. "The greatest good to the greatest number" is the ideal that directs the life of a self-governing community. "The safety and happiness of the ruling class" is the first principle of imperial organization.
The main job of an imperial class is to protect the empire that provides its benefits and privileges. So, at its core, imperialism goes against the idea of popular government. "The greatest good for the greatest number" is the principle that guides the life of a self-governing community. Meanwhile, "the safety and happiness of the ruling class" is the primary focus of imperial organization.
Imperialism is so generally recognized and so widely accepted as a mortal foe of popular government that the members of an imperial class, just rising into power, are always careful to keep the masses of the people ignorant of[Pg 18] the true course of events. This necessity explains the long period, in the history of many great empires, when the name and forms of democracy were preserved, after the imperial structure had been established on solid foundations. Slow changes, carefully directed and well disguised, are necessary to prevent outraged peoples from rising against an imperial order when they discover how they have been sold into slavery. Even with all of the safeguards, under the control of the ablest statesmen, Caesar frequently meets his Brutus.
Imperialism is widely seen and accepted as a serious enemy of popular government, so those in power in an imperial class are always careful to keep the masses unaware of[Pg 18] the true events. This need explains the long periods in the histories of many great empires when the name and forms of democracy were maintained, even after the imperial structure was firmly established. Gradual changes, carefully managed and well hidden, are necessary to stop angry people from rising up against an imperial order when they realize they’ve been sold into slavery. Even with all the precautions and the best political leaders in control, Caesar often encounters his Brutus.
The love of justice; the yearning for liberty; the sense of fair play; the desire to extend opportunity, all operate powerfully upon those to whom the principles of self-government are dearest, leading them to sacrifice position, economic advantage, and sometimes life itself for the sake of the principles to which they have pledged their faith.
The love of justice, the desire for freedom, the sense of fairness, and the wish to create opportunities all strongly influence those who value self-government the most, pushing them to give up status, financial benefits, and sometimes even their lives for the principles they hold dear.
Therein lies what is perhaps one of the most essential differences between popular government and empire. The former rests upon certain ideas of popular rights and liberties. The latter is a weapon of exploitation in the hands of the ruling class. Popular government lies in the hopes and beliefs of the people. Empire is the servant of ambition and the shadow of greed. Popular government has been evolved by the human race at an immense sacrifice during centuries of struggle against the forms and ideas that underly imperialism. Since men have set their backs on the past and turned their faces with resolute hope to the future, empire has repelled them, while democracy has called and beckoned.
There’s a crucial difference between popular government and empire. Popular government is based on ideas of individual rights and freedoms. In contrast, empire is a tool for exploitation used by the ruling class. Popular government is rooted in the hopes and beliefs of the people, while empire serves ambition and embodies greed. The concept of popular government has developed over centuries, through immense sacrifice and struggle against the forces and ideas that support imperialism. As people have rejected the past and confidently looked to the future, they’ve turned away from empire and been drawn toward democracy.
Empires have been made possible by "bread and circuses"; by appealing to an abnormally developed sense of patriotism; by the rule of might where largess and cajolery have failed. Rome, Germany and Britain are excellent examples of these three methods. In each case, millions of citizens have had faith in the empire, believing in its promise of glory and of victory; but on the other hand, this belief could be maintained only by a continuous propaganda—triumphs in Rome, school-books and "boilerplate"[Pg 19] in Germany and England. Even then, the imperial class is none too secure in its privileges. Always from the abysses of popular discontent, there arises some Spartacus, some Liebknecht, some Smillie, crying that "the future belongs to the people."
Empires have thrived on "bread and circuses"; by tapping into an overly intense sense of patriotism; and through the sheer force of power when generosity and persuasion have fallen short. Rome, Germany, and Britain are prime examples of these three strategies. In each instance, millions of citizens believed in the empire, trusting its promise of glory and success; however, this belief could only be sustained through constant propaganda—triumphs in Rome, textbooks and "boilerplate" in Germany and England. Even so, the ruling class is never completely secure in its privileges. Always from the depths of public discontent, there emerges a figure like Spartacus, Liebknecht, or Smillie, declaring that "the future belongs to the people."
The imperial class, its privileges unceasingly threatened by the popular love of freedom—devotes not a little attention to the problem of "preserving law and order" by suppressing those who speak in the name of liberty, and by carrying on a generous advertising campaign, the object of which is to persuade the people of the advantages which they derive from imperial rule.
The ruling elite, whose privileges are constantly at risk from the people's desire for freedom, focuses a lot on "maintaining law and order" by silencing those who advocate for liberty and running an extensive marketing campaign aimed at convincing the public of the benefits they get from imperial control.
During the earlier stages in the development of empire, the imperial class is able to keep itself and its designs in the background. As time passes, however, the power of the imperialist becomes more and more evident, until some great crisis forces the empire builders to step out into the open. They then appear as the frank apologists, spokesmen and defenders of the order for which they have so faithfully labored and from which they expect to gain so much.
During the early stages of empire development, the ruling class can keep itself and its plans hidden. As time goes on, though, the power of the imperialist becomes increasingly obvious, until a significant crisis forces the empire builders to come into the spotlight. They then emerge as the open supporters, representatives, and defenders of the system they have worked so hard for and from which they expect to benefit greatly.
Finally, the ambition of some aggressive leader among the imperialists, or a crisis in the affairs of the empire leads to the next step—the appointment of a "dictator," "supreme ruler" or "emperor." This is the last act of the imperial drama. Henceforth, the imperial class divides its attention between,—
Finally, the ambition of some aggressive leader among the imperialists, or a crisis in the affairs of the empire, leads to the next step—the appointment of a "dictator," "supreme ruler," or "emperor." This is the final act of the imperial drama. From this point on, the imperial class splits its attention between—
1. The suppression of agitation and revolt among the people at home;
1. Managing opposition and rebellion among the population;
2. Maintaining the imperial sway over conquered territory;
2. Maintaining control over conquered territories;
3. Extending the boundaries of the empire and
3. Growing the empire's borders; and
4. The unending struggle between contending factions of the ruling class for the right to carry on the work of exploitation at home and abroad.
4. The ongoing struggle between rival factions of the ruling class for the opportunity to persist in their exploitative practices both at home and abroad.
4. The Price of Empire
Since the imperial or ruling class is willing to go to any lengths in order to preserve the empire upon which its privileges depend, it follows that the price of empire must be reckoned in the losses that the masses of the people suffer while safeguarding the privileges of the few.
Since the ruling class is willing to do whatever it takes to maintain the empire that their privileges rely on, it follows that the cost of the empire must account for the losses that the majority of people endure while protecting the privileges of the few.
As a matter of course, conquered and dependent people pay with their liberty for their incorporation into the empire that holds dominion over them. On any other basis, empire is unthinkable. Indeed the terms "dependencies," "domination," and "subject" carry with them only one possible implication—the subordination or extinction of the liberties of the peoples in question.
As a matter of course, conquered and dependent people pay with their freedom for being incorporated into the empire that controls them. On any other basis, empire is unimaginable. In fact, the terms "dependencies," "domination," and "subject" imply only one possible outcome—the subordination or loss of the freedoms of the peoples involved.
The imperial class—a minority—depends for its continued supremacy upon the ownership of some form of property, whether this property be slaves, or land, or industrial capital. As Veblen puts it: "The emergence of the leisure class coincides with the beginning of ownership." ("Theory of the Leisure Class," T. Veblen, New York. B. W. Huebsch, 1899, p. 22.) Necessarily, therefore, the imperial class will sacrifice the so-called human or personal rights of the home population to the protection of its property rights. Indeed the property rights come to be regarded as the essential human rights, although there is but a small minority of the community that can boast of the possession of property.
The ruling class—a minority—relies on owning some type of property to maintain its dominance, whether that property is slaves, land, or industrial assets. As Veblen notes: "The emergence of the leisure class coincides with the beginning of ownership." ("Theory of the Leisure Class," T. Veblen, New York. B. W. Huebsch, 1899, p. 22.) Consequently, the ruling class will prioritize the protection of its property rights over the so-called human or personal rights of the general population. In fact, property rights are often seen as the ultimate human rights, even though only a small portion of the community can claim to own property.
The superiority of ruling class property rights over the personal rights and liberties of the inhabitants in a subject territory is taken as a matter of course. Even in the home country, where the issue is clearly made, the imperial class will sacrifice the happiness, the health, the longevity, and the lives of the propertyless class in the interest of "law and order" and "the protection of property." The stories of the Roman populace; of the French peasants under Louis XIV; of the English factory workers (men, women and children) during the past hundred years, and of the low skilled workers in the United States since the Civil War,[Pg 21] furnish ample proof of the correctness of this contention. The life, liberty and happiness of the individual citizen is a matter of small importance so long as the empire is saved.
The dominance of ruling class property rights over the personal rights and freedoms of people living in a controlled territory is taken for granted. Even in the home country, where the issue is clear, the elite will sacrifice the well-being, health, longevity, and lives of the propertyless class in the name of "law and order" and "property protection." The experiences of the Roman common people, the French peasants under Louis XIV, the English factory workers (both men, women, and children) over the past century, and the unskilled workers in the United States since the Civil War,[Pg 21] provide ample evidence of this claim. The life, liberty, and happiness of individual citizens matter little as long as the empire is preserved.
A crisis in imperial affairs is always regarded, by the ruling class, as a legitimate reason for curtailing the rights of the people. Under ordinary circumstances, the imperial class will gain rather than lose from the exercise of "popular liberties." Indeed, the exercise of these liberties is of the greatest assistance in convincing the people that they are enjoying freedom and thus keeping them satisfied with their lot. But in a period of turmoil, with men's hearts stirred, and their souls aflamed with conviction and idealism, there is always danger that the people may exercise their "unalienable right" to "alter or abolish" their form of government. Consequently, during a crisis, the imperial class takes temporary charge of popular liberties. Every great empire engaged in the recent war passed through such an experience. In each country the ruling class announced that the war was a matter of life and death. Papers were suppressed or censored; free speech was denied; men were conscripted against will and conscience; constitutions were thrust aside; laws "slumbered"; writers and thinkers were jailed for their opinions; food was rationed; industries were controlled—all in the interest of "winning the war." After the war was won, the victors practiced an even more rigorous suppression while they were "making the peace." Then followed months and years of protests and demands, until, one by one, the liberties were retaken by the people or else the war-tyranny, once firmly established, became a part of "the heritage of empire." In such cases, where liberties were not regained, the plain people learned to do without them.
A crisis in imperial affairs is always viewed by those in power as a valid reason to restrict people's rights. Normally, the ruling class benefits from "popular liberties." In fact, allowing these freedoms helps convince people they are free and keeps them content with their situation. But during times of unrest, when emotions run high and people are driven by strong beliefs and ideals, there’s a real risk that they might exercise their "unalienable right" to "change or get rid of" their government. Therefore, during a crisis, those in power temporarily take control of popular freedoms. Every major empire involved in the recent war went through this. In each nation, the ruling class claimed that the war was a matter of life and death. Newspapers were shut down or censored; free speech was stifled; people were drafted against their will and belief; constitutions were ignored; laws became inactive; writers and thinkers were imprisoned for their views; food was rationed; industries were regulated—all in the name of "winning the war." Once the war was over, the victors enforced even stricter controls while they were "making peace." This was followed by months and years of protests and demands, until, one by one, the people reclaimed their rights or, if not, the oppressive measures of war became a part of "the heritage of empire." In cases where freedoms weren’t restored, ordinary people learned to live without them.
Liberty is the price of empire. Imperialism presupposes that the people will be willing, at any time, to surrender their "rights" at the call of the rulers.
Liberty is the cost of empire. Imperialism assumes that people will be ready at any moment to give up their "rights" at the request of those in power.
5. The Universality of Empire
Imperialism is not new, nor is it confined to one nation or to one race. On the contrary it is as old as history and as wide as the world.
Imperialism isn't new, and it isn't limited to just one nation or one race. In fact, it's as old as history itself and as expansive as the world.
Before Rome, there was Carthage. Before Carthage, there were Greece, Macedonia, Egypt, Assyria, China. Where history has a record, it is a record of empire.
Before Rome, there was Carthage. Before Carthage, there were Greece, Macedonia, Egypt, Assyria, China. Wherever history has a record, it’s a record of empire.
During modern times, international affairs have been dominated by empires. The great war was a war between empires. During the first three years, the two chief contestants were the British Empire on the one hand and the German Empire on the other. Behind these leaders were the Russian Empire, the Italian Empire, the French Empire, and the Japanese Empire.
During modern times, international relations have been dominated by empires. The Great War was a conflict between these empires. In the first three years, the two main contenders were the British Empire on one side and the German Empire on the other. Supporting these leaders were the Russian Empire, the Italian Empire, the French Empire, and the Japanese Empire.
The Peace of Versailles was a peace between empires. Five empires dominated the peace table—Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan and the United States. The avowedly anti-imperial nations of Europe—Russia and Hungary—were not only excluded from the deliberations of the Peace Table, but were made the object of constant diplomatic, military and economic aggression by the leading imperialist nations.
The Peace of Versailles was an agreement between empires. Five empires dominated the peace talks—Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan, and the United States. The openly anti-imperial nations of Europe—Russia and Hungary—were not only left out of the discussions at the Peace Table, but they also faced ongoing diplomatic, military, and economic aggression from the leading imperialist countries.
6. The Evolution of Empire
Empires do not spring, full grown, from the surroundings of some great historic crisis. Rather they, like all other social institutions, are the result of a long series of changes that lead by degrees from the pre-imperial to the imperial stage. Many of the great empires of the past two thousand years have begun as republics, or, as they are sometimes called, "democracies," and the processes of transformation from the republican to the imperial stage have been so gradual that the great mass of the people were not aware that any change had occurred until the emperor ascended the throne.
Empires don't just appear fully formed from major historical events. Instead, they, like all other social systems, come from a long series of changes that gradually lead from pre-imperial to imperial stages. Many of the significant empires over the past two thousand years started out as republics, or what are sometimes called "democracies." The shift from a republican to an imperial system has been so gradual that most people didn't even realize that a change had taken place until the emperor took the throne.
The development of empire is of necessity a slow process. There are the dependent people to be subjected; the territory to conquered; the imperial class to be built up. This last process takes, perhaps, more time than either of the other two. Class consciousness is not created in a day. It requires long experience with the exercise of imperial power before the time has come to proclaim an emperor, and forcibly to take possession of the machinery of public affairs.
The development of an empire is inevitably a slow process. There are dependent populations to be controlled, territory to be conquered, and an imperial class to be established. This last task probably takes more time than the other two combined. Class consciousness isn’t formed overnight. It takes years of experience with wielding imperial power before it's time to declare an emperor and take control of the machinery of public affairs by force.
7. The United States and the Stages of Empire
Any one who is familiar with its history will realize at once that the United States is passing through some of the more advanced stages in the development of empire. The name "Republic" still remains; the traditions of the Republic are cherished by millions; the republican forms are almost intact, but the relations of the United States to its conquered territory and its subject peoples; the rapid maturation of the plutocracy as a governing class or caste; the shamelessness of the exploitation in which the rulers have indulged; and the character of the forces that are now shaping public policy, proclaim to all the world the fact of empire.
Anyone who knows its history will quickly realize that the United States is in some of the more advanced stages of empire development. The name "Republic" still exists; the traditions of the Republic are valued by millions; the republican structures are nearly intact, but the relationships between the United States and its conquered territories and subject peoples, the swift rise of the wealthy elite as a governing class, the blatant exploitation by those in power, and the nature of the forces currently influencing public policy all make it clear to the world that this is an empire.
The chief characteristics of empire exist in the United States. Here are conquered territory; subject peoples; an imperial, ruling class, and the exploitation by that class of the people at home and abroad. During generations the processes of empire have been working, unobserved, in the United States. Through more than two centuries the American people have been busily laying the foundations and erecting the imperial structure. For the most part, they have been unconscious of the work that they were doing, as the dock laborer, is ordinarily unconscious of his part in the mechanism of industry. Consciously or unconsciously, the American people have reared the imperial structure, until it stands, to-day, imposing in its grandeur, upon the spot where many of the founders of the American government hoped to see a republic.
The main features of an empire are present in the United States. There are conquered lands, subjugated people, an imperial ruling class, and the exploitation of locals and foreigners by that class. For generations, the workings of empire have been ongoing, unnoticed, in the United States. Over more than two hundred years, Americans have been busy laying the groundwork and building the imperial framework. For the most part, they haven’t been aware of the role they played, just like a dockworker typically doesn’t think about their part in the industrial process. Whether consciously or unconsciously, the American people have constructed this imperial framework, and today it stands impressively where many of the founders of the American government envisioned a republic.
The entrance of the United States into the war did not greatly alter the character of the forces at work, nor did it in any large degree change the direction in which the country was moving. Rather, it brought to the surface of public attention factors of American life that had been evolving unnoticed, for generations.
The entry of the United States into the war didn't significantly change the nature of the forces at play, nor did it largely alter the direction the country was heading. Instead, it highlighted aspects of American life that had been quietly developing for generations.
The world situation created by the war compelled the American imperial class to come out in the open and to occupy a position that, while wholly inconsistent with the traditions of American life, is nevertheless in keeping with the demands of imperial necessity. The ruling class in the United States has taken a logical step and has made a logical stand. The masters of American life have done the only thing that they could do in the interests of the imperial forces that they represent. They are the victims, as much as were the Kaiser and the Czar on the one hand, and the Belgians and the Serbs on the other, of that imperial necessity that knows no law save the preservation of its own most sacred interests.
The global situation created by the war pushed the American ruling class to be more transparent and take a stance that, while completely at odds with the traditions of American life, aligns with the needs of imperial objectives. The leadership in the United States has made a logical decision and taken a logical position. Those in control of American society have done what they had to in the interest of the imperial forces they represent. They are as much victims as the Kaiser and the Czar were, on one side, and the Belgians and the Serbs on the other, of that imperial necessity that recognizes no law except the protection of its own most essential interests.
Certain liberal American thinkers have taken the stand that the incidents of 1917-1918 were the result of the failure of the President, and of certain of his advisers, to follow the theories which he had enunciated, and to stand by the cause that he had espoused. These critics overlook the incidental character of the war as a factor in American domestic policy. The war never assumed anything like the importance in the United States that it did among the European belligerents. On the surface, it created a furore, but underneath the big fact staring the administration in the face was the united front of the business interests, and their organized demands for action. The far-seeing among the business men realized that the plutocratic structure the world over was in peril, and that the fate of the whole imperial régime was involved in the European struggle. The Russian Revolution of March 1917 was the last straw. From that time on the entrance of the United States into the war became a certainty as the only means of "saving (capitalist) civilization."
Some liberal American thinkers believe that the events of 1917-1918 were caused by the President's failure, along with some of his advisers, to adhere to the principles he had laid out and to support the cause he championed. These critics ignore the secondary role of the war in American domestic policy. The war never held the same significance in the United States as it did for the European combatants. On the surface, it sparked a lot of excitement, but the glaring reality for the administration was the united front of business interests and their organized calls for action. The more astute business leaders recognized that the global wealthy structure was in jeopardy and that the future of the entire imperial system was at stake in the European conflict. The Russian Revolution of March 1917 was the tipping point. From that moment, the United States' entry into the war became inevitable as the only way to "save (capitalist) civilization."
The thoughtful student of the situation in the United States is not deceived by personalities and names. He realizes that the events of 1917-1918 have behind them generations of causes which lead logically to just such results; that he is witnessing one phase of a great process in the life of the American nation—a process that is old in its principles yet ever new in its manifestations.
The thoughtful student of the situation in the United States is not fooled by personalities and names. He understands that the events of 1917-1918 are backed by generations of causes that logically lead to these outcomes; that he is witnessing one phase of a significant process in the life of the American nation—a process that has old principles but is always new in its expressions.
Traditional liberties have always given way before imperial necessity. An examination of the situation in which the ruling class of the United States found itself in 1917, and of the forces that were operating to determine public policy, must convince even the enthusiast that the occurrences of 1917 and the succeeding years were the logical outcome of imperial necessity. To what extent that explanation will account for the discrepancy between the promise of 1776 and the twentieth century fulfillment of that promise must appear from a further examination of the evidence.
Traditional freedoms have always been sacrificed for the needs of the empire. A look at the circumstances faced by the ruling class in the United States in 1917, along with the forces influencing public policy, should convince even the most optimistic that the events of 1917 and the years that followed were a logical result of imperial needs. To what degree this explanation clarifies the gap between the promise of 1776 and its realization in the twentieth century will require a closer look at the evidence.
III. SUBJUGATING THE INDIANS
1. The Conquering Peoples
The first step in the establishment of empire—the conquest of territory and the subjugation of the conquered populations,—was taken by the people of the United States at the time of their earliest settlements. They took the step naturally, unaffectedly, as became the sons of their fathers.
The first step in building an empire—the takeover of land and the dominance of the conquered people—was made by the people of the United States during their earliest settlements. They took this step effortlessly, as was fitting for the descendants of their forefathers.
The Spanish, French, and English who made the first settlement in North America were direct descendants of the tribes that have swept across Europe and portions of Asia during the past three or four thousand years. These tribes, grouped on the basis of similarity in language under the general term "Aryan," hold a record of conquest that fills the pages of written history.
The Spanish, French, and English who established the first settlement in North America were direct descendants of the tribes that have moved across Europe and parts of Asia over the last three to four thousand years. These tribes, categorized by their similar languages under the general term "Aryan," have a history of conquest that fills the pages of recorded history.
Hunger; the pressure of surplus population; the inrush of new hordes of invaders, drove them on. Ambition; the love of adventure; the lure of new opportunities in new lands, called them further. Meliorism,—the desire to better the conditions of life for themselves and for their children—animated them. In later years the necessity of disposing of surplus wealth impelled them. Driven, lured, coerced, these Aryan tribes have inundated the earth. Passing beyond the boundaries of Europe, they have crossed the seas into Africa, Asia, America and Australia.
Hunger, the pressure of an overflowing population, and the arrival of new waves of invaders pushed them onward. Ambition, a love for adventure, and the promise of new opportunities in unfamiliar lands drew them further. Meliorism—the wish to improve living conditions for themselves and their children—motivated them. In later years, the need to get rid of excess wealth drove them. Compelled, enticed, and forced, these Aryan tribes have spread across the globe. Going beyond Europe, they have sailed to Africa, Asia, America, and Australia.
Among the Aryans, after bitter strife, the Teutons have attained supremacy. The "Teutonic Peoples" are "the English speaking inhabitants of the British Isles, the German speaking inhabitants of Germany, Austria-Hungary and Switzerland, the Flemish speaking inhabitants of Belgium, the Scandinavian inhabitants of Sweden and Norway and practically all of the inhabitants of Holland and Denmark." ("Encyclopedia Britannica.")
Among the Aryans, after intense conflict, the Teutons have achieved dominance. The "Teutonic Peoples" are "the English-speaking residents of the British Isles, the German-speaking residents of Germany, Austria-Hungary, and Switzerland, the Flemish-speaking residents of Belgium, the Scandinavian residents of Sweden and Norway, and nearly all of the residents of Holland and Denmark." ("Encyclopedia Britannica.")
This Teutonic domination has been established only by the bitterest of struggles. During the time when North America was being settled, the English dispossessed first the Spanish and later the French. Since the Battle of Waterloo—won by English and German troops; and the Crimean War—won by British against Russian troops—the Teutonic power has gone unchallenged and so it remains to-day.
This Teutonic dominance was achieved only through the harshest struggles. When North America was being settled, the English first pushed out the Spanish and later the French. Since the Battle of Waterloo—won by English and German troops—and the Crimean War—won by the British against the Russians—Teutonic power has faced no challenge, and it still stands today.
The dominant power in the United States for nearly two centuries has been the English speaking power. Thus the Americans draw their inspiration, not only from the Aryan, but from the English speaking Teutons—the most aggressive and dominating group among the Aryans.
The dominant power in the United States for nearly two centuries has been the English-speaking power. Thus, Americans draw their inspiration not only from the Aryans but also from the English-speaking Teutons—the most aggressive and dominant group among the Aryans.
Three hundred years ago the title to North America was claimed by Spain, France and Great Britain. The land itself was almost entirely in the hands of Indian tribes which held the possession that according to the proverb, is "nine points of the law."
Three hundred years ago, Spain, France, and Great Britain claimed ownership of North America. The land was mostly controlled by Indigenous tribes, who had the possession that, according to the saying, is "nine points of the law."
The period of American settlement has witnessed the rapid dispossession of the original holders, until, at the present time, the Indians have less than two per cent of the land area of the United States.[4]
The time of American settlement has seen the quick takeover of land from the original inhabitants, and now, the Indigenous people own less than two percent of the land in the United States.[4]
The conquest, by the English speaking whites, of the three million square miles which comprise the United States has been accomplished in a phenomenally short space of time. Migration; military occupation; appropriation of the lands taken from the "enemy;" settlement, and permanent exploitation—through all these stages of conquest the country has moved.
The takeover of the three million square miles that make up the United States by English-speaking white people happened in an incredibly short amount of time. Migration, military control, taking lands from the "enemy," settlement, and ongoing exploitation—through all these stages of conquest, the country has advanced.
The "Historical Register of the United States Army" (F. B. Heitman, Washington, Govt. Print., 1903, vol. 2, pp. 298-300) contains a list of 114 wars in which the United States has been engaged since 1775. The publication likewise presents a list of 8600 battles and engagements incident[Pg 28] to these 114 wars. Two of these wars were with England, one with Mexico and one with Spain. These, together with the Civil War and the War with Germany, constitute the major struggles in which the United States has been engaged. In addition to these six great wars there were the numerous wars with the Indians, the last of which (with the Chippewa) occurred in 1898. Some of these Indian "wars" were mere policing expeditions. Others, like the wars with the Northwest Indians, with the Seminoles and with the Apaches, lasted for years and involved a considerable outlay of life and money.
The "Historical Register of the United States Army" (F. B. Heitman, Washington, Govt. Print., 1903, vol. 2, pp. 298-300) includes a list of 114 wars that the United States has participated in since 1775. The publication also provides a list of 8,600 battles and engagements related to these 114 wars. Two of these wars were against England, one was with Mexico, and one was with Spain. Together with the Civil War and the War with Germany, these make up the major conflicts the United States has been involved in. In addition to these six significant wars, there were many conflicts with Native Americans, the last of which (with the Chippewa) took place in 1898. Some of these Indian "wars" were essentially policing missions, while others, such as the wars with the Northwest Indians, Seminoles, and Apaches, spanned years and resulted in a substantial loss of life and resources.
When the Indian Wars were ended, and the handful of red men had been crushed by the white millions, the American Indians, once possessors of a hunting ground that stretched across the continent, found themselves in reservations, under government tutelage, or else, abandoning their own customs and habits of life, they accepted the "pale-face" standards in preference to their own well-loved traditions.
When the Indian Wars ended and the small number of Native Americans were defeated by the millions of white settlers, the American Indians, who once roamed a hunting ground that spanned the continent, found themselves in reservations or under government control. Alternatively, they abandoned their own customs and way of life, choosing to adopt the standards of the "white man" instead of their cherished traditions.
The territory flanking the Mississippi Valley, with its coastal plains and the deposits of mineral wealth, is one of the richest in the world. Only two other areas, China and Russia, can compare with it in resources.
The land around the Mississippi Valley, with its flat coastal plains and rich mineral deposits, is among the most affluent in the world. Only China and Russia have resources that can match it.
This garden spot came into the possession of the English speaking whites almost without a struggle. It was as if destiny had held a door tight shut for centuries and suddenly had opened it to admit her chosen guests.
This garden area was acquired by English-speaking whites almost without any resistance. It was as if fate had kept a door tightly shut for centuries and then suddenly swung it open to welcome her chosen guests.
History shows that such areas have almost always been held by one powerful nation after another, and have been the scene of ferocious struggles. Witness the valleys of the Euphrates, the Nile, the Danube, the Po and the Rhine. The barrier of the Atlantic saved North America.
History shows that these regions have nearly always been controlled by one dominant nation after another and have been the site of intense conflicts. Just look at the valleys of the Euphrates, the Nile, the Danube, the Po, and the Rhine. The Atlantic Ocean acted as a barrier that protected North America.
Had the Mississippi Valley been in Europe, Asia or Northern Africa, it would doubtless have been blood-soaked for centuries and dominated by highly organized nations, armed to the teeth. Lying isolated, it presented an almost virgin opportunity to the conquering Teutons of Western Europe.
Had the Mississippi Valley been in Europe, Asia, or Northern Africa, it would definitely have been blood-soaked for centuries and ruled by highly organized nations, fully armed. Isolated, it offered an almost untouched opportunity to the conquering Teutons of Western Europe.
Freed by their isolated position from the necessity of contending against outside aggression, the inhabitants of the United States have expended their combative energies against the weaker peoples with whom they came into immediate contact,—
Freed by their isolated position from the need to fight against outside threats, the people of the United States have directed their aggressive energies toward the weaker nations they encountered directly,—
1. The Indians, from whom they took the land and wrested the right to exploit the resources of the continent;
1. The Native Americans, from whom they took the land and claimed the right to exploit the continent's resources;
2. The African Negroes who were captured and brought to America to labor as slaves;
2. The African people who were kidnapped and brought to America to work as slaves;
3. The Mexicans, from whom they took additional slave territory at a time when the institution of slavery was in grave danger, and
3. The Mexicans, from whom they took additional territory for slavery at a time when slavery was seriously threatened, and
4. The Spanish Empire from which they took foreign investment opportunities at a time when the business interests of the country first felt the pressure of surplus wealth.
4. The Spanish Empire, from which they seized foreign investment opportunities, during a time when the country’s business interests first faced the pressure of excess wealth.
Each of these four groups was weak. No one of them could present even the beginnings of an effectual resistance to the onslaught of the conquerors. Each in turn was forced to bow the knee before overwhelming odds.
Each of these four groups was weak. None of them could put up even the slightest effective resistance to the attack of the conquerors. Each was ultimately forced to submit to overwhelming odds.
2. The First Obstacle to Conquest
The first obstacle to the spread of English civilization across the continent of North America was the American Indian. He was in possession of the country; he had a culture of his own; he held the white man's civilization in contempt and refused to accept it. He had but one desire,—to be let alone.
The first obstacle to the spread of English civilization across the continent of North America was the American Indian. He was in possession of the land; he had his own culture; he held the white man's civilization in disdain and refused to accept it. His only desire was to be left alone.
The continent was a "wilderness" to the whites. To the Indians it was a home. Their villages were scattered from the Atlantic to the Pacific, from the Gulf to Alaska; they knew well its mountains, plains and rivers. A primitive people, supporting themselves largely by hunting, fishing, simple agriculture and such elemental manual arts[Pg 30] as pottery and weaving, they found the vast stretches of North America none too large to provide them with the means of satisfying their wants.
The continent was a "wilderness" to white settlers. To the Native Americans, it was a home. Their villages were spread out from the Atlantic to the Pacific, from the Gulf to Alaska; they were familiar with its mountains, plains, and rivers. As a primitive people, they mostly sustained themselves through hunting, fishing, simple farming, and basic crafts[Pg 30] like pottery and weaving. They found the vast expanses of North America more than sufficient to meet their needs.
The ideas of the Indian differed fundamentally from those of the white man. Holding to the Eastern conception which makes the spiritual life paramount, he reduced his material existence to the simplest possible terms. He had no desire for possessions, which he regarded—at the best—as "only means to the end of his ultimate perfection."[5] To him, the white man's desire for wealth was incomprehensible and the white man's sedentary life was contemptible. He must be free at all times to commune with nature in the valleys, and at sunrise and sunset to ascend the mountain peak and salute the Great Spirit.
The Indian's beliefs were fundamentally different from those of the white man. Embracing the Eastern view that prioritizes spiritual life, he simplified his material existence as much as possible. He didn't care about possessions, which he viewed—at best—as "just tools for achieving his ultimate growth." To him, the white man's craving for wealth was puzzling, and he looked down on the white man's settled lifestyle. He needed to be free at all times to connect with nature in the valleys, and at sunrise and sunset, to climb the mountain peak and honor the Great Spirit.[5]
The individual Indian—having no desire for wealth—could not be bribed or bought for gold as could the European. The leaders, democratically selected, and held by the most enduring ties of loyalty to their tribal oaths, were above the mercenary standards of European commerce and statesmanship. Friendly, hospitable, courteous, generous, hostile, bitter, ferocious they were—but they were not for sale.
The individual Indian—lacking any desire for wealth—couldn't be bribed or bought with gold like the European. The leaders, chosen by the people and bound by strong loyalty to their tribal oaths, stood above the mercenary values of European trade and politics. They could be friendly, hospitable, courteous, and generous, but also hostile, bitter, and fierce—but they were not for sale.
The attitude of the Indian toward the land which the white men coveted was typical of his whole relation with white civilization. "Land ownership, in the sense in which we use the term, was unknown to the Indians till the whites came among them."[6] The land devoted to villages was tribal property; the hunting ground surrounding the village was open to all of the members of the tribe; between the hunting grounds of different tribes there was a neutral territory—no man's land—that was common to both. If a family cultivated a patch of land, the neighbors did not trespass. Among the Indians of the Southwest the village owned the agricultural land and "periodically its[Pg 31] governor, elected by popular vote, would distribute or redistribute the arable acres among his constituents who were able to care for them."[7] The Indians believed that the land, like the sunlight, was a gift of the Great Spirit to his children, and they were as willing to part with the one as with the other.
The way the Indians viewed the land that the white men desired reflected their overall relationship with white civilization. "Land ownership, in the way we understand it, was unknown to the Indians until the whites arrived."[6] The land used for villages was owned by the tribe; the hunting grounds surrounding the village were accessible to all tribe members; and there was a neutral area—no man's land—between different tribes' hunting grounds that both could use. If a family cultivated a section of land, the neighbors didn’t intrude. Among the Indians of the Southwest, the village owned the farmland and "periodically its[Pg 31] governor, elected by popular vote, would distribute or redistribute the cultivable acres among his constituents who were capable of tending them."[7] The Indians believed that the land, like sunlight, was a gift from the Great Spirit to his children, and they were just as willing to part with one as with the other.
They carried their communal ideas still farther. Among the Indians of the Northwest, a man's possessions went at his death to the whole tribe and were distributed among the tribal members. Among the Alaskan Indians, no man, during his life, could possess more than he needed while his neighbor lacked. Food was always regarded as common property. "The rule being to let him who was hungry eat, wherever he found that which would stay the cravings of his stomach."[8] The motto of the Indian was "To each according to his need."
They took their shared beliefs even further. Among the North West Indians, when a man died, his belongings went to the entire tribe and were shared among its members. Among the Alaskan Indians, no one could own more than they needed while their neighbor was in need. Food was always seen as a shared resource. "The rule was to let anyone who was hungry eat, no matter where they found something that would satisfy their hunger."[8] The motto of the Indian was "To each according to his need."
Such a communist attitude toward property, coupled with a belief that the land—the gift of the Great Spirit—was a trust committed to the tribe, proved a source of constant irritation to the white colonists who needed additional territory. As the colonies grew, it became more and more imperative to increase the land area open for settlement, and to such encroachments the Indian offered a stubborn resistance.
Such a communist view on property, combined with the belief that the land—the gift of the Great Spirit—was a trust belonging to the tribe, caused ongoing frustration for the white colonists who needed more land. As the colonies expanded, it became increasingly essential to enlarge the area available for settlement, and the Native Americans resisted these encroachments stubbornly.
The Indian would not—could not—part with his land, neither would he work, as a slave or a wage-servant. Before such degradation he preferred death. Other peoples—the negroes; the inhabitants of Mexico, Peru and the West Indies; the Hindus and the Chinese—made slaves or servants. The Indian for generations held out stolidly against the efforts of missionaries, farmers and manufacturers alike to convert him into a worker.
The Indian would not—could not—give up his land, nor would he work as a slave or a paid laborer. He would rather die than face such humiliation. Other groups—the Black people; the residents of Mexico, Peru, and the West Indies; the Hindus and the Chinese—became slaves or workers. For generations, the Indian steadfastly resisted the attempts of missionaries, farmers, and manufacturers to turn him into a laborer.
The Indian could not understand the ideas of "purchase," "sale" and "cash payment" that constitute essential features of the white man's economy. To him strength[Pg 32] of limb, courage, endurance, sobriety and personal dignity and reserve were infinitely superior to any of the commercial virtues which the white men possessed.
The Indian couldn't grasp the concepts of "buying," "selling," and "cash payments" that are key aspects of the white man's economy. For him, physical strength[Pg 32], courage, endurance, self-control, and personal dignity were far more valuable than any of the business traits that the white men had.
This attitude of the Indian toward European standards of civilization; his indifference to material possessions; his unwillingness to part with the land; and his refusal to work, made it impossible to "assimilate" him, as other peoples were assimilated, into colonial society. The individual Indian would not demean himself by becoming a cog in the white man's machine. He preferred to live and die in the open air of his native hills and plains.
This attitude of the Indian toward European standards of civilization; his indifference to material possessions; his unwillingness to part with the land; and his refusal to work made it impossible to "assimilate" him, like other groups were assimilated, into colonial society. The individual Indian would not lower himself by becoming just a part of the white man's system. He preferred to live and die in the fresh air of his native hills and plains.
The Indian was an intense individualist—trained in a school of experience where initiative and personal qualities were the tests of survival. He placed the soles of his moccasined feet firmly against his native earth, cast his eyes around him and above him and melted harmoniously into his native landscape.
The Indian was a strong individualist—shaped by a life of experience where taking initiative and personal traits determined survival. He pressed the soles of his moccasined feet firmly into his native land, looked around him and up at the sky, and seamlessly blended into his natural surroundings.
Missionaries and teachers labored in vain—once an Indian, always an Indian. The white settlers pushed on across mountain ranges and through valleys. Generations came and went without any marked progress in bringing the white men and the red men together. When the Indian, in the mission or in the government school did become "civilized," he gave over his old life altogether and accepted the white man's codes and standards. The two methods of life were too far apart to make amalgamation possible.
Missionaries and teachers worked tirelessly—once an Indian, always an Indian. The white settlers continued to move across mountains and through valleys. Generations passed without any real progress in uniting white people and Native Americans. When a Native American did become "civilized" in a mission or government school, they completely abandoned their old life and adopted the white man's rules and standards. The two ways of life were just too different for any merging to happen.
3. Getting the Land
The white man must have land! Population was growing. The territory along the frontier seemed rich and alluring.
The white man needs land! The population was increasing. The land along the frontier looked rich and inviting.
Everywhere, the Indian was in possession, and everywhere he considered the sale of land in the light of parting with a birth-right. He was friendly at first, but he had no sympathy with the standards of white civilization.
Everywhere, the Native American was present, and everywhere he viewed the sale of land as a loss of his birthright. He was initially friendly, but he had no understanding of the values of white civilization.
For such a situation there was only one possible solution. Under the plea that "necessity knows no law" the white man took up the task of eliminating the Indian, with the least friction, and in the most effective manner possible.
For such a situation, there was only one possible solution. With the argument that "necessity knows no law," the white man took on the task of removing the Indian with minimal conflict and in the most efficient way possible.
There were three methods of getting the land away from the Indian—the easiest was by means of treaties, under which certain lands lying along the Atlantic Coast were turned over to the whites in exchange for larger territories west of the Mississippi. The second method was by purchase. The third was by armed conquest. All three methods were employed at some stage in the relations between the whites and each Indian tribe.
There were three ways to take the land from the Native Americans—the easiest was through treaties, where certain lands along the Atlantic Coast were given to the settlers in exchange for larger territories west of the Mississippi. The second method was through purchase. The third was through armed conquest. All three methods were used at some point in the interactions between the settlers and each Native American tribe.
The experience with the Cherokee Nation is typical of the relation between the whites and the other Indian tribes. (Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology. Vol. 5. "The Cherokee Nation," by Charles C. Royce.)
The experience with the Cherokee Nation reflects the typical relationship between white people and other Native American tribes. (Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology. Vol. 5. "The Cherokee Nation," by Charles C. Royce.)
The Cherokee nation before the year 1650 was established on the Tennessee River, and exercised dominion over all the country on the east side of the Alleghany Mountains, including the head-waters of the Yadkin, the Catawba, the Broad, the Savannah, the Chattahoochee and the Alabama. In 1775 there were 43 Cherokee towns covering portions of this territory. In 1799 their towns numbered 51.
The Cherokee nation before 1650 was based along the Tennessee River and controlled all the land on the east side of the Alleghany Mountains, which included the sources of the Yadkin, Catawba, Broad, Savannah, Chattahoochee, and Alabama rivers. By 1775, there were 43 Cherokee towns in this area. By 1799, the number of their towns had grown to 51.
Treaty relations between the whites and the Cherokees began in 1721, when there was a peace council, held between the representatives of 37 towns and the authorities of South Carolina. From that time, until the treaty made with the United States government in 1866, the Cherokees were gradually pushed back from their rich hunting grounds toward the Mississippi valley. By the treaty of 1791, the United States solemnly guaranteed to the Cherokees all of their land, the whites not being permitted even to hunt on them. In 1794 and 1804 new treaties were negotiated, involving additional cessions of land. By the treaty of 1804, a road was to be cut through the Cherokee territory, free for the use of all United States citizens.
Treaty relations between the white settlers and the Cherokees began in 1721 during a peace council with representatives from 37 towns and officials from South Carolina. From then until the treaty with the United States government in 1866, the Cherokees were gradually pushed away from their rich hunting grounds toward the Mississippi Valley. In the treaty of 1791, the United States officially promised to guarantee all of the Cherokees' land, with whites not even allowed to hunt on it. New treaties were negotiated in 1794 and 1804, involving further land concessions. The treaty of 1804 included a provision to create a road through Cherokee territory, which would be open for use by all United States citizens.
An agitation arose for the removal of the Cherokees to some point west of the Mississippi River. Some of the Indians accepted the opportunity and went to Arkansas. Others held stubbornly to their villages. Meanwhile white hunters and settlers encroached on their land; white men debauched their women, and white desperadoes stole their stock. By the treaty of 1828 the United States agreed to possess the Cherokees and to guarantee to them forever several millions of acres west of Arkansas, and in addition a perpetual outlet west, and a "free and unmolested use of all the country lying west of the western boundary of the above described limits and as far west as the sovereignty of the United States and their right of soil extend" (p. 229). The Cherokees who had settled in Arkansas agreed to leave their lands within 14 months. By the treaty of 1836 the Cherokees ceded to the United States all lands east of the Mississippi. There was considerable difficulty in enforcing this provision but by degrees most of the Indians were removed west of the river. In 1859 and 1860 the Commissioner of Indian affairs prepared a survey of the Cherokee domain. This was opposed by the head men of the nation. By the Treaty of 1866 other tribes were quartered on land owned by the Cherokees and railroads were run through their territory.
An agitation arose for the relocation of the Cherokees to somewhere west of the Mississippi River. Some of the Indians accepted the opportunity and moved to Arkansas. Others stubbornly held onto their villages. Meanwhile, white hunters and settlers encroached on their land; white men exploited their women, and white criminals stole their livestock. By the treaty of 1828, the United States agreed to take possession of the Cherokees and to guarantee them forever several million acres west of Arkansas, plus a permanent outlet west and a "free and unmolested use of all the country lying west of the western boundary of the above described limits and as far west as the sovereignty of the United States and their right of soil extend" (p. 229). The Cherokees who settled in Arkansas agreed to leave their lands within 14 months. By the treaty of 1836, the Cherokees ceded all lands east of the Mississippi to the United States. There was significant difficulty in enforcing this provision, but gradually most of the Indians were removed west of the river. In 1859 and 1860, the Commissioner of Indian Affairs prepared a survey of the Cherokee domain. This was opposed by the leaders of the nation. By the Treaty of 1866, other tribes were settled on land owned by the Cherokees, and railroads were constructed through their territory.
Diplomacy, money and the military forces had done their work. The first treaty, made in 1721, found the Cherokee nation in virtual possession of the mountainous regions of Southeastern United States. The twenty-fourth treaty (1866) left them on a tiny reservation, two thousand miles from their former home. Those twenty-four treaties had netted the State and Federal governments 81,220,374 acres of land (p. 378). To-day the Cherokee Nation has 63,211 acres.[9]
Diplomacy, finance, and military force had done their job. The first treaty, created in 1721, placed the Cherokee nation in effective control of the mountainous areas of the Southeastern United States. By the twenty-fourth treaty (1866), they were reduced to a small reservation, two thousand miles away from their original home. Those twenty-four treaties resulted in the State and Federal governments acquiring 81,220,374 acres of land (p. 378). Today, the Cherokee Nation has 63,211 acres.[9]
A great nation of proud, independent, liberty-loving men and women, came into conflict with the whites of the Carolinas and Georgia; with the state and national governments. "For two hundred years a contest involving their very existence as a people has been maintained against the unscrupulous rapacity of Anglo-Saxon civilization. By degrees they were driven from their ancestral domain to an unknown and inhabitable region" (p. 371). Now the contest is ended. The white men have the land. The Cherokees have a little patch of territory; government support; free schools and the right to accept the sovereignty of the nation that has conquered them.
A great nation of proud, independent, freedom-loving men and women came into conflict with the white settlers of the Carolinas and Georgia, and with the state and national governments. "For two hundred years, a struggle for their very existence as a people has been waged against the greedy aggression of Anglo-Saxon civilization. Gradually, they were pushed from their ancestral homeland to an unknown and unlivable territory" (p. 371). Now the struggle is over. The white settlers own the land. The Cherokees have a small piece of territory, government support, free schools, and the right to accept the authority of the nation that has defeated them.
The theory upon which the whites proceeded in taking the Indian lands is thus stated by Leupp,—"Originally, the Indians owned all the land; later we needed most of it for ourselves; therefore, it is but just that the Indians should have what is left."[10]
The reasoning behind the whites taking the Indian lands is summed up by Leupp—"Originally, the Indians owned all the land; later we needed most of it for ourselves; so it’s only fair that the Indians should have what’s left."[10]
4. The Triumph of the Whites
The early white settlers had been, in almost every instance, hospitably or even reverentially welcomed by the Indians, who regarded them as children of the Great White Spirit. During the first bitter winters, it was the Indians who fed the colonists from their supplies of grain; guided them to the better lands, and shared with them their[Pg 36] knowledge of hunting, fishing and agriculture. The whites retaliated with that cunning, grasping, bestial ferocity which has spread terror through the earth during the past five centuries.
The early white settlers were, in nearly every case, warmly or even reverently welcomed by the Indians, who saw them as children of the Great White Spirit. During the first harsh winters, it was the Indians who provided food to the colonists from their grain supplies; they showed them the best lands and shared their[Pg 36] knowledge of hunting, fishing, and farming. The whites responded with a cunning, greedy, brutal ferocity that has spread fear across the earth over the last five hundred years.
In the early years, when the whites were few and the Indians many, the whites satisfied themselves by debauching the red men with whiskey and bribing them with baubles and trinkets. At the same time they made offensive and defensive alliances with them. The Spanish in the South; the French in the North and the English between, leagued themselves with the various tribes, supplied them with gunpowder and turned them into mercenaries who fought for hire. Heretofore the Indian had been a free man, fighting his wars and feuds as free men have done time out of mind. The whites hired him as a professional soldier and by putting bounties on scalps, plying the Indians with whiskey and inciting them by every known device, they converted them into demons.
In the early days, when there were few white people and many Native Americans, the whites lured the Native Americans with whiskey and bribed them with shiny objects and trinkets. At the same time, they formed both offensive and defensive alliances with them. The Spanish in the South, the French in the North, and the English in between allied with various tribes, provided them with gunpowder, and turned them into mercenaries who fought for money. Until then, the Native American had been a free person, engaging in his own wars and conflicts as free people always have. The whites hired him as a professional soldier, and by offering bounties on scalps, feeding them whiskey, and inciting them through every means possible, they transformed them into monsters.
There is no evidence to show that up to the advent of the white men the Indian tribes did any more fighting among themselves than the nobles of Germany, the city states of Italy or the other inhabitants of western Europe. Indeed there has recently been published a complete translation of the "Constitution of the Five Nations," a league to enforce peace which the Indians organized about the year 1390, A. D.[11] This league which had as its object the establishment of the "Great Peace" was built upon very much the same argument as that advanced for the League of Nations of 1919.
There is no evidence to show that until the arrival of white men, the Indian tribes fought among themselves any more than the nobles of Germany, the city-states of Italy, or the other people of Western Europe. In fact, a complete translation of the "Constitution of the Five Nations" has recently been published, which was a league created by the Indians around the year 1390 A.D.[11] This league aimed to establish the "Great Peace" and was based on very similar reasoning to that proposed for the League of Nations in 1919.
When the whites first came to North America, the Indians were a formidable foe. For years they continued to be a menace to the lonely settler or the frontier village. But when the white settlers were once firmly established, the days of uncertainty were over, and the Indians were brushed aside as a man brushes aside a troublesome insect. Their "uprisings" and "wars" counted for little or nothing. They were inferior in numbers; they were[Pg 37] poorly armed and equipped; they had no reserves upon which to draw; there was no organization among the tribes in distant portions of the country. The white millions swept onward. The Indian bands made a stand here and there but the tide of white civilization overwhelmed them, smothered them, destroying them and their civilization together.
When the white settlers first arrived in North America, the Native Americans were a powerful adversary. For years, they posed a threat to the isolated settler or the frontier community. However, once the white settlers established themselves, the period of uncertainty ended, and the Native Americans were dismissed as easily as one would swat away a bothersome insect. Their "uprisings" and "wars" amounted to little or nothing. They were outnumbered, poorly armed and equipped, had no resources to rely on, and lacked organization among tribes scattered across the country. The millions of white settlers advanced relentlessly. Native American groups made some stand here and there, but the wave of white civilization overwhelmed and extinguished both them and their culture.
The Indians were the first obstacle to the building of the American Empire. Three hundred years ago the whole three million square miles that is now the United States was theirs. They were the American people. To-day they number 328,111 in a population of 105,118,467 and the total area of their reservations is 53,489 square miles. (Statistical Abstract of the U. S., 1918, pp. 8 and 776.)
The Indigenous peoples were the first obstacle to the creation of the American Empire. Three hundred years ago, the entire three million square miles that now make up the United States belonged to them. They were the original Americans. Today, their population is 328,111 out of a total of 105,118,467, and the total area of their reservations is 53,489 square miles. (Statistical Abstract of the U. S., 1918, pp. 8 and 776.)
FOOTNOTES:
[4] The total number of square miles in Indian Reservations in 1918 was 53,490 as against 241,800 square miles in 1880. (Statistical Abstract of the United States, 1918, p. 8.)
[4] In 1918, Indian Reservations covered a total of 53,490 square miles, compared to 241,800 square miles in 1880. (Statistical Abstract of the United States, 1918, p. 8.)
[7] Ibid., p. 24.
Ibid., p. 24.
[8] Ibid., p. 10.
Ibid., p. 10.
[9] "Referring to your inquiry of November 20, 1919, concerning the Cherokee Indian Reservation, you are advised that the Cherokee Indian country in the northeastern part of Oklahoma aggregated 4,420,068 acres.
[9] "In response to your question from November 20, 1919, about the Cherokee Indian Reservation, I want to inform you that the Cherokee Indian lands in the northeastern region of Oklahoma totaled 4,420,068 acres."
"Of said area 4,346,223 acres have been allotted in severalty to the enrolled members of said Cherokee Indian Nation, Oklahoma. Twenty-two thousand eight hundred and eighty acres were disposed of as town lots, or reserved for railway rights of way, churches, schools, cemeteries, etc., and the remaining area has been sold, or otherwise disposed of as provided by law.
"Of that area, 4,346,223 acres have been assigned individually to the enrolled members of the Cherokee Indian Nation in Oklahoma. Twenty-two thousand eight hundred and eighty acres were allocated as town lots or set aside for railway rights of way, churches, schools, cemeteries, and so on, and the rest of the area has been sold or otherwise handled as required by law."
"The Cherokee tribal land in Oklahoma with the exception of the possible title of said Nation to certain river beds has been disposed of.
"The Cherokee tribal land in Oklahoma, except for the possible title of that Nation to certain riverbeds, has been sold off."
"In reference to the Eastern band of Cherokees, you are advised that said Indians who have been incorporated hold title in fee to certain land in North Carolina, known as the Qualla Reservation and certain other lands, aggregating 63,211 acres."—Letter from the Office of Indian Affairs. Dec. 9, 1919, "In re Cherokee land."
"In regard to the Eastern Band of Cherokees, you are informed that these Native Americans who have been incorporated own the title in fee to specific land in North Carolina, known as the Qualla Reservation, along with some other lands, totaling 63,211 acres."—Letter from the Office of Indian Affairs. Dec. 9, 1919, "In re Cherokee land."
IV. SLAVERY FOR A RACE
1. The Labor Shortage
The American colonists took the land which they required for settlement from the Indians. The labor necessary to work this land was not so easily secured. The colonists had set themselves the task of establishing European civilization upon a virgin continent. In order to achieve this result, they had to cut the forests; clear the land; build houses; cultivate the soil; construct ships; smelt iron, and carry on a multitude of activities that were incidental to setting up an old way of life in a new world. The one supreme and immediate need was the need for labor power. From the earliest days of colonization there had been no lack of harbors, fertile soil, timber, minerals and other resources. From the earliest days the colonists experienced a labor shortage.
The American colonists took the land they needed for settlement from the Native Americans. Getting the labor required to work this land wasn’t so easy. The colonists aimed to establish European civilization on a pristine continent. To do this, they had to cut down trees, clear the land, build houses, farm the soil, construct ships, smelt iron, and engage in many other activities essential for recreating an old way of life in a new world. The most pressing and immediate need was for labor. From the very start of colonization, there was no shortage of harbors, fertile soil, timber, minerals, and other resources. However, the colonists faced a labor shortage right from the beginning.
The labor situation was trebly difficult. First, there was no native labor; second, passage from Europe was so long and so hazardous that only the bold and venturesome were willing to attempt it, and third, when these adventurers did reach the new world, they had a choice between taking up free land and working it for themselves and taking service with a master. Men possessing sufficient initiative to leave an old home and make a journey across the sea were not the men to submit themselves to unnecessary authority when they might, at will, become masters of their own fortunes. The appeal of a new life was its own argument, and the newcomers struck out for themselves.
The labor situation was extremely challenging. First, there was no local workforce; second, the journey from Europe was long and dangerous, so only the brave and adventurous were willing to make the trip; and third, when these adventurers finally arrived in the new world, they had to choose between claiming free land to work for themselves or serving under a master. People with enough drive to leave their old homes and cross the ocean weren’t likely to submit to unnecessary authority when they could become the masters of their own destinies. The lure of a new life was a compelling reason in itself, and the newcomers set out to create their own path.
Throughout the colonies, and particularly in the South where the plantation culture of rice and tobacco, and later of cotton, called for large numbers of unskilled workers, the labor problem was acute. The abundance of raw materials and fertile land; the speedy growth of industry in[Pg 39] the North and of agriculture in the South; the generous profits and expanding markets created a labor demand which far outstripped the meager supply,—a demand that was met by the importation of black slaves from Africa.
Throughout the colonies, especially in the South where the plantation culture of rice and tobacco, and later cotton, required a large number of unskilled workers, the labor issue was severe. The plentiful raw materials and fertile land; the rapid growth of industry in[Pg 39] the North and agriculture in the South; the generous profits and expanding markets created a labor demand that far exceeded the limited supply—a demand that was met by importing black slaves from Africa.
2. The Slave Coast
The "Slave Coast" from which most of the Negroes came was discovered by Portuguese navigators, who were the first Europeans to venture down the West coast of Africa, and, rounding the "lobe" of the continent, to sail East along the "Gold Coast." The trade in gold and ivory which sprang up as a result of these early explorations led other nations of Europe to begin an eager competition which eventually brought French, Dutch, German, Danish and English commercial interests into sharp conflict with the Portuguese.
The "Slave Coast," where most of the Black people originated, was discovered by Portuguese navigators, who were the first Europeans to explore the West coast of Africa. They sailed around the "lobe" of the continent and headed East along the "Gold Coast." The trade in gold and ivory that developed from these early explorations sparked intense competition among other European nations, eventually leading to conflicts between French, Dutch, German, Danish, and English commercial interests and the Portuguese.
Ships sailing from the Gold Coast for home ports made a practice of picking up such slaves as they could easily secure. By 1450 the number reaching Portugal each year was placed at 600 or 700.[12] From this small and quite incidental beginning there developed a trade which eventually supplied Europe, the West Indies, North America and South America with black slaves.
Ships leaving the Gold Coast for their home ports often made it a practice to pick up whatever slaves they could easily obtain. By 1450, the annual number arriving in Portugal was estimated to be around 600 or 700.[12] This small and somewhat accidental beginning led to a trade that ultimately supplied Europe, the West Indies, North America, and South America with black slaves.
Along the "Slave Coast," which extended from Cape Verde on the North to Cape St. Martha on the South, and in the hinterland there lived Negroes of varying temperaments and of varying standards of culture. Some of them were fierce and warlike. Others were docile and amenable to discipline. The former made indifferent slaves; the latter were eagerly sought after. "The Wyndahs, Nagoes and Pawpaws of the Slave Coast were generally the most highly esteemed of all. They were lusty and industrious, cheerful and submissive."[13]
Along the "Slave Coast," which stretched from Cape Verde in the north to Cape St. Martha in the south, there lived Black people with different personalities and cultural backgrounds. Some were fierce and warlike, while others were calm and willing to follow orders. The fierce ones didn't make good slaves, but the calmer ones were in high demand. The Wyndahs, Nagoes, and Pawpaws of the Slave Coast were generally considered the best. They were strong and hardworking, cheerful and compliant.[13]
The natives of the Slave Coast had made some notable cultural advances. They smelted metals; made pottery; wove; manufactured swords and spears of merit; built houses of stone and of mud, and made ornaments of some artistic value. They had developed trade with the interior, taking salt from the coast and bartering it for gold, ivory and other commodities at regular "market places."
The people of the Slave Coast had made significant cultural progress. They smelted metals, created pottery, wove textiles, crafted quality swords and spears, built houses of stone and mud, and made ornaments with artistic value. They developed trade with the interior, bringing salt from the coast and exchanging it for gold, ivory, and other goods at regular markets.
The native civilization along the West coast of Africa was far from ideal, but it was a civilization which had established itself and which had made progress during historic times. It was a civilization that had evolved language; arts and crafts; tribal unity; village life, and communal organization. This native African civilization, in the seventeenth, eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries was confronted by an insatiable demand for black slaves. The conflicts that resulted from the efforts to supply that demand revolutionized and virtually destroyed all that was worthy of preservation in the native culture.
The native civilization along the West coast of Africa was far from perfect, but it was a civilization that had established itself and made progress throughout history. It was a civilization that had developed language, arts and crafts, tribal unity, village life, and community organization. This native African civilization, in the seventeenth, eighteenth, and early nineteenth centuries, faced an unquenchable demand for black slaves. The conflicts that arose from attempts to meet that demand changed and nearly erased everything that was valuable in the native culture.
When the whites first went to the Slave Coast there was comparatively little slavery among the natives. Some captives, taken in war; some debtors, unable to meet their obligations, and some violators of religious rites, were held by the chief or the headman of the tribe. On occasion he would sell these slaves, but the slave trade was never established as a business until the white man organized it.
When the Europeans first arrived at the Slave Coast, there was relatively little slavery among the local people. Some captives taken in wars, some debtors who couldn't pay their debts, and some people who broke religious laws were kept by the chief or the tribal leader. Sometimes, he would sell these slaves, but the slave trade didn’t become a business until the Europeans set it up.
The whites came, and with guile and by force they persuaded and compelled the natives to permit the erection of forts and of trading posts. From the time of the first Portuguese settlement, in 1482, the whites began their work with rum and finished it with gun-powder. Rum destroyed the stamina of the native; gun-powder rendered his intertribal wars more destructive. These two agencies of European civilization combined, the one to degenerate, the other to destroy the native tribal life.
The white settlers arrived and, using trickery and force, convinced the natives to allow the construction of forts and trading posts. Since the first Portuguese settlement in 1482, the white settlers started their efforts with rum and completed it with gunpowder. Rum weakened the natives' resilience, while gunpowder made their intertribal conflicts even more deadly. Together, these two elements of European civilization worked to undermine and ultimately ruin the native tribal way of life.
The traders, adventurers, buccaneers and pirates that gathered along the Slave Coast were not able to teach the natives anything in the way of cruelty, but they could and[Pg 41] did give them lessons in cunning, trickery and double dealing. Early in the history of the Gold Coast the whites began using the natives to make war on commercial rivals. In one famous instance, "the Dutch had instigated the King of Fetu to refuse the Assins permission to pass through his territory. These people used to bring a great deal of gold to Cape Coast Castle (English), and the Dutch hoped in this way to divert the trade to their own settlements. The King having complied and plundered some of the traders on the way down, the Assins declared war against him and were assisted by the English with arms and ammunition. The King of Sabol was also paid to help them, and the allied army (20,000 strong) inflicted a crushing defeat on the Fetus."[14]
The traders, adventurers, buccaneers, and pirates who gathered along the Slave Coast didn’t teach the locals anything about cruelty, but they did show them a lot about cunning, trickery, and deceit. Early in the history of the Gold Coast, the Europeans began using the locals to fight against their commercial enemies. In one well-known case, "the Dutch encouraged the King of Fetu to deny the Assins permission to pass through his land. These people used to bring a lot of gold to Cape Coast Castle (English), and the Dutch hoped to redirect the trade to their own settlements. After the King agreed and looted some traders on his way down, the Assins declared war on him and were supported by the English with weapons and ammunition. The King of Sabol was also paid to assist them, and the allied army (20,000 strong) dealt a major defeat to the Fetu."[Pg 41]
On another occasion, the Dutch were worsted in a war with some of the native tribes. Realizing that if they were to maintain themselves on the Coast they must raise an army as quickly as possible, they approached the Fetus and bargained with them to take the field and fight the Komendas until they had utterly exterminated them, on payment of $4,500. But no sooner had this arrangement been made than the English paid the Fetus an additional $4,500 to remain neutral![15]
On another occasion, the Dutch faced defeat in a war against some of the native tribes. Realizing that to stay on the Coast, they needed to quickly assemble an army, they approached the Fetus and negotiated with them to fight the Komendas until they were completely wiped out, in exchange for $4,500. But as soon as this deal was struck, the English offered the Fetus an extra $4,500 to stay neutral![15]
Before 1750, when the competition for the slaves was less keen, and the supply came nearer to meeting the demand, the slavers were probably as honest in this as they were in any other trade with the natives. The whites encouraged and incited the native tribes to make war upon one another for the benefit of the whites. The whites fostered kidnaping, slavery and the slave trade. The natives were urged to betray one another, and the whites took advantage of their treachery. During the four hundred years that the African slave trade was continued, it was the whites who encouraged it; fostered it; and backed it financially. The slave trade was a white man's trade, [Pg 42]carried on under conditions as far removed from the conditions of ordinary African life as the manufacturing and trading of Europe were removed from the manufacturing and trading of the Africans.
Before 1750, when the competition for slaves was less intense and the supply was closer to meeting the demand, the slave traders were likely as honest in this trade as they were in any other dealings with the local people. The white colonizers encouraged and provoked the native tribes to go to war against each other for their own benefit. They promoted kidnapping, slavery, and the slave trade. The natives were urged to betray one another, and the whites exploited their treachery. Throughout the four hundred years that the African slave trade lasted, it was the whites who encouraged it, supported it, and funded it. The slave trade was a white man's business, [Pg 42]conducted under conditions that were as far removed from ordinary African life as the manufacturing and trading in Europe were from those of the Africans.
3. The Slave Trade
With the pressing demand from the Americas for a generous supply of black slaves, the business of securing them became one of the chief commercial activities of the time. "The trade bulked so large in the world's commerce in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries that every important maritime community on the Atlantic sought a share, generally with the sanction and often with the active assistance of its respective sovereign."[16]
With the increasing demand from the Americas for a substantial supply of enslaved Black people, the business of acquiring them became one of the main commercial activities of the era. "The trade was so significant in the global commerce of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries that every major maritime community on the Atlantic wanted a piece of it, typically with the approval and often with the active support of their respective governments."[16]
The catching, holding and shipping of Negroes on the African coast was the means by which the demand for slaves was met. With a few minor exceptions, the whites did not engage directly in slave catching. In most instances they bought their slaves from native brokers who lived in the coast towns. The brokers, in turn, received their slaves from the interior, where they were captured during wars, by professional raiding parties, well supplied with arms and ammunition. Slave-catching, begun as a kidnaping of individuals, developed into a large-scale traffic that provided the revenue of the more war-like natives. Villages were attacked and burned, and whole tribes were destroyed or driven off to the slave-pens on the coast. After 1750, for nearly a hundred years, the demand for slaves was so great and the profits were so large that no pains were spared to secure them.
The capturing, holding, and trading of Black people on the African coast was how the demand for slaves was fulfilled. With a few minor exceptions, white people didn't participate directly in slave capturing. Instead, they mostly purchased their slaves from local brokers who lived in coastal towns. These brokers, in turn, got their slaves from the interior, where individuals were captured during wars by professional raiding groups, heavily armed and equipped. What started as individual kidnappings evolved into a massive trade that generated revenue for the more aggressive local groups. Villages were attacked and burned, and entire tribes were either destroyed or forcibly taken to the slave-holding areas on the coast. After 1750, for almost a hundred years, the demand for slaves was so high and the profits so significant that no efforts were spared to obtain them.
The Slave Coast native was compelled to choose between being a slave-catcher or a slave. As a slave-catcher he spread terror and destruction among his fellows, seized them and sold them to white men. As a slave he made the long journey across the Atlantic.
The native from the Slave Coast had to decide between being a slave-catcher or a slave. As a slave-catcher, he instilled fear and chaos among his people, capturing them and selling them to white men. As a slave, he faced the long journey across the Atlantic.
The number of slaves carried away from Africa is variously estimated. Claridge states that "the Guinea Coast as a whole supplied as many as from 70,000 to 100,000 yearly" in 1700.[17] Bogart estimates the number of slaves secured as 2,500 per year in 1700; 15,000 to 20,000 per year from 1713 to 1753; in 1771, 47,000 carried by British ships alone; and in 1768 the slaves shipped from the African coast numbered 97,000.[18] Add to these numbers those who were killed in the raids; those who died in the camps, where the mortality was very high, and those who committed suicide. The total represents the disturbing influence that the slave trade introduced into the native African civilization.
The number of slaves taken from Africa is estimated in various ways. Claridge notes that "the Guinea Coast as a whole supplied as many as 70,000 to 100,000 each year" in 1700.[17] Bogart estimates the number of slaves captured as 2,500 per year in 1700; 15,000 to 20,000 per year from 1713 to 1753; in 1771, 47,000 were taken by British ships alone; and in 1768, the slaves shipped from the African coast numbered 97,000.[18] Additionally, these figures do not account for those who were killed in the raids, those who died in the camps, where the mortality rate was extremely high, and those who committed suicide. The total reflects the disturbing impact that the slave trade had on native African civilization.
In the early years of the trade the ships were small and carried only a few hundred Negroes at most. As the trade grew, larger and faster ships were built with galleries between the decks. On these galleries the blacks were forced to lie with their feet outboard—ironed together, two and two, with the chains fastened to staples in the deck. "They were squeezed so tightly together that the average space allowed to each one was but 16 inches by five and a half feet."[19] The galleries were frequently made of rough lumber, not tightly joined. Later, when the trade was outlawed, the slaves were stowed away out of sight on loose shelves over the cargo. "Where the 'tween decks space was two feet high or more, the slaves were stowed sitting up in rows, one crowded into the lap of another, and with legs on legs, like rider on a crowded toboggan." (Spears, p. 71.) There they stayed for the weeks or the months of the voyage. "In storms the sailors had to put on the hatches and seal tight the openings into the infernal cesspool." (Spears, p. 71.) The odor of a slaver was often unmistakable at a distance of five miles down wind.
In the early days of the trade, the ships were small and could only carry a few hundred enslaved people at most. As the trade expanded, larger and faster ships were built with galleries between the decks. On these galleries, the enslaved individuals were forced to lie with their feet hanging over the sides—chained together, two by two, with the chains attached to staples in the deck. "They were squeezed so tightly together that the average space allowed to each one was but 16 inches by five and a half feet." [19] The galleries were often made of rough wood, not tightly fitted. Later, when the trade was banned, the enslaved were hidden away out of sight on loose shelves above the cargo. "Where the 'tween decks space was two feet high or more, the enslaved were stowed sitting up in rows, one crowded into the lap of another, and with legs on legs, like rider on a crowded toboggan." (Spears, p. 71.) They remained there for weeks or months during the journey. "In storms, the sailors had to put on the hatches and seal tight the openings into the infernal cesspool." (Spears, p. 71.) The smell of a slaver was often unmistakable from five miles downwind.
The terrible revolt of the slaves in the West Indies, beginning in 1781, gave the growing anti-slavery sentiment an immense impetus. It also gave the slave owners pause. The cotton-gin had not yet been invented. Slavery was on a shifty economic basis in the South. Great Britain passed the first law to limit the slave trade in 1788; the United States outlawed the trade in 1794. In 1824 Great Britain declared the slave trade piracy. During these years, and during the years that followed, until the last slaver left New York Harbor in 1863, the trade continued under the American flag, in swift, specially constructed American-built ships.
The horrific slave revolt in the West Indies that started in 1781 gave a huge boost to the growing anti-slavery movement. It also caused slave owners to reconsider their position. The cotton gin hadn't been invented yet, and slavery was on shaky economic ground in the South. Great Britain passed the first law to restrict the slave trade in 1788, and the United States banned the trade in 1794. In 1824, Great Britain declared the slave trade to be piracy. Throughout these years, and the years that followed until the last slaver left New York Harbor in 1863, the trade continued under the American flag, using fast, specially built American ships.
As the restrictions upon the trade became more severe in the face of an increasing demand for slaves, "the fitting out of slavers developed into a flourishing business in the United States, and centered in New York City." The New York Journal of Commerce notes in 1857 that "down-town merchants of wealth and respectability are extensively engaged in buying and selling African Negroes, and have been, with comparatively little interruption for an indefinite number of years." A writer in the Continental Monthly for January, 1862, says:—"The city of New York has been until of late the principal port of the world for this infamous commerce; although the cities of Boston and Portland, are only second to her in distinction." During the years 1859-1860 eighty-five slavers are reported to have fitted out in New York Harbor and these ships alone had a capacity to transport from 30,000 to 60,000 slaves a year.[20]
As trade restrictions tightened due to an increasing demand for slaves, "the outfitting of slave ships became a booming business in the United States, primarily based in New York City." The New York Journal of Commerce reported in 1857 that "wealthy and reputable downtown merchants are heavily involved in buying and selling African slaves, and have been doing so with relatively little interruption for many years." A writer in the Continental Monthly for January 1862 stated: "Until recently, New York City has been the main port in the world for this disgraceful trade; however, the cities of Boston and Portland are a close second." Between 1859 and 1860, eighty-five slave ships are said to have been outfitted in New York Harbor, and these ships alone could transport between 30,000 and 60,000 slaves each year.[20]
The merchants of the North pursued the slave trade so relentlessly because it paid such enormous profits on the capital outlay. Some of the voyages went wrong, but the trade, on the whole, netted immense returns. At the end of the eighteenth century a good ship, fitted to carry from 300 to 400 slaves, could be built for about $35,000. Such a ship would make a clear profit of from $30,000 to $100,000 in a single voyage. Some of them made as many as five[Pg 45] voyages before they became so foul that they had to be abandoned.[21] While some voyages were less profitable than others, there was no avenue of international trade that offered more alluring possibilities.
The merchants of the North pursued the slave trade with relentless ambition because it generated enormous profits on their investments. Some voyages encountered problems, but overall, the trade yielded immense returns. By the end of the eighteenth century, a decent ship capable of carrying 300 to 400 slaves could be built for about $35,000. Such a ship could make a profit ranging from $30,000 to $100,000 on a single voyage. Some of these ships completed as many as five[Pg 45] voyages before they became so dirty that they had to be abandoned.[21] While some voyages were less profitable than others, there was no other international trade option that offered more enticing possibilities.
Sanctioned by potentates, blessed by the church, and surrounded with the garments of respectability, the slave trade grew, until, in the words of Samuel Hopkins (1787), "The trade in human species has been the first wheel of commerce in Newport, on which every other movement in business has depended.... By it the inhabitants have gotten most of their wealth and riches." (Spears, p. 20.) After the vigorous measures taken by the British Government for its suppression, the slave trade was carried on chiefly in American-built ships; officered by American citizens; backed by American capital, and under the American flag.
Sanctioned by powerful leaders, endorsed by the church, and wrapped in a facade of respectability, the slave trade flourished until, as Samuel Hopkins noted in 1787, "The trade in human beings has been the primary driver of commerce in Newport, on which all other business activities have relied.... Through it, the residents have accumulated most of their wealth and riches." (Spears, p. 20.) After the strong actions taken by the British Government to suppress it, the slave trade continued primarily in American-built ships, operated by American citizens, funded by American capital, and sailing under the American flag.
The slave trade was the business of the North as slavery was the business of the South. Both flourished until the Proclamation of Emancipation in 1863.
The slave trade was the business of the North, while slavery was the business of the South. Both thrived until the Emancipation Proclamation in 1863.
4. Slavery in the United States
Slavery and the slave trade date from the earliest colonial times. The first slaves in the English colonies were brought to Jamestown in 1619 by a Dutch ship. The first American-built slave ship was the Desire, launched at Marblehead in 1636. There were Negro slaves in New York as early as 1626, although there were only a few hundred slaves in the colonies prior to 1650.
Slavery and the slave trade have been around since the earliest days of colonialism. The first slaves in the English colonies were brought to Jamestown in 1619 by a Dutch ship. The first American-built slave ship was the Desire, launched in Marblehead in 1636. There were Black slaves in New York as early as 1626, although there were only a few hundred slaves in the colonies before 1650.
Since slave labor is economical only where the slaves can be worked together in gangs, there was never much slavery among the farmers and small business men of the North. On the other hand, in the South, the developing plantation system made it possible for the owner to use large gangs of slaves in the clearing of new land; in the raising of[Pg 46] tobacco, and in caring for rice and cotton. The plantation system of agriculture and the cotton gin made slavery the success that it was in the United States. "The characteristic American slave, indeed, was not only a Negro, but a plantation workman."[22]
Since slave labor is only cost-effective when slaves can be grouped together in large numbers, slavery was never widespread among farmers and small business owners in the North. In contrast, in the South, the growing plantation system allowed owners to employ large groups of slaves for clearing new land, growing[Pg 46] tobacco, and tending to rice and cotton. The plantation agriculture system and the cotton gin made slavery so successful in the United States. "The typical American slave was not only a Black person but also a plantation laborer."[22]
The opening years of the nineteenth century found slavery intrenched over the whole territory of the United States that lay South of the Mason and Dixon line. In that territory slave trading and slave owning were just as much a matter of course as horse trading and horse owning were a matter of course in the North. "Every public auctioneer handled slaves along with other property, and in each city there were brokers, buying them to sell again, and handling them on commission."[23]
The early years of the nineteenth century saw slavery firmly established across all the regions of the United States located south of the Mason and Dixon line. In those areas, trading and owning slaves were as normal as trading and owning horses were in the North. "Every public auctioneer sold slaves alongside other property, and in each city, there were brokers who bought them to resell and handled them for a commission."[23]
The position of the broker is indicated in the following typical bill of sale which was published in Charleston, S. C., in 1795. "Gold Coast Negroes. On Thursday, the 17th of March instant, will be exposed to public sale near the exchange ... the remainder of the cargo of negroes imported in the ship Success, Captain John Conner, consisting chiefly of likely young boys and girls in good health, and having been here through the winter may be considered in some degree seasoned to the climate."[24]
The role of the broker is shown in the following typical bill of sale published in Charleston, SC, in 1795. "Gold Coast Slaves. On Thursday, March 17th, there will be a public sale near the exchange ... the remaining cargo of slaves imported on the ship Success, Captain John Conner, primarily consisting of healthy young boys and girls who have been here through the winter and can be considered somewhat acclimated to the climate."[24]
Such a bill of sale attracted no more attention at that time than a similar bill advertising cattle attracts to-day.
Such a bill of sale got no more attention back then than a similar ad for cattle does today.
During the early colonial days, the slaves were better fed and provided for than were the indentured servants. They were of greater money value and, particularly in the later years when slavery became the mainstay of Southern agriculture, a first class Negro, acclimated, healthy, willing and trustworthy, was no mean asset.
During the early colonial days, slaves were better fed and taken care of than indentured servants. They had a higher monetary value, and especially in the later years when slavery became central to Southern agriculture, a skilled, healthy, willing, and trustworthy Black person was a significant asset.
Toward the end of the eighteenth century slavery began to show itself unprofitable in the South. The best and most[Pg 47] accessible land was exhausted. Except for the rice plantations of South Carolina and Georgia, slavery was not paying. The Southern delegates to the Constitutional Convention, with the exception of the delegates from these states, were prepared to abolish the slave trade. Some of them were ready to free their own slaves. Then came the invention of the cotton gin and the rise of the cotton kingdom. The amount of raw cotton consumed by England was 13,000 bales in 1781; 572,000 bales in 1820; and 3,366,000 bales in 1860. During that period, the South was almost the sole source of supply.
Toward the end of the eighteenth century, slavery started to become unprofitable in the South. The best and most[Pg 47] accessible land was depleted. Aside from the rice plantations in South Carolina and Georgia, slavery wasn't making money. The Southern delegates at the Constitutional Convention, except for those from these states, were ready to end the slave trade. Some of them were even willing to free their own slaves. Then came the invention of the cotton gin and the emergence of the cotton economy. The amount of raw cotton consumed by England was 13,000 bales in 1781; 572,000 bales in 1820; and 3,366,000 bales in 1860. During that time, the South was nearly the only source of supply.
The attitude of the South, confronted by this wave of slave prosperity, underwent a complete change. Her statesmen had consented, between 1808 and 1820, to severe restrictive laws directed towards the slave trade. After cotton became king, slaves rose rapidly in price; land, once used and discarded, was again brought under cultivation; cotton-planting spread rapidly into the South and Southwest; Texas was annexed; the Mexican War was fought; an agitation was begun for the annexation of Cuba, and Calhoun (1836) declared that he "ever should regret that this term (piracy) had been applied" to the slave trade in our laws.[25]
The South's attitude changed completely in response to this surge in slave prosperity. Between 1808 and 1820, its leaders agreed to strict laws limiting the slave trade. Once cotton became the dominant crop, the price of slaves skyrocketed; land that had been used and abandoned was cultivated again; cotton farming spread quickly throughout the South and Southwest; Texas was added to the Union; the Mexican War happened; calls for the annexation of Cuba began, and Calhoun (1836) expressed that he "would always regret that this term (piracy) had been used" in our laws regarding the slave trade.[25]
The change of sentiment corresponded with the changing value of the slaves. Phillips publishes a detailed table of slave values in which he estimates that an unskilled, able-bodied young slave man was worth $300 in 1795; $500 to $700 in 1810; $700 to $1200 to in 1840; and $1100 to $1800 in 1860.[26] The factors which resulted in the increased slave prices were the increased demand for cotton, the increased demand for slaves, and the decrease in the importation of negroes due to the greater severity of the prohibitions on the slave trade.
The shift in attitude matched the changing value of slaves. Phillips provides a detailed table of slave values, estimating that an unskilled, able-bodied young male slave was worth $300 in 1795; $500 to $700 in 1810; $700 to $1,200 in 1840; and $1,100 to $1,800 in 1860.[26] The reasons for the rising slave prices included the increased demand for cotton, the rising demand for slaves, and the decline in the importation of enslaved people due to stricter prohibitions on the slave trade.
5. Slavery for a Race
The American colonists needed labor to develop the wilderness. White labor was scarce and high, so the colonists turned to slave labor performed by imported blacks. The merchants of the North built the ships and carried on the slave trade at an immense profit. The plantation owners of the South exploited the Negroes after they reached the states.
The American colonists needed workers to develop the wilderness. White labor was limited and expensive, so the colonists resorted to slave labor from imported Black individuals. Northern merchants built the ships and profited greatly from the slave trade. Southern plantation owners exploited the Black people once they arrived in the states.
The continuance of the slave trade and the provision of a satisfactory supply of slaves for the Southern market depended upon slave-catching in Africa, which, in turn, involved the destruction of an entire civilization. This work of destruction was carried forward by the leading commercial nations of the world. During nearly 250 years the English speaking inhabitants of America took an active part in the business of enslaving, transporting and selling black men. These Americans—citizens of the United States—bought stolen Negroes on the African coast; carried them against their will across the ocean; sold them into slavery, and then, on the plantations, made use of their enforced labor.
The ongoing slave trade and the steady supply of slaves for the Southern market relied on capturing slaves in Africa, which ultimately led to the destruction of an entire civilization. This destruction was carried out by the major commercial nations of the world. For nearly 250 years, English-speaking people in America played an active role in the business of enslaving, transporting, and selling Black individuals. These Americans—citizens of the United States—purchased stolen Africans on the coast of Africa, forcibly brought them across the ocean, sold them into slavery, and then exploited their forced labor on plantations.
Both slavery and the slave trade were based on a purely economic motive—the desire for profit. In order to satisfy that desire, the American people helped to depopulate villages,—to devastate, burn, murder and enslave; to wipe out a civilization, and to bring the unwilling objects of their gain-lust thousands of miles across an impassable barrier to alien shores.
Both slavery and the slave trade were driven solely by the desire for profit. To fulfill that desire, Americans contributed to the depopulation of villages—devastating, burning, murdering, and enslaving; destroying a civilization and forcing the unwilling victims of their greed thousands of miles across an insurmountable barrier to foreign lands.
FOOTNOTES:
[15] Ibid., p. 150.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 150.
[23] Ibid., p. 190.
Ibid., p. 190.
[24] Ibid., p. 40.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 40.
V. THE WINNING OF THE WEST
1. Westward, Ho!
The English colonists in America occupied only the narrow strip of country between the Alleghanies and the Atlantic Ocean. The interior was inhabited by the Indians, and claimed by the French, the Spanish and the British, but neither possession nor legal title carried weight with the stream of pioneers that was making a path into the "wilderness," crying its slogan,—"Westward, Ho!" as it moved toward the setting sun. The first objective of the pioneers was the Ohio Valley; the second was the valley of the Mississippi; the third was the Great Plains; the fourth was the Pacific slope, with its golden sands. Each one of these objectives developed itself out of the previous conquest.
The English colonists in America only settled the narrow strip of land between the Allegheny Mountains and the Atlantic Ocean. The interior was occupied by Native Americans and claimed by the French, Spanish, and British, but neither ownership nor legal rights mattered to the wave of pioneers pushing into the "wilderness," shouting their slogan, "Westward, Ho!" as they headed toward the setting sun. The pioneers’ first target was the Ohio Valley; the second was the Mississippi Valley; the third was the Great Plains; and the fourth was the Pacific Coast, with its golden beaches. Each of these targets emerged from the previous conquest.
The settlers who made their way across the mountains into the valley of the Ohio, found themselves in a land of plenty. The game was abundant; the soil was excellent, and soon they were in a position to offer their surplus products for sale. These products could not be successfully transported across the mountains, but they could be floated down the Ohio and the Mississippi—a natural roadway to the sea. But beside the Indians, who claimed all of the land for their own, there were the Spaniards at New Orleans, doing everything in their power to prevent the American Colonists from building up a successful river commerce.
The settlers who crossed the mountains into the Ohio Valley found themselves in a land of plenty. Game was abundant, the soil was excellent, and soon they were able to sell their surplus products. These products couldn't be easily transported over the mountains, but they could be floated down the Ohio and the Mississippi—a natural route to the sea. However, alongside the Indians, who claimed all the land as their own, there were the Spaniards in New Orleans, doing everything they could to stop the American Colonists from developing a successful river trade.
The frontiersmen were able to push back the Indians. The Spanish garrisons presented a more serious obstacle. New Orleans was a well fortified post that could be provisioned from the sea. Behind it, therefore, lay the whole power of the Spanish fleet. The right of navigation was finally obtained in the Treaty of 1795. Still friction [Pg 50]continued with the Spanish authorities and serious trouble was averted only by the transfer of Louisiana, first to the French (1800) and then by them to the United States (1803). Napoleon had agreed, when he secured this territory from the Spaniards, not to turn it over to the United States. A pressing need of funds, however, led him to strike an easy bargain with the American government which was negotiating for the control of the mouth of the Mississippi. Napoleon insisted that the United States take, not only the mouth of the river, but also the territory to the West which he saw would be useless without this outlet. After some hesitation, Jefferson and his advisers accepted the offer and the Louisiana Purchase was consummated.
The frontiersmen were able to drive back the Native Americans. The Spanish military outposts posed a more significant challenge. New Orleans was a well-defended location that could be supplied from the sea. Behind it, therefore, was the full might of the Spanish fleet. The right to navigate the river was finally secured in the Treaty of 1795. Still, there was ongoing tension with the Spanish authorities, and serious conflict was avoided only by the transfer of Louisiana, first to the French (1800) and then by them to the United States (1803). Napoleon had agreed, when he acquired this territory from the Spanish, not to hand it over to the United States. However, a pressing need for funds led him to make a favorable deal with the American government, which was seeking control of the Mississippi River's mouth. Napoleon insisted that the United States take not only the river's mouth but also the territory to the west, which he believed would be useless without this access. After some hesitation, Jefferson and his advisors accepted the offer, and the Louisiana Purchase was finalized.
The Louisiana Purchase gave the young American nation what it needed—a place in the sun. The colonists had taken land for their early requirements from the Indians who inhabited the coastal plain. They had enslaved the Negroes and thus had secured an ample supply of cheap labor. Now, the pressure of population, and the restless, pioneer spirit of those early days, led out into the West.
The Louisiana Purchase provided the growing American nation with what it needed—a chance to thrive. The colonists had taken land from the Native Americans living in the coastal areas to meet their initial needs. They had enslaved Black people, securing a large supply of inexpensive labor. Now, the increasing population and the adventurous spirit of those early times pushed them westward.
Until 1830 immigration was not a large factor in the increase of the colonial population, but the birth-rate was prodigious. In the closing years of the eighteenth century, Franklin estimated that the average family had eight children. There were sections of the country where the population doubled, by natural increase, once in 23 years. Indeed, the entire population of the United States was increasing at a phenomenal rate. The census of 1800 showed 5,308,483 persons in the country. Twenty years later the population was 9,638,453—an increase of 81 per cent. By 1840 the population was reported as 17,069,453—an increase of 77 per cent over 1820, and of 221 per cent over 1800.
Until 1830, immigration wasn’t a major factor in the growth of the colonial population, but the birth rate was incredibly high. In the late 1700s, Franklin estimated that the average family had eight kids. There were areas in the country where the population doubled through natural growth every 23 years. In fact, the entire population of the United States was growing at an astonishing rate. The census of 1800 recorded 5,308,483 people in the country. Twenty years later, the population was 9,638,453—an increase of 81 percent. By 1840, the population was reported to be 17,069,453—an increase of 77 percent compared to 1820, and 221 percent compared to 1800.
The small farmers and tradesmen of the North were settling up the Northwest Territory. The plantation owners of the South, operating on a large scale, and with the wasteful methods that inevitably accompany slavery, were clamoring for new land to replace the tracts that had been[Pg 51] exhausted by constant recropping with no attempt at fertilization.
The small farmers and tradespeople in the North were establishing themselves in the Northwest Territory. Meanwhile, the plantation owners in the South, working on a large scale and using the wasteful practices that come with slavery, were demanding new land to replace the areas that had been[Pg 51] depleted by continuous cropping without any effort to fertilize the soil.
Cotton had been enthroned in the South since the invention of the cotton gin in 1792. With the resumption of European trade relations in 1815 the demand for cotton and for cotton lands increased enormously. There was one, and only one logical way to meet this demand—through the possession of the Southwest.
Cotton had been the king of the South since the cotton gin was invented in 1792. After European trade relations resumed in 1815, the demand for cotton and cotton land skyrocketed. There was only one clear way to satisfy this demand—by acquiring the Southwest.
2. The Southwest
The pioneers had already broken into the Southwest in large numbers. While Spain still held the Mississippi, there were eager groups of settlers pressing against the frontier which the Spanish guarded so jealously against all comers. The Louisiana Purchase met the momentary demand, but beyond the Louisiana Purchase, and between the settlers and the rich lands of Texas lay the Mexican boundary. The tide of migration into this new field hurled itself against the Mexican border in the same way that an earlier generation had rolled against the frontier of Louisiana.
The pioneers had already moved into the Southwest in large numbers. While Spain still controlled the Mississippi, there were eager groups of settlers pushing against the frontier that the Spanish guarded so fiercely against everyone. The Louisiana Purchase fulfilled the immediate demand, but beyond that, between the settlers and the wealthy lands of Texas, lay the Mexican border. The wave of migration into this new area crashed against the Mexican border just like an earlier generation had surged against the frontier of Louisiana.
The attitude of these early settlers is described with sympathetic accuracy by Theodore Roosevelt. "Louisiana was added to the United States because the hardy backwoods settlers had swarmed into the valleys of the Tennessee, the Cumberland and the Ohio by hundreds of thousands.... Restless, adventurous, hardy, they looked eagerly across the Mississippi to the fertile solitudes where the Spaniard was the nominal, and the Indian the real master; and with a more immediate longing they fiercely coveted the Creole provinces at the mouth of the river."[27] This fierce coveting could have only one possible outcome—the colonists got what they wanted.
The attitude of these early settlers is described with sympathetic accuracy by Theodore Roosevelt. "Louisiana was added to the United States because the tough backwoods settlers had flooded into the valleys of the Tennessee, the Cumberland, and the Ohio by the hundreds of thousands.... Restless, adventurous, and resilient, they eagerly gazed across the Mississippi at the fertile lands where the Spaniard was the nominal, and the Indian the true master; and with a more immediate desire, they fiercely craved the Creole provinces at the mouth of the river."[27] This fierce craving could have only one possible outcome—the colonists got what they wanted.
The speed with which the Southwest rushed into prominence as a factor in national affairs is indicated by its contribution to the cotton-crop. In 1811 the states and territories from Alabama and Tennessee westward produced one-sixteenth of the cotton grown in the United States. In 1820 they produced a third; in 1830, a half; and by 1860, three-quarters of the cotton raised. At the same time, the population of the Alabama-Mississippi territory was:—
The rapid rise of the Southwest as an important player in national affairs is reflected in its contribution to the cotton crop. In 1811, the states and territories from Alabama and Tennessee westward produced one-sixteenth of the cotton grown in the United States. By 1820, they produced a third; in 1830, a half; and by 1860, three-quarters of the cotton raised. Meanwhile, the population of the Alabama-Mississippi territory was:—
200,000 in 1810. |
445,000 in 1820. |
965,000 in 1830. |
1,377,000 in 1840. |
Thus thirty years saw an increase of nearly seven-fold in the population of this region.[28]
Thus, over thirty years, the population of this region grew almost seven times.[28]
Meanwhile, slavery had become the issue of the day. The slave power was in control of the Federal Government, and in order to maintain its authority, it needed new slave states to offset the free states that were being carved out of the Northwest.
Meanwhile, slavery had become the hot topic of the day. The slaveholders were in control of the federal government, and to keep their power, they needed new slave states to balance the free states that were being created in the Northwest.
Here were three forces—first the desire of the frontiersmen for "elbow room"; second the demand of King Cotton for unused land from which the extravagant plantation system might draw virgin fertility and third, the necessity that was pressing the South to add territory in order to hold its power. All three forces impelled towards the Southwest, and it was thither that population pressed in the years following 1820.
There were three main factors—first, the frontiersmen's desire for more space; second, King Cotton's demand for untapped land so that the lavish plantation system could exploit its rich soil; and third, the South's urgent need to acquire more territory to maintain its influence. All three factors drove people toward the Southwest, and that’s where the population moved in the years after 1820.
3. Texas
Mexico lay to the Southwest, and therefore Mexico became the object of American territorial ambitions. The district now known as Texas had constituted a part of the Louisiana Purchase (1803); had been ceded to Spain (1819); had been made the object of negotiations looking towards its[Pg 53] purchase in 1826; had revolted against Mexico and been recognized as an independent state in 1835.
Mexico was located to the southwest, making it a target for American territorial ambitions. The area now known as Texas was part of the Louisiana Purchase (1803), was ceded to Spain (1819), was subject to negotiations for its[Pg 53] purchase in 1826, and had revolted against Mexico, gaining recognition as an independent state in 1835.
Texas had been settled by Americans who had secured the permission of the Mexican Government to colonize. These settlers made no effort to conceal their opposition to the Mexican Government, with which they were entirely out of sympathy. Many of them were seeking territory in which slavery might be perpetuated, and they introduced slaves into Texas in direct violation of the Mexican Constitution. The Americans did not go to Texas with any idea of becoming Mexican subjects; on the contrary, as soon as they felt themselves strong enough, they declared their independence of Mexico, and began negotiations for the annexation of Texas to the United States.
Texas was settled by Americans who had gotten permission from the Mexican Government to move there. These settlers were open about their opposition to the Mexican Government, which they completely disagreed with. Many of them were looking for land where they could continue slavery, and they brought slaves into Texas in clear violation of the Mexican Constitution. The Americans didn’t go to Texas planning to become part of Mexico; instead, as soon as they felt strong enough, they declared their independence from Mexico and started talks to annex Texas to the United States.
The Texan struggle for independence from Mexico was cordially welcomed in all parts of the United States, but particularly in the South. Despite the protests of Mexico, public meetings were held; funds were raised; volunteers were enlisted and equipped, and supplies and munitions were sent for the assistance of the Texans in ships openly fitted out in New Orleans.
The Texan fight for independence from Mexico was warmly supported across the United States, especially in the South. Even with Mexico's objections, public meetings took place; funds were gathered; volunteers were recruited and outfitted, and supplies and weapons were sent to help the Texans on ships openly prepared in New Orleans.
No sooner had the Texans established a government than the campaign for annexation was begun. The advocates of annexation—principally Southerners—argued in favor of adding so rich and so logical a prize to the territory of the United States, citing the purchase of Louisiana and of Florida as precedents. Their opponents, first on constitutional grounds and then on grounds of public policy, argued against annexation.
No sooner had the Texans set up a government than the push for annexation started. The supporters of annexation—mainly from the South—argued for adding such a valuable and sensible asset to the territory of the United States, pointing to the purchases of Louisiana and Florida as examples. Their opponents, initially on constitutional grounds and later on public policy grounds, argued against annexation.
Opinion in the South was greatly aroused. Despite the fact that many of her foremost statesmen were against annexation, some of the Southern newspapers even went so far as to threaten the dissolution of the Union if the treaty of ratification failed to pass the Senate.
Opinion in the South was highly stirred. Even though many of her top politicians opposed annexation, some Southern newspapers went so far as to threaten to dissolve the Union if the ratification treaty didn’t pass the Senate.
The campaign of 1844 was fought on the issue of annexation and the election of James K. Polk was a pledge that Texas should be annexed to the United States. During[Pg 54] the campaign, the line of division on annexation had been a party line—Democrats favoring; Whigs opposing. Between the election and the passage of the joint resolution by which annexation was consummated, it became a sectional issue,—Southern Whigs favoring annexation and Northern Democrats opposing it.
The 1844 campaign revolved around the issue of annexation, and James K. Polk's election promised that Texas would be joined with the United States. During[Pg 54] the campaign, support for annexation was largely divided along party lines—Democrats were in favor while Whigs were against. However, between the election and the approval of the joint resolution that made annexation happen, it shifted to a regional issue—Southern Whigs supported annexation while Northern Democrats opposed it.
So strong was the protest against annexation, that the treaty could not command the necessary two-thirds vote in the Senate. The matter was disposed of by the passage of a joint resolution (March 1, 1845) which required only a majority vote in both houses of Congress. President Polk therefore took office with the mandate of the country and the decision of both houses of the retiring Congress, in favor of annexation.
The protest against annexation was so intense that the treaty couldn't get the required two-thirds vote in the Senate. Instead, it was resolved through a joint resolution (March 1, 1845) that only needed a majority vote in both houses of Congress. As a result, President Polk took office backed by the will of the country and the decision of both houses of the outgoing Congress in favor of annexation.
Mexico, in the meantime, had offered to recognize the independence of Texas and to make peace with her if the Texas Congress would reject the joint resolution, and refuse the proffered annexation. This the Texas Congress refused, and with the passage, by that body, of an act providing for annexation, the Mexican minister was withdrawn from Washington, and Mexico began her preparations for war.
Mexico, meanwhile, had offered to acknowledge Texas's independence and make peace if the Texas Congress would turn down the joint resolution and reject the proposed annexation. The Texas Congress declined this offer, and with the passage of a law by that body to allow for annexation, the Mexican minister was pulled from Washington, and Mexico started preparing for war.
President Polk had taken office with the avowed intention of buying California from Mexico. The rupture threatened to prevent him from carrying this plan into effect. He therefore sent an unofficial representative to Mexico in an effort to restore friendly relations. Failing in that, he and his advisers determined upon war as the only feasible method of obtaining California and of settling the diplomatic tangle involved in the annexation of Texas.
President Polk took office with the clear goal of buying California from Mexico. The conflict threatened to thwart his plans. So, he sent an unofficial representative to Mexico to try to restore friendly relations. When that failed, he and his advisors decided that war was the only viable way to acquire California and resolve the diplomatic issues surrounding the annexation of Texas.
4. The Conquest of Mexico
The Polk Administration made the Mexican War as a part of its expansionist policy.
The Polk Administration included the Mexican War as part of its expansionist strategy.
"Although that unfortunate country (Mexico) had officially notified the United States that the annexation of[Pg 55] Texas would be treated as a cause of war, so constant were the internal quarrels in Mexico that open hostilities would have been avoided had the conduct of the Administration been more honorable. That was the opinion of Webster, Clay, Calhoun, Benton, and Tyler.... Mexico was actually goaded on to war. The principle of the manifest destiny of this country was invoked as a reason for the attempt to add to our territory at the expense of Mexico."[29]
"Even though that unfortunate country (Mexico) had officially informed the United States that the annexation of[Pg 55] Texas would be seen as a reason for war, the constant internal conflicts in Mexico meant that open fighting could have been avoided if the government's actions had been more honorable. That was the view of Webster, Clay, Calhoun, Benton, and Tyler.... Mexico was actually provoked into war. The idea of the manifest destiny of this country was brought up as justification for the attempt to expand our territory at Mexico's expense."[29]
After the annexation of Texas it became the duty of the United States to defend that state against the threatened Mexican invasion.
After Texas was annexed, it became the responsibility of the United States to defend that state against the potential Mexican invasion.
Mexican troops had occupied the southern bank of the Rio Grande. General Zachary Taylor with a small force, moved to a position on the Nueces River. Between the two rivers lay a strip of territory the possession of which was one of the sources of dispute between Mexico and Texas. What followed may be stated in the words of one of the officers who participated in the expedition: "The presence of the United States troops on the edge of the territory farthest from the Mexican settlements was not sufficient to provoke hostilities. We were sent to provoke a fight, but it was essential that Mexico begin it" (p. 41). "Mexico showing no willingness to come to the Nueces to drive the invaders from her soil, it became necessary for the 'invaders' to approach to within a convenient distance to be struck. Accordingly, preparations were begun for moving the army to the Rio Grande, to a point near Matamoras. It was desirable to occupy a position near the largest center of population possible to reach without actually invading territory to which we set up no claim whatever" (p. 45).[30]
Mexican troops had taken control of the southern bank of the Rio Grande. General Zachary Taylor, leading a small force, positioned himself along the Nueces River. Between these two rivers lay a disputed area that was a source of conflict between Mexico and Texas. What happened next can be described in the words of one of the officers involved in the expedition: "The presence of U.S. troops at the far edge of the territory, away from Mexican settlements, wasn't enough to start hostilities. We were sent to provoke a fight, but it was crucial that Mexico initiate it" (p. 41). "Since Mexico showed no intention of coming to the Nueces to drive the 'invaders' from her land, it became necessary for the 'invaders' to move closer to a point where they could be attacked. So, preparations began to move the army to the Rio Grande, close to Matamoros. It was important to occupy a spot near the largest population center that we could reach without actually invading land to which we made no claim" (p. 45).[30]
The occupation, by the United States troops, of the disputed territory soon led to a clash in which several United States soldiers were killed. The incident was taken by the President as a sufficient cause for the declaration of a[Pg 56] state of war. The House complied readily with his wishes, passing the necessary resolution. Several members of the Senate begged for a delay during which the actual state of affairs might be ascertained. The President insisted, however, and the war was declared (May 13, 1846).
The occupation of the disputed territory by U.S. troops quickly led to a clash that resulted in the deaths of several U.S. soldiers. The President saw this incident as a valid reason to declare a[Pg 56] state of war. The House easily agreed with his wishes, passing the necessary resolution. Some senators requested a pause to confirm the actual situation. However, the President persisted, and war was declared (May 13, 1846).
The declaration of war was welcomed with wild enthusiasm in the South. Meetings were called; funds were raised; volunteers were enlisted, equipped and despatched in all haste to the scene of the conflict.
The declaration of war was met with overwhelming excitement in the South. Meetings were organized; money was raised; volunteers were signed up, equipped, and sent off quickly to the battlefield.
The North was less eager. There were protests, petitions, demonstrations. Many of the leaders of northern opinion took a public stand against the war. But the news of the first victories sent the country mad with an enthusiasm in which the North joined the South.
The North was less enthusiastic. There were protests, petitions, and demonstrations. Many of the northern leaders publicly opposed the war. But the news of the first victories drove the country into a frenzy of enthusiasm that saw the North rallying alongside the South.
The United States troops, during the Mexican War, won brilliant—almost unbelievable successes—against superior forces and in the face of immense natural obstacles. Had the war been less of a military triumph there must have been a far more widely-heard protest from Polk's enemies in the North. Successful beyond the wildest dreams of its promoters, the victorious war carried its own answer to those who questioned the worthiness of the cause. Within two years, the whole of Mexico was under the military control of the United States, and that country was in a position to dictate its own terms.
The U.S. troops, during the Mexican War, achieved impressive—almost unbelievable victories—against stronger forces and despite huge natural challenges. If the war hadn't been such a military success, there would have been much louder protests from Polk's opponents in the North. Achieving results that exceeded the wildest dreams of its supporters, the successful war provided its own response to those who doubted the legitimacy of the cause. Within two years, all of Mexico was under the military control of the United States, allowing that country to set its own terms.
The demands of the United States were mild to the extent of generosity. Under the treaty the annexation of Texas was validated; New Mexico and Upper California were ceded to the United States; the lower Rio Grande was fixed as the southern boundary of Texas, and in considerations of these additions to its territory, the United States agreed to pay Mexico fifteen millions of dollars.
The demands of the United States were mild to the point of being generous. Under the treaty, the annexation of Texas was confirmed; New Mexico and Upper California were handed over to the United States; the lower Rio Grande was established as the southern boundary of Texas, and in exchange for these additions to its territory, the United States agreed to pay Mexico fifteen million dollars.
Under this plan, Mexico was paid for territory that she did not need and could not use, while the United States gave a money consideration for the title to land that was already hers by right of conquest, and of which she was in actual possession.
Under this plan, Mexico was compensated for land that she didn't need and couldn't use, while the United States paid money for territory that was already rightfully hers by conquest and which she actually occupied.
The details of the treaty are relatively unimportant. The outstanding fact is that Mexico was in possession of certain territory that the ruling power in the United States wanted, and that ruling power took what it wanted by force of arms. "The war was one of conquest in the interest of an institution." It was "one of the most unjust ever waged by a stronger against a weaker nation."[31]
The specifics of the treaty aren't that important. What matters is that Mexico controlled certain land that the U.S. government wanted, and they took it by force. "The war was about conquering for the benefit of an institution." It was "one of the most unjust wars ever fought by a stronger nation against a weaker one."[31]
Congressman A. P. Gardner of Massachusetts summarized the matter very pithily in his debate with Morris Hillquit (New York, April 2, 1915), "We assisted Texas to get away from Mexico and then we proceeded to annex Texas. Plainly and bluntly stated, our purpose was to get some territory for American development." (Stenographic report in the New York Call, April 11, 1915.)
Congressman A. P. Gardner of Massachusetts summed it up well during his debate with Morris Hillquit (New York, April 2, 1915), "We helped Texas break away from Mexico and then we went ahead and annexed Texas. Simply put, our goal was to acquire territory for American growth." (Stenographic report in the New York Call, April 11, 1915.)
5. Conquering the Conquered
The work of conquering the Southwest was not completed by the termination of the war. Mexico ceded the territory—in the neighborhood of a million square miles—but she was giving away something that she had never possessed. Mexico claimed title to land that was occupied by the Indians. She had never conquered it; never settled it; never developed it. Her sovereignty was of the same shadowy sort that Spain had exercised over the country before the Mexican revolution.
The task of taking over the Southwest didn't end with the war. Mexico handed over a territory of about a million square miles, but it was giving away something it never truly owned. Mexico claimed rights to land that was occupied by Native Americans. It had never conquered, settled, or developed it. Its control was as vague as the kind that Spain had over the area before the Mexican revolution.
The new owners of the Southwest had a very different purpose in mind. No empty title would satisfy them. They intended to use the land. The Indians—already in possession—resented the encroachments of the invaders, but they fared no better than the Mexicans, or than their red-skinned brothers who had contended for the right to fish and hunt along their home streams in the Appalachians. The Indians of the Southwest fought stubbornly, but the wars that meant life and death to them were the merest[Pg 58] pastime for an army that had just completed the humiliation of a nation of the size and strength of Mexico. The Indians were swept aside, and the country was opened to the trapper, the prospector, the trader and the settler.
The new owners of the Southwest had a completely different agenda. No empty title would satisfy them. They planned to make use of the land. The Native Americans—who were already living there—resented the intrusions of the newcomers, but they had no better luck than the Mexicans, or their Indigenous brothers who had fought for the rights to fish and hunt in their home waters in the Appalachians. The Native Americans of the Southwest fought tenaciously, but the wars that were a matter of life and death for them were just a[Pg 58] trivial pursuit for an army that had just finished humiliating a nation as large and powerful as Mexico. The Native Americans were pushed aside, and the land was opened up to trappers, prospectors, traders, and settlers.
The Mexican War was a slight affair, involving a relatively small outlay in men and money. The total number of American soldiers killed in the war was 1,721; the wounded were 4,102; the deaths from accident and disease were 11,516, making total casualties of 5,823 and total losses of 15,618.[32]
The Mexican War was a minor conflict, requiring a relatively small investment of troops and funds. The total number of American soldiers killed in the war was 1,721; the wounded numbered 4,102; deaths from accidents and disease amounted to 11,516, resulting in total casualties of 5,823 and total losses of 15,618.[32]
The money cost of the Mexican War—the army and navy appropriations for the years 1846 to 1849 inclusive—was $119,624,000. Obviously the net cost of the war was less than this gross total,—how much less it is impossible to say.
The financial cost of the Mexican War—the army and navy budgets for the years 1846 to 1849—was $119,624,000. Clearly, the actual cost of the war was lower than this total, but it's impossible to determine by how much.
No satisfactory figures are available to show the cost in men and money of the Indian Wars in the Southwest. "From 1849 to 1865, the government expended $30,000,000 in the subjugation of the Indians in the territories of New Mexico and Arizona."[33] Their character may be gauged by noting from the "Historical Register" (Vol. 2, p. 281-2) the losses sustained in the four Indian Wars of which a record is preserved. In the Northwest Indian Wars (1790 to 1795) 896 persons were killed and 436 were wounded; in the Seminole War (1817 to 1818) 46 were killed and 36 were wounded; in the Black Hawk War (1831-2) the killed were 26 and the wounded 39; in the Seminole War (1835-1842) 383 were killed and 557 wounded. These were among the most serious of the Indian Wars and in all of them the cost in life and limb was small. Judged on this standard, the losses in the Southwest, during the Indian Wars, were, at most, trifling. The total outlay that was involved in the conquest of the vast domain would not have covered one first class battle of the Great War, and yet this outlay added[Pg 59] to the territory of the United States something like a million square miles containing some of the richest and most productive portions of the earth's surface.
No satisfactory figures are available to show the costs in lives and money of the Indian Wars in the Southwest. "From 1849 to 1865, the government spent $30,000,000 to control the Indians in the territories of New Mexico and Arizona."[33] Their impact can be assessed by looking at the "Historical Register" (Vol. 2, p. 281-2) which lists the losses from the four documented Indian Wars. In the Northwest Indian Wars (1790 to 1795), 896 people were killed and 436 were wounded; during the Seminole War (1817 to 1818), 46 were killed and 36 were wounded; in the Black Hawk War (1831-2), 26 were killed and 39 were wounded; and in the Seminole War (1835-1842), 383 were killed and 557 wounded. These were among the most significant Indian Wars, and in all of them, the toll in lives and injuries was relatively low. Based on this criterion, the losses in the Southwest during the Indian Wars were, at most, minor. The overall spending involved in conquering the vast territory wouldn’t have paid for a single major battle of the Great War, yet this investment expanded[Pg 59] the United States by about a million square miles, including some of the richest and most productive areas of the earth.
This domain was won by a process of military conquest; it was taken from the Mexicans and the Indians by force of arms. In order to acquire it, it was necessary to drive whole tribes from their villages; to burn; to maim; to kill. "St. Louis, New Orleans, St. Augustine, San Antonio, Santa Fe and San Francisco are cities that were built by Frenchmen and Spaniards; we did not found them but we conquered them." "The Southwest was conquered only after years of hard fighting with the original owners" (p. 26). "The winning of the West and the Southwest is a stage in the conquest of a continent" (p. 27). "This great westward movement of armed settlers was essentially one of conquest, no less than of colonization" (p. 370).[34] None of the possessors of this territory were properly armed or equipped for effective warfare. All of them fell an easy prey to the organized might of the Government of the United States.
This area was taken through military conquest; it was seized from the Mexicans and the Native Americans by force. To obtain it, whole tribes had to be driven from their villages; there were acts of burning, injury, and killing. "St. Louis, New Orleans, St. Augustine, San Antonio, Santa Fe, and San Francisco are cities that were established by French and Spanish settlers; we didn’t create them, we conquered them." "The Southwest was only taken after years of intense fighting with the original inhabitants" (p. 26). "The conquest of the West and the Southwest marks a chapter in the takeover of a continent" (p. 27). "This major westward push of armed settlers was fundamentally about conquest as much as it was about colonization" (p. 370).[34] None of the individuals occupying this land were adequately armed or prepared for effective combat. They all easily fell victim to the organized power of the Government of the United States.
FOOTNOTES:
VI. THE BEGINNINGS OF WORLD DOMINION
1. The Shifting of Control
During the half century that intervened between the War of 1812 and the Civil War of 1861 the policy of the United States government was decided largely by men who came from south of the Mason and Dixon line. The Southern whites,—class-conscious rulers with an institution (slavery) to defend,—acted like any other ruling class under similar circumstances. They favored Southward expansion which meant more territory in which slavery might be established.
During the fifty years between the War of 1812 and the Civil War of 1861, the policy of the United States government was mostly shaped by men from south of the Mason-Dixon line. The Southern whites—class-conscious leaders with a system (slavery) to protect—acted like any other ruling class in comparable situations. They supported expansion to the south, which meant acquiring more territory where slavery could be established.
The Southerners were looking for a place in the sun where slavery, as an institution, might flourish for the profit and power of the slave-holding class. Their most effective move in this direction was the annexation of Texas and the acquisition of territory following the Mexican War. An insistent drive for the annexation of Cuba was cut short by the Civil War.
The Southerners were searching for a place in the sun where slavery could thrive for the benefit and influence of the slaveholding class. Their most impactful action in this pursuit was the annexation of Texas and the acquisition of land after the Mexican War. A strong push for the annexation of Cuba was halted by the Civil War.
Southern sentiment had supported the Louisiana Purchase of 1803 and the Florida Purchase of 1819. From Jefferson's time Southern statesmen had been advocating the purchase of Cuba. Filibustering expeditions were fitted out in Southern ports with Cuba as an objective; agitation was carried on, inside and outside of Congress; between 1850 and 1861 the acquisition of Cuba was the question of the day. It was an issue in the Campaign of 1853. In 1854 the American ministers to London, France and Madrid met at the direction of the State Department and drew up a document (the "Ostend Manifesto") dealing with the future of Cuba. McMaster summarizes the Manifesto in these words: "The United States ought to buy Cuba because of its nearness to our coast; because it belonged naturally to that great group of states of which[Pg 61] the Union was the providential nursery; because it commanded the mouth of the Mississippi whose immense and annually growing trade must seek that way to the ocean, and because the Union could never enjoy repose, could never be secure, till Cuba was within its boundaries." (Vol. viii, pp. 185-6.) If Spain refused to sell Cuba it was suggested that the United States should take it.
Southern sentiment had backed the Louisiana Purchase of 1803 and the Florida Purchase of 1819. Since Jefferson's era, Southern leaders had been pushing for the purchase of Cuba. Filibustering expeditions were launched from Southern ports with Cuba as the target; there was ongoing agitation, both inside and outside Congress; between 1850 and 1861, acquiring Cuba was the hot topic of the day. It was a key issue in the Campaign of 1853. In 1854, American ministers to London, France, and Madrid met on the State Department’s orders and drafted a document (the "Ostend Manifesto") regarding Cuba's future. McMaster summarizes the Manifesto this way: "The United States ought to buy Cuba because of its proximity to our coast; because it naturally belonged to that great group of states of which[Pg 61] the Union was the providential nursery; because it controlled the mouth of the Mississippi, whose vast and growing trade must find its way to the ocean, and because the Union could never find peace, could never be secure, until Cuba was within its borders." (Vol. viii, pp. 185-6.) If Spain refused to sell Cuba, it was suggested that the United States should simply take it.
The Ostend Manifesto was rejected by the State Department, but it was a good picture of the imperialistic sentiment at that time abroad among certain elements in the United States.
The Ostend Manifesto was turned down by the State Department, but it accurately reflected the imperialistic feelings that some groups in the United States held toward foreign affairs at that time.
The Cuban issue featured in the Lincoln-Douglas Debates in 1858. It was hotly discussed by Congress in 1859. Only twenty years had passed since the United States, by force of arms, had taken from Mexico territory that she coveted. Now it was proposed to appropriate territory belonging to Spain.
The Cuban issue was a hot topic in the Lincoln-Douglas Debates in 1858. It was passionately discussed by Congress in 1859. Just twenty years earlier, the United States had taken land from Mexico by force that it desired. Now, there was a proposal to seize territory belonging to Spain.
The outbreak of hostilities deferred the project, and when the Civil War was over, the slave power was shattered. From that time forward national policy was guided by the leaders of the new industrial North.
The outbreak of hostilities delayed the project, and when the Civil War was over, the power of slavery was destroyed. From that point on, national policy was directed by the leaders of the new industrial North.
The process of this change was fearfully wasteful. The shifting of power from the old régime to the new cost more lives and a greater expenditure of wealth than all of the wars of conquest that had been fought during the preceding half century.
The process of this change was incredibly wasteful. The transfer of power from the old regime to the new cost more lives and spent more wealth than all the wars of conquest fought in the previous fifty years.
The change was complete. The slaves were liberated by Presidential Proclamation. The Southern form of civilization—patriarchal and feudal—disappeared, and upon its ruins—rapidly in the West; slowly in the South—there arose the new structure of an industrial civilization.
The change was complete. The slaves were freed by Presidential Proclamation. The Southern way of life—patriarchal and feudal—vanished, and on its ruins—quickly in the West; slowly in the South—there emerged the new framework of an industrial society.
The new civilization had no need to look outward for economic advantage. Forest tracts, mineral deposits and fertile land afforded ample opportunity at home. It was three thousand miles to the Pacific and at the end of the journey there was gold! The new civilization therefore turned its energies to the problem of subduing the [Pg 62]continent and of establishing the machinery necessary to provide for its vastly increasing needs. A small part of the capital required for this purpose came from abroad. Most of it was supplied at home. But the events involved in opening up the territory west of the Rockies, of spanning the country with steel, and providing outlets for the products of the developing industries were so momentous that even the most ambitious might fulfill his dreams of conquest without setting foot on foreign soil. Territorial aggrandizement was forgotten, and men turned with a will to the organization of the East and the exploration and development of the West.
The new civilization didn’t need to look outside for economic gain. Forests, mineral deposits, and fertile land provided plenty of opportunities at home. It was three thousand miles to the Pacific, and at the end of that journey, there was gold! So, the new civilization focused its efforts on conquering the [Pg 62] continent and establishing the structures needed to meet its rapidly growing needs. A small portion of the capital needed for this came from abroad, but most was sourced locally. However, the tasks involved in opening up the territory west of the Rockies, connecting the country with railroads, and creating markets for the products of the growing industries were so significant that even the most ambitious could achieve their dreams of conquest without ever leaving their own country. Expanding territories was forgotten, and people eagerly turned to organizing the East and exploring and developing the West.
The leaders of the new order found time to take over Alaska (1868) with its 590,884 square miles. The move was diplomatic rather than economic, however, and it was many years before the huge wealth of Alaska was even suspected.
The leaders of the new order took the opportunity to take over Alaska (1868), which has 590,884 square miles. This decision was more diplomatic than economic, and it would be many years before people even realized the vast wealth of Alaska.
2. Hawaii
The new capitalist interests began to feel the need of additional territory toward the end of the nineteenth century. The desirable resources of the United States were largely in private hands and most of the available free land had been pre-empted. Beside that, there were certain interests, like sugar and tobacco, that were looking with longing eyes toward the tempting soil and climate of Hawaii, Porto Rico and Cuba.
The new capitalist interests started to feel the need for more territory toward the end of the nineteenth century. The valuable resources in the United States were mainly in private ownership, and most of the open land had already been claimed. Additionally, certain industries, like sugar and tobacco, were eyeing the attractive soil and climate of Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and Cuba.
When the South had advocated the annexation of Texas, its statesmen had been denounced as expansionists and imperialists. The same fate awaited the statesmen of the new order who were favoring the extension of United States territory to include some of the contiguous islands that offered special opportunities for certain powerful financial interests.
When the South pushed for the annexation of Texas, its leaders were criticized as expansionists and imperialists. The same criticism was directed at the leaders of the new order who supported expanding United States territory to include some nearby islands that presented unique opportunities for certain influential financial interests.
The struggle began over the annexation of Hawaii. After numerous attempts to annex Hawaii to the United States a revolution was finally consummated in Honolulu[Pg 63] in 1893. At that time, under treaty provisions, the neutrality of Hawaii was guaranteed by the United States. Likewise, "of the capital invested in the islands, two-thirds is owned by Americans." This statement is made in "Address by the Hawaiian Branches of the Sons of the American Revolution, the Sons of Veterans, and the Grand Army of the Republic to their compatriots in America Concerning the Annexation of Hawaii." (1897.) These advocates of annexation state in the same address that: "The revolution (of 1893) was not the work of filibusterers and adventurers, but of the most conservative and law-abiding citizens, of the principal tax-payers, the leaders of industrial enterprises, etc." The purpose behind the revolution seemed clear. Certain business men who had sugar and other products to sell in the United States, believed that they would gain, financially, by annexation. They engineered the revolution of 1893 and they were actively engaged in the agitation for annexation that lasted until the treaty of annexation was confirmed by the United States in 1898. The matter was debated at length on the floor of the United States Senate, and an investigation revealed the essential facts of the case.
The fight started over the annexation of Hawaii. After several attempts to make Hawaii a part of the United States, a revolution finally took place in Honolulu[Pg 63] in 1893. At that time, the United States guaranteed Hawaii's neutrality under treaty provisions. Also, "two-thirds of the capital invested in the islands is owned by Americans." This is stated in the "Address by the Hawaiian Branches of the Sons of the American Revolution, the Sons of Veterans, and the Grand Army of the Republic to their compatriots in America Concerning the Annexation of Hawaii." (1897.) In the same address, these supporters of annexation argue that: "The revolution (of 1893) was not caused by filibusters and adventurers, but by the most conservative and law-abiding citizens, the main taxpayers, the leaders of industrial businesses, etc." The motivation for the revolution seemed obvious. Some businessmen with sugar and other products to sell in the United States believed they would benefit financially from annexation. They orchestrated the 1893 revolution and were actively involved in the push for annexation until the treaty of annexation was approved by the United States in 1898. The issue was thoroughly debated in the United States Senate, and an investigation uncovered the key facts of the situation.
The immediate cause of the revolution in 1893 was friction over the Hawaiian Constitution. After some agitation, a "Committee of Safety" was organized for the protection of life and property on the islands. Certain members of the Hawaiian government were in favor of declaring martial law, and dealing summarily with the conspirators. The Queen seems to have hesitated at such a course because of the probable complications with the government of the United States.
The immediate cause of the revolution in 1893 was tension regarding the Hawaiian Constitution. After some unrest, a "Committee of Safety" was formed to protect lives and property on the islands. Some members of the Hawaiian government supported declaring martial law and taking swift action against the conspirators. The Queen appears to have been reluctant to pursue that route due to potential complications with the United States government.
The U. S. S. Boston, sent at the request of United States Minister Stevens to protect American life and property in the Islands, was lying in the harbor of Honolulu. After some negotiations between the "Committee of Safety" and Minister Stevens, the latter requested the Commander of the Boston to land a number of marines. This was done on the afternoon of January 16, 1893. Immediately the[Pg 64] Governor of the Island of Oahu and the Minister of Foreign Affairs addressed official communications to the United States Minister, protesting against the landing of troops "without permission from the proper authorities." Minister Stevens replied, assuming full responsibility.
The U. S. S. Boston, dispatched at the request of United States Minister Stevens to safeguard American lives and property in the Islands, was anchored in the harbor of Honolulu. After some discussions between the "Committee of Safety" and Minister Stevens, the latter asked the Commander of the Boston to deploy a number of marines. This took place on the afternoon of January 16, 1893. Immediately, the[Pg 64] Governor of the Island of Oahu and the Minister of Foreign Affairs sent official communications to the United States Minister, protesting against the deployment of troops "without permission from the proper authorities." Minister Stevens responded, taking full responsibility.
On the day following the landing of the marines, the Committee of Safety, under the chairmanship of Judge Dole, who had resigned as Justice of the Supreme Court of Hawaii in order to accept the Chairmanship of the Committee, proceeded to the government building, and there, under cover of the guns of the United States Marines, who were drawn up for the purpose of protecting the Committee against possible attack, a proclamation was read, declaring the abrogation of the Hawaiian monarchy, and the establishment of a provisional government "to exist until terms of union with the United States have been negotiated and agreed upon." Within an hour after the reading of this proclamation, and while the Queen and her government were still in authority, and in possession of the Palace, the Barracks, and the Police Station, the United States Minister gave the Provisional Government his recognition.
On the day after the Marines landed, the Committee of Safety, led by Judge Dole, who had stepped down as a Justice of the Supreme Court of Hawaii to take the Chair of the Committee, went to the government building. There, under the protection of the United States Marines, who were stationed to guard the Committee against any potential attacks, a proclamation was read. This proclamation announced the end of the Hawaiian monarchy and the formation of a provisional government "to exist until terms of union with the United States have been negotiated and agreed upon." Within an hour after this proclamation was read, while the Queen and her government were still in power and controlled the Palace, the Barracks, and the Police Station, the United States Minister recognized the Provisional Government.
The Queen, who had 500 soldiers in the Barracks, was inclined to fight, but on the advice of her counselors, she yielded "to the superior force of the United States of America" until the facts could be presented at Washington, and the wrong righted.
The Queen, who had 500 soldiers in the Barracks, was ready to fight, but on her advisors' suggestion, she submitted "to the greater power of the United States of America" until the situation could be presented in Washington, and the injustice corrected.
Two weeks later, on the first of February, Minister Stevens issued a proclamation declaring a protectorate over the islands. This action was later repudiated by the authorities at Washington, but on February 15, President Harrison submitted a treaty of annexation to the Senate. The treaty failed of passage, and President Cleveland, as one of his first official acts, ordered a complete investigation of the whole affair.
Two weeks later, on February 1, Minister Stevens announced a declaration of a protectorate over the islands. This move was later rejected by officials in Washington, but on February 15, President Harrison presented a treaty for annexation to the Senate. The treaty did not pass, and President Cleveland, as one of his first official actions, ordered a full investigation into the entire situation.
The Senate Committee on Foreign Relations submitted a report on the matter February 26, 1894. Four members[Pg 65] referred to the acts of Minister Stevens as "active, officious and unbecoming participation in the events which led to the revolution." All members of the committee agreed that his action in declaring a protectorate over the Islands was unjustified.
The Senate Committee on Foreign Relations submitted a report on the matter on February 26, 1894. Four members[Pg 65] referred to Minister Stevens's actions as "active, intrusive, and inappropriate involvement in the events that led to the revolution." All committee members agreed that his declaration of a protectorate over the Islands was unjustified.
The same kind of a fight that developed over the annexation of Texas now took place over the annexation of Hawaii. A group of senators, of whom Senator R. F. Pettigrew was the most conspicuous figure, succeeded in preventing the ratification of the annexation treaty until July 7, 1898. Then, ten weeks after the declaration of the Spanish-American War, under the stress of the war-hysteria, Hawaii was annexed by a joint resolution of Congress.
The same kind of conflict that arose over the annexation of Texas happened again with the annexation of Hawaii. A group of senators, with Senator R. F. Pettigrew being the most noticeable, managed to delay the ratification of the annexation treaty until July 7, 1898. Then, ten weeks after the declaration of the Spanish-American War, fueled by wartime hysteria, Hawaii was annexed by a joint resolution of Congress.
The Annexation of Hawaii marks a turning point in the history of the United States. For the first time, the American people secured possession of territory lying outside of the mainland of North America. For the first time the United States acquired territory lying within the tropics. The annexation of Hawaii was the first imperialistic act after the annexation of Texas, more than fifty years before. It was the first imperialistic act since the capitalists of the North had succeeded the slave-owners of the South as the masters of American public life.
The annexation of Hawaii represents a significant moment in U.S. history. It was the first time the American people officially gained control of land beyond the mainland of North America. For the first time, the United States acquired territory located in the tropics. The annexation of Hawaii was the first act of imperialism after Texas was annexed more than fifty years earlier. It was the first act of imperialism since Northern capitalists had taken over from Southern slave owners as the dominant force in American public life.
3. The Spanish-American War
The real test of the imperial intentions of the United States came with the Spanish-American War. An old, shattered world empire (Spain) held Porto Rico, Cuba and the Philippines. Porto Rico and Cuba were of peculiar value to the sugar and tobacco interests of the United States. They were close to the mainland, they were enormously productive and, furthermore, Cuba contained important deposits of iron ore.
The true measure of America's imperial ambitions emerged during the Spanish-American War. An old, crumbling world empire (Spain) controlled Puerto Rico, Cuba, and the Philippines. Puerto Rico and Cuba were especially valuable to the U.S. sugar and tobacco industries. They were near the mainland, highly productive, and Cuba also had significant iron ore deposits.
Spain had only a feeble grip on her possessions. For years the natives of Cuba and of the Philippines had been[Pg 66] in revolt against the Spanish power. At times the revolt was covert. Again it blazed in the open.
Spain had a weak hold on its territories. For years, the people of Cuba and the Philippines had been[Pg 66] in rebellion against Spanish authority. Sometimes the uprising was hidden, while at other times it erupted openly.
The situation in Cuba was rendered particularly critical because of the methods used by the Spanish authorities in dealing with the rebellious natives. The Spaniards were simply doing what any empire does to suppress rebellion and enforce obedience, but the brutalities of imperialism, as practiced in Cuba by the Spaniards, gave the American interventionists their opportunity. Day after day the newspapers carried front page stories of Spanish atrocities in Cuba. Day after day the ground was prepared for open intervention in the interests of the oppressed Cubans. There was more than grim humor in the instructions which a great newspaper publisher is reported to have sent his cartoonist in Cuba,—"You provide the pictures; we'll furnish the war."
The situation in Cuba became especially critical because of the way the Spanish authorities handled the rebellious locals. The Spaniards were just doing what any empire does to quash rebellion and maintain control, but the harsh realities of imperialism, as demonstrated by the Spaniards in Cuba, gave American interventionists their chance. Every day, newspapers featured headlines about Spanish atrocities in Cuba. Every day, the groundwork was laid for open intervention in support of the oppressed Cubans. There was more than just dark humor in the instructions that a prominent newspaper publisher allegedly sent to his cartoonist in Cuba: "You provide the pictures; we'll supply the war."
The conflict was precipitated by the blowing up of the United States battleship Maine as she lay in the harbor of Havana (February 15, 1898). It has not been settled to this day whether the Maine was blown up from without or within. At the time it was assumed that the ship was blown up by the Spanish, although "there was no evidence whatever that any one connected with the exercise of Spanish authority in Cuba had had so much as guilty knowledge of the plans made to destroy the Maine" (p. 270), and although "toward the last it had begun to look as if the Spanish Government were ready, rather than let the war feeling in the United States put things beyond all possibility of a peaceful solution, to make very substantial concessions to the Cuban insurgents and bring the troubles of the Island to an end" (p. 273-4).[35]
The conflict started when the United States battleship Maine exploded while it was in the Havana harbor (February 15, 1898). To this day, it remains unclear whether the Maine was destroyed from the outside or the inside. At the time, people believed the Spanish were responsible for the explosion, even though "there was no evidence whatever that anyone connected with the exercise of Spanish authority in Cuba had had so much as guilty knowledge of the plans made to destroy the Maine" (p. 270), and although "toward the last it had begun to look as if the Spanish Government were ready, rather than let the war feeling in the United States put things beyond all possibility of a peaceful solution, to make very substantial concessions to the Cuban insurgents and bring the troubles of the Island to an end" (p. 273-4).[35]
Congress, in a joint resolution passed April 20, 1898, declared that "the people of the Island of Cuba are, and of right ought to be, free and independent.... The United States hereby disclaims any intention to exercise sovereignty, jurisdiction or control over said island except for[Pg 67] the pacification thereof, and asserts its determination, when that is accomplished, to leave the government and control of the island to its people."
Congress, in a joint resolution passed on April 20, 1898, declared that "the people of the Island of Cuba are, and rightfully should be, free and independent.... The United States disclaims any intention to exercise sovereignty, jurisdiction, or control over the island except for[Pg 67] its pacification, and asserts its commitment, once that is achieved, to leave the governance and control of the island to its people."
The war itself was of no great moment. There was little fighting on land, and the naval battles resulted in overwhelming victories for the American Navy. The treaty, ratified February 6, 1899, provided that Spain should cede to the United States Guam, Porto Rico, Cuba and the Philippines, and that the United States should pay to Spain twenty millions of dollars. As in the case of the Mexican War, the United States took possession of the territory and then paid a bonus for a clear title.
The war itself wasn’t very significant. There was minimal fighting on land, and the naval battles ended in major victories for the American Navy. The treaty, ratified on February 6, 1899, stated that Spain would give the United States Guam, Puerto Rico, Cuba, and the Philippines, and that the United States would pay Spain twenty million dollars. Similar to the Mexican War, the United States claimed the territory and then paid a bonus for a clear title.
The losses in the war were very small. The total number of men who were killed in action and who died of wounds was 289; while 3,949 died of accidents and disease. ("Historical Register," Vol. 2, p. 187.) The cost of the war was comparatively slight. Hostilities lasted from April 21, 1898 to August 12, 1898. The entire military and naval expense for the year 1898 was $443,368,000; for the year 1899, $605,071,000. Again the need for a larger place in the sun had been felt by the people of the United States and again the United States had won immense riches with a tiny outlay in men and money.
The losses in the war were minimal. A total of 289 men were killed in action or died from wounds, while 3,949 died from accidents and disease. ("Historical Register," Vol. 2, p. 187.) The cost of the war was relatively low. Fighting lasted from April 21, 1898, to August 12, 1898. The total military and naval expense for 1898 was $443,368,000, and for 1899, it was $605,071,000. Once again, the people of the United States felt the need for a bigger role on the global stage, and once again, the United States gained vast wealth with a small investment of men and money.
Now came the real issue,—What should the United States do with the booty?
Now came the real question—What should the United States do with the loot?
There were many who held that the United States was bound to set the peoples of the conquered territory free. To be sure the specific pledge contained in the joint resolution of April 20, 1898, applied to Cuba alone, but, it was argued, since the people of the Philippines had also been fighting for liberty, and since they had come so near to winning their independence from the Spaniards, they were likewise entitled to it.
There were many who believed that the United States was obligated to free the people of the conquered territory. While the specific promise in the joint resolution of April 20, 1898, applied only to Cuba, it was argued that since the people of the Philippines had also been fighting for their freedom and had nearly achieved independence from the Spaniards, they deserved it too.
On the other hand, the advocates of annexation insisted that it was the duty of the United States to accept the responsibilities (the "white man's burden") that the acquisition of these islands involved.
On the other hand, supporters of annexation argued that it was the responsibility of the United States to take on the duties (the "white man's burden") that came with acquiring these islands.
As President McKinley put it:—"The Philippines, like Cuba and Porto Rico, were entrusted to our hands by the providence of God." (President McKinley, Boston, February 16, 1899.) How was the country to avoid such a duty?
As President McKinley said:—"The Philippines, like Cuba and Puerto Rico, were entrusted to us by the providence of God." (President McKinley, Boston, February 16, 1899.) How could the country avoid such a responsibility?
Thus was the issue drawn between the "imperialists" and the "anti-imperialists."
Thus was the issue defined between the "imperialists" and the "anti-imperialists."
The imperialists had the machinery of government, the newspapers, and the prestige of a victorious and very popular war behind them. The anti-imperialists had half a century of unbroken tradition; the accepted principles of self-government; the sayings of men who had organized the Revolution of 1776; written the Declaration of Independence; held exalted offices and piloted the nation through the Civil War.
The imperialists had the government machinery, the newspapers, and the credibility of a victorious and very popular war supporting them. The anti-imperialists had fifty years of continuous tradition; the widely accepted principles of self-government; the words of those who organized the Revolution of 1776; wrote the Declaration of Independence; held high offices and guided the nation through the Civil War.
The imperialists used their inside position. The anti-imperialists appealed to public opinion. They organized a league "to aid in holding the United States true to the principles of the Declaration of Independence. It seeks the preservation of the rights of the people as guaranteed to them by the Constitution. Its members hold self-government to be fundamental, and good government to be but incidental. It is its purpose to oppose by all proper means the extension of the sovereignty of the United States over subject peoples. It will contribute to the defeat of any candidate or party that stands for the forcible subjugation of any people." (From the declaration of principle printed on the literature in 1899 and 1900.) Anti-imperialist conferences were held in New York, Philadelphia, Chicago, Indianapolis, Boston and other large cities. The League claimed to have half a million members. An extensive pamphlet literature was published, and every effort was made to arouse the people of the country to the importance of the decision that lay before them.
The imperialists leveraged their insider status. The anti-imperialists turned to public opinion. They formed a league "to help keep the United States true to the principles of the Declaration of Independence. It aims to preserve the rights of the people as guaranteed by the Constitution. Its members believe self-government is essential, and good governance is merely a byproduct. Its goal is to oppose, by all appropriate means, the expansion of U.S. sovereignty over other peoples. It will work to defeat any candidate or party that supports the forced subjugation of any group." (From the declaration of principle printed on the literature in 1899 and 1900.) Anti-imperialist conferences took place in New York, Philadelphia, Chicago, Indianapolis, Boston, and other major cities. The League claimed to have half a million members. They published extensive pamphlets, and made every effort to raise awareness of the critical decision that lay ahead for the nation.
The imperialists said a great deal less than their opponents, but they were more effective in their efforts. The President had said, in his message to Congress (April 1,[Pg 69] 1898), "I speak not of forcible annexation, for that cannot be thought of. That, by our code of morals, would be criminal aggression." The phrase was seized eagerly by those who were opposing the annexation of the Spanish possessions. After the war with Spain had begun, the President changed front on the ground that destiny had placed a responsibility upon the American people that they could not shirk. Taking this view of the situation, the President had only one course open to him—to insist upon the annexation of the Philippines, Porto Rico and Guam. This was the course that was followed, and on April 11, 1899, these territories were officially incorporated into the United States.
The imperialists said a lot less than their opponents, but they were more effective in their efforts. The President stated in his message to Congress (April 1,[Pg 69] 1898), "I'm not talking about forcible annexation, as that’s out of the question. That would be seen as criminal aggression according to our moral standards." This phrase was eagerly embraced by those opposing the annexation of the Spanish territories. After the war with Spain began, the President changed his stance, arguing that destiny had placed a responsibility on the American people that they could not ignore. With this perspective, the President had only one option—to push for the annexation of the Philippines, Puerto Rico, and Guam. This was the path that was taken, and on April 11, 1899, these territories were officially added to the United States.
Senator Hoar, in a speech on January 9, 1899, put the issue squarely. He described it as "a greater danger than we have encountered since the Pilgrims landed at Plymouth—the danger that we are to be transformed from a republic, founded on the Declaration of Independence, guided by the counsels of Washington, into a vulgar, commonplace empire, founded upon physical force."
Senator Hoar, in a speech on January 9, 1899, clearly addressed the issue. He described it as "a greater danger than we have faced since the Pilgrims landed at Plymouth—the danger that we may be changed from a republic, based on the Declaration of Independence and guided by the advice of Washington, into a cheap, typical empire based on physical force."
Cuba remained to be disposed of. With the specific guarantee of independence contained in the joint resolution passed at the outbreak of the war, it seemed impossible to do otherwise than to give the Cubans self-government. Many influential men lamented the necessity, but it was generally conceded. But how much independence should Cuba have? That question was answered by the passage of the Cuban Treaty with the "Platt Amendment" attached. Under the treaty as ratified the United States does exercise "sovereignty, jurisdiction and control" over the island.
Cuba still needed to be addressed. With the explicit guarantee of independence included in the joint resolution passed at the start of the war, it seemed unavoidable to grant Cubans self-government. Many influential figures expressed regret over this necessity, but it was widely accepted. However, the question of how much independence Cuba should have remained. This was resolved with the passage of the Cuban Treaty, which included the "Platt Amendment." Under the ratified treaty, the United States exercises "sovereignty, jurisdiction and control" over the island.
4. The Philippines
The territory acquired from Spain was now, in theory, disposed of. Practically, the Philippines remained as a source of difficulty and even of political danger.
The territory gained from Spain was now, theoretically, settled. In reality, the Philippines continued to be a source of trouble and even political risk.
The people of Cuba were, apparently, satisfied. The Porto Ricans had accepted the authority of the United[Pg 70] States without question. But the Filipinos were not content. If the Cubans were to have self-government, why not they?
The people of Cuba seemed, seemingly, satisfied. The Puerto Ricans had accepted the authority of the United[Pg 70] States without doubt. But the Filipinos were not happy. If the Cubans were allowed self-government, why couldn't they?
The situation was complicated by the peculiar relations existing between the Filipinos and the United States Government. Immediately after the declaration of war with Spain the United States Consul-General at Singapore had cabled to Admiral Dewey at Hong Kong that Aguinaldo, leader of the insurgent forces in the Philippines, was then at Singapore, and was ready to go to Hong Kong. Commodore Dewey cabled back asking Aguinaldo to come at once to Hong Kong. Aguinaldo left Singapore on April 26, 1898, and, with seventeen other revolutionary Filipino chiefs, was taken from Hong Kong to Manila in the United States naval vessel McCulloch. Upon his arrival in Manila, he at once took charge of the insurgents.
The situation was complicated by the unique relationship between the Filipinos and the United States Government. Right after the war with Spain was declared, the U.S. Consul-General in Singapore messaged Admiral Dewey in Hong Kong that Aguinaldo, the leader of the insurgent forces in the Philippines, was in Singapore and ready to go to Hong Kong. Commodore Dewey responded by asking Aguinaldo to come to Hong Kong immediately. Aguinaldo left Singapore on April 26, 1898, and, along with seventeen other revolutionary Filipino leaders, was transported from Hong Kong to Manila on the U.S. naval vessel McCulloch. Upon arriving in Manila, he immediately took charge of the insurgents.
For three hundred years the inhabitants of the Philippines had been engaged in almost incessant warfare with the Spanish authorities. In the spring of 1898 they were in a fair way to win their independence. They had a large number of men under arms—from 20,000 to 30,000; they had fought the Spanish garrisons to a stand-still, and were in practical control of the situation.
For three hundred years, the people of the Philippines had been involved in almost nonstop conflict with the Spanish authorities. By spring 1898, they were close to achieving their independence. They had a considerable force of soldiers—between 20,000 and 30,000; they had brought the Spanish garrisons to a halt and were effectively in control of the situation.
Aguinaldo was furnished with 4,000 or 5,000 stands of arms by the American officials, he took additional arms from the Spaniards and he and his people coöperated actively with the Americans in driving the Spanish out of Luzon. The Filipino army captured Iloilo, the second largest city in the Philippines, without the assistance of the Americans. On the day of the surrender of Manila, 15½ miles of the surrounding line was occupied by the Filipinos and 600 yards by the American troops. Throughout the early summer, the relations between the Filipinos and the Americans continued to be friendly. General Anderson, in command of the American Army, wrote a letter to the commander of the Filipinos (July 4, 1898) in which he said,—"I desire to have the most amicable relations with you and to have you and your people coöperate with[Pg 71] us in military operations against the Spanish forces." During the summer the American officers called upon the Filipinos for supplies and information and accepted their coöperation. Aguinaldo, on his part, treated the Americans as deliverers, and in his proclamations referred to them as "liberators" and "redeemers."
Aguinaldo was provided with 4,000 to 5,000 weapons by American officials, and he seized more weapons from the Spaniards. He and his troops actively worked with the Americans to drive the Spanish out of Luzon. The Filipino army captured Iloilo, the second-largest city in the Philippines, without any help from the Americans. On the day Manila surrendered, the Filipinos occupied 15½ miles of the surrounding area while American troops held just 600 yards. Throughout early summer, the relationship between the Filipinos and Americans remained friendly. General Anderson, who was in charge of the American Army, wrote a letter to the Filipino commander on July 4, 1898, stating, "I wish to maintain the most friendly relations with you and to have you and your people work with us in military operations against the Spanish forces." During the summer, American officers asked the Filipinos for supplies and information, accepting their cooperation. Aguinaldo, for his part, regarded the Americans as deliverers and referred to them in his proclamations as "liberators" and "redeemers."
The Filipinos, at the earliest possible moment, organized a government. On June 18 a republic was proclaimed; on the 23rd the cabinet was announced; on the 27th a decree was published providing for elections, and on August 6th an address was issued to foreign governments, announcing that the revolutionary government was in operation, and was in control of fifteen provinces.
The Filipinos quickly set up a government. On June 18, a republic was declared; on the 23rd, the cabinet was introduced; on the 27th, a decree was released to arrange elections, and on August 6, a message was sent to foreign governments, stating that the revolutionary government was up and running and in charge of fifteen provinces.
The real intent of the Americans was foreshadowed in the instructions handed by President McKinley to General Wesley Merritt on May 19, 1898. General Merritt was directed to inform the Filipinos that "we come not to make war upon the people of the Philippines, nor upon any party or faction among them, but to protect them in their homes, in their employments, and in their personal and religious rights. Any persons who, either by active aid or by honest submission, coöperate with the United States in its effort to give effect to this beneficent purpose, will receive the reward of its support and protection."
The true intention of the Americans was hinted at in the instructions given by President McKinley to General Wesley Merritt on May 19, 1898. General Merritt was instructed to let the Filipinos know that "we come not to wage war on the people of the Philippines, nor on any party or faction among them, but to protect them in their homes, their jobs, and their personal and religious rights. Anyone who, through active help or honest cooperation, supports the United States in its effort to fulfill this noble goal will receive the benefits of its support and protection."
The Filipinos sent a delegation to Paris to lay their claims for independence before the Peace Commission. Meeting with no success, they visited Washington, with no different result. They were not to be free!
The Filipinos sent a delegation to Paris to present their claims for independence to the Peace Commission. After having no success, they went to Washington, but the outcome was the same. They were not going to be free!
On September 8, 1898, General Otis, commander of the American forces in the Philippines, notified Aguinaldo that unless he withdrew his forces from Manila and its suburbs by the 15th "I shall be obliged to resort to forcible action." On January 5, 1899, by Presidential Proclamation, McKinley ordered that "The Military Government heretofore maintained by the United States in the city, harbor, and bay of Manila is to be extended with all possible dispatch to the whole of the ceded territory." On February[Pg 72] 4, 1899, General Otis reported "Firing upon the Filipinos and the killing of one of them by the Americans, leading to return fire." (Report up to April 6, 1899.) Then followed the Philippine War during which 1,037 Americans were killed in action or died of wounds; 2,818 were wounded, and 2,748 died of disease. ("Historical Register," Vol. II, p. 293.)
On September 8, 1898, General Otis, the commander of the American forces in the Philippines, informed Aguinaldo that unless he withdrew his troops from Manila and the surrounding areas by the 15th, "I will have to take strong action." On January 5, 1899, by Presidential Proclamation, McKinley ordered that "The Military Government previously maintained by the United States in the city, harbor, and bay of Manila is to be quickly extended to the entire ceded territory." On February[Pg 72] 4, 1899, General Otis reported "Firing on the Filipinos and the killing of one of them by the Americans, leading to return fire." (Report up to April 6, 1899.) This was followed by the Philippine War, during which 1,037 Americans were killed in action or died from wounds; 2,818 were injured, and 2,748 died from disease. ("Historical Register," Vol. II, p. 293.)
The Philippines were conquered twice—once in a contest with Spain (in coöperation with the Filipinos, who regarded themselves as our allies), and once in a contest with the Filipinos, the native inhabitants, who were made subjects of the American Empire by this conquest.[36]
The Philippines were conquered twice—first during a battle with Spain (alongside the Filipinos, who saw themselves as our allies), and second during a conflict with the Filipinos, the native inhabitants, who became subjects of the American Empire due to this conquest.[36]
5. Imperialism Accepted
The Philippine War was the last political episode in the life of the American Republic. From February 4, 1899, the United States accepted the political status of an Empire. Hawaii had been annexed at the behest of the Hawaiian Government; Porto Rico had been occupied as a part of the war strategy and without any protest from the Porto Ricans. The Philippines were taken against the determined opposition of the natives, who continued the struggle for independence during three bitter years.
The Philippine War was the last major political event in the history of the American Republic. Starting on February 4, 1899, the United States embraced the role of an Empire. Hawaii was annexed at the request of its government; Puerto Rico was occupied as part of the war strategy, and there was no objection from the Puerto Ricans. The Philippines were taken despite strong resistance from the locals, who fought for their independence during three difficult years.
The Filipinos were fighting for independence—fighting to drive invaders from their soil. The United States authorities had no status in the Philippines other than that of military conquerors.
The Filipinos were fighting for independence—fighting to push invaders off their land. The United States authorities had no standing in the Philippines other than that of military conquerors.
Continental North America was occupied by the whites after a long struggle with the Indian tribes. This territory was "conquered"—but it was contiguous—it formed a part of a geographic unity. The Philippines were separated from San Francisco by 8,000 miles of water; geographically they were a part of Asia. They were tropical in [Pg 73]character, and were inhabited by tribes having nothing in common with the American people except their common humanity. Nevertheless, despite non-contiguity; despite distance; despite dissimilarity in languages and customs, the soldiers of the United States conquered the Filipinos and the United States Government took control of the islands, acting in the same way that any other empire, under like circumstances, unquestionably would have acted.
Continental North America was settled by white people after a long battle with Native American tribes. This land was "conquered"—but it was connected, forming part of a geographic whole. The Philippines were separated from San Francisco by 8,000 miles of water; geographically, they were part of Asia. They had a tropical climate and were home to tribes that had nothing in common with the American people aside from our shared humanity. Still, despite being non-contiguous, despite the distance, and despite the differences in languages and customs, U.S. soldiers defeated the Filipinos, and the U.S. government took control of the islands, acting just like any other empire would have in similar circumstances.
There was no strategic reason that demanded the Philippines unless the United States desired to have an operating base near to the vast resources and the developing markets of China. As a vantage point from which to wage commercial and military aggression in the Far East, the Philippines may possess certain advantages. There is no other excuse for their conquest and retention by the United States save the economic excuse of advantages to be gained from the possession of the islands themselves.
There was no strategic reason for the United States to want the Philippines unless it aimed to have a base close to the vast resources and emerging markets of China. The Philippines could provide advantages as a position to launch commercial and military actions in the Far East. Other than the economic benefits of controlling the islands themselves, there’s no other justification for the U.S. taking over and holding onto them.
The end of the nineteenth century saw the end of the Republic about which men like Jefferson and Lincoln wrote and dreamed. The New Century marked the opening of a new epoch—the beginning of world dominion for the United States.
The end of the nineteenth century marked the conclusion of the Republic that figures like Jefferson and Lincoln wrote about and envisioned. The New Century signaled the start of a new era—the beginning of global dominance for the United States.
FOOTNOTES:
VII. THE STRUGGLE FOR WEALTH AND POWER
1. Economic Foundations
The people of the United States, through their contests with the American Indians, the Mexicans and the Filipinos, have established that "supreme and extensive political domination" which is one of the chief characteristics of empire.
The people of the United States, through their conflicts with American Indians, Mexicans, and Filipinos, have established that "supreme and extensive political domination," which is one of the main features of an empire.
But the American Empire does not rest upon a political basis. Only the most superficial portions of its superstructure are political in character. Imperialism in the United States, as in every other modern country, is built not upon politics, but upon industry.
But the American Empire isn’t built on a political foundation. Only the most superficial parts of its structure are political in nature. Like in every other modern country, American imperialism is based not on politics, but on industry.
The struggle between empires has shifted, in recent years, from the political and the military to the economic field. The old imperialism was based on military conquest and political domination. The new "financial" imperialism is based on economic opportunities and advantages. Under this new régime, territorial domination is subordinated to business profit.
The battle between empires has recently shifted from political and military arenas to the economic sphere. Traditional imperialism relied on military conquests and political control. The new "financial" imperialism focuses on economic opportunities and benefits. In this new system, territorial control takes a backseat to business profits.
While American public officials were engaged in the routine task of extending the political boundaries of the United States, the foundations of imperial strength were being laid by the masters of industrial life—the traders, manufacturers, bankers, the organizers of trusts and of industrial combinations. These owners and directors of the nation's wealth have been the real builders of the American Empire.
While American public officials were busy with the usual work of expanding the political borders of the United States, the groundwork for imperial power was being established by the leaders of industry—the traders, manufacturers, bankers, and the creators of trusts and industrial alliances. These owners and executives of the nation’s wealth have been the true architects of the American Empire.
As the United States has developed, the economic motives have come more and more to the surface, until no modern nation—not England herself—has such a record in the search for material possessions. The pursuit of wealth, in the United States, has been carried forward ruthlessly; brutally. "Anything to win" has been the motto. Man[Pg 75] against man, and group against group, they have struggled for gain,—first, in order to "get ahead;" then to accumulate the comforts and luxuries, and last of all, to possess the immense power that goes with the control of modern wealth.
As the United States has grown, the focus on economic motives has become increasingly prominent, to the point where no other modern nation—not even England—has such a record in the quest for material wealth. The pursuit of riches in the United States has been relentless and harsh. "Anything to win" has been the guiding principle. Individuals against individuals, and groups against groups, they have battled for profit—initially to "get ahead," then to gather comforts and luxuries, and ultimately to acquire the immense power that comes with controlling modern wealth.
The early history of the country presaged anything but this. The colonists were seeking to escape tyranny, to establish justice and to inaugurate liberty. Their promises were prophetic. Their early deeds put the world in their debt. Forward looking people everywhere thrilled at the mention of the name "America." Then came the discovery of the fabulous wealth of the new country; the pressure of the growing stream of immigrants; the heaping up of riches; the rapacious search after more! more! the desertion of the dearest principles of America's early promise, and the transcribing of another story of "economic determinism."
The early history of the country suggested anything but this. The colonists were trying to escape tyranny, create justice, and start liberty. Their promises were prophetic. Their early actions put the world in their debt. Forward-thinking people everywhere felt excitement at the mention of the name "America." Then came the discovery of the incredible wealth of the new country; the pressure of a growing stream of immigrants; the accumulation of riches; the greedy quest for more and more; the abandonment of the core principles of America's early promise, and the rewriting of another story of "economic determinism."
Until very recent times the American people continued to talk of political affairs as though they were the matters of chief public concern. The recent growth and concentration of economic power have showed plainly, however, that America was destined to play her greatest rôle on the economic field. Capable men therefore ceased to go into politics and instead turned their energies into the whirl of business, where they received a training that made them capable of handling affairs of the greatest intricacy and magnitude.
Until very recently, Americans kept discussing political issues as if they were the most important public concerns. However, the recent rise and concentration of economic power have clearly shown that America was meant to focus more on the economy. As a result, capable individuals stopped pursuing politics and redirected their efforts into the fast-paced world of business, where they gained the skills necessary to manage highly complex and significant matters.
2. Every Man for Himself
The development of American industry, during the hundred years that began with the War of 1812, led inevitably to the unification of business control in the hands of a small group of wealth owners.
The growth of American industry, starting with the War of 1812 and continuing for a hundred years, inevitably resulted in the consolidation of business control in the hands of a small group of wealthy individuals.
"Every man for himself" was the principle that the theorists of the eighteenth century bequeathed to the industrial pioneers of the nineteenth. The philosophy of individualism fitted well with the temperament and experience of the English speaking peoples; the practice of [Pg 76]individualism under the formula "Every man for himself" seemed a divine ordination for the benefit of the new industry.
"Every person for themselves" was the principle that the thinkers of the eighteenth century passed on to the industrial innovators of the nineteenth. The philosophy of individualism aligned perfectly with the mindset and experiences of English-speaking people; the practice of [Pg 76]individualism under the slogan "Every person for themselves" appeared to be a divine mandate for the advantage of the new industry.
The eager American population adopted the slogan with enthusiasm. "Every man for himself" was the essence of their frontier lives; it was the breath of the wilderness.
The enthusiastic American population embraced the slogan with excitement. "Every person for themselves" was the heart of their frontier existence; it was the spirit of the wild.
But the idea failed in practice. Despite the assurances of its champions that individualism was necessary to preserve initiative and that progress was impossible without it, like many another principle—fine sounding in theory, it broke down in the application.
But the idea didn’t work in reality. Even though its supporters claimed that individualism was essential to maintain initiative and that progress couldn’t happen without it, like many other principles—great in theory, it fell apart when put into practice.
The first struggle that confronted the ambitious conqueror of the new world was the struggle with nature. Her stores were abundant, but they must be prepared for human use. Timber must be sawed; soil tilled; fish caught; coal mined; iron smelted; gold extracted. Rivers must be bridged; mountains spanned; lines of communication maintained. The continent was a vast storehouse of riches—potential riches. Before they could be made of actual use, however, the hand of man must transform them and transport them.
The first challenge faced by the ambitious conqueror of the new world was the challenge posed by nature. Resources were plentiful, but they needed to be made usable for people. Timber had to be sawed; soil needed to be cultivated; fish had to be caught; coal mined; iron processed; and gold extracted. Rivers needed to be crossed; mountains navigated; and communication lines established. The continent was a massive reservoir of wealth—latent wealth. However, before it could be utilized, human effort was necessary to change and move it.
These necessary industrial processes were impossible under the "every man for himself" formula. Here was a vast continent, with boundless opportunities for supplying the necessaries and comforts of life—provided men were willing to come together; divide up the work; specialize; and exchange products.
These essential industrial processes couldn't happen with the "every man for himself" mentality. Here was a huge continent, full of endless opportunities to provide the essentials and comforts of life—if people were willing to come together, share the workload, specialize, and trade goods.
Coöperation—alone—could conquer nature. The basis of this coöperation proved to be the machine. Its means was the system of production and transportation built upon the use of steam, electricity, gas, and labor saving appliances.
Cooperation—alone—could conquer nature. The foundation of this cooperation turned out to be the machine. Its method was the system of production and transportation based on the use of steam, electricity, gas, and labor-saving devices.
When the United States was discovered, the shuttle was thrown by hand; the hammer was wielded by human arm; the mill-stones were turned by wind and water; the boxes and bales were carried by pack-animals or in sailing vessels,—these processes of production and transportation were[Pg 77] conducted in practically the same way as in the time of Pharaoh or of Alexander the Great. A series of discoveries and inventions, made in England between 1735 and 1784, substituted the machine for the tool; the power of steam for the power of wind, water or human muscle; and set up the factory to produce, and the railroad and the steamboat to transport the factory product.
When the United States was discovered, things were done manually; hammers were swung by people; mills were powered by wind and water; goods were transported by pack animals or sailing ships—these methods of production and transportation were[Pg 77]essentially the same as they were in the times of Pharaoh or Alexander the Great. A series of discoveries and inventions in England from 1735 to 1784 replaced the tool with the machine, harnessed steam power instead of relying on wind, water, or human strength, and established factories for production as well as railroads and steamboats for transporting factory goods.
American industry, up to 1812, was still conducted on the old, individualistic lines. Factories were little known. Men worked singly, or by twos and threes in sheds or workrooms adjoining their homes. The people lived in small villages or on scattered farms. Within the century American industry was transformed. Production shifted to the factory; about the factory grew up the industrial city in which lived the tens or hundreds of thousands of factory workers and their families.
American industry, up until 1812, was still run on traditional, individualistic methods. Factories were rare. People worked alone or in small groups in sheds or workshops next to their homes. They lived in small villages or on isolated farms. Within a century, American industry underwent a complete transformation. Production moved to factories; around these factories emerged industrial cities where tens or hundreds of thousands of factory workers and their families lived.
The machine made a new society. The artisan could not compete with the products of the machine. The home workshop disappeared, and in its place rose the factory, with its tens, its hundreds and its thousands of operatives.
The machine created a new society. The artisan couldn't compete with the products of the machine. The home workshop faded away, and in its place arose the factory, with its dozens, hundreds, and thousands of workers.
Under the modern system of machine production, each person has his particular duty to perform. Each depends, for the success of his service, upon that performed by thousands of others.
Under today's system of machine production, everyone has their specific role to fulfill. Each person relies, for the success of their work, on the tasks carried out by thousands of others.
All modern industry is organized on the principle of coöperation, division of labor, and specialization. Each has his task, and unless each task is performed the entire system breaks down.
All modern industry is organized on the principle of cooperation, division of labor, and specialization. Everyone has their role, and if any role isn’t fulfilled, the whole system falls apart.
Never were the various branches of the military service more completely dependent upon each other than are the various departments of modern economic life. No man works alone. All are associated more or less intimately with the activities of thousands and millions of their fellows, until the failure of one is the failure of all, and the success of one is the success of all.
Never have the different branches of the military been more interconnected than the various sectors of today's economy. No one works alone. Everyone is closely linked with the activities of thousands or millions of others, so that the failure of one leads to the failure of all, and the success of one means success for all.
Such a development could have only one possible result,—people who worked together must live together. [Pg 78]Scattered villages gave place to industrial towns and cities. People were compelled to coöperate in their lives as well as in their labor.
Such a development could only lead to one outcome—people who worked together had to live together. [Pg 78]Scattered villages gave way to industrial towns and cities. People were forced to cooperate in their daily lives as well as in their work.
The theory under which the new industrial society began its operations was "every man for himself." The development of the system has made every man dependent upon his fellows. The principle demanded an extreme individualism. The practice has created a vast network of inter-relations, that leads the cotton spinner of Massachusetts to eat the meat prepared by the packing-house operative in Omaha, while the pottery of Trenton and the clothing of New York are sent to the Yukon in exchange for fish and to the Golden Gate for fruit. Inside as well as outside the nation, the world is united by the strong hands of economic necessity. None can live to himself, alone. Each depends upon the labor of myriads whom he has never seen and of whom he has never heard. Whether we will or no, they are his brothers-in-labor—united in the Atlas fellowship of those who carry the world upon their shoulders.
The idea that kicked off the new industrial society was "every person for themselves." But as the system has grown, everyone has become reliant on each other. This principle called for extreme individualism, but in practice, it has created a huge web of connections. For example, a cotton spinner in Massachusetts might eat meat prepared by a packing house worker in Omaha, while pottery from Trenton and clothing from New York are sent to the Yukon in exchange for fish and to the Golden Gate for fruit. Both within and outside the nation, the world is bound together by the powerful force of economic necessity. No one can truly live in isolation. Each person relies on the work of countless others they've never met or even heard of. Whether we like it or not, they are our labor brothers—joined in the shared struggle of those who bear the weight of the world on their shoulders.
The theory of "every man for himself" failed. The practical exigencies involved in subjugating a continent and wresting from nature the means of livelihood made it necessary to introduce the opposite principle,—"In Union there is strength; coöperation achieves all things."
The idea of "every person for themselves" didn't work. The real challenges of conquering a continent and extracting resources from nature for survival made it essential to adopt the opposite principle—"In unity there is strength; teamwork makes everything possible."
3. The Struggle for Organization
The technical difficulties involved in the mechanical production of wealth compelled even the individualists to work together. The requirements of industrial organization drove them in the same direction.
The technical challenges of mass production forced even individualists to collaborate. The needs of industrial organization pushed them all in the same direction.
The first great problem before the early Americans was the conquest of nature. To this problem the machine was the answer. The second problem was the building of an organization capable of handling the new mechanism of production—an organization large enough, elastic enough,[Pg 79] stable enough and durable enough—to this problem the corporation was the answer.
The first major challenge facing the early Americans was overcoming nature. The machine provided a solution to this challenge. The second challenge was creating an organization that could manage the new production mechanisms—an organization that was large enough, adaptable enough,[Pg 79] stable enough, and resilient enough— the corporation was the solution to this problem.
The machine produced the goods. The corporation directed the production, marketed the products and financed both operations.
The machine made the products. The company handled production, marketed the items, and funded both activities.
The corporation, as a means of organizing and directing business enterprise is a product of the last hundred years. A century ago the business of the United States was carried on by individuals, partnerships, and a few joint stock companies. At the time of the last Census, more than four-fifths of the manufactured products were turned out under corporate direction; most of the important mining enterprises were corporate, and the railroads, public utilities, banks and insurance companies were virtually all under the corporate form of organization. Thus the passage of a century has witnessed a complete revolution in the form of organizing and directing business enterprise.
The corporation, as a way to organize and manage business activities, is a product of the last hundred years. A century ago, businesses in the United States were mostly run by individuals, partnerships, and a few joint stock companies. According to the last Census, more than four-fifths of manufactured products were produced under corporate management; most major mining operations were corporate, and the railroads, public utilities, banks, and insurance companies were nearly all structured as corporations. Therefore, the last hundred years have seen a total transformation in how business enterprises are organized and managed.
The corporation, as a form of business organization is immensely superior to individual management and to the partnership.
The corporation, as a type of business organization, is far better than individual management and partnerships.
1. The corporation has perpetual life. In the eyes of the law, it is a person that lives for the term of its charter. Individuals die; partnerships are dissolved; but the corporation with its unbroken existence, possesses a continuity and a permanence that are impossible of attainment under the earlier forms of business organization.
1. The corporation has a continuous existence. Legally, it’s considered a person that lasts for the duration of its charter. Individuals can die; partnerships can break up; but the corporation, with its uninterrupted existence, has a level of continuity and permanence that older types of business organizations can’t achieve.
2. Liability, under the corporation, is limited by the amount of the investment. The liability of an individual or a partner engaged in business was as great as his ability to pay. The investor in a corporation cannot lose a sum larger than that represented by his investment.
2. Liability in a corporation is limited to the amount invested. An individual or partner in a business had liability equal to their ability to pay. An investor in a corporation can only lose what they invested.
3. The corporation, through the issuing of stocks and bonds, makes it possible to subdivide the total amount invested in one enterprise into many small units.[37] These[Pg 80] chances for small investment mean that a large number of persons may join in subscribing the capital for a business enterprise. They also mean that one well-to-do person may invest his wealth in a score or a hundred enterprises, thus reducing the risk of heavy losses to a minimum.
3. The corporation, by issuing stocks and bonds, allows the total investment in a single business to be broken down into many small parts.[37] These[Pg 80] opportunities for small investments mean that many people can participate in funding a business venture. They also mean that a wealthy individual can spread their money across multiple businesses, greatly minimizing the chance of significant losses.
4. The corporation is not, as were the earlier forms of organization, necessarily a "one man" concern. Many corporations have upon their boards of directors the leading business men, merchants, bankers and financiers. In this way, the investing public has the assurance that the enterprise will be conducted along business lines, while the business men on the board have an opportunity to get in on the "ground floor."
4. Unlike earlier forms of organization, a corporation isn’t necessarily just a “one-man” operation. Many corporations have top businesspeople, merchants, bankers, and financiers on their boards of directors. This way, the investing public can be confident that the business will be run professionally, while the business leaders on the board get the chance to be involved from the very start.
The corporation has a permanence, a stability, and a breadth of financial support that are quite impossible in the case of the private venture or of the partnership. It does for business organization what the machine did for production.
The corporation has a level of permanence, stability, and financial support that is simply unachievable with private ventures or partnerships. It transforms business organization much like the machine transformed production.
The corporation came into favor at a time when business was expanding rapidly. Surplus was growing. Wealth and capital were accumulating. Industrial units were increasing in size. It was necessary to find some means by which the surplus wealth in the hands of many individuals could be brought together, large sums of capital concentrated under one unified control, the investments, thus secured, safeguarded against untoward losses, and the business conservatively and efficiently directed. The corporation was the answer to these needs.
The corporation emerged as business was booming. Surplus wealth was increasing, and capital was building up. Industries were getting bigger. It became essential to find a way to combine the excess wealth held by many individuals, concentrate substantial amounts of capital under a single management, protect those investments from unexpected losses, and run the business in a conservative and efficient manner. The corporation provided the solution to these requirements.
"United we stand" proved to be as true of organizers and investors as it was of producers. The corporation was the common denominator of people with various industrial and financial interests.
"Together we stand" turned out to be just as true for organizers and investors as it was for producers. The corporation served as the common ground for people with different industrial and financial interests.
The corporation played another rôle of vital consequence. It enabled the banker to dominate the business world. Heretofore, the banker had dealt largely with exchange. The industrial leader was his equal if not his superior. The[Pg 81] organization of the corporation put the supreme power in the hands of the banker, who as the intermediary between investor and producer, held the purse strings.
The corporation had another crucial role. It allowed the banker to control the business world. Until now, the banker mostly dealt with currency exchange. The industrial leader was often on equal footing, if not superior, to him. The[Pg 81] structure of the corporation placed ultimate power in the hands of the banker, who acted as the middleman between investors and producers, holding the financial reins.
4. Capitalist against Capitalist
The early American enterprisers—the pioneers—began a single-handed struggle with nature. Necessity forced them to coöperate. They established a new industry. The factory brought them together. They organized their system of industrial direction and control. The corporation united them. They turned on one another in mortal combat, and the frightfulness of their losses forced them to join hands.
The early American entrepreneurs—the pioneers—started a solo battle with nature. Necessity pushed them to work together. They created a new industry. The factory brought them together. They organized their system of industrial leadership and management. The corporation united them. They fought against each other in fierce competition, and the severity of their losses compelled them to collaborate.
The business men of the late nineteenth century had been nurtured upon the idea of competition. "Every man for himself and the devil take the hindermost" summed up their philosophy. Each person who entered the business arena was met by an array of savage competitors whose motto was "Victory or Death." In the struggle that followed, most of them suffered death.
The business people of the late nineteenth century were raised on the idea of competition. "Every person for themselves and let the rest take their chances" captured their mindset. Anyone who stepped into the business world faced a group of fierce competitors whose motto was "Win or Lose." In the battles that ensued, the majority faced defeat.
Capitalist set himself up against capitalist in bitter strife. The railroads gouged the farmers, the manufacturers and the merchants and fought one another. The big business organizations drove the little man to the wall and then attacked their larger rivals. It was a fight to the finish with no quarter asked or given.
Capitalists went up against each other in fierce conflict. The railroads exploited the farmers, manufacturers, and merchants while battling one another. Large business entities pushed the smaller ones to the brink and then turned on their bigger competitors. It was a ruthless battle with no mercy shown or received.
The "finish" came with periodic regularity in the seventies, the eighties and the nineties. The number of commercial failures in 1875 was double the number of 1872. The number of failures in 1878 was over three times that of 1871. The same thing happened in the eighties. The liabilities of concerns failing in 1884 were nearly four times the liabilities of those failing in 1880. The climax came in the nineties, after a period of comparative prosperity. Hard times began in 1893. Demand dropped off. Production decreased. Unemployment was widespread. Wages[Pg 82] fell. Prices went down, down, under bitter competitive selling, to touch rock bottom in 1896. Business concerns continued to fight one another, though both were going to the wall. Weakened by the struggle, unable to meet the competitive price cutting that was all but the universal business practice of the time, thousands of business houses closed their doors. The effect was cumulative; the fabric of credit, broken at one point, was weakened correspondingly in other places and the guilty and the innocent were alike plunged into the morass of bankruptcy.
The "finish" happened consistently in the seventies, eighties, and nineties. The number of business failures in 1875 was double that of 1872. In 1878, failures were more than three times those of 1871. The same trend occurred in the eighties. The liabilities of businesses that failed in 1884 were nearly four times those of the failures in 1880. The peak came in the nineties, following a period of relative prosperity. Tough times began in 1893. Demand fell. Production dropped. Unemployment was widespread. Wages[Pg 82] fell. Prices decreased drastically, pushed down by intense competition, hitting rock bottom in 1896. Businesses continued to compete, even as both were going under. Weakened by the struggle and unable to cope with the price cuts that had become the norm, thousands of businesses closed their doors. The impact was cumulative; the credit system, damaged at one point, weakened correspondingly elsewhere, dragging both the guilty and the innocent into bankruptcy.
The destruction wrought in the business world by the panic of 1893 was enormous. The number of commercial failures for 1893 jumped to 15,242. The amount of liabilities involved in these failures was $346,780,000. This catastrophe, coming as it did so close upon the heels of the panics that had immediately preceded it, could not fail to teach its lesson. Competition was not the life, but the death of trade. "Every man for himself" as a policy applied in the business world, led most of those engaged in the struggle over the brink to destruction. There was but one way out—through united action.
The destruction caused in the business world by the panic of 1893 was massive. The number of commercial failures for 1893 soared to 15,242. The total liabilities from these failures amounted to $346,780,000. This disaster, happening right after the previous panics, couldn't help but impart its lesson. Competition wasn't the lifeblood but the demise of trade. The mindset of "every man for himself" in the business realm drove most of those involved in the struggle to the edge of ruin. There was only one way out—through united action.
The period between 1897 and 1902 was one of feverish activity directed to coördinating the affairs of the business world. Trusts were formed in all of the important branches of industry and trade. The public looked upon the trust as a means of picking pockets through trade conspiracies and the boosting of prices. The Sherman Anti-Trust Law had been passed on that assumption. In reality, the trusts were organized by far seeing men who realized that competition was wasteful in practice and unsound in theory. The idea that the failure of one bank or shoe factory was of advantage to other banks and shoe factories, had not stood the test of experience. The tragedies of the nineties had showed conclusively that an injury to one part of the commercial fabric was an injury to all of its parts.
The years between 1897 and 1902 were marked by intense efforts to organize the business world. Trusts were established across all major industries and trades. The public viewed these trusts as a way to exploit consumers through trade conspiracies and inflated prices. The Sherman Anti-Trust Law was enacted based on that belief. In reality, the trusts were created by forward-thinking individuals who recognized that competition was inefficient in practice and flawed in theory. The notion that the failure of one bank or shoe factory would benefit other banks and factories had not proven true. The crises of the 1890s clearly demonstrated that harm to one part of the commercial ecosystem affected all its components.
The generation of business men trained since 1900 has had no illusions about competition. Rather, it has had as its object the successful combination of various forms of[Pg 83] business enterprise into ever larger units. First, there was the uniting of like industries;—cotton mills were linked with cotton mills, mines with mines. Then came the integration of industry—the concentration under one control of all of the steps in the industrial process from the raw material to the finished product,—iron mines, coal mines, blast furnaces, converters, and rail mills united in one organization to take the raw material from the ground and to turn out the finished steel product. Last of all there was the union of unlike industries,—the control, by one group of interests, of as many and as varied activities as could be brought together and operated at a profit. The lengths to which business men have gone in combining various industries is well shown by the recent investigation of the meat packing industry. In the course of that investigation, the Federal Trade Commission was able to show that the five great packers (Wilson, Armour, Swift, Morris and Cudahy) were directly affiliated with 108 business enterprises, including 12 rendering companies; 18 stockyard companies; 8 terminal railway companies; 9 manufacturers of packers' machinery and supplies; 6 cattle loan companies; 4 public service corporations; 18 banks, and a number of miscellaneous companies, and that they controlled 2000 food products not immediately related to the packing industry.[38]
The generation of businesspeople trained since 1900 has been clear-eyed about competition. Instead, their focus has been on successfully merging different types of[Pg 83] business ventures into increasingly larger entities. Initially, similar industries were combined; for example, cotton mills merged with other cotton mills, and mines connected with other mines. This was followed by the integration of industries—bringing all the stages of the industrial process under one control, from raw materials to finished products. This meant that iron mines, coal mines, blast furnaces, converters, and rail mills were consolidated into one organization to take raw materials from the ground and produce finished steel. Finally, there was the combination of dissimilar industries—one group of interests managing as many diverse activities as possible to operate them profitably. The extent to which businesspeople have combined various industries is clearly illustrated by the recent investigation into the meatpacking industry. During this investigation, the Federal Trade Commission found that the five major packers (Wilson, Armour, Swift, Morris, and Cudahy) were directly connected to 108 business enterprises. This included 12 rendering companies, 18 stockyard companies, 8 terminal railway companies, 9 manufacturers of packaging machinery and supplies, 6 cattle loan companies, 4 public service corporations, 18 banks, and several other miscellaneous companies, and they controlled 2000 food products that weren’t directly related to the packing industry.[38]
Business is consolidated because consolidation pays—not primarily, through the increase of prices, but through the greater stability, the lessened costs, and the growing security that has accompanied the abolition of competition.
Business is combined because consolidation is beneficial—not mainly through raising prices, but through greater stability, reduced costs, and the increased security that comes with the elimination of competition.
Again the forces of social organization have triumphed in the face of an almost universal opposition. American business men practiced competition until they found that coöperation was the only possible means of conducting large affairs. Theory advised, "Compete"! Experience warned, "Combine"! Business men—like all other practical people—accepted the dictates of experience as the[Pg 84] only sound basis for procedure. Their combination solidified their ranks, preparing them to take their places in a closely knit, dominant class, with clearly marked interests, and a strong feeling of class consciousness and solidarity.
Once again, the forces of social organization have succeeded despite almost universal opposition. American business leaders focused on competition until they realized that cooperation was the only viable way to manage large operations. Theory urged them to "Compete"! Experience advised them to "Combine"! Business leaders—like all practical people—followed the guidance of experience as the[Pg 84] only reliable basis for action. Their collaboration united their ranks, readying them to join a tightly connected, dominant class with clearly defined interests and a strong sense of class awareness and solidarity.
It was in the consummation of these combinations, integrations and consolidations that the investment banker came into his own as the keystone in the modern industrial arch.
It was through the completion of these combinations, integrations, and consolidations that the investment banker established himself as the key player in the modern industrial framework.
5. The Investment Banker
The investment banker is the directing and coördinating force in the modern business world. The necessities of factory production demanding great outlays of capital; the immense financial requirements of corporations; the consolidation of business ventures on a huge scale; the broadened use of corporate securities as investments—all brought the investment banker into the foreground.
The investment banker is the guiding and coordinating force in today’s business world. The needs of factory production requiring large amounts of capital, the massive financial demands of corporations, the consolidation of business ventures on a large scale, and the increased use of corporate securities as investments—all of these have brought the investment banker to the forefront.
Before the Spanish War, the investment banker financed the trusts. After the war he was entrusted with the vast surpluses which the concentration of business control had placed in a few hands. Business consolidation had given the banker position. The control of the surplus brought him power. Henceforth, all who wished access to the world of great industrial and commercial affairs must knock at his door.
Before the Spanish War, the investment banker financed the trusts. After the war, he was given the huge surpluses that the concentration of business control had placed in a few hands. Business consolidation had given the banker his position. The control of the surplus gave him power. From then on, anyone wanting to gain access to the world of large industrial and commercial affairs had to knock on his door.
This concentration of economic control in the hands of a relatively small number of investment bankers has been referred to frequently as the "Money Trust."
This concentration of economic control in the hands of a relatively small number of investment bankers is often referred to as the "Money Trust."
Investment banking monopoly, or as it is sometimes called, the "Money Trust" was examined in detail by the Pujo Committee of the House of Representatives, which presented a summary of its report on February 28, 1913. The committee placed, at the center of its diagram of financial power, J. P. Morgan & Co., the National City Bank, the First National Bank, the Guaranty Trust Co., and the Bankers Trust Co., all of New York. The report refers to Lee, Higginson & Co., of Boston and New York;[Pg 85] to Kidder, Peabody & Co., of Boston and New York, and to Kuhn, Loeb & Co., of New York, together with the Morgan affiliations, as being "the most active agents in forwarding and bringing about the concentration of control of money and credit" (p. 56).
Investment banking monopoly, also known as the "Money Trust," was thoroughly investigated by the Pujo Committee of the House of Representatives, which released a summary of its report on February 28, 1913. The committee highlighted J. P. Morgan & Co., the National City Bank, the First National Bank, the Guaranty Trust Co., and the Bankers Trust Co., all based in New York, as central to its financial power diagram. The report also mentions Lee, Higginson & Co. of Boston and New York;[Pg 85] Kidder, Peabody & Co. of Boston and New York, and Kuhn, Loeb & Co. of New York, along with the Morgan affiliations, identifying them as "the most active agents in forwarding and bringing about the concentration of control of money and credit" (p. 56).
The methods by which this control was effected are classed by the Committee under five heads:—
The ways in which this control was implemented are categorized by the Committee into five main areas:—
1. "Through consolidations of competitive or potentially competitive banks and trust companies which consolidations in turn have recently been brought under sympathetic management" (p. 56).
1. "Through mergers of competitive or potentially competitive banks and trust companies, which have recently been placed under supportive management" (p. 56).
2. Through the purchase by the same interests of the stock of competitive institutions.
2. By the same interests buying the stock of competing institutions.
3. Through interlocking directorates.
3. Via interlocking directorates.
4. "Through the influence which the more powerful banking houses, banks, and trust companies have secured in the management of insurance companies, railroads, producing and trading corporations and public utility corporations, by means of stock holdings, voting trusts, fiscal agency contracts, or representation upon their boards of directors, or through supplying the money requirements of railway, industrial, and public utility corporations and thereby being enabled to participate in the determination of their financial and business policies" (p. 56).
4. "Due to the control that major banks, banking houses, and trust companies have gained over the management of insurance companies, railroads, production and trading firms, and public utility companies through their stock ownership, voting trusts, financial agency agreements, or by having representation on their boards, as well as by meeting the financial needs of railways, industries, and public utilities, they have been able to influence their financial and business decisions" (p. 56).
5. "Through partnership or joint account arrangements between a few of the leading banking houses, banks, and trust companies in the purchase of security issues of the great interstate corporations, accompanied by understandings of recent growth—sometimes called 'banking ethics'—which have had the effect of effectually destroying competition between such banking houses, banks, and trust companies in the struggle for business or in the purchase and sale of large issues of such securities" (p. 56).
5. "Through partnerships or joint account setups among a few of the top banks, and trust companies when buying security offerings from major interstate corporations, along with agreements about recent growth—sometimes referred to as 'banking ethics'—which have effectively eliminated competition among these banks and trust companies in the fight for business or in the buying and selling of sizable securities" (p. 56).
Morgan & Co., the First National Bank, the National City Bank, the Bankers Trust Co., and the Guaranty Trust[Pg 86] Co., which were all closely affiliated, had extended their control until they held,—
Morgan & Co., the First National Bank, the National City Bank, the Bankers Trust Co., and the Guaranty Trust[Pg 86] Co., all of which were closely linked, had expanded their control until they held,—
118 directorships in 34 banks with combined resources of $2,679,000,000.
118 directorships in 34 banks, managing assets totaling $2,679,000,000.
30 directorships in 10 insurance companies with total assets of $2,293,000,000.
30 directorships in 10 insurance companies with total assets of $2,293,000,000.
105 directorships in 32 transportation systems having a total capital of $11,784,000,000.
105 directorships in 32 transportation systems with a total capital of $11,784,000,000.
63 directorships in 24 producing and trading companies having a total capitalization of $3,339,000,000.
63 directorships in 24 production and trading companies, with a total capitalization of $3,339,000,000.
25 directorships in 12 public utility corporations with a total capitalization of $2,150,000,000.
25 directorships in 12 public utility companies with a total capitalization of $2,150,000,000.
The investment banker had become, what he was ultimately bound to be, the center of the system built upon the century-long struggle to control the wealth of the continent in the interest of the favored few who happened to own the choicest natural gifts.
The investment banker had become, what he was ultimately destined to be, the center of the system built upon the century-long struggle to control the wealth of the continent for the benefit of the select few who happened to own the best natural resources.
6. The Cohesion of Wealth
The struggle for wealth and power, actively waged among the business men of the United States for more than a century, has thus by a process of elimination, subordination and survival, placed a few small groups of strong men in a position of immense economic power. The growth of surplus and its importance in the world of affairs has made the investment banker the logical center of this business leadership. He, with his immediate associates, directs and controls the affairs of the economic world.
The competition for wealth and power, actively fought by businesspeople in the United States for over a century, has led to a process of elimination, subordination, and survival that has positioned a few small groups of powerful individuals in a place of immense economic influence. The increase in surplus and its significance in global affairs has made the investment banker the natural leader of this business sector. He, along with his close associates, directs and controls the workings of the economic world.
The spirit of competition ruled the American business world at the beginning of the last century, the forces of combination dominated at its close. The new order was the product of necessity, not of choice. The life of the frontier had ingrained in men an individualism that chafed[Pg 87] under the restraints of combination. It was the compelling forces of impending calamity and the opportunity for greater economic advantage—not the traditions or accepted standards of the business world—that led to the establishment of the centralized wealth power. American business interests were driven together by the battering of economic loss and lured by the hope of greater economic gains.
The competitive spirit dominated American business at the start of the last century, while the forces of consolidation took over by its end. This new order emerged out of necessity rather than choice. Life on the frontier had instilled a strong sense of individualism in people, which resisted the pressures of unification. It was the urgent threats of impending disaster and the chance for greater financial benefits—not the traditions or norms of the business world—that resulted in the rise of centralized economic power. American business interests were pushed together by the impact of economic loss and tempted by the promise of bigger profits.
Years of struggle and experience, by converting a scattered, individualistic wealth owning class into a highly organized, closely knit, homogeneous group with its common interests in the development of industry and the safeguarding of property rights, have brought unity and power to the business world.
Years of struggle and experience have transformed a fragmented, individualistic wealth-owning class into a well-organized, tightly connected, uniform group with shared interests in developing industry and protecting property rights, bringing unity and strength to the business world.
Individually the members of the wealth-controlling class have learned that "in union there is strength"; collectively they are gripped by the "cohesion of wealth"—the class conscious instinct of an associated group of human beings who have much to gain and everything to lose.
Individually, the members of the wealthy class have realized that "strength comes from unity"; together, they are held together by the "cohesion of wealth"—the awareness among a connected group of people who have a lot to gain and everything to lose.
FOOTNOTES:
[37] The 169 largest railroads in the United States have issued 84,418,796 shares of stock. ("American Labor Year Book," 1917-18, p. 169.) Theoretically, therefore, there might be eighty-four millions of owners of the American railroads.
[37] The 169 largest railroads in the United States have issued 84,418,796 shares of stock. ("American Labor Year Book," 1917-18, p. 169.) So, theoretically, there could be eighty-four million owners of American railroads.
VIII. THEIR UNITED STATES
1. Translating Wealth into Power
The first object of the economic struggle is wealth. The second is power.
The primary goal of economic competition is wealth. The second is power.
At the end of their era of competition, the leaders of American business found themselves masters of such vast stores of wealth that they were released from the paralyzing fear of starvation, and were guaranteed the comforts and luxuries of life. Had these men sought wealth as a means of satisfying their physical needs their object would have been attained.
At the end of their competitive era, the leaders of American business found themselves with so much wealth that they were free from the crippling fear of hunger and ensured a life of comfort and luxury. If these men had pursued wealth to meet their physical needs, they would have achieved their goal.
The gratification of personal wants is only a minor element in the lives of the rich. After they have secured the things desired, they strive for the power that will give them control over their fellows.
The satisfying of personal desires is just a small part of the lives of the wealthy. Once they have obtained what they want, they pursue the power that allows them to dominate others.
The possession of things, is, in itself, a narrow field. The control over productive machinery gives him who exercises it the power to enjoy those things which the workers with machinery produce. The control over public affairs and over the forces that shape public opinion give him who exercises it the power to direct the thoughts and lives of the people. It is for these reasons that the keen, self-assertive, ambitious men who have come to the top in the rough and tumble of the business struggle have steadily extended their ownership and their control.
The possession of things is, in itself, a limited area. Having control over production machines gives the person who holds that power the ability to enjoy the products created by the workers using those machines. Control over public matters and the forces that influence public opinion allows the individual who wields it to steer the thoughts and lives of the people. For these reasons, the sharp, assertive, ambitious individuals who have risen to the top in the tough and competitive business world have consistently expanded their ownership and control.
2. The Wealth of the United States
The bulk of American wealth, which consists for the most part of land and buildings, is concentrated in the centers of commerce and industry—in the regions of supreme business power.
The majority of American wealth, primarily made up of land and buildings, is concentrated in the heart of commerce and industry—in the areas of major business influence.
The last detailed estimate of the wealth of the United States was made by the Census Bureau for the year 1912. At that time, the total wealth of the country was placed at $187,739,000,000. (The estimate for 1920 is $500,000,000,000.) Roughly speaking, this represented an estimate of exchangeable values. The figures, at best, are rough approximations. Their importance lies, not in their accuracy, but in the picture which they give of relationships.
The last detailed estimate of the wealth of the United States was made by the Census Bureau in 1912. At that time, the total wealth of the country was estimated at $187,739,000,000. (The estimate for 1920 is $500,000,000,000.) Generally speaking, this represented an estimate of exchangeable values. The figures are rough approximations at best. Their significance lies not in their accuracy, but in the picture they provide of relationships.
The Total Wealth of the United States, Classified by
Groups, with the
Percentage of the Total
Wealth in Each Group[39]
The Total Wealth of the United States, Classified by
Groups, with the
Percentage of the Total
Wealth in Each Group[39]
Total Estimated Wealth |
||
Wealth Groups | Amount (000,000 Omitted) |
Per Cent of Total |
1. Real Property (land and buildings) | $110,676 | 59 |
2. Public Utilities (railroads, street railways, telegraph, telephone, electric light, etc.) |
26,415 | 14 |
3. Live Stock and Machinery (live stock, farm implements and man- ufacturing machinery |
13,697 | 7 |
4. Raw Materials, Manufactured Prod- ucts, Merchandise (including gold and silver bullion) |
24,193 | 13 |
5. Personal Possessions (clothing, personal adornments, furniture, carriages, etc.) |
12,758 | 7 |
———— | —— | |
Total of all groups | $187,739 | 100 |
The bulk of the exchangeable wealth of the United States consists of "productive" or "investment" property. If, to the total of 110 billions given by the Census as the value of real property, are added the real property values of the public utilities, the total will probably exceed three quarters of the total wealth of the United States. If, in addition, account is taken of the fact that much of the wealth classed as "raw materials, etc.," is the immediate product of the land (coal, ore, timber), some idea may be obtained of the extent to which the estimated wealth of the country is in the form of land, its immediate products, and buildings. Furthermore, it must be remembered that great quantities of ore lands, timber lands, waterpower sites, etc., are assessed at only a fraction of their total present value.
The majority of the exchangeable wealth in the United States is made up of "productive" or "investment" property. If we add the estimated $110 billion value of real estate reported by the Census to the real estate values of public utilities, the total is likely to exceed three-quarters of the nation's wealth. Additionally, considering that much of the wealth categorized as "raw materials, etc." comes directly from the land (like coal, ore, and timber), we can start to understand how much of the country's estimated wealth consists of land, its immediate products, and buildings. It's also important to note that many ore lands, timber lands, water power sites, and so on are assessed at only a small fraction of their actual market value.
The personal property of the country is valued at less than one fourteenth of the total wealth. It is in reality a negligible item, as compared with the value of the real property, of the public utilities, and of the raw materials and products of industry.
The country's personal property is worth less than one-fourteenth of the total wealth. In reality, it's a minor factor when compared to the value of real estate, public utilities, and the raw materials and products of industry.
The wealth of the United States is in permanent form—land and improvements; personal possessions are a mere incident in the total. In truth, American wealth is in the main productive (business) wealth, designed for the further production of goods, rather than for the satisfaction of human wants.
The wealth of the United States is in permanent form—land and improvements; personal belongings are just a small part of the whole. In reality, American wealth is mostly productive (business) wealth, created for the continued production of goods, rather than for meeting human needs.
3. Ownership and Control
Who owns this vast wealth? It is impossible to answer the question with anything like definiteness. Figures have been compiled to show that five per cent of the people own two-thirds to three-quarters of it; that the poorest two-thirds of the people own five per cent of it, and that the well-to-do or middle class own the remainder. These figures would make it appear that more than one-fourth of the population is in the middle class. If the income-tax returns are to be trusted this proportion is far too[Pg 91] high. On all hands it is admitted that the wealth of the country is concentrated in the hands of a small fraction of the people and the important wealth—that is, the wealth upon which production, transportation and exchange depends—is in still fewer hands.
Who owns this vast wealth? It's impossible to answer this question definitively. Data has been gathered showing that five percent of the population owns two-thirds to three-quarters of it; that the poorest two-thirds own five percent, and that the middle class owns the rest. These figures suggest that more than a quarter of the population falls into the middle class. However, if we can trust the income tax returns, this proportion is far too[Pg 91] high. Everyone agrees that the country's wealth is concentrated in the hands of a small fraction of the people, and the most significant wealth—that is, the wealth that supports production, transportation, and exchange—is in even fewer hands.
Neither the total wealth of the country, nor that portion of the total which is owned directly by the propertied class is of most immediate moment. Ownership does not necessarily involve control. A puddler in the Gary Mills may own five shares of stock in the Steel Corporation without ever raising his voice to determine the corporation policy. This is ownership without control. On the other hand, a banking house through a voting trust agreement, may control the policy of a corporation in which it does not own one per cent of the stock. This is control without ownership. Ownership may be quite incidental. It is control that counts in terms of power.
Neither the total wealth of the country nor the part of that wealth owned directly by the wealthy class is what matters most right now. Ownership doesn’t always mean having control. A worker at the Gary Mills might own five shares of stock in the Steel Corporation without ever having a say in the corporation's policies. This is ownership without control. Conversely, a bank might control a corporation’s policies through a voting trust agreement, even if it doesn’t own a single percent of the stock. This is control without ownership. Ownership can be quite irrelevant. What really matters in terms of power is control.
Most of the property owners in the United States play no part in the control of prices or of production, in the direction of economic policy, or in the management of economic affairs.
Most property owners in the United States have no influence over price control, production, economic policy, or the management of economic issues.
Theoretically, stockholders direct the policies of corporations, and, therefore, each holder of 5 or 10 shares of corporate stock would play a part in deciding economic affairs. Practically, the small stockholder has no part in business control.
Theoretically, shareholders guide the policies of companies, so each person with 5 or 10 shares of stock would have a say in economic decisions. In reality, though, small shareholders have no real influence over business control.
The small farmer—the small business man of largest numerical consequence—has been exploited by the great interests for two generations. Despite his numbers and his organizations, despite his frequent efforts, through anti-trust laws, railway control laws, banking reform laws, and the like, he has little voice in determining important economic policies.
The small farmer—the small business owner with the most significant numbers—has been taken advantage of by big interests for two generations. Despite his numbers and his organizations, and despite his constant efforts through anti-trust laws, railway regulations, banking reforms, and similar measures, he has little say in shaping important economic policies.
The small savings bank depositor or the holder of an ordinary insurance policy is a negative rather than a positive factor in economic control. Not only does he exercise no power over the dollar which he has placed with the[Pg 92] bank or with the insurance company, but he has thereby strengthened the hands of these organizations. Each dollar placed with the financier is a dollar's more power for him and his.
The small savings account holder or the person with a standard insurance policy is more of a burden than an asset in economic control. They don’t have any influence over the dollar they’ve deposited with the[Pg 92] bank or the insurance company, but in doing so, they’ve actually bolstered these organizations. Every dollar deposited with the financier gives them an extra dollar's worth of power.
Suppose—the impossible—that half of the families in the United States "own property." Subtract from this number the small stockholders; the holders of bonds, notes and mortgages; the small tradesman; the small farmer; the home owner and the owner of a savings-bank deposit or of an insurance policy—what remains? There are the large stockholders, the owners and directors of important industries, public utilities, banks, trust companies and insurance companies. These persons, in the aggregate, constitute a fraction of one per cent of the adult population of the United States.
Suppose—the unlikely scenario—that half of the families in the United States "own property." If you take away the small stockholders, the holders of bonds, notes, and mortgages, the small business owners, the small farmers, the homeowners, and those with savings bank accounts or insurance policies—what’s left? You find the large stockholders, the owners and executives of major industries, public utilities, banks, trust companies, and insurance companies. In total, these individuals make up a fraction of one percent of the adult population in the United States.
Start with the total non-personal wealth of the country, subtract from it the share-values of the small stockholders; the values of all bonds, mortgages and notes; the property of the small tradesman and the small farmer; the value of homes—what remains? There are left the stocks in the hands of the big stockholders; the properties owned and directed by the owners and directors of important industries, public utilities, banks, trust companies and insurance companies. This wealth in the aggregate probably makes up less than 10 per cent of the total wealth of the country and yet the tiny fraction of the population which owns this wealth can exercise a dictatorial control over the economic policies that underlie American public life.
Start with the total non-personal wealth of the country, subtract the share values of the small stockholders; the values of all bonds, mortgages, and notes; the property of small business owners and small farmers; the value of homes—what do you have left? What remains is the stock owned by the big stockholders; the properties controlled by the owners and executives of major industries, public utilities, banks, trust companies, and insurance companies. This wealth likely accounts for less than 10 percent of the country's total wealth, yet the tiny fraction of the population that owns this wealth can exert dictatorial control over the economic policies that shape American public life.
4. The Avenues of Mastery
While control rests back directly or indirectly upon some form of ownership, most owners exercise little or no control over economic affairs. Instead they are made the victims of a social system under which one group lives at the expense of another.
While control ultimately comes from some form of ownership, most owners have little to no control over economic matters. Instead, they become victims of a social system where one group thrives at the expense of another.
Against this tendency toward control by one group or class (usually a minority) over the lives of another group[Pg 93] or class (usually a majority) the human spirit always has revolted. The United States in its earlier years was an embodiment of the spirit of that revolt. President Wilson characterized it excellently in 1916. Speaking of the American Flag, he said,—"That flag was originally stained in very precious blood, blood spilt, not for any dynasty, nor for any small controversies over national advantage, but in order that a little body of three million men in America might make sure that no man was their master."[40]
Against this tendency for one group or class (usually a minority) to control the lives of another group or class (usually a majority), the human spirit has always resisted. The United States in its early years was a symbol of that resistance. President Wilson captured this sentiment perfectly in 1916. Referring to the American Flag, he said, "That flag was originally stained in very precious blood, blood spilt, not for any dynasty, nor for any small disputes over national advantage, but so that a small group of three million people in America could ensure that no one was their master."[40]
Against mastery lovers of liberty protest. Mastery means tyranny; mastery means slavery.
Against control, lovers of freedom protest. Control leads to oppression; control leads to servitude.
Mastery has always been based upon some form of ownership. There is in the United States a group, growing in size, of people who take more in keep than they give in service; people who own land; franchises; stocks and bonds and mortgages; real estate and other forms of investment property; people who are living without ever lifting a finger in toil, or giving anything in labor for an unceasing stream of necessaries, comforts and luxuries. These people, directly or indirectly, are the owners of the productive machinery of the United States.
Mastery has always been linked to some form of ownership. In the United States, there’s a growing group of people who take more from society than they contribute in service; people who own land, franchises, stocks, bonds, mortgages, real estate, and other types of investment properties; people who live without ever having to work or contribute labor for a constant flow of necessities, comforts, and luxuries. These individuals, either directly or indirectly, own the productive resources of the United States.
Historically there have been a number of stages in the development of mastery. First, there was the ownership of the body. One man owned another man, as he might own a house or a pile of hides. At another stage, the owner of the land—the feudal baron or the landlord—said to the tenant, who worked on his land: "You stay on my land. You toil and work and make bread and I will eat it." The present system of mastery is based on the ownership by one group of people, of the productive wealth upon which depends the livelihood of all. The masters of present day economic society have in their possession the natural resources, the tools, the franchises, patents, and the other phases of the modern industrial system with which the people must work in order to live. The few who own and control the productive wealth have it in their power[Pg 94] to say to the many who neither own nor control,—"You may work or you may not work." If the masses obtain work under these conditions the owners can say to them further,—"You work, and toil and earn bread and we will eat it." Thus the few, deriving their power from the means by which their fellows must work for a living, own the jobs.
Historically, there have been several stages in the development of mastery. First, there was ownership of the body. One person owned another, just like they might own a house or a pile of hides. At another stage, the landowner—the feudal lord or landlord—told the tenant working his land: "You stay on my land. You work hard to produce bread, and I will eat it." Today’s system of mastery is based on one group of people owning the productive wealth that everyone depends on for their livelihood. The current masters of our economic society hold the natural resources, tools, franchises, patents, and other aspects of the modern industrial system that people need to live. The few who own and control this productive wealth have the power[Pg 94] to dictate to the many who neither own nor control: "You can work or not work." If the masses do find work under these conditions, the owners can further say to them: "You work hard to earn your bread, and we will eat it." Thus, the few, deriving their power from the means by which their fellow citizens must work to survive, own the jobs.
5. The Mastery of Job-Ownership
Job-ownership is the foundation of the latest and probably the most complete system of mastery ever perfected. The slave was held only in physical bondage. Behind serfdom there was land ownership and a religious sanction. "Divine right" and "God's anointed," were terms used to bulwark the position of the owning class, who made an effort to dominate the consciences as well as the bodies of their serfs. Job-ownership owes its effectiveness to a subtle, psychological power that overwhelms the unconscious victim, making him a tool, at once easy to handle and easy to discard.
Job ownership is the basis of the most advanced and likely the most complete system of control ever developed. A slave was only physically trapped. Serfdom was backed by land ownership and religious endorsement. Terms like "divine right" and "God's chosen" were used to support the status of the owning class, who aimed to control both the minds and bodies of their serfs. Job ownership is effective due to a subtle psychological power that overwhelms the unaware individual, turning them into a tool that is both easy to manage and easy to throw away.
The system of private ownership that succeeded Feudalism taught the lesson of economic ambition so thoroughly that it has permeated the whole world. The conditions of eighteenth century life have passed, perhaps forever, but its psychology lingers everywhere.
The system of private ownership that followed Feudalism taught the lesson of economic ambition so well that it has spread throughout the world. The conditions of life in the eighteenth century may be gone, possibly for good, but its mindset remains everywhere.
The job-holder has been taught that he must "get ahead" in the world; that if he practices the economic virtues,—thrift, honesty, earnestness, persistence, efficiency—he will necessarily receive great economic reward; that he must support his family on the standard set by the community, and that to do all of these essential things, he must take a job and hold on to it. Having taken the job, he finds that in order to hold it, he must be faithful to the job-owner, even if that involves faithlessness to his own ideas and ideals, to his health, his manhood, and the lives of his wife and children.
The employee has been taught that he must "move up" in the world; that if he shows economic virtues—like saving, honesty, hard work, determination, and efficiency—he will definitely earn significant financial rewards; that he needs to provide for his family according to the community's standards, and to do all these crucial things, he has to get a job and stick with it. Once he has the job, he realizes that to keep it, he must remain loyal to his employer, even if that means being disloyal to his own beliefs and values, his health, his masculinity, and the well-being of his wife and children.
The driving power in slavery was the lash. Under serfdom it was the fear of hunger. The modern system of job-ownership owes its effectiveness to the fact that it has been built upon two of the most potent driving forces in all the world—hunger and ambition—the driving force that comes from the empty stomach and the driving force that comes from the desire for betterment. Thus job-owning, based upon an automatic self-drive principle, enables the job-owner to exact a return in faithful service that neither slavery nor serfdom ever made possible. Job-owning is thus the most thorough-going form of mastery yet devised by the ingenuity of man.
The main force behind slavery was the whip. In serfdom, it was the fear of starvation. The modern system of job ownership is effective because it relies on two of the strongest motivating factors in the world—hunger and ambition—the drive that comes from an empty stomach and the drive that comes from the desire for improvement. Therefore, job ownership, based on an automatic self-motivation principle, allows the job owner to receive a level of dedication in return that neither slavery nor serfdom ever achieved. Job ownership is thus the most complete form of control ever created by human ingenuity.
Unlike the slave owner and the Feudal lord the modern job-owner has no responsibility to the job-holder. The slave owner must feed, clothe and house his slave—otherwise he lost his property. The Feudal lord must protect and assist his tenant. That was a part of his bargain with his overlord. The modern job-owner is at liberty, at any time, to "discharge" the job-holder, and by throwing him out of work take away his chance of earning a living. While he keeps the job-holder on his payroll, he may pay him impossibly low wages and overwork him under conditions that are unfit for the maintenance of decent human life. Barring the factory laws and the health laws, he is at liberty to impose on the job-holder any form of treatment that the job-holder will tolerate.
Unlike a slave owner or a feudal lord, a modern employer has no obligation to their employees. A slave owner had to provide food, clothing, and shelter for their slaves; otherwise, they would lose their property. A feudal lord had to protect and support their tenants as part of their agreement with their superior. In contrast, a modern employer can fire an employee at any time, taking away their ability to earn a living. While the employee is on the payroll, the employer can pay them unreasonably low wages and demand excessive work under conditions that are unsuitable for maintaining a decent quality of life. Aside from labor laws and health regulations, the employer is free to treat the employee in any way that the employee is willing to tolerate.
There is no limit to the amount of industrial property that one man may own. Therefore, there is no limit to the number of jobs he may control. It is possible (not immediately likely) that one coterie of men might secure possession of enough industrial property to control the jobs of all of the gainfully occupied people in American industry. If this result could be achieved, these tens of millions would be able to earn a living only in case the small coterie in control permitted them to do so.
There’s no limit to how much industrial property one person can own. So, there’s no limit to how many jobs they can control. It’s possible (though not very likely) that a small group of people could acquire enough industrial property to control the jobs of all the employed individuals in American industry. If that were to happen, these tens of millions would only be able to make a living if the small group in control allowed them to do so.
Job ownership is built, of necessity, on the ownership of land, resources, capital, credit, franchises, and other special privileges. But its power of control goes far [Pg 96]beyond this mere physical ownership into the realms of social psychology.
Job ownership is fundamentally based on owning land, resources, capital, credit, franchises, and other special privileges. However, its influence extends well beyond just physical ownership into the areas of social psychology.
The early colonists, who fled from the economic, political, social and religious tyranny of feudalism, believed that liberty and freedom from unjust mastery lay in the private ownership of the job. They had no thought of the modern industrial machine.
The early colonists, who escaped the economic, political, social, and religious oppression of feudalism, believed that true liberty and freedom from unjust control came from owning their own work. They had no concept of the modern industrial machine.
The abolitionists who fought slavery believed that freedom and liberty could be obtained by unshackling the body. They did not foresee the shackled mind.
The abolitionists who fought against slavery believed that freedom and liberty could be achieved by breaking physical chains. They didn't anticipate the chains that bound the mind.
The modern world, seeking freedom; yearning for liberty and justice; aiming at the overthrow of the mastery that goes with irresponsible power, finds to its dismay that the ownership of the job carries with it, not only economic mastery, but political, social and even religious mastery, as well.
The modern world, striving for freedom; longing for liberty and justice; aiming to dismantle the control that comes with irresponsible power, discovers to its disappointment that having a job brings not only economic control but also political, social, and even religious dominance.
6. The Ownership of the Product
The industrial overlord holds control of the job with one hand. With the other he controls the product of industry. From the time the raw material leaves the earth in the form of iron ore, crude petroleum, logs, or coal, through all of the processes of production, it is owned by the industrial master, not by the worker. Workers separate the product from the earth, transport it, refine it, fabricate it. Always, the product, like the machinery, is the possession of the owning class.
The industrial ruler has a grip on the job with one hand. With the other hand, he controls the end product of industry. From the moment raw materials like iron ore, crude oil, timber, or coal are extracted from the earth, throughout all the production processes, they belong to the industrial master, not the worker. Workers extract the product from the earth, transport it, refine it, and manufacture it. Always, the product, just like the machinery, is owned by the wealthy class.
While industry was competitive, the pressure of competition kept prices at a cost level, and the exploiting power of the owner was confined to the job-holder. To-day, through combinations and consolidations, industry has ceased to be competitive, and the exploiting power of the job-owner is extended through his ownership of the product.
While the industry was competitive, the pressure from competition kept prices low, and the owner's power to exploit was limited to the job-holder. Nowadays, through mergers and consolidations, the industry is no longer competitive, and the owner's power to exploit extends through their ownership of the product.
The modern town-dweller is almost wholly in the hands of the private owners of the products upon which he depends. The ordinary city dweller spends two-fifths of[Pg 97] his income for food; one-fifth for rent, fuel and light, and one-fifth for clothes. Food, houses, fuel (with the exception of gas supply in some cities), and clothing are privately owned. The public ownership of streets and water works, of some gas, electricity, street cars, and public markets, is a negligible factor in the problem. The private monopolist has the upper hand and he is able through the control of transportation, storage, and merchandising facilities, to make handsome profits for the "service" which he renders the consumer.
The modern city resident is largely at the mercy of private owners of the products they need. The average city person spends two-fifths of[Pg 97] their income on food; one-fifth on rent, fuel, and utilities; and one-fifth on clothing. Food, housing, fuel (except for gas in some cities), and clothing are all privately owned. Public ownership of streets, water services, some gas, electricity, streetcars, and public markets plays a minimal role in the issue. The private monopolist has the advantage and can leverage control over transportation, storage, and sales to make significant profits from the "service" they provide to consumers.
7. The Control of the Surplus
The wealth owners are doubly entrenched. They own the jobs upon which most families depend for a living. They own the necessaries of life which most families must purchase in order to live. Further, they control the surplus wealth of the community.
The wealthy are firmly established in two ways. They own the jobs that most families rely on to make a living. They own the essential goods that families must buy to survive. Additionally, they control the extra wealth in the community.
There are three principal channels of surplus. First of all there is the surplus laid aside by business concerns, reinvested in the business, spent for new equipment and disposed of in other ways that add to the value of the property. Second, there are the 19,103 people in the United States with incomes of $50,000 or more per year; the 30,391 people with incomes of $25,000 to $50,000 per year and the 12,502 people with incomes of $10,000 to $25,000 per year. (Figures for 1917.) Many, if not most of these rich people, carry heavy insurance, invest in securities, or in some other way add to surplus. In the third place there are the small investors, savings-bank depositors, insurance policy holders who, from their income, have saved something and have laid it aside for the rainy day. The masters of economic life—bankers, insurance men, property holders, business directors—are in control of all three forms of surplus.
There are three main sources of surplus. First, there's the surplus set aside by businesses, which is reinvested back into the company, spent on new equipment, or used in other ways that increase the value of their assets. Second, in the United States, there are 19,103 individuals with annual incomes of $50,000 or more; 30,391 earning between $25,000 and $50,000; and 12,502 with incomes ranging from $10,000 to $25,000. (Figures for 1917.) Many of these wealthy individuals have substantial insurance policies, invest in securities, or find other ways to contribute to the surplus. Lastly, there are small investors, savings account holders, and insurance policy participants who have saved a portion of their income for a rainy day. The key players in the economy—bankers, insurance agents, property owners, and business leaders—oversee all three forms of surplus.
The billions of surplus wealth that come each year under the control of the masters carry with them an immense authority over the affairs of the community. The owners[Pg 98] of wealth owe much of their immediate power to the fact that they control this surplus, and are in a position to direct its flow into such channels as they may select.
The billions of excess wealth that come each year under the control of the wealthy carry with them significant authority over the community's affairs. The owners[Pg 98] of this wealth owe much of their immediate power to the fact that they control this surplus and can choose where to direct its flow.
8. The Channels of Public Opinion
No one can question the control which business interests exercise over the jobs, the industrial product, and the economic surplus of the community. These facts are universally admitted. But the corollaries which flow naturally from such axioms are not so readily accepted. Yet given the economic power of the business world, the control over the channels of public opinion and over the machinery of government follows as a matter of course.
No one can dispute the power that businesses have over jobs, industrial products, and the economic benefits of the community. These facts are widely accepted. However, the conclusions that naturally come from these truths are not as easily embraced. But considering the economic influence of the business world, control over public opinion and the government is just a natural outcome.
The channels of public opinion—the school, the press, the pulpit,—are not directly productive of tangible economic goods, yet they depend upon tangible economic goods for their maintenance. Whence should these goods come? Whence but from the system that produces them, through the men who control that system! The plutocracy exercises its power over the channels of public opinion in two ways,—the first, by a direct or business office control; and second, by an indirect or social prestige control.
The channels of public opinion—schools, the media, and religious institutions—don’t directly create tangible economic goods, but they rely on those goods for their support. Where should these goods come from? Only from the system that produces them, through the people who run that system! The wealthy elite exerts its influence over the channels of public opinion in two ways: first, through direct control in business or office settings; and second, through indirect control based on social status and prestige.
The business office control is direct and simple. Schools, colleges, newspapers, magazines and churches need money. They cannot produce tangible wealth directly, and they must, therefore, depend upon the surplus which arises from the productive activities of the economic world. Who controls that surplus? Business men. Who, then, is in a position to dictate terms in financial matters? Who but the dominant forces in business life?
The way business offices are run is straightforward and uncomplicated. Schools, colleges, newspapers, magazines, and churches all require funding. They can't generate physical wealth on their own, so they rely on the surplus created by the productive activities in the economy. Who manages that surplus? Businesspeople. So, who has the authority to set the terms in financial dealings? Who but the key players in the business world?
The facts are incontrovertible. It is not mere chance that recruits the overwhelming majority of school-board members, college trustees, newspaper managers, and church vestrymen, from the ranks of successful business and professional men. It is necessary for the educator, the journalist, and the minister to work through these men in[Pg 99] order to secure the "sinews of war." They are at the focal points of power because they control the sources of surplus wealth.
The facts are undeniable. It's not just a coincidence that most school board members, college trustees, newspaper managers, and church leaders come from successful business and professional backgrounds. Educators, journalists, and ministers need to collaborate with these individuals in[Pg 99] to get the "resources they need." They hold the key positions of power because they manage the sources of extra wealth.
The second method of maintaining control—through the control of social prestige—is indirect, but none the less effective. The young man in college; the young graduate looking for a job; the young man rising in his profession, and the man gaining ascendancy in his chosen career are brought into constant contact with the "influential" members of the business world. It is the business world that dominates the clubs and the vacation spots; it is the business world that is met in church, at the dinner tables and at the social gathering.
The second way to maintain control—through the control of social status—is indirect, but still very effective. The young man in college, the recent graduate searching for a job, the young professional advancing in his career, and the man gaining influence in his chosen field are constantly interacting with the "influential" people in the business world. It's the business world that runs the clubs and vacation spots; it's the business world that's encountered in church, at dinner parties, and at social events.
The man who would "succeed" must retain the favor of this group. He does so automatically, instinctively or semi-consciously—it is the common, accepted practice and he falls in line.
The man who wants to "succeed" must keep the support of this group. He does it naturally, instinctively, or somewhat unconsciously—it's the usual, accepted practice, and he simply goes along with it.
The masters need not bribe. They need not resort to illegal or unethical methods. The ordinary channels of advertising, of business acquaintance and patronage, of philanthropy and of social intercourse clinch their power over the channels of public opinion.
The masters don’t need to bribe. They don’t have to use illegal or unethical methods. The usual ways of advertising, networking and gaining customers, philanthropy, and socializing strengthen their influence over public opinion.
9. The Control of Political Machinery
The American government,—city, state and nation—is in almost the same position as the schools, newspapers and churches. It does not turn out tangible, economic products. It depends, for its support, upon taxes which are levied, in the first instance, upon property. Who are the owners of this property? The business interests. Who, therefore, pay the bills of the government? The business interests.
The American government—local, state, and national—is nearly in the same situation as schools, newspapers, and churches. It doesn’t produce tangible economic goods. It relies on taxes, which are primarily imposed on property. Who owns this property? The business sector. So, who ends up covering the government's expenses? The business sector.
Nowhere has the issue been stated more clearly or more emphatically than by Woodrow Wilson in certain passages of his "New Freedom." As a student of politics and[Pg 100] government—particularly the American Government—he sees the power which those who control economic life are able to exercise over public affairs, and realizes that their influence has grown, until it overtops that of the political world so completely that the machinery of politics is under the domination of the organizers and directors of industry.
Nowhere has this issue been expressed more clearly or forcefully than by Woodrow Wilson in certain sections of his "New Freedom." As a political science student and[Pg 100] expert—especially in American government—he recognizes the power that those who control economic life have over public matters and understands that their influence has increased to the point where it surpasses that of the political arena completely, causing the political system to be dominated by the organizers and leaders of industry.
"We know," writes Mr. Wilson in "The New Freedom," "that something intervenes between the people of the United States and the control of their own affairs at Washington. It is not the people who have been ruling there of late" (p. 28). "The masters of the government of the United States are the combined capitalists and manufacturers of the United States.... Suppose you go to Washington and try to get at your government. You will always find that while you are politely listened to, the men really consulted are the men who have the biggest stakes—the big bankers, the big manufacturers, the big masters of commerce, the heads of railroad corporations and of steamship corporations.... Every time it has come to a critical question, these gentlemen have been yielded to and their demands have been treated as the demands that should be followed as a matter of course. The government of the United States at present is a foster-child of the special interests" (p. 57-58). "The organization of business has become more centralized, vastly more centralized, than the political organization of the country itself" (p. 187). "An invisible empire has been set up above the forms of democracy" (p. 35). "We are all caught in a great economic system which is heartless" (p. 10).
"We know," writes Mr. Wilson in "The New Freedom," "that something stands between the people of the United States and their ability to control their own affairs in Washington. It's not the people who have been in charge lately" (p. 28). "The real rulers of the government of the United States are the combined capitalists and manufacturers.... If you go to Washington and try to connect with your government, you’ll always notice that while you’re politely heard, the people who are actually consulted are those with the largest stakes—the big bankers, the big manufacturers, the top business leaders, the heads of railroad and shipping companies.... Every time a crucial issue arises, these individuals are given preference, and their requests are treated as the ones that should be met as a matter of course. Currently, the government of the United States acts as a dependent of special interests" (p. 57-58). "The organization of business has become significantly more centralized than the political organization of the country itself" (p. 187). "An invisible empire has been established above the democratic frameworks" (p. 35). "We are all trapped in a vast economic system that lacks compassion" (p. 10).
This is the direct control exercised by the plutocracy over the machinery of government. Its indirect control is no less important, and is exercised in exactly the same way as in the case of the channels of public opinion.
This is the direct control exerted by the wealthy elite over the government machinery. Its indirect control is equally significant and is carried out in the same manner as that of public opinion channels.
Lawyers receive preferment and fees from business—there is no other large source of support for lawyers. Judges are chosen from among these same lawyers. Usually they are lawyers who have won preferment and [Pg 101]emolument. Legislators are lawyers and business men, or the representatives of lawyers and business men. The result is as logical as it is inevitable.
Lawyers gain favors and payment from businesses—there's no other major source of income for lawyers. Judges are selected from these same lawyers. Typically, they are lawyers who have received favors and [Pg 101] earnings. Legislators are lawyers and businesspeople, or they represent lawyers and businesspeople. The outcome is as reasonable as it is unavoidable.
The wealth owners control the machinery of government because they pay the taxes and provide the campaign funds. They control public officials because they have been, are, or hope to be, on the payrolls, or participants in the profits of industrial enterprises.
The wealthy hold power over the government because they pay the taxes and supply the campaign funds. They have influence over public officials because they have been, are, or hope to be, on the payrolls, or involved in the profits of business ventures.
10. It is "Their United States"
The man fighting for bread has little time to "turn his eyes up to the eternal stars." The western cult of efficiency makes no allowances for philosophic propensities. Its object is product and it is satisfied with nothing short of that sordid goal.
The man struggling for basic needs has little time to "look up at the eternal stars." The Western obsession with efficiency allows for no philosophical inclinations. Its aim is output, and it settles for nothing less than that grim objective.
The members of the wealth owning class are relieved from the food struggle. Their ownership of the social machinery guarantees them a secure income from which they need make no appeal. These privileges provide for them and theirs the leisure and the culture that are the only possible excuse for the existence of civilization.
The wealthy class is free from the struggle for food. Their control over social systems ensures a steady income that doesn’t require any pleading. These advantages give them and their families the free time and culture that are the only valid reasons for civilization to exist.
The propertied class, because it owns the jobs, the industrial products, the social surplus, the channels of public opinion and the political machinery also enjoys the opportunity that goes with adequately assured income, leisure and culture.
The wealthy class, since it controls the jobs, industrial products, social wealth, public opinion, and the political system, also benefits from the opportunities that come with a stable income, free time, and access to culture.
The members of the dominant economic class hold a key—property ownership—which opens the structure of social wealth. Those who have access to this key are the blessed ones. Theirs are the things of this world.
The members of the dominant economic class possess a key—property ownership—that unlocks the structure of social wealth. Those who have access to this key are the fortunate ones. They own the things of this world.
The property owners enjoy the fleshpots. They hold the vantage points. The vital forces are in their hands. Economically, politically, socially, they are supreme.
The property owners enjoy their riches. They have all the advantages. The crucial power is in their hands. Economically, politically, socially, they are in control.
If the control of material things can make a group secure, the wealth owners in the United States are secure. They hold property, prestige, power.
If controlling material possessions can make a group safe, then the wealthy in the United States are safe. They have property, status, and power.
The phrase "our United States" as used by the great[Pg 102] majority of the people is a misnomer. With the exception of a theoretically valuable but practically unimportant right called "freedom of contract," the majority of the wage earners in the United States have no more excuse for using the phrase "our United States" than the slaves in the South, before the war, for saying "our Southland."
The term "our United States," as used by the great[Pg 102] majority of people, is misleading. Aside from a theoretically valuable yet practically insignificant right known as "freedom of contract," most wage earners in the United States have no more reason to say "our United States" than slaves in the South did before the war when they referred to "our Southland."
The franchise is a potential power, making it theoretically possible for the electorate to take possession of the country. In practice, the franchise has had no such result. Quite the contrary, the masters of American life by a policy of chicanery and misrepresentation, advertise and support first one and then the other of the "Old Parties," both of which are led by the members of the propertied class or by their retainers. The people, deluded by the press, and ignorant of their real interests, go to the polls year after year and vote for representatives that represent, in all of their interests, the special privileged classes.
The right to vote is a powerful tool that could theoretically allow citizens to take control of the country. In reality, it hasn’t worked out that way. Instead, the leaders of American society, through manipulation and deceit, promote and back one of the "Old Parties" after another, both of which are run by the wealthy or their supporters. The public, misled by the media and unaware of their true interests, goes to the polls every year and votes for representatives who, in all their actions, serve the interests of the privileged classes.
The economic and social reorganization of the United States during the past fifty years has gone fast and far. The system of perpetual (fee simple) private ownership of the resources has concentrated the control over the natural resources in a small group, not of individuals, but of corporations; has created a new form of social master, in the form of a land-tool-job owner; has thus made possible a type of absentee-landlordism more effective and less human than were any of its predecessors and has decreased the responsibility at the same time that it has augmented the power of the owning group. These changes have been an integral part of a general economic transformation that has occupied the chief energies of the ablest men of the community for the past two generations.
The economic and social restructuring of the United States over the last fifty years has progressed rapidly and significantly. The ongoing practice of private ownership of resources has concentrated control over natural resources in a small group, not of individuals, but of corporations; it has created a new form of social authority, shaped like a land-tool-job owner; this has enabled a more effective and less personal type of absentee landlordism than any that came before it and has reduced accountability while increasing the power of the owning group. These changes have been a crucial part of a broader economic transformation that has absorbed the main efforts of the most capable individuals in the community for the past two generations.
The country of many farms, villages and towns, and of a few cities, with opportunity free and easy of access, has become a country of highly organized concentrated wealth power, owned by a small fraction of the people and controlled by a tiny minority of the owners for their benefit and profit. The country which was rightfully called "our United States" in 1840, by 1920 was "their United States" in every important sense of the word.
The country filled with farms, villages, and towns, along with a few cities, where opportunities were once open and accessible, has transformed into a nation of highly organized concentrated wealth, owned by a small percentage of the population and controlled by a tiny group of owners for their own benefit and profit. The nation that was rightly referred to as "our United States" in 1840 had, by 1920, become "their United States" in every significant sense of the term.
FOOTNOTES:
IX. THE DIVINE RIGHT OF PROPERTY
1. Land Ownership and Liberty
The owners of American wealth have been molded gradually into a ruling class. Years of brutal, competitive, economic struggle solidified their ranks,—distinguishing friend from enemy; clarifying economic laws, and demonstrating the importance of coördination in economic affairs. Economic control, once firmly established, opened before the wealth owning class an opportunity to dominate the entire field of public life.
The owners of American wealth have gradually become a ruling class. Years of fierce, competitive economic struggle solidified their ranks—separating friends from foes, clarifying economic principles, and highlighting the importance of coordination in economic matters. Once economic control was firmly established, it created an opportunity for the wealth-owning class to dominate all aspects of public life.
Before the property owners could feel secure in their possessions, steps must be taken to transmute the popular ideas regarding "property rights" into a public opinion that would permit the concentration of important property in the hands of a small owning class, at the same time that it held to the conviction that society, without privately owned land and machinery, was unthinkable.
Before property owners could feel secure in what they owned, measures needed to be taken to change the common beliefs about "property rights" into a public opinion that would allow significant assets to be concentrated in the hands of a small owning class, while still maintaining the belief that society without privately owned land and machinery was unimaginable.
Many of the leading spirits among the colonists had come to America in the hope of realizing the ideal of "Every man a farm, and every farm a man." Upon this principle they believed that it would be possible to set up the free government which so many were seeking in those dark days of the divine right of kings.
Many of the influential figures among the colonists came to America with the hope of achieving the ideal of "Every man a farm, and every farm a man." Based on this principle, they believed it would be possible to establish the free government that so many were looking for during those dark times of the divine right of kings.
For many years after the organization of the Federal Government men spoke of the public domain as if it were to last indefinitely. As late as 1832 Henry Clay, in a discussion of the public lands, could say, "We should rejoice that this bountiful resource possessed by our country, remains in almost undiminished quantity." Later in the same speech he referred to the public lands as being "liberally offered,—in exhaustless quantities, and at [Pg 104]moderate prices, enriching individuals and tending to the rapid improvement of the country."[41]
For many years after the establishment of the Federal Government, people talked about the public domain as if it would last forever. As recently as 1832, Henry Clay, while discussing public lands, remarked, "We should celebrate that this abundant resource our country has remains in nearly unchanged amounts." Later in the same speech, he described the public lands as being "freely available—in endless supply, and at [Pg 104]affordable prices, benefiting individuals and contributing to the rapid development of the country."[41]
The land rose in price as settlers came in greater numbers. Land booms developed. Speculation was rife. Efforts were made to secure additional concessions from the Government. It was in this debate, where the public land was referred to as "refuse land" that Henry Clay felt called upon to remind his fellow-legislators of the significance and growing value of the public land. He said, "A friend of mine in this city bought in Illinois last fall about two thousand acres of this refuse land at the minimum price, for which he has lately refused six dollars per acre.... It is a business, a very profitable business, at which fortunes are made in the new states, to purchase these refuse lands and without improving them to sell them at large advances."[42]
The land prices increased as more settlers arrived. Land booms occurred. Speculation was everywhere. There were attempts to secure more concessions from the government. In this debate, where public land was called "refuse land," Henry Clay felt the need to remind his fellow lawmakers about the importance and rising value of public land. He said, "A friend of mine in this city bought around two thousand acres of this refuse land in Illinois last fall at the minimum price, and he has recently turned down six dollars per acre for it... It's a business, a very profitable business, where fortunes are made in the new states by buying these refuse lands and selling them for much higher prices without even improving them." [42]
A century ago, while it was still almost a wilderness, Illinois began to feel the pressure of limited resources—a pressure which has increased to such a point that it has completely revolutionized the system of society that was known to the men who established the Government of the United States.
A hundred years ago, when it was still mostly wild, Illinois started to experience the strain of limited resources—a strain that has intensified to the point where it has completely transformed the society that the founders of the United States knew.
This early record of a mid-western land boom, with Illinois land at six dollars an acre, tells the story of everything that was to follow. Even in 1832 there was not enough of the good land to go around. Already the community was dividing itself into two classes—those who could get good land and those who could not. A wise man, understanding the part played by economic forces in determining the fate of a people, might have said to Henry Clay on that June day in 1832, "Friend, you have pronounced the obituary of American liberty."
This early account of a land boom in the Midwest, with Illinois land priced at six dollars an acre, reveals the story of what was to come. Even in 1832, there wasn’t enough good land to meet demand. The community was already splitting into two classes—those who could acquire good land and those who couldn’t. A wise person, recognizing how economic forces shape the destiny of a society, might have told Henry Clay on that June day in 1832, "Friend, you have declared the death of American liberty."
Some wise man might have spoken thus, but how strange the utterance would have sounded! There was so much[Pg 105] land, and all history seemed to guarantee the beneficial results that are derived from individual land ownership. The democracies of Greece and Rome were built upon such a foundation. The yeomanry of England had proved her pride and stay. In Europe the free workers in the towns had been the guardians of the rights of the people. Throughout historic times, liberty has taken root where there is an economic foundation for the freedom which each man feels he has a right to demand.
Some wise person might have said something like this, but how strange it would have sounded! There was so much[Pg 105] land, and all of history seemed to promise the positive outcomes that come from private land ownership. The democracies of Greece and Rome were built on this principle. The independent farmers of England had proven to be her pride and support. In Europe, the free workers in the cities had been the protectors of people's rights. Throughout history, liberty has thrived where there is an economic base for the freedom that everyone feels entitled to demand.
2. Security of "Acquisitions"
Feudal Europe depended for its living upon agriculture. The Feudal System had concentrated the ownership of practically all of the valuable agricultural land in the hands of the small group of persons which ruled because it controlled economic opportunity. The power of this class rested on its ownership of the resource upon which the majority of the people depended for a livelihood.
Feudal Europe relied on agriculture for survival. The Feudal System had concentrated ownership of almost all the valuable agricultural land in the hands of a small ruling class that controlled economic opportunities. The power of this class was based on its ownership of the resources that most people depended on for their livelihood.
The Feudal System was transplanted to England, but it never took deep root there. When in 1215 A. D. (only a century and a half after the Great William had made his effort to feudalize England) King John signed the Magna Carta, Feudalism proper gave way to landlordism—the basis of English economic life from that time to this.
The Feudal System was brought to England, but it never really established itself there. When King John signed the Magna Carta in 1215 A.D. (just a century and a half after William the Conqueror tried to feudalize England), true Feudalism was replaced by landlordism—the foundation of English economic life from then until now.
The system of English landlordism (which showed itself at its worst in the absentee landlordism of Ireland) differed from Feudalism in this essential respect,—Feudalism was based upon the idea of the divine right of kings. English landlordism was based on the idea of divine right of property. English landlordism is the immediate ancestor of the property concept that is universally accepted in the business world of to-day.
The system of English landlordism (which was at its worst in the absentee landlordism of Ireland) differed from feudalism in one key way: feudalism was rooted in the idea of the divine right of kings, while English landlordism was based on the idea of the divine right of property. English landlordism is the direct predecessor of the property concept that is widely accepted in today's business world.
The evils of Feudalism and of landlordism were well known to the American colonists who were under the impression that they arose not from the fact of ownership, but from the concentration of ownership. The resources[Pg 106] of the new world seemed limitless, and the possibility that landlordism might show its ugly head on this side of the Atlantic was too remote for serious consideration.
The problems of feudalism and landlordism were well understood by the American colonists, who believed these issues stemmed not from ownership itself, but from how concentrated that ownership was. The resources[Pg 106] of the new world appeared infinite, and the idea that landlordism could become a reality on this side of the Atlantic seemed too unlikely to worry about.
With the independence of the United States assured after the War of 1812; with the growth of industry, and the coming of tens of thousands of new settlers, the future of democracy seemed bright. Daniel Webster characterized the outlook in 1821 by saying, "A country of such vast extent, with such varieties of soil and climate, with so much public spirit and private enterprise, with a population increasing so much beyond former examples, ... so free in its institutions, so mild in its laws, so secure in the title it confers on every man to his own acquisitions,—needs nothing but time and peace to carry it forward to almost any point of advancement."[43]
With the independence of the United States guaranteed after the War of 1812; with the rise of industry and the arrival of tens of thousands of new settlers, the future of democracy appeared promising. Daniel Webster summed up the outlook in 1821 by stating, "A country of such vast extent, with such diverse soil and climate, with so much public spirit and private initiative, with a population growing significantly beyond previous examples, ... so free in its institutions, so lenient in its laws, so secure in the rights it grants every person to their own earnings,—needs nothing but time and peace to bring it forward to nearly any level of progress."[43]
"So free in its institutions, so mild in its laws, so secure in the title it confers on every man to his own acquisitions,"—the words were prophetic. At the moment when they were uttered the forces were busy that were destined to realize Webster's dream, on an imperial scale, at the expense of the freedom which he prized. Men were free to get what they could, and once having secured it, they were safeguarded in its possession. Property ownership was a virtue universally commended. Constitutions were drawn and laws were framed to guarantee to property owners the rights to their property, even in cases where this property consisted of the bodies of their fellow men.
"So free in its institutions, so gentle in its laws, so assured in the right it gives every person to their own belongings,"—these words were prophetic. At the time they were spoken, the forces were already at work that would fulfill Webster's vision, on a grand scale, at the cost of the freedom he valued. People were free to acquire whatever they could, and once they had it, they were protected in their ownership. Owning property was a quality widely praised. Constitutions were written and laws were established to ensure that property owners had rights to their property, even in situations where that property included the bodies of other human beings.
The movement toward the protection of property rights has been progressive. Webster as a representative of the dominant interests of the country a hundred years ago rejoiced that every man had a secure title to "his own acquisitions," at a time when the property of the country was generally owned by those who had expended some personal effort in acquiring it. It was a long step from these personal acquisitions to the tens of billions of wealth[Pg 107] in the hands of twentieth century American corporations. Daniel Webster helped to bridge the gap. He was responsible, at least in part, for the Dartmouth College Decision (1816) in which the Supreme Court ruled that a charter, granted by a state, is a contract that cannot be modified at will by the state. This decision made the corporation, once created and chartered, a free agent. Then came the Fourteenth Amendment with its provision that "no state shall make or enforce any law which shall abridge the privileges or immunities of citizens of the United States; nor shall any state deprive any person of life, liberty or property, without due process of law." The amendment was intended to benefit negroes. It has been used to place property ownership first among the American beatitudes.
The movement to protect property rights has progressed significantly. Over a hundred years ago, Webster, representing the prevailing interests of the nation, celebrated that every person had a secure title to "their own belongings," during a time when most property was owned by those who had put in personal effort to acquire it. This represented a big leap from individual ownership to the vast amounts of wealth[Pg 107] accumulated by American corporations in the twentieth century. Daniel Webster played a key role in bridging that gap. He was partly responsible for the Dartmouth College Decision (1816), where the Supreme Court ruled that a charter granted by a state is a contract that the state cannot change arbitrarily. This decision made a corporation, once established and chartered, an independent entity. Then came the Fourteenth Amendment, which states, "no state shall make or enforce any law which shall abridge the privileges or immunities of citizens of the United States; nor shall any state deprive any person of life, liberty or property, without due process of law." Although the amendment was originally intended to benefit African Americans, it has been utilized to prioritize property ownership among American rights.
Corporations are "persons" in the eyes of the law. When the state of California tried to tax the property of the Southern Pacific Railroad at a rate different from that which it imposed on persons, the Supreme Court declared the law unconstitutional. This decision, coupled with that in the Dartmouth College Case secured for a corporation "the same immunities as any other person; and since the charter creating a corporation is a contract, whose obligation cannot be impaired by the one-sided act of a legislature, its constitutional position, as property holder, is much stronger than anywhere in Europe." These decisions "have had the effect of placing the modern industrial corporation in an almost impregnable constitutional position."[44]
Corporations are considered "people" under the law. When California attempted to tax the Southern Pacific Railroad's property at a different rate than what it charged individuals, the Supreme Court ruled the law unconstitutional. This ruling, along with the one in the Dartmouth College Case, established that a corporation is entitled to "the same privileges as any other person; and since the charter that creates a corporation is a contract, its obligations cannot be diminished by a single action of a legislature, its constitutional status as a property owner is much stronger than in any European country." These rulings "have resulted in putting the modern industrial corporation in a nearly unassailable constitutional position."[44]
Surrounded by constitutional guarantees, armed with legal privileges and prerogatives and employing the language of liberty, the private property interests in the United States have gone forward from victory to victory, extending their power as they increased and concentrated their possessions.
Surrounded by constitutional protections, backed by legal rights and special privileges, and using the language of freedom, private property interests in the United States have progressed from one victory to another, growing their influence as they increased and consolidated their assets.
3. Safeguarding Property Rights
The efforts of Daniel Webster and his contemporaries to protect "acquisitions" have been seconded, with extraordinary ability, by business organizers, accountants, lawyers and bankers, who have broadened the field of their endeavors until it includes not merely "acquisitions," but all "property rights." Daniel Webster lived before the era of corporations. He thought of "acquisitions" as property secured through the personal efforts of the human being who possessed it. To-day more than half of the total property and probably more than three-quarters of productive wealth is owned by corporations. It required ability and foresight to extend the right of "acquisitions" to the rights of corporate stocks and bonds. The leaders among the property owners possessed the necessary qualifications. They did their work masterfully, and to-day corporate property rights are more securely protected than were the rights of acquisitions a hundred years ago.
The efforts of Daniel Webster and his contemporaries to protect "acquisitions" have been greatly enhanced by business organizers, accountants, lawyers, and bankers, who have expanded their focus to include not just "acquisitions," but all "property rights." Daniel Webster lived before the age of corporations. He viewed "acquisitions" as property obtained through the personal efforts of the individual who owned it. Today, more than half of all property and likely over three-quarters of productive wealth is owned by corporations. It took skill and foresight to extend the right of "acquisitions" to include corporate stocks and bonds. The leaders among property owners had the required expertise. They executed their tasks brilliantly, and now corporate property rights are more securely protected than the rights of acquisitions were a hundred years ago.
The safeguards that have been thrown about property are simple and effective. They arose quite naturally out of the rapidly developing structure of industrialism.
The protections put in place for property are straightforward and effective. They emerged naturally from the quickly evolving framework of industrialism.
First—There was an immense increase in the amount of property and of surplus in the hands of the wealth-owning class. After the new industry was brought into being with the Industrial Revolution, economic life no longer depended so exclusively upon agricultural land. Coal, iron, copper, cement, and many other resources could now be utilized, making possible a wider field for property rights. Again, the amount of surplus that could be produced by one worker, with the assistance of a machine, was much greater than under the agricultural system.
First—There was a huge increase in the amount of property and surplus held by the wealthy class. After the new industry emerged during the Industrial Revolution, the economy was no longer solely reliant on agricultural land. Resources like coal, iron, copper, cement, and many others could now be used, creating a broader scope for property rights. Additionally, the surplus that one worker could produce with the help of a machine was significantly greater than what was possible under the agricultural system.
Second—The new method of conducting economic affairs gave the property owners greater security of possession. Property holders always have been fearful that[Pg 109] some fate might overtake their property, forcing them into the ranks of the non-possessors. When property was in the form of bullion or jewels, the danger of loss was comparatively great. The Feudal aristocracy, with its land-holdings, was more secure. Land-holdings were also more satisfactory. Jewels and plate do not pay any rent, but tenants do. Thus the owner of land had security plus a regular income.
Second—The new way of managing economic matters provided property owners with greater security in their ownership. Property owners have always worried that[Pg 109] something could happen to their property, pushing them into the group of non-owners. When property consisted of gold or jewels, the risk of loss was relatively high. The Feudal aristocracy, with its land ownership, was more secure. Owning land was also more beneficial. Jewels and silverware don’t generate any income, but tenants do. Therefore, a landowner had both security and a steady income.
The corporation facilitated possession by providing a means (stocks and bonds) whereby the property owner was under no obligation other than that of clipping coupons or cashing interest checks upon "securities" that are matters of public record; issued by corporations that make detailed financial reports, and that are subject to vigorous public inspection and, in the cases of banks and other financial organizations, to the most stringent regulation.
The corporation made it easy to own something by offering stocks and bonds, allowing the property owner to only worry about collecting coupons or cashing interest checks on "securities" that are publicly recorded; issued by companies that provide detailed financial reports and are closely monitored by the public, and in the case of banks and other financial institutions, are strictly regulated.
Third—Greater permanence has been secured for property advantages. Corporations have perpetual, uninterrupted life. The deaths of persons do not affect them. The corporation also overcame the danger of the dissipation of property in the process of "three generations from shirt sleeves to shirt sleeves." The worthless son of the thrifty parent may still be able to squander his inheritance, but that simply means a transfer of the title to his stocks and bonds. The property itself remains intact.
Third—Property advantages are more permanent now. Corporations have a never-ending, continuous existence. The deaths of individuals don’t impact them. The corporation also solved the issue of property loss in the cycle of "three generations from shirt sleeves to shirt sleeves." The unworthy child of a hardworking parent might still waste their inheritance, but that only means the ownership of their stocks and bonds changes hands. The property itself stays safe.
Fourth—Property has secured a claim on income that is, in the last analysis, prior to the claim of the worker.
Fourth—Property has established a right to income that is, ultimately, ahead of the worker's claim.
When a man ran his own business, investing his capital, putting back part of his earnings, and taking from the business only what he needed for his personal expenses, "profits" were a matter of good fortune. There were "good years" and "bad years," when profits were high or low. Many years closed with no profit at all. The average farmer still handles his business in that way.
When a man ran his own business, investing his money, reinvesting some of his earnings, and taking only what he needed for his personal expenses, "profits" were largely a matter of luck. There were "good years" and "bad years," when profits were high or low. Many years ended with no profit at all. The average farmer still runs his business this way.
The incorporation of business, and the issuing of bonds and stocks has revolutionized this situation. It is no longer possible to "wait till things pick up." If the business has[Pg 110] issued a million in bonds, at five per cent, there is an interest charge of $50,000 that must be met each year. There may be no money to lay out for repairs and needed improvements, but if the business is to remain solvent, it must pay the interest on its bonds.
The formation of businesses and the issuance of bonds and stocks has changed everything. You can’t just "wait until things get better" anymore. If a business has[Pg 110] issued a million in bonds at five percent, there’s an annual interest payment of $50,000 that needs to be covered. There might not be any funds available for repairs and necessary upgrades, but if the business wants to stay afloat, it has to pay the interest on its bonds.
Businesses that are issuing securities to the public face the same situation with regard to their stocks. Wise directors see to it that a regular rate, rather than a high rate of dividends, is paid. Regularity means greater certainty and stability, hence better consideration from the investing public.
Businesses that are offering securities to the public encounter the same issues with their stocks. Smart directors ensure that a consistent rate, rather than a high rate of dividends, is paid out. Consistency brings greater certainty and stability, which leads to better reception from investors.
Fifth—The practices of the modern economic world have gone far to increase the security of property rights.
Fifth—The practices of today's economic world have greatly improved the security of property rights.
Business men have worked ardently to "stabilize" business. They have insisted upon the importance of "business sanity;" of conservatism in finance; of the returns due a man who risks his wealth in a business venture; and of the fundamental necessity of maintaining business on a sound basis. After centuries of experiment they have evolved what they regard as a safe and sane method of financial business procedure. Every successful business man tried to live up to the following well-established formula.
Businesspeople have worked hard to "stabilize" their enterprises. They have emphasized the importance of "business sanity," being conservative with finances, and ensuring that those who invest their wealth in business ventures receive fair returns. They recognize that maintaining a solid foundation for business is essential. After centuries of trial and error, they have developed what they believe to be a safe and rational approach to financial operations. Every successful entrepreneur strives to adhere to this well-established formula.
First, he pays out of his total returns, or gross receipts, the ordinary costs of doing business—materials, labor, repairs and the like. These payments are known as running expenses or up-keep.
First, he deducts the regular costs of running the business from his total returns, or gross income—like materials, labor, repairs, and similar expenses. These payments are called operating expenses or upkeep.
Second, after up-keep charges are paid he takes the remainder, called gross income, and pays out of it the fixed charges—taxes, insurance, interest and depreciation.
Second, after maintenance costs are covered, he uses the remaining amount, known as gross income, to pay the fixed expenses—taxes, insurance, interest, and depreciation.
Third, the business man, having paid all of the necessary expenses of doing business (the running expenses and the fixed charges), has left a fund (net income) which, roughly speaking, is the profits of the business. Out of this net income, dividends are paid, improvements and extensions of the plant are provided for.
Third, the businessman, having covered all the necessary costs of running the business (operating expenses and fixed charges), has a remaining amount (net income) which, broadly speaking, represents the profits of the business. From this net income, dividends are paid, and funds are allocated for improvements and expansions of the facility.
Fourth, the careful business man increases the stability of his business by adding something to his surplus or undivided profits.
Fourth, the careful businessman boosts the stability of his business by adding something to his surplus or retained earnings.
The operating statistics of the United Steel Corporation for 1918 illustrate the principle:
The operating statistics of the United Steel Corporation for 1918 illustrate the principle:
1. | Gross Receipts | $1,744,312,163 |
Manufacturing and Operating expenses | ||
including ordinary repairs | 1,178,032,665 | |
——————— | ||
2. | Gross Earnings | $ 566,279,498 |
Other income | 40,474,823 | |
——————— | ||
$ 606,754,321 | ||
General Expense, (including commission | ||
and selling expense, taxes, etc.) | 337,077,986 | |
Interest, depreciation, sinking fund, etc. | 144,358,958 | |
——————— | ||
3. | Net Income | $ 125,317,377 |
Dividends | 96,382,027 | |
——————— | ||
4. | Surplus for the year | $ 28,935,350 |
Total surplus | 460,596,154 |
Like every carefully handled business, the Steel Corporation,—
Like any well-managed business, the Steel Corporation,—
1. Paid its running expenses,
1. Covered its operating costs,
2. Paid its fixed obligations,
2. Met its fixed financial commitments,
3. Divided up its profits,
3. Distributed its profits,
4. And kept a nest egg.
4. And set aside some money for emergencies.
The effectiveness of such means of stabilizing property income is illustrated by a compilation (published in the Wall Street Journal for August 7th, 1919) of the business of 104 American corporations between December 31, 1914, and December 31, 1918. The inventories—value of property owned—had increased from 1,192 millions to 2,624 millions of dollars; the gain in surplus, during the four years,[Pg 112] was 1,941 millions; the increase in "working capital" was 1,876 millions. These corporations, representing only a small fraction of the total business of the country, had added billions to their property values during the four years.
The effectiveness of these methods for stabilizing property income is shown in a report (published in the Wall Street Journal on August 7, 1919) on the performance of 104 American corporations from December 31, 1914, to December 31, 1918. The value of their inventories—property they owned—rose from 1,192 million to 2,624 million dollars; the surplus gained over the four years was 1,941 million; and "working capital" increased by 1,876 million. These corporations, which made up only a small part of the overall business in the country, added billions to their property values during those four years.
These various items,—up-keep; depreciation; insurance; taxes; interest; dividends and surplus,—are recognized universally by legislatures and courts as "legitimate" outlays. They, therefore, are elements that are always present in the computation of a "fair" price. The cost to the consumer of coffee, shoes, meat, blankets, coal and transportation are all figured on such a basis. Hence, it will be seen that each time the consumer buys a pair of shoes or a pound of meat, he is paying, with part of his money, for the stabilizing of property.
These different items—maintenance; depreciation; insurance; taxes; interest; dividends; and surplus—are recognized universally by lawmakers and courts as "legitimate" expenses. Therefore, they are factors that are always considered in calculating a "fair" price. The cost to the consumer for coffee, shoes, meat, blankets, coal, and transportation is all figured based on this. Thus, it can be seen that every time a consumer buys a pair of shoes or a pound of meat, they are using part of their money to help stabilize property.
Fifth. Property titles under this system are rendered immortal. A thousand dollars, invested in 1880 in 5 per cent. 40 year bonds, will pay to the owner $2,000 in interest by 1920, at which time the owner gets his original thousand back again to be re-invested so long as he and his descendants care to do so. The dollar, invested in the business of the steel corporation, by the technical processes of bookkeeping, is constantly renewed. Not only does it pay a return to the owner, but literally, it never dies.
Fifth. Property titles under this system are made everlasting. A thousand dollars invested in 1880 in 5 percent, 40-year bonds will earn the owner $2,000 in interest by 1920, at which point the owner gets their original thousand back to reinvest for as long as they and their descendants want to. The dollar invested in the steel corporation's business, through the technical processes of accounting, is continually refreshed. Not only does it provide a return to the owner, but it also never truly dies.
The community is built upon labor. Its processes are continued and its wealth is re-created by labor. The men who work on the railroad keep the road operating; those who own the railroad owe to it no personal fealty, and perform upon it no personal service. If the worker dies, the train must stop until he is replaced; if the owner dies, the clerk records a change of name in the registry books.
The community relies on work. Its operations continue and its wealth is generated through labor. The people who work on the railroad keep it running; those who own the railroad have no personal loyalty to it and don’t provide any personal service. If a worker dies, the train has to stop until they’re replaced; if the owner dies, the clerk just updates the name in the registry.
The well-ordered society will encourage work. It will aim to develop enthusiasm, to stimulate activity. Nevertheless, in "practical America" a scheme of economic organization is being perfected under which the cream of life goes to the owners. They have the amplest opportunities. They enjoy the first fruits.
The organized society will promote work. It will strive to generate enthusiasm and encourage action. However, in "practical America," a system of economic organization is being refined where the best of life benefits the owners. They have the greatest opportunities. They reap the initial rewards.
4. Property Rights and Civilization
Under these circumstances, it is easy to see how "the rights of property" soon comes to mean the same thing as "civilization," and how "the preservation of law and order" is always interpreted as the protection of property. With a community organized on a basis which renders property rights supreme in all essential particulars, it is but natural that the perpetuation of these rights should be regarded as the perpetuation of civilization itself.
Under these circumstances, it’s easy to understand how "property rights" quickly come to mean the same thing as "civilization," and how "maintaining law and order" is always seen as protecting property. In a community structured in a way that puts property rights above everything else, it's only natural that preserving these rights is viewed as preserving civilization itself.
The present organization of economic life in the United States permits the wealth owners through their ownership to live without doing any work upon the work done by their fellows. As recipients of property income (rent, interest and dividends) they have a return for which they need perform no service,—a return that allows them to "live on their income."
The current setup of the economy in the United States allows those who own wealth to live off the work of others without doing any work themselves. As beneficiaries of property income (like rent, interest, and dividends), they receive money without having to provide any services—money that enables them to "live off their income."
The man who fails to assist in productive activity gives nothing of himself in return for the food, clothing and shelter which he enjoys,—that is, he lives on the labor of others. Where some have sowed and reaped, hammered and drilled, he has regaled himself on the fruits of their toil, while never toiling himself.
The man who doesn't contribute to productive work offers nothing in exchange for the food, clothing, and shelter he enjoys—meaning he depends on the labor of others. While some have planted and harvested, worked hard and created, he has indulged in the benefits of their effort without ever putting in any of his own.
The matter appears most clearly in the case of an heir to an estate. The father dies, leaving his son the title deeds to a piece of city land. If he has no confidence in his son's business ability or if his son is a minor, he may leave the land in trust, and have it administered in his son's interest by some well organized trust company. The father did not make the land, though he did buy it. The son neither made nor bought the land, it merely came to him; and yet each year he receives a rent-payment upon which he is able to live comfortably without doing any work. It must at once be apparent that this son of his father, economically speaking, performs no function in the community, but merely takes from the community an annual toll or rental based on his ownership of a part of the[Pg 114] land upon, which his fellowmen depend for a living. Of what will this toll consist? Of bread, shoes, motor-cars, cigars, books and pictures,—the products of the labor of other men.
The situation is most clear in the case of an heir to an estate. The father passes away, leaving his son the title deeds to a piece of city land. If he doesn't trust his son's business skills or if his son is a minor, he might place the land in trust, having it managed in his son's best interest by a reputable trust company. The father didn't create the land, although he did purchase it. The son neither created nor bought the land; it just came to him. Yet each year, he receives rent payments that allow him to live comfortably without doing any work. It's obvious that this son, from an economic standpoint, doesn't contribute to the community; he simply collects an annual fee or rent based on his ownership of a portion of the[Pg 114] land that others rely on for their livelihoods. What does this fee consist of? Bread, shoes, cars, cigars, books, and art—the products of others' labor.
This son of his father is living on his income,—supported by the labor of other people. He performs no labor himself, and yet he is able to exist comfortably in a world where all of the things which are consumed are the direct or indirect product of the labor of some human being.
This son of his father is living off his income—supported by the work of others. He doesn’t do any work himself, yet he manages to live comfortably in a world where everything consumed is the direct or indirect result of someone’s labor.
Living on one's income is not a new social experience, but it is relatively new in the United States. The practice found a reasonably effective expression in the feudalism of medieval Europe. It has been brought to extraordinary perfection under the industrialism of Twentieth Century America.
Living on one's income isn't a new social experience, but it's fairly recent in the United States. The idea was fairly effective in the feudalism of medieval Europe. It's been taken to new heights under the industrialism of Twentieth Century America.
Imagine the feelings of the early inhabitants of the American colonies toward those few gentlemen who set themselves up as economically superior beings, and who insisted upon living without any labor, upon the labor performed by their fellows. It was against the suggestion of such a practice that Captain John Smith vociferated his famous "He that will not work, neither shall he eat." The suggestion that some should share in the proceeds of community life without participating in the hardships that were involved in making a living seemed preposterous in those early days.
Imagine the feelings of the early inhabitants of the American colonies toward those few gentlemen who positioned themselves as economically superior and insisted on living without any work, relying instead on the labor of others. It was in response to this idea that Captain John Smith famously proclaimed, "He that will not work, neither shall he eat." The notion that some people could benefit from community life without facing the struggles of earning a living seemed ridiculous in those early days.
To-day, living on one's income is accepted in every industrial center of the United States as one of the methods of gaining a livelihood. Some men and women work for a living. Other men and women own for a living.
To day, living on one's income is accepted in every industrial center of the United States as one of the ways to earn a living. Some people work to make money. Others own businesses to make money.
Workers are in most cases the humble people of the community. They do not live in the finest homes, eat the best food, wear the most elaborate clothing, or read, travel and enjoy the most of life.
Workers are often the everyday people in the community. They don’t live in the nicest homes, eat the best food, wear fancy clothes, or have the opportunity to read, travel, and enjoy life to the fullest.
The owners as a rule are the well-to-do part of the community. They derive much of all of their income from[Pg 115] investments. The return which they make to the community in services is small when compared with the income which they receive from their property holdings.
The owners are generally the more affluent members of the community. They get a large portion of their income from[Pg 115] investments. The services they provide to the community are minimal compared to the income they earn from their property holdings.
Living on one's income is becoming as much a part of American economic life as living by factory labor, or by mining, or by manufacturing, or by any other occupation upon which the community depends for its products. The difference between these occupations and living on one's income is that they are relatively menial, and it is relatively respectable, that is, they have won the disapprobation and it has won the approbation of American public opinion.
Living off your income is becoming just as common in American economic life as working in factories, mining, manufacturing, or any other job that the community relies on for its goods. The difference between these jobs and living off your income is that those jobs are seen as somewhat low-status, while living off your income is viewed as more respectable, having gained the approval of American public opinion.
The best general picture of the economic situation that permits a few people to live on their incomes, while the masses of the people work for a living, is contained in the reports of the Federal Commissioner of Internal Revenue. The figures for 1917 ("Statistics of Income for 1917" published August 1919) show that 3,472,890 persons filed returns, making one for each six families in the United States. Almost one half of the total number of returns made in 1917 were from persons whose income was between $1000 and $2000. There were 1,832,132 returns showing incomes of $2000 or more, one for each twelve families in the country.
The best overall view of the economic situation, where a few people can live off their incomes while the majority work to get by, can be found in the reports from the Federal Commissioner of Internal Revenue. The figures for 1917 ("Statistics of Income for 1917" published August 1919) show that 3,472,890 people filed tax returns, which is one for every six families in the United States. Almost half of all the returns filed in 1917 came from individuals earning between $1,000 and $2,000. There were 1,832,132 returns reporting incomes of $2,000 or more, which is one for every twelve families in the country.
The number of persons receiving the higher incomes is comparatively small. There were 270,666 incomes between $5,000 and $10,000; 30,391 between $10,000 and $25,000; 12,439 between $25,000 and $50,000. There were 432,662 returns (22 for each 1000 families in the United States) showing incomes of $5,000 or over; there were 161,996 returns (8 returns for each 1000 families) showing incomes of $10,000 or over; 49,494 showing incomes of $25,000 and over; 19,103 showing incomes of $50,000 and more. Thus the number of moderate and large incomes, compared with the total population of the country, was minute.
The number of people earning higher incomes is relatively small. There were 270,666 incomes between $5,000 and $10,000; 30,391 between $10,000 and $25,000; and 12,439 between $25,000 and $50,000. There were 432,662 tax returns (22 for every 1,000 families in the United States) showing incomes of $5,000 or more; 161,996 returns (8 returns for every 1,000 families) showing incomes of $10,000 or more; 49,494 showing incomes of $25,000 and above; and 19,103 showing incomes of $50,000 or more. Therefore, the number of moderate and high incomes, compared to the total population of the country, was tiny.
The portion of the report that is of particular interest, in so far as the present study is concerned, is that which presents a division of the total net income of those reporting $2,000 or more, into three classes—income from [Pg 116]personal service, income from business profits and income from the ownership of property.
The part of the report that is especially relevant to this study is the section that breaks down the total net income of those reporting $2,000 or more into three categories—income from [Pg 116]personal services, income from business profits, and income from property ownership.
Income Sources—1917
Amount of Income |
Per Cent of Total Income |
|
Source | ||
1. Income from personal serv- ice; salaries, wages; com- mission, bonuses, director's fees, etc |
$ 3,648,437,902 | 30.21 |
2. Income from business; busi- ness, trade, commerce, partnership, farming, and profits from sales of real estate, stocks, bonds, and other property |
3,958,670,028 | 32.77 |
3. Income from property; rents and royalties |
684,343,399 | 5.67 |
Interest on bonds, notes, etc. | 936,715,456 | 7.76 |
Dividends | 2,848,842,499 | 23.59 |
Total from Property | 4,469,901,354 | 37.02 |
4. Total income | 12,077,009,284 | 100.00 |
Those persons who have incomes of $2,000 or more receive 30 cents on the dollar in the form of wages and salaries; 33 cents in the form of business profits, and 37 cents in the form of incomes from the ownership of property. The dividend payments alone—to this group of property owners, are equal to three quarters of the total returns for personal service.
Those individuals who earn $2,000 or more receive 30 cents for every dollar as wages and salaries, 33 cents as business profits, and 37 cents as income from property ownership. The dividend payments alone to this group of property owners equal three-quarters of the total earnings from personal services.
These figures refer, of course, to all those in receipt of $2,000 or more per year. Obviously, the smaller incomes are in the form of wages, salaries, and business profits, while the larger incomes take the form of rent, interest and dividends. This is made apparent by a study of the detailed tables published in connection with the "Income Statistics for 1916."
These figures refer, of course, to everyone earning $2,000 or more per year. Clearly, the lower incomes come from wages, salaries, and business profits, while the higher incomes come from rent, interest, and dividends. This is evident from a review of the detailed tables published alongside the "Income Statistics for 1916."
Among those of small incomes—$5,000 to $10,000—nearly half of the income was derived from personal services. The proportion of the income resulting from personal service diminished steadily as the incomes rose until, in the highest income group—those receiving $2,000,000 or more per year, less than one-half of one per cent. was the result of personal service while more than 99 per cent. of the incomes came from property ownership.
Among people with lower incomes—$5,000 to $10,000—almost half of their income came from personal services. The share of income from personal services gradually decreased as incomes increased, until, in the highest income group—those earning $2,000,000 or more per year—less than half of one percent came from personal services, while over 99 percent of their income was from property ownership.
A small portion of the American people are in receipt of incomes that necessitate a report to the revenue officers. Among those persons, a small number are in receipt of incomes that might be termed large—incomes of $10,000 or over, for example. Among these persons with large incomes the majority of the income is secured in the form of rent, interest, dividends and profits. The higher the income group, the larger is the percentage of the income that comes from property holdings.
A small part of the American population earns incomes that require reporting to tax authorities. Among these individuals, a few have what could be considered large incomes—such as those earning $10,000 or more. For these people with high incomes, most of their earnings come from rent, interest, dividends, and profits. The higher the income bracket, the larger the percentage of income derived from property investments.
The economic system that exists at the present time in the United States places a premium on property ownership. The recipients of the large incomes are the holders of the large amounts of property.
The current economic system in the United States values property ownership highly. Those who earn substantial incomes are typically the owners of significant amounts of property.
Large incomes are property incomes. The rich are rich because they are property owners. Furthermore, the organization of present-day business makes the owner of property more secure—far more secure in his income, than is the worker who produces the wealth out of which the property income is paid.
Large incomes come from property. The wealthy are wealthy because they own property. Additionally, the way modern businesses are set up gives property owners much more security in their income than the workers who create the wealth that funds those property incomes.
5. Plutocracy
The owning class in the United States is established on an economic basis,—the private ownership of the earth. No more solid foundation for class integrity and class power has ever been discovered.
The owning class in the United States is built on an economic foundation—the private ownership of land. No stronger basis for maintaining class unity and power has ever been found.
The owners of the United States are powerfully entrenched. Operating through the corporation, its members have secured possession of the bulk of the more useful[Pg 118] resources, the important franchises and the productive capital. Where they do not own outright, they control. The earth, in America, is the landlords and the fullness thereof. They own the productive machinery, and because they own they are able to secure a vast annual income in return for their bare ownership.
The owners of the United States are deeply established. Through the corporation, its members have secured most of the valuable[Pg 118] resources, key franchises, and productive capital. Where they don’t own something outright, they still control it. In America, the land belongs to the landlords and all that comes with it. They own the means of production, and because of their ownership, they are able to generate a substantial annual income just from owning it.
Families which enjoy property income have one great common interest—that of perpetuating and continuing the property income; hence the "cohesion of wealth." "The cohesion of wealth" is a force that welds individuals and families who receive property income into a unified group or class.
Families that benefit from property income share a significant common interest: maintaining and extending that income. This is what’s meant by “cohesion of wealth.” “Cohesion of wealth” is a force that unites individuals and families who receive property income into a single group or class.
The cohesion of wealth is a force of peculiar social significance. It might perhaps be referred to as the class consciousness of the wealthy except that it manifests itself among people who have recently acquired wealth, more violently, in some cases, than it appears among those whose families have possessed wealth for generations. Then, the cohesion of wealth is not always an intelligent force. In the case of some persons it is largely instinctive.
The unity of wealth is a significant social force. It could be called the class awareness of the rich, but it actually shows up more intensely among those who have just gained wealth compared to those whose families have been wealthy for generations. Additionally, the unity of wealth isn't always a thoughtful force. For some people, it is mostly driven by instinct.
Originally, the cohesion of wealth expresses itself instinctively among a group of wealth owners. They may be competing fiercely as in the case of a group of local banks, department stores, or landlords, but let a common enemy appear, with a proposition for currency reform, labor legislation or land taxation and in a twinkling the conflicting interests are thrown to the winds and the property owners are welded into a coherent, unified group. This is the beginning of a wealth cohesion which develops rapidly into a wealth consciousness.
Originally, the unity of wealth shows up naturally among a group of wealthy individuals. They might be competing hard against each other, like in the case of local banks, department stores, or landlords, but when a common threat arises, like a proposal for currency reform, labor laws, or land taxes, suddenly all those conflicting interests are set aside, and the property owners come together as a united front. This is the start of a wealth cohesion that quickly evolves into a collective wealth consciousness.
American business, a generation ago, was highly competitive. Each business man's hand was raised against his neighbor and the downfall of one was a matter of rejoicing for all. The bitter experience of the nineties drove home some lessons; the struggles with labor brought some more; the efforts at government regulations had their effect; but most of all, the experience of meeting with men in various[Pg 119] lines of business and discussing the common problems through the city, state and national and business organizations led to a realization of the fact that those who owned and managed business had more in common than they had in antagonism. By knifing one another they made themselves an easy prey for the unions and the government. By pooling ideas and interests they presented a solid front to the demands of organized labor and the efforts of the public to enforce regulation.
American business, a generation ago, was super competitive. Every business person's hand was raised against their neighbor, and the downfall of one was something everyone celebrated. The tough lessons of the nineties hit hard; the struggles with labor taught even more; efforts at government regulations had their impact; but most importantly, meeting with people in various[Pg 119] industries and discussing common problems through city, state, national, and business organizations led to the realization that those who owned and ran businesses had more in common than what divided them. By undermining each other, they made themselves easy targets for unions and the government. By sharing ideas and interests, they could stand strong against the demands of organized labor and public regulation efforts.
"Plutocracy" means control by those who own wealth. The "plutocratic class" consists of that group of persons who control community affairs because they own property. This class, because of its property ownership, is compelled to devote time and infinite pains to the task of safeguarding the sacred rights of property. It is to that task that the leaders of the American plutocracy have committed themselves, and it is from the results of that accomplished work that they are turning to new labors.
"Plutocracy" refers to control by the wealthy. The "plutocratic class" is made up of those who influence community matters because they own property. This class, due to their property ownership, must spend time and effort protecting the essential rights of property. The leaders of the American plutocracy have dedicated themselves to this task, and from the outcomes of that work, they are moving on to new endeavors.
X. INDUSTRIAL EMPIRES
1. They Cannot Pause!
The foundations of Empire have been laid in the United States. Territory has been conquered; peoples have been subjugated or annihilated; an imperial class has established itself. Here are all of the essential characteristics of empire.
The foundations of Empire have been established in the United States. Territory has been conquered; people have been subjugated or wiped out; an imperial class has made its presence known. All the key characteristics of empire are here.
The American people have been busy laying the political foundations of Empire for three centuries. A great domain, taken by force of arms from the people who were in possession of it has been either incorporated into the Union, or else held as dependent territory. The aborigines have disappeared as a race. The Negroes, kidnaped from their native land, enslaved and later liberated, are still treated as an inferior people who should be the hewers of wood and the drawers of water. A vast territory was taken from Mexico as a result of one war. A quarter million square miles were secured from Spain in another; on the Continent three and a half millions of square miles; in territorial possessions nearly a quarter of a million more—this is the result of little more than two hundred years of struggle; this is the geographic basis for the American Empire.
The American people have been busy building the political foundations of Empire for three centuries. A large territory, taken by force from the people who lived there, has either been integrated into the Union or held as dependent territory. The indigenous people have vanished as a distinct race. The Black individuals, kidnapped from their homeland, enslaved and later freed, are still treated as an inferior group meant to do menial labor. A vast territory was taken from Mexico due to one war. A quarter of a million square miles were gained from Spain in another; on the continent, three and a half million square miles; in territorial possessions, nearly another quarter of a million—this is the result of just over two hundred years of struggle; this is the geographic foundation of the American Empire.
The structure of owning class power is practically complete in the United States. Through long years the business interests have evolved a form of organization that concentrates the essential power over the industrial and financial processes in a very few hands,—the hands of the investment bankers. During this contest for power the plutocracy learned the value of the control of public opinion, and brought the whole machinery for the direction of public affairs under its domination. Thus political and social institutions as well as the processes of economic life were[Pg 121] made subject to plutocratic authority. A hundred years has sufficed to promulgate ideas of the sacredness of private property that place its preservation and protection among the chief duties of man. Economic organization; the control of all important branches of public affairs, and the elevation of property rights to a place among the beatitudes—by these three means was the authority of the plutocracy established and safeguarded.
The power structure of the owning class is almost complete in the United States. Over many years, business interests have developed a way of organizing that concentrates significant control over industrial and financial processes in the hands of just a few—specifically, the investment bankers. During this struggle for power, the wealthy learned the importance of influencing public opinion and took control of the entire system that directs public affairs. As a result, political and social institutions, along with economic activities, were[Pg 121] placed under the authority of the wealthy elite. A century has been enough to promote ideas about the sanctity of private property, which now makes its preservation and protection one of humanity's main responsibilities. Through economic organization, control of all important areas of public affairs, and elevating property rights to a status akin to sacred values—these three methods established and protected the power of the wealthy elite.
Since economic political and social power cover the field of authority that one human being may exercise over another, it might be supposed that the members of the plutocratic class would pause at this point and cease their efforts to increase power. But the owners cannot pause! A force greater than their wills compels them to go on at an ever growing speed. Within the vitals of the economic system upon which it subsists the plutocracy has found a source of never-ending torment in the form of a constantly increasing surplus.
Since economic, political, and social power represent the authority one person can have over another, it might be assumed that the members of the wealthy elite would stop here and stop trying to gain more power. But the wealthy can’t stop! A force stronger than their own wills drives them to keep pushing forward at an ever-increasing pace. Deep within the core of the economic system that supports it, the wealthy elite has discovered a source of never-ending pressure in the form of a constantly growing surplus.
2. The Knotty Problem of Surplus
The present system of industry is so organized that the worker is always paid less in wages than he creates in product. A part of this difference between product and wages goes to the upkeep and expansion of the industry in which the worker is employed. Another part in the form of interest, dividends, rents, royalties and profits, goes to the owners of the land and productive machinery.
The current industrial system is set up so that workers always earn less in wages than the value of the products they create. A portion of the difference between the value of the products and wages is used for maintaining and expanding the industry where the worker is employed. Another portion, in the form of interest, dividends, rents, royalties, and profits, goes to the owners of the land and productive machinery.
The values produced in industry and handed to the industrial worker or property owner in the form of income, may be used or "spent" either for "consumption goods"—things that are to be used in satisfying human wants, such as street car transportation, clothing, school books, and smoking tobacco; or for production goods—things that are to be used in the making of wealth, such as factory buildings, lathes, harvesting machinery, railroad equipment. Those who have small incomes necessarily spend the greater[Pg 122] part for the consumption of goods upon which their existence depends. On the other hand, those who are in receipt of large incomes cannot use more than a limited amount of consumption goods. Therefore, they are in a position to turn part of their surplus into production goods. As a reward for this "saving" the system gives them title to an amount of wealth equal to the amount saved, and in addition, it grants an amount of "interest" so that the next year the recipient of surplus gets the regular share of surplus, and beside that an additional reward in the form of interest. His share of the surplus is thus increased. That is, surplus breeds surplus.
The value created in industry and given to workers or property owners as income can be used or "spent" in two ways: on "consumption goods"—items used to satisfy human needs, like public transportation, clothing, school supplies, and tobacco; or on production goods—items used to create wealth, like factory buildings, machinery, and railroad equipment. People with lower incomes have to spend most of their money on consumption goods essential for their survival. On the flip side, those with higher incomes can only use a certain amount of consumption goods. So, they can invest part of their extra income into production goods. In return for this "saving," the system grants them ownership of wealth equal to their savings, along with "interest" so that the following year, those with surplus get their regular share and an extra reward in the form of interest. This increases their share of the surplus. In other words, surplus leads to more surplus.
The workers are, for the most part, spenders. The great bulk of their income is turned at once into consumption goods. The owners in many instances are capitalists who hold property for the purpose of turning the income derived from it into additional investments.
The workers mostly spend their money. A large portion of their income goes straight into buying consumer goods. The owners, in many cases, are capitalists who own property to turn the income from it into more investments.
Could the worker buy back dollar for dollar the values which he produces there would be no surplus in the form of rent, interest, dividends and profits. The present economic system is, however, built upon the principle that those who own the lands and the productive machinery should be recompensed for their mere ownership. It follows, of course, that the more land and machinery there is to own the greater will be the amount of surplus which will go to the owners. Since surplus breeds surplus the owners find that it pays them not to use all of their income in the form of consumption, but rather to invest all that they can, thereby increasing the share of surplus that is due them. The worker, on the other hand, finds that he must produce a constantly larger amount of wealth which he never gets, but which is destined for the payment of rent, interest, dividends and profits. Increased incomes yield increased investments. Increased investments necessitate the creation and payment of increased surplus. The payment of increased surplus means increased incomes. Thus the circle is continued—with the returns heaping up in the coffers of the plutocracy.
If workers could buy back dollar for dollar the value they produce, there would be no surplus in the form of rent, interest, dividends, and profits. However, the current economic system is based on the idea that those who own land and productive machinery should be compensated just for owning it. Naturally, the more land and machinery there is to own, the greater the surplus that goes to the owners. Because surplus generates more surplus, the owners find it beneficial not to spend all their income on consumption but to invest as much as they can, thus increasing their share of surplus. On the flip side, workers must produce an ever-increasing amount of wealth that they never receive, which is instead used to pay rent, interest, dividends, and profits. Higher incomes lead to higher investments. Increased investments require the creation and payment of more surplus. The payment of more surplus results in higher incomes. Thus, the cycle continues—with the profits piling up in the hands of the wealthy elite.
Originally the surplus was utilized to free the members of the owning class from the grinding drudgery of daily toil, by permitting them to enjoy the fruits of the labor of others. Then it was employed in the exercise of power over the economic and social machinery. But that was not the end—instead it proved only the beginning. As property titles were concentrated in fewer and fewer hands, and the amount of property owned by single individuals or groups of individuals becomes greater, their incomes (chiefly in the form of rent, interest, dividends and profits) rose until by 1917 there were 19,103 persons in the United States who declared incomes of $50,000 or more per year, which is the equivalent of $1,000 per week. Among these persons 141 declared annual incomes of over $1,000,000. Besides these personal incomes, each industry which paid these dividends and profits, through its depreciation, amortization, replacement, new construction, and surplus funds was reinvesting in the industries billions of wealth that would be used in the creation of more wealth. The normal processes of the growth of the modern economic system has forced upon the masters of life the problem of disposing of an ever increasing amount of surplus.
Originally, the surplus was used to free the members of the owning class from the exhausting grind of daily work, allowing them to enjoy the benefits of others' labor. Then, it was used to exert control over the economic and social systems. But that was just the beginning. As property ownership became concentrated in fewer hands, and individuals or groups owned more property, their incomes (mainly from rent, interest, dividends, and profits) rose. By 1917, there were 19,103 people in the United States declaring incomes of $50,000 or more per year, which is like getting $1,000 a week. Among these individuals, 141 reported annual incomes exceeding $1,000,000. In addition to these personal incomes, each industry that paid these dividends and profits reinvested billions of dollars, through depreciation, amortization, replacement, new construction, and surplus funds, into the industries to create more wealth. The natural processes of the growth of the modern economic system forced the powerful to tackle the problem of how to deal with an ever-growing amount of surplus.
During prosperous periods, the investment funds of a community like England and the United States grow very rapidly. The more prosperous the nation, the greater is the demand from those who cannot spend their huge incomes for safe, paying investment opportunities.
During prosperous times, the investment funds of a community like England and the United States grow quickly. The more prosperous the nation, the higher the demand from those who can’t spend their large incomes on safe, profitable investment opportunities.
The immense productivity of the present-day system of industry has added greatly to the amount of surplus seeking investment. Each invention, each labor saving device, each substitution of mechanical power that multiplies the productive capacity of industry at the same time increases the surplus at the disposal of the plutocracy.
The huge productivity of today's industrial system has significantly increased the amount of surplus looking for investment. Every invention, every labor-saving device, and every use of mechanical power that boosts the productive capacity of industry also raises the surplus available for the wealthy elite.
The surplus must be disposed of. There is no other alternative. If hats, flour and gasoline are piled up in the warehouses or stored in tanks, no more of these commodities will be made until this surplus has been used. The whole economic system proceeds on the principle that for each[Pg 124] commodity produced, a purchaser must be found before another unit of the commodity is ordered. Demand for commodities stimulates and regulates the machinery of production.
The surplus needs to be dealt with. There’s no other option. If hats, flour, and gasoline are stored in warehouses or tanks, no more of these items will be produced until this surplus is used up. The entire economic system operates on the principle that for every[Pg 124] commodity created, a buyer must be found before another unit of that commodity is requested. The demand for goods drives and controls the production process.
Those in control of the modern economic system have no choice but to produce surplus, and once having produced it, they have no choice except to dispose of it. An inexorable fate drives them onward—augmenting their burdens as it multiplies their labors.
Those running today's economic system have no choice but to create a surplus, and once they do, they have no option but to get rid of it. An unavoidable fate pushes them forward—adding to their burdens as it increases their work.
Investment opportunities, of necessity, are eagerly sought by the plutocracy, since the law of their system is "Invest or perish"!
Investment opportunities are eagerly sought after by the wealthy elite, as their motto is "Invest or die"!
Invest? Where? Where there is some demand for surplus capital—that is in "undeveloped countries."
Invest? Where? Where there’s a demand for extra capital—that is in "developing countries."
The necessity for disposing of surplus has imposed upon the business men of the world a classification of all countries as "developed" or "undeveloped." "Developed" countries are those in which the capitalist processes have gone far enough to produce a surplus that is sufficient to provide for the upkeep and for the normal expansion of industry. In "developed" countries mines are opened, factories are built, railroads are financed, as rapidly as needed, out of the domestic industrial surplus. "Undeveloped" countries are those which cannot produce sufficient capital for their own needs, and which must, therefore, depend for industrial expansion upon investments of capital from the countries that do produce a surplus.
The need to get rid of excess has led businesspeople around the world to categorize all countries as "developed" or "undeveloped." "Developed" countries are those where capitalist processes have advanced enough to create a surplus that can support the maintenance and normal growth of industry. In "developed" countries, mines are opened, factories are built, and railroads are funded as quickly as necessary, using the domestic industrial surplus. "Undeveloped" countries, on the other hand, are those that can't generate enough capital for their own needs and must rely on investments from countries that do produce a surplus for their industrial growth.
"Developed" countries are those in which the modern industrial system has been thoroughly established.
"Developed" countries are those where the modern industrial system is fully in place.
The contrast between developed and undeveloped countries is made clear by an examination of the investments of any investing nation, such as Great Britain. Great Britain in 1913 was surrounded by rich, prosperous neighbors—France, Germany, Holland, Belgium. Each year about a billion dollars in English capital was invested outside of the British Isles. Where did this wealth go? The chief objectives of British investment, aside from the[Pg 125] British Dominions and the United States, were (stated in millions of pounds) Argentine 320; Brazil 148; Mexico 99; Russia 67; France 8 and Germany 6. The wealth of Germany or France is greater than that of Argentine, Brazil and Mexico combined, but Germany and France were developed countries, producing enough surplus for their own needs, and, therefore, the investable wealth of Great Britain went, not to her rich neighbors, but to the poorer lands across the sea.
The difference between developed and undeveloped countries is highlighted by looking at the investments of any investing nation, like Great Britain. In 1913, Great Britain was surrounded by wealthy, thriving neighbors—France, Germany, the Netherlands, Belgium. Each year, around a billion dollars in British capital was invested outside the British Isles. So where did this wealth go? The main targets of British investment, aside from the[Pg 125] British Dominions and the United States, were (in millions of pounds) Argentina 320; Brazil 148; Mexico 99; Russia 67; France 8 and Germany 6. The wealth of Germany or France is greater than that of Argentina, Brazil, and Mexico combined, but Germany and France were developed countries that produced enough surplus for their own needs. Therefore, Britain's investable wealth went not to its wealthy neighbors but to the poorer lands overseas.
Each nation that produces an investable surplus—and in the nature of the present economic system, every capitalist nation must some day reach the point where it can no longer absorb its own surplus wealth—must find some undeveloped country in which to invest its surplus. Otherwise the continuity of the capitalist world is unthinkable. Great Britain, Belgium, Holland, France, Germany and Japan all had reached this stage before the war. The United States was approaching it rapidly.
Each country that generates an investment surplus—and in today's economic system, every capitalist nation eventually reaches a point where it can't fully utilize its own excess wealth—needs to find some undeveloped nation to invest its surplus. If not, the stability of the capitalist world isn't feasible. Before the war, Great Britain, Belgium, Holland, France, Germany, and Japan had all reached this stage. The United States was getting there quickly.
3. "Undeveloped Countries"
Capitalism is so new that the active struggle to secure investment opportunities in undeveloped countries is of the most recent origin. The voyages which resulted in the discovery, by modern Europeans, of the Americas, Australia, Japan, and an easy road to the Orient, were all made within 500 years. The actual processes of capitalism are products of the past 150 years in England, where they had their origin. In France, Germany, Italy and Japan they have existed for less than a century. The great burst of economic activity which has pushed the United States so rapidly to the fore as a producer of surplus wealth dates from the Civil War. Only in the last generation did there arise the financial imperialism that results from the necessity of finding a market for investable surplus.
Capitalism is so new that the active effort to secure investment opportunities in developing countries has only recently begun. The journeys that led modern Europeans to discover the Americas, Australia, Japan, and a direct path to the East all happened within the last 500 years. The actual practices of capitalism have emerged from the past 150 years in England, where they originated. In France, Germany, Italy, and Japan, these practices have existed for less than a century. The significant surge of economic activity that has propelled the United States to the forefront as a producer of surplus wealth began after the Civil War. It’s only in the last generation that financial imperialism has developed from the need to find a market for investable surplus.
The struggle for world trade had been waged for centuries before the advent of capitalism, but the struggle for [Pg 126]investment opportunities in undeveloped countries is strictly modern. The matter is strikingly stated by Amos Pinchot in his "Peace or Armed Peace" (Nov. 11, 1918).
The battle for global trade has been fought for centuries before capitalism came along, but the fight for [Pg 126]investment chances in developing countries is a recent issue. Amos Pinchot highlights this clearly in his "Peace or Armed Peace" (Nov. 11, 1918).
"If you will look at the maps following page 554 of Hazen's 'Europe since 1815,' or any other standard colored map showing Africa and Asia in 1884, you will see that, but for a few rare spots of coloration, the whole continent of Africa is pure white. Crossing the Red Sea into Arabia, Persia, Mesopotamia and Asia Minor, you will find the same or rather a more complete lack of color. This is merely the cartographer's way of showing, by tint and lack of tint, that at that time Africa and Western Asia were still in the hands of their native populations.
"If you look at the maps on page 554 of Hazen's 'Europe since 1815,' or any other standard colored map showing Africa and Asia in 1884, you'll notice that, except for a few rare spots of color, the entire continent of Africa is completely white. As you cross the Red Sea into Arabia, Persia, Mesopotamia, and Asia Minor, you'll see the same lack of color, or even a more pronounced absence. This is just how the cartographer indicates, through color and lack of color, that at that time Africa and Western Asia were still under the control of their native populations."
"Let us now turn to the same maps thirty years later, i.e., in 1914. We find them utterly changed. They are no longer white, but a patch work of variegated hues....
"Let’s now look at the same maps thirty years later, in 1914. They are completely transformed. They’re no longer white, but a patchwork of various colors...."
"From 1870 to 1900, Great Britain added to her possessions, to say nothing of her spheres of influence, nearly 5,000,000 square miles with an estimated population of 88,000,000. Within a few years after England's permanent occupation of Egypt, which was the signal for the renaissance of French colonialism, France increased hers by 3,500,000 square miles with a population of 37,000,000, not counting Morocco added in 1911. Germany, whose colonialism came later, because home and nearby markets longer absorbed the product of her machines, brought under her dominion from 1884 to 1899 1,000,000 square miles with an estimated population of 14,000,000."
"From 1870 to 1900, Great Britain expanded her territories, not to mention her spheres of influence, by nearly 5,000,000 square miles with an estimated population of 88,000,000. Within a few years after England’s permanent occupation of Egypt, which sparked the revival of French colonialism, France added 3,500,000 square miles with a population of 37,000,000, excluding Morocco which was incorporated in 1911. Germany, whose colonial efforts started later because the domestic and nearby markets took longer to absorb the output of her factories, brought under her control from 1884 to 1899 1,000,000 square miles with an estimated population of 14,000,000."
This is a picture of the political effects that followed the economic causes summed up in the term "financial imperialism."
This is a depiction of the political consequences that came after the economic reasons summarized by the term "financial imperialism."
In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries it was the trader, dealing in raw stuff; in the nineteenth century it was the manufacturer, producing at low cost to cut under his neighbor's price. During the past thirty years the investment banker has occupied the foreground with his efforts to find safe, paying opportunities for the disposal of[Pg 127] the surplus committed to his care. British bankers, French bankers, German bankers, Belgian bankers, Dutch bankers—all intent upon the same mission—because behind all, and relentlessly driving, were the accumulating surpluses, demanding an outlet. European bankers found that outlet in Africa, Asia, Australia and the Americas. The stupendous strides in the development of the resources in these countries would have been impossible but for that surplus of European capital.
In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, it was the trader working with raw materials; in the nineteenth century, it was the manufacturer aiming to produce at low costs to undercut competitors. Over the past thirty years, investment bankers have taken center stage, striving to find safe and profitable opportunities for managing[Pg 127] the surplus funds entrusted to them. British bankers, French bankers, German bankers, Belgian bankers, Dutch bankers—all focused on the same goal—driven by the accumulating surpluses that needed a place to go. European bankers discovered that outlet in Africa, Asia, Australia, and the Americas. The incredible progress in developing the resources of these regions would not have been possible without the surplus of European capital.
The undeveloped countries to-day have the same characteristics,—virgin resources, industrial and commercial possibilities, and in many cases cheap labor. This is true, for example, in China, Mexico and India. It is true to a less extent in South America and South Africa. The logical destination of capital is the point where the investment will "pay."
The developing countries today have the same features—untapped resources, industrial and commercial opportunities, and in many cases, low labor costs. This is evident in countries like China, Mexico, and India. It's somewhat true in South America and South Africa as well. The logical place for investment is where it will generate a good return.
The investor who has used up the cream of the home investment market turns his eyes abroad. As a recent writer has suggested, "There is a glamor about the foreign investment" which does not hold for a domestic one. Foreign investments have yielded such huge returns in the past that there is always a seeming possibility of wonderful gains for the future. The risk is greater, of course, but this is more than offset by the increased rate of return. If it were not so, the wealth would be invested at home or held idle.
The investor who has exhausted the best opportunities in the home investment market looks overseas. As a recent author pointed out, "There's a certain allure to foreign investment" that domestic investment doesn't have. Foreign investments have brought in such massive returns in the past that there's always a perception of amazing profits in the future. The risk is higher, of course, but it's more than compensated for by the higher rate of return. If that weren’t the case, the wealth would be invested locally or left unused.
4. The Great Investing Nations
The great industrial nations are the great investing nations. An agriculture community produces little surplus wealth. Land values are low, franchises and special privileges are negligible factors. There can be relatively little speculation. Changes in method of production are infrequent. Changes in values and total wealth are gradual. The owning class in an agriculture civilization may live comfortably. If it is very small in proportion to the total population it may live luxuriously, but it cannot derive[Pg 128] great revenues such as those secured by the owning classes of an industrial civilization.
The major industrial nations are also the major investing nations. An agricultural community generates little surplus wealth. Land values are low, and franchises and special privileges play a minor role. There’s not much speculation. Changes in production methods happen rarely. Changes in values and overall wealth are slow. The owning class in an agricultural society may live comfortably. If it’s very small compared to the total population, it might live luxuriously, but it won't earn
[Pg 128] significant revenues like those gained by the owning classes in an industrial society.
Industrial civilization possesses all of the factors for augmenting surplus wealth which are lacking in agricultural civilizations. Changes in the forms of industrial production are rapid; special privilege yields rich returns and is the subject of wide speculative activity; land values increase; labor saving machinery multiplies man's capacity to turn out wealth. As much surplus wealth might be produced in a year of this industrial life as could have been turned out in a generation or a century of agricultural activity or of hand-craft industry.
Industrial civilization has all the elements needed to increase surplus wealth that agricultural civilizations lack. Changes in industrial production happen quickly; special privileges bring in high returns and attract a lot of speculation; land values rise; and labor-saving machines boost people's ability to generate wealth. A year of this industrial lifestyle can produce as much surplus wealth as could be generated in a generation or even a century of agricultural efforts or handcrafted work.
England, France, Germany, Holland, Belgium, Japan and the United States, the great industrial nations, have become the great lending nations. Their search for "undeveloped territory" and "spheres of influence" is not a search for trade, but for an opportunity to invest and exploit. If these nations wished to exchange cotton for coffee, or machinery for wheat on even terms, they could exchange with one another, or with one of the undeveloped countries, but they demand an outlet for surplus wealth—an outlet that can only be utilized where the government of the developed country will guarantee the investment of its citizens in the undeveloped territory.
England, France, Germany, Holland, Belgium, Japan, and the United States, the major industrial nations, have become the leading lending nations. Their pursuit of "undeveloped land" and "spheres of influence" isn't about trade; it's about finding ways to invest and exploit. If these countries wanted to trade cotton for coffee or machinery for wheat on fair terms, they could easily do so with each other or with one of the undeveloped countries. Instead, they seek a place to invest their surplus wealth—one that only works if the government of the developed country guarantees the investment of its citizens in the undeveloped area.
The investing nations either want to take the raw products of the undeveloped country, manufacture them and sell them back as finished material (the British policy in India), or else they desire to secure possession of the resources, franchises and other special privileges in the undeveloped country which they can exploit for their own profit (the British policy in South America).
The investing countries either want to take the raw materials from the undeveloped country, process them, and sell them back as finished products (like Britain did in India), or they aim to gain control over the resources, rights, and other special privileges in the undeveloped country that they can exploit for their own benefit (similar to Britain’s approach in South America).
The Indians, under the British policy, are thus in relatively the same position as the workers in one of the industrial countries. They are paid for their raw material a fraction of the value of the finished product. They are expected to buy back the finished product, which is a manifest impossibility. There is thus a drastic limitation on the[Pg 129] exploitation of undeveloped countries, just as there is a limitation on the exploitation of domestic labor. In both cases the people as consumers can buy back less in value than the exploiters have to sell. Obviously the time must come when all the undeveloped sections of the world have been exploited to the limit. Then surplus will go a-begging.
The Indians, under British policy, are in a similar situation to workers in industrial countries. They receive a small fraction of the value of their raw materials compared to the finished product. They are expected to purchase the finished product, which is completely unrealistic. This creates a significant limitation on the[Pg 129]exploitation of underdeveloped countries, just as there is a limit on the exploitation of domestic workers. In both cases, people as consumers are able to buy back less value than what the exploiters are selling. Clearly, there will come a time when all the underdeveloped areas of the world have been exploited to their fullest. At that point, surplus will be left without buyers.
Some of the investors in the great exploiting nations have abandoned the idea of making huge returns by way of the English policy in India. Instead the investors in every nation are buying up resources, franchises and concessions and other special privileges in the undeveloped countries and treating them in exactly the same way that they would treat a domestic investment. In this case the resources and labor of the undeveloped country are exploited for the profit of the foreign investor.
Some investors from the major exploiting countries have given up on the idea of making big profits through English policies in India. Instead, investors from all nations are purchasing resources, franchises, concessions, and other special privileges in underdeveloped countries and treating them just like domestic investments. In this situation, the resources and labor of the underdeveloped country are exploited for the profit of the foreign investor.
The Roman conquerors subjugated the people politically and then exacted an economic return in the form of tribute. The modern imperialists do not bother about the political machinery, so long as it remains in abeyance, but content themselves with securing possession of the economic resources of a region and exacting a return in interest and dividends on the investment. Political tribute is largely a thing of the past. In its place there is a new form—economic tribute—which is safer, cheaper, and on the whole far superior to the Roman method of exploiting undeveloped regions.
The Roman conquerors took control of the people politically and then demanded economic returns through tribute. Today's imperialists don’t focus on the political systems as long as they remain inactive; instead, they are satisfied with gaining access to a region's economic resources and collecting interest and dividends from their investments. Political tribute is mostly a thing of the past. In its place is a new form—economic tribute—which is safer, more cost-effective, and overall much better than the Roman way of exploiting underdeveloped areas.
5. The American Home Field
A hundred years ago the United States was an undeveloped country. Its resources were virgin. Its wealth possibilities were immense. Both domestic and foreign capitalists invested large sums in the canals, the railroads and other American commercial and industrial enterprises. The rapid economic expansion of recent years has involved the outlay of huge sums of new capital.
A hundred years ago, the United States was an undeveloped nation. Its resources were untouched. Its potential for wealth was huge. Both local and foreign investors poured significant amounts of money into canals, railroads, and other American business and industrial ventures. The quick economic growth in recent years has required the expenditure of massive amounts of new capital.
The total capital invested in manufactures was 8,975 millions in 1899 and 22,791 millions in 1914. The total[Pg 130] of railway capital was 11,034 millions in 1899 and 20,247 millions in 1914. Manufacturing and railroading alone secured a capital outlay of over 20 billions in 15 years. Some idea of the increase in investments may be gained from the amount of new stocks and bonds listed annually on the New York Stock Exchange. The total amount of new stocks listed for the five years ending with 1914 was 1,420 millions; the total of new bonds was 2,226 million. (The Financial Review Annual, 1918, p. 67.) The total capital of new companies (with an authorized capital of at least $100,000) was in 1918, $2,599,753,600; in 1919, $12,677,229,600, and in the first 10 months of 1920, $12,242,577,700. (Bradstreets, Nov. 6, 1920, p. 731.) The figures showing the amount of stocks and bonds issued do not by any means exhaust the field of new capital. Reference has already been made to the fact that the United States Steel Corporation, between 1903 and 1918 increased its issues of stocks and bonds by only $31,600,000, while, in the same time its assets increased $987,000,000. The same fact is illustrated, on a larger scale, in a summary (Wall Street Journal, August 7, 1919) of the finances of 104 corporations covering the four years, December 31, 1914, to December 31, 1918. During this time, six of the leading steel companies of the United States increased their working capital by $461,965,000 and their surplus by $617,656,000. This billion was taken out of the earnings of the companies. Concerning the entire 104 corporations, the Journal notes that, "After heavy expenditures for new construction and acquisitions, and record breaking dividends, they added a total of nearly $2,000,000,000 to working capital." In addition, these corporations, in four years, showed a gain of $1,941,498,000 in surplus and a gain in inventories of $1,522,000,000.
The total capital invested in manufacturing was $8.975 billion in 1899 and $22.791 billion in 1914. The total[Pg 130] of railway capital was $11.034 billion in 1899 and $20.247 billion in 1914. Manufacturing and railroads combined secured over $20 billion in capital expenditures over 15 years. You can get an idea of the increase in investments from the amount of new stocks and bonds listed each year on the New York Stock Exchange. The total value of new stocks listed for the five years ending in 1914 was $1.42 billion, while the total of new bonds was $2.226 billion. (The Financial Review Annual, 1918, p. 67.) The total capital of new companies (with authorized capital of at least $100,000) was $2,599,753,600 in 1918, $12,677,229,600 in 1919, and $12,242,577,700 in the first 10 months of 1920. (Bradstreets, Nov. 6, 1920, p. 731.) The figures showing the amount of stocks and bonds issued do not cover all new capital. It's already been noted that the United States Steel Corporation, between 1903 and 1918, increased its stock and bond issues by only $31.6 million, while its assets grew by $987 million during the same period. This fact is further illustrated on a larger scale in a summary (Wall Street Journal, August 7, 1919) of the finances of 104 corporations between December 31, 1914, and December 31, 1918. During this time, six of the leading U.S. steel companies boosted their working capital by $461.965 million and their surplus by $617.656 million. This billion came from the companies' earnings. Regarding all 104 corporations, the Journal mentions that "After significant expenses for new construction and acquisitions, along with record-breaking dividends, they added nearly $2 billion to working capital." Additionally, these companies showed a gain of $1.941498 billion in surplus and an increase in inventories of $1.522 billion over the four years.
Considerable amounts of capital are invested in private industry, by individuals and partnerships. No record of these investments ever appears. Farmers invest in animals, machinery and improved buildings—investments that are not represented by stocks or bonds. Again, the great corporations themselves are constantly adding to their [Pg 131]assets without increasing their stock or bond issues. In these and other ways, billions of new capital are yearly absorbed by the home investment market.
Significant amounts of money are invested in private industry by individuals and partnerships. There’s no record of these investments. Farmers put money into animals, machinery, and upgraded buildings—investments that aren’t shown by stocks or bonds. Additionally, major corporations are always adding to their [Pg 131]assets without raising their stock or bond offerings. In these and other ways, billions in new capital are absorbed each year by the home investment market.
Although most of the enterprises of the United States have been floated with American capital, the investors of Great Britain, Holland, France and other countries took a hand. In 1913 the capitalists of Great Britain had larger investments in the United States than in any other country, or than in any British Dominion. (The U. S., 754,617,000 pounds; Canada and Newfoundland, 514,870,000 pounds; India and Ceylon, 378,776,000 pounds; South Africa, 370,192,000 pounds and so on.) (Annals, 1916, Vol. 68, p. 28, Article by C. K. Hobson.) The aggregate amount of European capital invested in the United States was approximately $6,500,000,000 in 1910. Of this sum more than half was British. ("Trade Balance of the United States," George Paisch. National Monetary Commission, 1910, p. 175.)
Although most businesses in the United States have been started with American funding, investors from Great Britain, the Netherlands, France, and other countries were also involved. In 1913, British capitalists had more investments in the United States than in any other country or British Dominion. (The U.S., £754,617,000; Canada and Newfoundland, £514,870,000; India and Ceylon, £378,776,000; South Africa, £370,192,000, and so on.) (Annals, 1916, Vol. 68, p. 28, Article by C. K. Hobson.) The total amount of European capital invested in the United States was about $6,500,000,000 in 1910. More than half of this amount was British. ("Trade Balance of the United States," George Paisch. National Monetary Commission, 1910, p. 175.)
By the beginning of the present century (the U. S. Steel Corporation was organized in 1901) the main work of organization inside of the United States was completed. The bankers had some incidental tasks before them, but the industrial leaders themselves had done their pioneer duty. There were corners to be smoothed off, and bearings to be rubbed down, but the great structural problems had been solved, and the foundations of world industrial empire had been laid.
By the start of this century (the U.S. Steel Corporation was formed in 1901), the primary organizational work in the United States was finished. The bankers had a few minor tasks left, but the industrial leaders had already done their pioneering work. There were still some rough edges to be smoothed out and details to be refined, but the major structural challenges had been addressed, and the foundations of a global industrial empire had been established.
6. Leaving the Home Field
The Spanish-American War marks the beginning of the new era in American business organization. This war found the American people isolated and provincial. It left them with a new feeling for their own importance.
The Spanish-American War marks the start of a new era in American business organization. This war found the American people isolated and narrow-minded. It gave them a new sense of their own significance.
The worlds at home had been conquered. The transcontinental railroads had been built; the steel industry, the oil industry, the coal industry, the leather industry, the woolen industry and a host of others had been organized[Pg 132] by a whole generation of industrial organizers who had given their lives to this task.
The homefronts had been conquered. The transcontinental railroads were built; the steel industry, oil industry, coal industry, leather industry, woolen industry, and many others were organized[Pg 132] by an entire generation of industrial organizers who devoted their lives to this work.
Across the borders of the United States—almost within arm's reach of the eager, stirring, high-strung men of the new generation, there were tens of thousands of square miles of undeveloped territory—territory that was fabulously rich in ore, in timber, in oil, in fertility. On every side the lands stretched away—Mexico, the West Indies, Central America, Canada—with opportunity that was to be had for the taking.
Across the borders of the United States—almost within arm's reach of the eager, energetic, high-strung men of the new generation—there were tens of thousands of square miles of untapped land. This land was incredibly rich in minerals, timber, oil, and arable soil. On every side, the lands expanded—Mexico, the Caribbean, Central America, Canada—offering opportunities that were there for the taking.
Opportunity called. Capital, seeking new fields for investment, urged. Youth, enthusiasm and enterprise answered the challenge.
Opportunity knocked. Capital, looking for new places to invest, pushed forward. Youth, energy, and innovation rose to the occasion.
The foreign investments of the United States at the time of the Spanish-American War were negligible. By 1910 American business men had two billions invested abroad—$700,000,000 in Mexico; $500,000,000 in Canada; $350,000,000 in Europe, and smaller sums in the West Indies, the Philippines, China, Central and South America. In 1913 there was a billion invested in Mexico and an equal amount in Canada. ("Commercial Policy," W. S. Culbertson, New York, Appleton, 1919, p. 315.)
The foreign investments of the United States during the Spanish-American War were minimal. By 1910, American businessmen had invested two billion dollars abroad—$700 million in Mexico; $500 million in Canada; $350 million in Europe, with smaller amounts in the West Indies, the Philippines, China, and Central and South America. By 1913, there was a billion invested in Mexico and another billion in Canada. ("Commercial Policy," W. S. Culbertson, New York, Appleton, 1919, p. 315.)
Capital flowed out of the United States in two directions:
Capital flowed out of the United States in two ways:
1. Toward the resources which were so abundant in certain foreign countries.
1. To the resources that were abundant in certain foreign countries.
2. Toward foreign markets.
2. To foreign markets.
7. Building on Foreign Resources
The Bethlehem Steel Corporation is a typical industry that has built up foreign connections as a means of exploiting foreign resources. The Corporation has a huge organization in the United States which includes 10 manufacturing plants, a coke producing company, 11 ship building plants, six mines and quarries, and extensive coal deposits in Pennsylvania and West Virginia. The Bethlehem Steel Corporation also controls ore properties near [Pg 133]Santiago, Cuba, near Nipe Bay, Cuba, and extensive deposits along the northern coast of Cuba; large ore properties at Tofo, Chile, and the Ore Steamship Corporation, a carrying line for Chilean and Cuban ore.
The Bethlehem Steel Corporation is a typical industry that has established foreign connections to tap into international resources. The Corporation has a large operation in the United States, which includes 10 manufacturing plants, a coke production company, 11 shipbuilding facilities, six mines and quarries, and extensive coal reserves in Pennsylvania and West Virginia. The Bethlehem Steel Corporation also controls ore properties near [Pg 133]Santiago, Cuba, close to Nipe Bay, and has significant deposits along the northern coast of Cuba; large ore properties at Tofo, Chile, and the Ore Steamship Corporation, a transportation line for Chilean and Cuban ore.
The American Smelting and Refining Company is another illustration of expansion into a foreign country for the purpose of utilizing foreign resources. According to the record of the Company's properties, the Company was operating six refining plants, one located in New Jersey; one in Nebraska; one in California; one in Illinois; one in Maryland, and one in Washington. The Company owned 14 lead smelters and 11 copper smelters, located as follows: Colorado, 4; Utah, 2; Texas, 2; Arizona, 2; New Jersey, 2; Montana, 1; Washington, 1; Nebraska, 1; California, 1; Illinois, 1; Chile, 2; Mexico, 6. Among these 25 plants a third is located outside of the United States.
The American Smelting and Refining Company is another example of expanding into a foreign country to take advantage of foreign resources. According to the Company’s records, it operated six refining plants: one in New Jersey, one in Nebraska, one in California, one in Illinois, one in Maryland, and one in Washington. The Company owned 14 lead smelters and 11 copper smelters, located as follows: Colorado, 4; Utah, 2; Texas, 2; Arizona, 2; New Jersey, 2; Montana, 1; Washington, 1; Nebraska, 1; California, 1; Illinois, 1; Chile, 2; Mexico, 6. Among these 25 plants, a third is located outside of the United States.
These are but two examples. The rubber, oil, tobacco and sugar interests have pursued a similar policy—extending their organization in such a way as to utilize foreign resources as a source for the raw materials that are destined to be manufactured in the United States.
These are just two examples. The rubber, oil, tobacco, and sugar industries have followed a similar strategy—expanding their operations to take advantage of foreign resources as a source for the raw materials that will be processed in the United States.
8. Manufacturing and Marketing Abroad
The Bethlehem Steel Corporation and the American Smelting and Refining Company go outside of the United States for the resources upon which their industries depend. Their fabricating industries are carried on inside of the country. There are a number of the great industries of the country that have gone outside of the United States to do their manufacturing and to organize the marketing of their products.
The Bethlehem Steel Corporation and the American Smelting and Refining Company source their resources from outside the United States for their industries. Their manufacturing operations take place within the country. Several major industries have also looked beyond the U.S. for manufacturing and have set up the marketing of their products elsewhere.
The International Harvester Company has built a worldwide organization. It manufactures harvesting machinery, farm implements, gasoline engines, tractors, wagons and separators at Springfield, Ohio; Rock Falls, Ill.; Chicago, Ill.; Auburn, New York; Akron, Ohio; Milwaukee, Wisc.,[Pg 134] and West Pullman, Ill. It has iron mines, coal mines and steel plants operated by the Wisconsin Steel Company. It has three twine mills and four railways. Foreign plants and branches are listed as follows: Norrkoping, Sweden; Copenhagen, Denmark; Christiania, Norway; Paris, France; Croix, France; Berlin, Germany; Hamilton, Ontario, Canada; Zurich, Switzerland; Vienna, Austria; Lubertzy, Russia; Neuss, Germany; Melbourne, Australia; London, England; Christ Church, New Zealand.
The International Harvester Company has established a global organization. It produces harvesting machinery, farming equipment, gasoline engines, tractors, wagons, and separators in Springfield, Ohio; Rock Falls, Illinois; Chicago, Illinois; Auburn, New York; Akron, Ohio; Milwaukee, Wisconsin,[Pg 134] and West Pullman, Illinois. It owns iron mines, coal mines, and steel plants operated by the Wisconsin Steel Company. Additionally, it has three twine mills and four railways. The foreign plants and branches are listed as follows: Norrkoping, Sweden; Copenhagen, Denmark; Christiania, Norway; Paris, France; Croix, France; Berlin, Germany; Hamilton, Ontario, Canada; Zurich, Switzerland; Vienna, Austria; Lubertzy, Russia; Neuss, Germany; Melbourne, Australia; London, England; Christ Church, New Zealand.
One of the greatest industrial empires in the world is the Standard Oil Properties. It is not possible to go into detail with regard to their operations. Space will admit of a brief comment upon one of the constituent parts or "states" of the empire—The Standard Oil Company of New Jersey. With a capital stock of $100,000,000, this Company, from the dissolution of the Standard Oil Company, December 15, 1911, to June 15, 1918, a period of six and a half years, paid dividends of $174,058,932.
One of the biggest industrial empires in the world is the Standard Oil Properties. It's not possible to go into detail about their operations. There's room for a brief comment on one of the parts or "states" of the empire—The Standard Oil Company of New Jersey. With a capital stock of $100,000,000, this Company paid out dividends of $174,058,932 from the dissolution of the Standard Oil Company on December 15, 1911, to June 15, 1918, a period of six and a half years.
The company describes itself as "a manufacturing enterprise with a large foreign business. The company drills oil wells, pumps them, refines the crude oil into many forms and sells the product—mostly abroad." (The Lamp, May, 1918.) The properties of the Company are thus listed:
The company describes itself as "a manufacturing business with a significant international presence. The company drills oil wells, extracts the oil, processes the crude oil into various forms, and sells the product—mainly overseas." (The Lamp, May, 1918.) The properties of the Company are thus listed:
1. The Company has 13 refineries, seven of them in New Jersey, Maryland, Oklahoma, Louisiana and West Virginia. Four of the remaining refineries are located in Canada, one is in Mexico and one in Peru.
1. The Company has 13 refineries, seven of which are in New Jersey, Maryland, Oklahoma, Louisiana, and West Virginia. Four of the remaining refineries are in Canada, one is in Mexico, and one is in Peru.
2. Pipeline properties in New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania and Maryland.
2. Pipeline properties in New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and Maryland.
3. A fleet of 54 ocean-going tank steamers with a capacity of 486,480 dead weight tons. (This is about two per cent of the total ocean-going tonnage of the world.)
3. A fleet of 54 ocean-going tank steamers with a capacity of 486,480 deadweight tons. (This is about two percent of the total ocean-going tonnage globally.)
4. Can and case factories, barrel factories, canning plants, glue factories and pipe shops.
4. Can and case factories, barrel factories, canning plants, glue factories, and pipe shops.
5. Through its subsidiary corporations, the Company controls:
5. The Company controls through its subsidiary corporations:
a. Oil wells in Pennsylvania, West Virginia, Ohio, Kentucky, Louisiana, Arkansas, Mississippi, Texas, California, Peru and Mexico. In connection with many of these properties refineries are operated.
a. Oil wells in Pennsylvania, West Virginia, Ohio, Kentucky, Louisiana, Arkansas, Mississippi, Texas, California, Peru, and Mexico. Refineries are operated in relation to many of these properties.
b. One subsidiary has 550 marketing stations in Canada. Others market in various parts of the United States; in the West Indies; in Central and South America; in Germany, Austria, Roumania, the Netherlands, France, Denmark and Italy.
b. One subsidiary has 550 marketing stations in Canada. Others market in different regions of the United States; in the West Indies; in Central and South America; in Germany, Austria, Romania, the Netherlands, France, Denmark, and Italy.
The Standard Oil Company of New Jersey comprises only one part—though a very successful part—of the Standard Oil Group of industries. It is one industrial state in a great industrial empire.
The Standard Oil Company of New Jersey is just one part—though a very successful part—of the Standard Oil Group of industries. It is one business within a large industrial empire.
Foreign resources offer opportunities to the exploiter. Foreign markets beckon. Both calls have been heeded by the American business interests that are busy building the international machinery of business organization.
Foreign resources present opportunities for those who exploit them. Foreign markets are inviting. American business interests have responded to both calls and are actively constructing the international machinery of business organization.
9. International Business and Finance
The steel, smelting, oil, sugar, tobacco, and harvester interests are confined to relatively narrow lines. In their wake have followed general business, and above all, financial activities.
The steel, smelting, oil, sugar, tobacco, and farming industries are focused on relatively specific areas. Following them have come broader business activities, especially in finance.
The American International Corporation was described by its vice-president (Mr. Connick) before a Senate Committee on March 1, 1918. "Until the Russian situation became too acute, they had offices in Petrograd, London, Paris, Rome, Mexico City. They sent commissions and agents and business men to South America to promote trade.... They were negotiating contracts for a thousand miles of railroad in China. They were practically rebuilding, you might say, the Grand Canal in China. They had acquired the Pacific Mail.... They then bought the New York Shipbuilding Corporation to provide ships for their shipping interests."
The American International Corporation was described by its vice-president, Mr. Connick, before a Senate Committee on March 1, 1918. "Until the Russian situation became too serious, they had offices in Petrograd, London, Paris, Rome, and Mexico City. They sent commissions, agents, and businesspeople to South America to boost trade.... They were negotiating contracts for a thousand miles of railroad in China. They were basically rebuilding the Grand Canal in China. They had acquired the Pacific Mail.... Then they bought the New York Shipbuilding Corporation to supply ships for their shipping interests."
By 1919 (New York Times, Oct. 31, 1919) the Company had acquired Carter Macy & Co., and the Rosin and Turpentine Export Co., and was interested in the International Mercantile Marine and the United Fruit Companies.
By 1919 (New York Times, Oct. 31, 1919), the Company had taken over Carter Macy & Co. and the Rosin and Turpentine Export Co., and was also interested in the International Mercantile Marine and the United Fruit Companies.
Another illustration of the same kind of general foreign business appeared in the form of an advertisement inserted on the financial page of the New York Times (July 10, 1919) by three leading financial firms, which called attention to a $3,000,000 note issue of the Haytian American Corporation "Incorporated under the laws of the State of New York, owning and operating sugar, railroad, wharf and public utility companies in the Republic of Hayti." Further, the advertisers note: "The diversity of the Company's operations assures stability of earnings."
Another example of the same type of general foreign business appeared in an advertisement on the financial page of the New York Times (July 10, 1919) by three prominent financial firms, highlighting a $3,000,000 note issue of the Haytian American Corporation "Incorporated under the laws of the State of New York, owning and operating sugar, railroad, wharf, and public utility companies in the Republic of Hayti." Additionally, the advertisers state: "The variety of the Company's operations guarantees stable earnings."
American manufacturers, traders and industrial empire builders have not gone alone into the foreign field. The bankers have accompanied them.
American manufacturers, traders, and industrial entrepreneurs haven't ventured into foreign markets alone. Bankers have joined them.
Several of the great financial institutions of the country are advertising their foreign connections.
Several major financial institutions in the country are promoting their international connections.
The Guaranty Trust Company (New York Times, Jan. 10, 1919) advertises under the caption "Direct Foreign Banking Facilities" offering "a direct and comprehensive banking service for trade with all countries." These connections include:
The Guaranty Trust Company (New York Times, Jan. 10, 1919) advertises under the heading "Direct Foreign Banking Facilities," providing "a direct and complete banking service for trade with all countries." These connections include:
1. Branches in London and Paris, which are designated United States depositories. "They are American institutions conducted on American lines, and are especially well equipped to render banking service throughout Europe." There are additional branches in Liverpool and Brussels. The Company also has direct connections in Italy and Spain, and representatives in the Scandinavian countries.
1. Branches in London and Paris, which are designated United States depositories. "They are American institutions run on American principles and are especially well-equipped to provide banking services throughout Europe." There are additional branches in Liverpool and Brussels. The Company also has direct connections in Italy and Spain, and representatives in the Scandinavian countries.
2. "Direct connections with the leading financial institutions in Argentina, Uruguay, Chile, and Brazil." A special representative in Buenos Ayres. "Through our affiliation with the Mercantile Bank of the Americas and its connections, we cover Peru, Northern Brazil, Columbia,[Pg 137] Ecuador, Venezuela, Nicaragua, Honduras, Guatemala, and other South and Central American countries."
2. "Direct connections with top financial institutions in Argentina, Uruguay, Chile, and Brazil." A special representative in Buenos Aires. "With our partnership with the Mercantile Bank of the Americas and its network, we serve Peru, Northern Brazil, Colombia,[Pg 137] Ecuador, Venezuela, Nicaragua, Honduras, Guatemala, and other South and Central American countries."
3. "Through the American Mercantile Bank of Cuba, at Havana, we cover direct Cuba and the West Indies."
3. "Through the American Mercantile Bank of Cuba in Havana, we provide direct coverage for Cuba and the West Indies."
4. "Direct banking and merchant service throughout British India," together with correspondents in the East Indies and the Straits Settlements.
4. "Direct banking and merchant services across British India," along with partners in the East Indies and the Straits Settlements.
5. "Direct connections with the National Bank of South Africa, at Cape Town, and its many branches in the Transvaal, Rhodesia, Natal, Mozambique, etc."
5. "Direct connections with the National Bank of South Africa in Cape Town and its numerous branches in Transvaal, Rhodesia, Natal, Mozambique, and so on."
6. Direct banking connections and a special representative in Australia and New Zealand.
6. Direct banking links and a dedicated representative in Australia and New Zealand.
7. "Through our affiliations with the Asia Banking Corporation we negotiate, direct, banking transactions of every nature in China, Manchuria, Southeastern Siberia, and throughout the Far East. The Asia Banking Corporation has its main office in New York and is establishing branches in these important trade centers: Shanghai, Pekin, Tientsin, Hankow, Harbin, Vladivostok. We are also official correspondents for leading Japanese banks."
7. "Through our partnerships with the Asia Banking Corporation, we handle all types of banking transactions in China, Manchuria, Southeastern Siberia, and across the Far East. The Asia Banking Corporation is headquartered in New York and is setting up branches in key trade hubs: Shanghai, Beijing, Tianjin, Hankou, Harbin, and Vladivostok. We also serve as official correspondents for major Japanese banks."
The advertisement concludes with this statement: "Our Foreign Trade Bureau collects and makes available accurate and up-to-date information relating to foreign trade—export markets, foreign financial and economic conditions, shipping facilities, export technique, etc. It endeavors to bring into touch buyers and sellers here and abroad."
The advertisement wraps up with this statement: "Our Foreign Trade Bureau gathers and provides accurate and current information about foreign trade—export markets, foreign financial and economic conditions, shipping options, export techniques, and more. It aims to connect buyers and sellers both locally and internationally."
The same issue of the Times carries a statement of the Mercantile Bank of the Americas which "offers the services of a banking organization with branches and affiliated banks in important trade centers throughout Central and South America, France and Spain." The Bank describes itself as "an American Bank for Foreign trade." Among its eleven directors are the President and two Vice-Presidents of the Guaranty Trust Company.
The same issue of the Times includes a statement from the Mercantile Bank of the Americas, which "provides banking services with branches and partner banks in key trade centers across Central and South America, France, and Spain." The Bank refers to itself as "an American Bank for Foreign trade." Among its eleven directors are the President and two Vice Presidents of the Guaranty Trust Company.
The Asia Banking Corporation, upon which the Guaranty Trust Company relies for its Eastern connections, was organized in 1918 "to engage in international and foreign[Pg 138] banking in China, in the dependencies and insular possessions of the United States, and, ultimately in Siberia" (Standard Corporation Service, May-August, 1918, p. 42). The officers elected in August 1918, were Charles H. Sabin, President of the Guaranty Trust Co., President; Albert Breton, Vice-President of the Guaranty Trust Co., and Ralph Dawson, Assistant Secretary of the Guaranty Trust Company, Vice-Presidents, and Robert A. Shaw, of the overseas division of the Guaranty Trust Company, Treasurer. Among the directors are representatives of the Bankers Trust Company and of the Mercantile Bank of the Americas.
The Asia Banking Corporation, which the Guaranty Trust Company depends on for its connections in the East, was established in 1918 "to engage in international and foreign[Pg 138] banking in China, in the dependencies and insular possessions of the United States, and, ultimately in Siberia" (Standard Corporation Service, May-August, 1918, p. 42). The officers elected in August 1918 were Charles H. Sabin, President of the Guaranty Trust Co., as President; Albert Breton, Vice-President of the Guaranty Trust Co., and Ralph Dawson, Assistant Secretary of the Guaranty Trust Company, as Vice-Presidents; and Robert A. Shaw from the Guaranty Trust Company's overseas division as Treasurer. The board includes representatives from the Bankers Trust Company and the Mercantile Bank of the Americas.
10. The National City Bank
The National City Bank of New York—the first bank in the history of the Western Hemisphere to show resources exceeding one billion dollars—illustrates in its development the cyclonic changes that the past few years have brought into American business circles. The National City Bank, originally chartered in 1812, had resources of $16,750,929 in 1879 and of $18,214,823 in 1889. From that point its development has been electric. The resources of the Bank totaled 128 millions in 1899; 280 millions in 1909; $1,039,418,324 in 1919. Between 1889 and 1899 they increased 600 per cent; between 1899 and 1919 they increased 700 per cent; during the 40 years from 1889 and 1919 the increase in resources exceeded six thousand per cent.
The National City Bank of New York—the first bank in the Western Hemisphere to reach over one billion dollars in assets—shows the dramatic changes that have taken place in American business over the last few years. Founded in 1812, the National City Bank had assets of $16,750,929 in 1879 and $18,214,823 in 1889. After that, its growth has been rapid. The bank's assets reached 128 million in 1899; 280 million in 1909; and $1,039,418,324 in 1919. Between 1889 and 1899, they grew by 600 percent; from 1899 to 1919, they increased by 700 percent; and over the 40 years from 1889 to 1919, the increase in assets exceeded six thousand percent.
The organization of the Bank is indicative of the organization of modern business. Among the twenty-one directors, all of whom are engaged in some form of business enterprise, there are the names of William Rockefeller, Percy A. Rockefeller, J. Ogden Armour, Cleveland H. Dodge of the Phelps-Dodge Corporation, Cyrus H. McCormick of the International Harvester Co., Philip A. S. Franklin, President of the International Mercantile Marine Co.; Earl D. Babst, President of the American Sugar Refining Co.; Edgar Palmer, President of the New Jersey[Pg 139] Zinc Co.; Nathan C. Kingsbury, Vice-President of the Union Pacific Railroad Co., and Frank Krumball, Chairman of the Chesapeake & Ohio Railroad Co. Some of the most powerful mining, manufacturing, transportation and public utility interests in the United States are represented, directly or indirectly, in this list.
The structure of the Bank reflects the organization of today’s businesses. Among the twenty-one directors, all of whom are involved in various business ventures, you'll find names like William Rockefeller, Percy A. Rockefeller, J. Ogden Armour, Cleveland H. Dodge from the Phelps-Dodge Corporation, Cyrus H. McCormick of International Harvester Co., Philip A. S. Franklin, President of International Mercantile Marine Co.; Earl D. Babst, President of American Sugar Refining Co.; Edgar Palmer, President of the New Jersey[Pg 139] Zinc Co.; Nathan C. Kingsbury, Vice-President of Union Pacific Railroad Co., and Frank Krumball, Chairman of Chesapeake & Ohio Railroad Co. Some of the most influential mining, manufacturing, transportation, and public utility interests in the United States are represented directly or indirectly in this list.
The domestic organization of the Bank consists of five divisions, each one under a vice-president. New York City constitutes the first division; the second division comprises New England and New York State outside of New York City; the three remaining divisions cover the other portions of the United States. Except for the size and the completeness of its organization, the National City Bank differs in no essential particulars from numerous other large banking institutions. It is a financial superstructure built upon a massive foundation of industrial enterprise.
The internal structure of the Bank has five divisions, each led by a vice president. The first division is New York City; the second division includes New England and New York State outside of New York City; the last three divisions cover the other areas of the United States. Aside from its size and thorough organization, the National City Bank is essentially like many other large banking institutions. It serves as a financial framework built on a strong foundation of industrial business.
The phase of the Bank's activity that is of peculiar significance at the present juncture is its foreign organization, all of which has been established since the outbreak of the European war.
The part of the Bank's operations that's especially important right now is its foreign organization, all of which was set up since the start of the European war.
The foreign business of the National City Bank is carried on by the National City Bank proper and the International Banking Corporation. The first foreign branch of the National City Bank was established at Buenos Aires on November 10th, 1914. On January 1st, 1919, the National City Bank had a total of 15 foreign branches; on December 31st, 1919, it had a total of 74 foreign branches.
The foreign operations of the National City Bank are conducted by the National City Bank itself and the International Banking Corporation. The first international branch of the National City Bank was opened in Buenos Aires on November 10, 1914. As of January 1, 1919, the National City Bank had a total of 15 international branches; by December 31, 1919, it had grown to 74 international branches.
The policy of the Bank in its establishment of foreign branches is described thus in its "Statement of Condition, December 31st, 1919": "The feature of branch development during the year was the expansion in Cuba, where twenty-two new branches were opened, making twenty-four in the island. Cuba is very prosperous, as a result of the expansion of the sugar industry, and as sugar is produced there under very favorable conditions economically, and the location is most convenient for supplying the United States, the industry is on a sound basis, and relations with the[Pg 140] United States are likely to continue close and friendly. Cuba is a market of growing importance to the United States, and the system of branches established by the Bank is designed to serve the trade between the two countries." The trader and the Banker are to work hand in hand.
The Bank's policy for establishing foreign branches is detailed in its "Statement of Condition, December 31st, 1919": "This year, the main focus of branch development was in Cuba, where we opened twenty-two new branches, bringing the total to twenty-four on the island. Cuba is thriving due to the growth of the sugar industry, which benefits from favorable economic conditions for sugar production. Its location is ideal for supplying the United States, making the industry stable, and we expect that relations with the[Pg 140] United States will remain strong and friendly. Cuba is becoming an increasingly important market for the United States, and the network of branches set up by the Bank aims to support trade between the two countries." The trader and the Banker are meant to collaborate closely.
The National City Bank has branches in Argentina, Brazil, Belgium, Chile, Colombia, Cuba, Italy, Porto Rico, Russia, Siberia, Spain, Trinidad, Uruguay and Venezuela, all of which have been established since 1914.
The National City Bank has branches in Argentina, Brazil, Belgium, Chile, Colombia, Cuba, Italy, Puerto Rico, Russia, Siberia, Spain, Trinidad, Uruguay, and Venezuela, all of which have been set up since 1914.
A portion of the foreign business of the National City Bank is conducted by the International Banking Corporation which was established in 1902 and which became a part of the National City Bank organization in 1915. The International Banking Corporation has a total of twenty-eight branches located in California, China, England, France, India, Japan, Java, Dominican Republic, Philippine Islands, Republic of Panama and the Straits Settlements. Under this arrangement, the financial relations with America are made by the National City Bank proper; while those with Europe and Asia are in the hands of the International Banking Corporation and the combination provides the Bank with 75 branches in addition to its vast organization within the United States.
A part of the National City Bank's foreign operations is managed by the International Banking Corporation, which was founded in 1902 and became part of the National City Bank in 1915. The International Banking Corporation has a total of twenty-eight branches in California, China, England, France, India, Japan, Java, the Dominican Republic, the Philippines, Panama, and the Straits Settlements. Under this setup, the National City Bank handles financial relations with America, while the International Banking Corporation oversees those with Europe and Asia. This partnership gives the Bank a total of 75 branches, in addition to its extensive operations within the United States.
The National City Bank of 1889, with its resources of eighteen millions, was a small affair compared with the billion dollar resources of 1920. Thirty years sufficed for a growth from youth to robust adulthood. Within five years, the Bank built up a system of foreign branches that make it one of the most potent States in the federation of international financial institutions.
The National City Bank of 1889, with its resources of eighteen million, was a small operation compared to the billion-dollar resources of 1920. In just thirty years, it grew from its early beginnings to a strong, established institution. Within five years, the Bank developed a network of international branches that made it one of the most powerful players in the global financial system.
11. Onward
Exploiters of foreign resources, manufacturers, traders and bankers have moved, side by side, out of the United States into the foreign field. Step by step they have advanced, rearing the economic structure of empire as they went.
Exploiters of foreign resources, manufacturers, traders, and bankers have moved, side by side, out of the United States into international markets. They have steadily progressed, building the economic framework of empire as they went.
The business men of the United States had no choice. They could not pause when they had spanned the continent. Ambition called them, surplus compelled them, profits lured them, the will to power dominated their lives. As well expect the Old Guard to pause in the middle of a charge—even before the sunken road at Waterloo—as to expect the business interests of the United States to cease their efforts and lay down their tools of conquest simply because they had reached the ocean in one direction. While there were left other directions in which there was no ocean; while other undeveloped regions offered the possibility of development, an inexorable fate—the fate inherent in the economic and the human stuff with which they were working compelled them to cry "Onward!" and to turn to the tasks that lay ahead.
The business leaders of the United States had no choice. They couldn’t stop after spanning the continent. Ambition drove them, surplus pushed them, profits attracted them, and the desire for power dominated their lives. It was just as unlikely to expect the Old Guard to pause in the middle of a charge—even at the sunken road at Waterloo—as to think that the business interests of the United States would halt their efforts and put down their tools of conquest simply because they had reached the ocean in one direction. As long as there were other areas without ocean; as long as other undeveloped regions presented opportunities for growth, an unstoppable fate—the fate inherent in the economy and the people they were working with—compelled them to shout "Onward!" and tackle the challenges ahead.
The fathers and grandfathers of these Twentieth Century American Plutocrats, working coatless in their tiny factories; managing their corner stores; serving their local banks, and holding their minor offices had never dreamed of the destiny that lay ahead. No matter. The necessity for expansion had come and with it came the opportunity. The economic pressure complemented the human desire for "more." The structure of business organization, which was erected to conquer one continent could not cease functioning when that one continent was subdued. Rather, high geared and speeded up as it was, it was in fine form to extend its conquests, like the well groomed army that has come scatheless through a great campaign, and that longs, throughout its tensely unified structure to be off on the next mission.
The fathers and grandfathers of these 20th Century American plutocrats, working without jackets in their small factories; running their local stores; serving their community banks, and holding minor political positions had never imagined the future that awaited them. But it didn’t matter. The need for growth had arrived, bringing new opportunities. The economic pressure matched the human craving for "more." The business organization that was built to conquer one continent couldn’t just stop operating once that continent was dominated. Instead, with its gears turning fast and smoothly, it was primed to expand its reach, like a well-trained army that has emerged unscathed from a major campaign and eagerly looks forward to its next mission.
The business life of the United States came to the Pacific; touched the Canadian border; surged against the Rio Grande. The continent had been spanned; the objective had been attained. Still, the cry was "Onward!"
The business landscape of the United States reached the Pacific; touched the Canadian border; and surged against the Rio Grande. The continent had been crossed; the goal had been achieved. Yet, the call was "Onward!"
Onward? Whither?
Onward? Where to?
Onward to the lands where resources are abundant and rich; onward where labor is plentiful, docile and cheap; [Pg 142]onward where the opportunities for huge profits are met with on every hand; onward into the undeveloped countries of the world.
Onward to the places where resources are plentiful and valuable; onward where labor is readily available, manageable, and inexpensive; [Pg 142]onward where the chances for big profits are everywhere; onward into the developing countries of the world.
The capitalists of the European nations, faced by a similar necessity for expansion, had been compelled to go half round the earth to India, to South Africa, to the East Indies, to China, to Canada, to South America. Close at home there was no country except Russia that offered great possibilities of development.
The capitalists of the European nations, needing to expand, had to travel halfway around the world to India, South Africa, the East Indies, China, Canada, and South America. Nearby, there was only Russia that presented significant opportunities for growth.
The business interests of the United States were more fortunate. At their very doors lay the opportunities—in Canada, in Mexico, in the West Indies, in Central and South America. Here were countries with the amplest, richest resources; countries open for capitalist development. To be sure these investment fields had been invaded already by foreign capitalists—British, German, Belgian and Spanish. But at the same time they were surrounded by a tradition of great virility and power—the tradition of "America for the Americans."
The business interests of the United States were more fortunate. Right at their doorstep were the opportunities—in Canada, in Mexico, in the West Indies, and in Central and South America. These were countries with abundant, rich resources; countries ready for capitalist development. Of course, these investment areas had already been entered by foreign capitalists—British, German, Belgian, and Spanish. But at the same time, they were surrounded by a tradition of great strength and influence—the tradition of "America for the Americans."
XI. THE GREAT WAR
1. Daylight
The work of industrial empire building had continued for less than half a century when the United States entered the Great War, which was one in a sequence of events that bound America to the wheel of destiny as it bound England and France and Germany and Japan and every other country that had adopted the capitalist method of production.
The effort of building industrial empires had gone on for less than fifty years when the United States joined the Great War, which was part of a series of events that connected America to the wheel of destiny, just like it did with England, France, Germany, Japan, and every other country that had embraced the capitalist system of production.
The war-test revealed the United States to the world and to its own people as a great nation playing a mighty rôle in international affairs. Most Europeans had not suspected the extent of its power. Even the Americans did not realize it. Nevertheless, the processes of economic empire building had laid a foundation upon which the superstructure of political empire is reared as a matter of course. Henceforth, no one need ask whether the United States should or should not be an imperial nation. There remained only the task of determining what form American imperialism should take.
The war-test showed the world and Americans that the United States was a powerful nation playing a significant role in international affairs. Most Europeans hadn't realized how strong it had become. Even Americans were unaware of it. However, the processes of economic empire building had set up a foundation for the political empire to grow naturally. From then on, there was no question about whether the United States should be an imperial nation. The only remaining task was to decide what shape American imperialism should take.
The Great War rounded out the imperial beginnings of the United States. It strengthened the plutocracy at home; it gave the United States immense prestige abroad.
The Great War marked the end of the United States' imperial beginnings. It bolstered the wealthy elite at home and boosted the country's prestige on the global stage.
The Era of Imperialism dawned upon the United States in 1898. Daylight broke in 1914, and the night of isolation and of international unimportance gave place to a new day of imperial power.
The Age of Imperialism began for the United States in 1898. Daylight arrived in 1914, and the period of isolation and international irrelevance gave way to a new era of imperial dominance.
2. Plutocracy in the Saddle
The rapid sweep across a new continent had placed the resources of the United States in the hands of a powerful minority. Nature had been generous and private ownership of the inexhaustible wilderness seemed to be the natural—the obvious method of procedure.
The quick expansion across a new continent had put the resources of the United States in the hands of a strong minority. Nature had been generous, and private ownership of the endless wilderness appeared to be the natural— the obvious way to go.
The lightning march of the American people across the continent gave the plutocracy its grip on the natural resources. The revolutionary transformations in industry guaranteed its control of the productive machinery.
The rapid expansion of the American people across the continent allowed the wealthy elite to seize control of the natural resources. The revolutionary changes in industry ensured their dominance over the means of production.
The wizards of industrial activity have changed the structure of business life even more rapidly than they have conquered the wilderness. True sons of their revolutionary ancestors, they have slashed and remodeled and built anew with little regard for the past.
The innovators of industry have transformed the landscape of business life even faster than they have tamed the wild. True heirs of their revolutionary forebears, they have cut, reshaped, and rebuilt with little concern for what came before.
Revolutions are the stalking grounds of predatory power. Napoleon built his empire on the French Revolution; Cromwell on the revolt against tyrannical royalty in England. Peaceful times give less opportunity to personal ambition. Institutions are well-rooted, customs and habits are firmly placed, life is regulated and held to earth by a fixed framework of habit and tradition.
Revolutions are the hunting grounds of ruthless power. Napoleon built his empire on the French Revolution; Cromwell on the rebellion against oppressive monarchy in England. Calm times offer fewer chances for personal ambition. Institutions are established, customs and habits are deeply rooted, life is organized and grounded by a stable framework of habits and traditions.
Revolution comes—fiercely, impetuously—uprooting institutions, overthrowing traditions, tearing customs from their resting places. All is uncertainty—chaos, when, lo! a man on horseback gathers the loose strands together saying, "Good people, I know, follow me!"
Revolution arrives—intense and impulsive—uprooting institutions, overthrowing traditions, and pulling customs from their foundations. Everything is uncertain—chaotic, when suddenly, a man on horseback gathers the scattered pieces together, saying, "Good people, I know, follow me!"
He does know; but woe to the people who follow him! Yet, what shall they do? Whither shall they turn? How shall they act? Who can be relied upon in this uncertain hour?
He knows; but woe to those who follow him! Yet, what can they do? Where can they turn? How should they act? Who can they trust in this uncertain time?
The man on horseback rises in his stirrups—speaking in mighty accents his message of hope and cheer, reassuring, promising, encouraging, inspiring all who come within the sound of his voice. His is the one assurance in a wilderness of uncertainty. What wonder that the people follow where he leads and beckons!
The man on horseback stands up in his stirrups—speaking in powerful tones his message of hope and positivity, reassuring, promising, encouraging, inspiring everyone who hears him. He is the one certainty in a land of doubt. No surprise that the people follow wherever he leads and gestures!
The revolutionary changes in American economic life between the Civil War and the War of 1914 gave the plutocrat his chance. He was the man on horseback, quick, clever, shrewd, farseeing, persuasive, powerful. Through the courses of these revolutionary changes, the Hills, Goulds, Harrimans, Wideners, Weyerhausers, [Pg 145]Guggenheims, Rockefellers, Carnegies, and Morgans did to the American economic organization exactly what Napoleon did to the French political organization—they took possession of it.
The major shifts in American economic life between the Civil War and World War I created an opportunity for the wealthy elite. He was the man in control, quick, smart, cunning, visionary, persuasive, and powerful. As a result of these revolutionary changes, the Hills, Goulds, Harrimans, Wideners, Weyerhausers, [Pg 145]Guggenheims, Rockefellers, Carnegies, and Morgans transformed the American economic structure just like Napoleon transformed the French political system—they seized it.
3. Making the Plutocracy Be Good
The American people were still thinking the thoughts of a competitive economic life when the cohorts of an organized plutocracy bore down upon them. High prices, trusts, millionaires, huge profits, corruption, betrayal of public office took the people by surprise, confused them, baffled them, enraged them. Their first thought was of politics, and during the years immediately preceding the war they were busy with the problem of legislating goodness into the plutocracy.
The American people were still focused on the ideas of a competitive economy when the forces of an organized wealthy elite struck them. Rising prices, monopolies, millionaires, massive profits, corruption, and the betrayal of public office shocked the public, leaving them confused, frustrated, and angry. Their initial reaction was political, and in the years leading up to the war, they worked on the challenge of legislating integrity into the plutocracy.
The plutocrats were in public disfavor, and their control of natural resources, banks, railroads, mines, factories, political parties, public offices, governmental machinery, the school system, the press, the pulpit, the movie business,—all of this power amounted to nothing unless it was backed by public opinion.
The wealthy elite were not popular with the public, and their control over natural resources, banks, railroads, mines, factories, political parties, government positions, the political system, schools, the media, religious institutions, and the film industry—none of this power meant anything without support from public opinion.
How could the plutocracy—the discredited, vilified plutocracy—get public opinion? How could the exploiters gain the confidence of the American people? There was only one way—they must line up with some cause that would command public attention and compel public support. The cause that it chose was the "defense of the United States."
How could the wealthy elite—the discredited and despised elite—win over public opinion? How could the exploiters earn the trust of the American people? There was only one way—they needed to align themselves with a cause that would capture public attention and inspire public support. The cause they chose was the "defense of the United States."
4. "Preparedness"
The plutocracy, with a united front, "went in" for the "defense of the United States,"—attacking the people on the side of their greatest weakness; playing upon their primitive emotions of fear and hate. The campaign was intense and dramatic, featuring Japanese invasions, Mexican inroads, and a world conquest by Germany.
The wealthy elite, coming together, "pushed" for the "defense of the United States,"—targeting the public on their most vulnerable points; tapping into their basic feelings of fear and hatred. The campaign was intense and dramatic, showcasing Japanese attacks, Mexican threats, and a global takeover by Germany.
The preparedness campaign was a marvel of efficient business organization. Its promoters made use of every device known to the advertising profession; the best brains were employed, and the country was blanketed with preparedness propaganda.
The preparedness campaign was a remarkable example of effective business organization. Its promoters utilized every strategy known to the advertising industry; the smartest minds were involved, and the entire country was covered with preparedness propaganda.
Officers of the Army and Navy were frank in insisting that the defense of the United States was adequately provided for. (See testimony of General Nelson A. Miles. Congressional Record, February 3, 1916, p. 2265.) Still the preparedness campaign continued with vigor. Congressman Clyde H. Tavenner in his speech, "The Navy League Unmasked," showed why. He gave facts like those appearing in George R. Kirkpatrick's book, "War, What For"; in F. C. Howe's "Why War," and in J. A. Hobson's "Imperialism," showing that, in the words of an English authority, "patriotism at from 10 to 15 per cent is a temptation for the best of citizens."
Officers of the Army and Navy were straightforward in stating that the defense of the United States was sufficiently addressed. (See testimony of General Nelson A. Miles. Congressional Record, February 3, 1916, p. 2265.) Yet, the preparedness campaign continued relentlessly. Congressman Clyde H. Tavenner, in his speech "The Navy League Unmasked," explained why. He provided facts similar to those found in George R. Kirkpatrick's book, "War, What For"; in F. C. Howe's "Why War," and in J. A. Hobson's "Imperialism," illustrating that, in the words of an English expert, "patriotism at about 10 to 15 percent is a temptation for even the best citizens."
Tavenner established the connection between the preparedness campaign and those who were making profits out of the powder business, the nickel business, the copper business, and the steel business, interlocked through interlocking directorates; then he established the connection between the Navy League and the firm of J. P. Morgan & Co., 23 Wall St., New York. Regarding this connection, Congressman Tavenner said, "The Navy League upon close examination would appear to be little more than a branch office of the house of J. P. Morgan & Co., and a general sales promotion bureau for the various armor and munition makers and the steel, nickel, copper and zinc interests."[45]
Tavenner revealed the link between the preparedness campaign and those profiting from the powder, nickel, copper, and steel industries, which were intertwined through interlocking boards of directors. He also highlighted the relationship between the Navy League and the firm of J. P. Morgan & Co., 23 Wall St., New York. About this connection, Congressman Tavenner stated, "The Navy League, upon close examination, seems to be little more than a branch office of the house of J. P. Morgan & Co., and a general sales promotion hub for various armor and munitions manufacturers and the steel, nickel, copper, and zinc sectors."[45]
The preparedness movement came from the business interests. It was fostered and financed by the plutocrats. It was their first successful effort at winning public confidence, and so well was it managed that millions of Americans fell into line, fired by the love of the flag and the world-old devotion to family and fireside.
The preparedness movement originated from business interests. It was supported and funded by wealthy elites. This marked their first successful attempt to gain public trust, and it was so effectively executed that millions of Americans rallied behind it, driven by patriotism and the age-old commitment to family and home.
5. Patriots
From preparedness to patriotism was an easy step. The preparedness advocates had evoked the spirit of the founders of American democracy and worked upon the emotions of the people until it was generally understood that those who favored preparedness were patriots.
From preparedness to patriotism was a simple transition. The preparedness supporters had tapped into the spirit of the founders of American democracy and stirred the emotions of the people until it was widely recognized that those who supported preparedness were patriots.
Plutocratic patriotism was accepted by the press, the pulpit, the college, and every other important channel of public information in the United States. Editors, ministers, professors and lawyers proclaimed it as though it were their own. Randolph Bourne, in a brilliant article (Seven Arts, July, 1917) reminds his readers of "the virtuous horror and stupefaction when they read the manifesto of their ninety-three German colleagues in defense of the war. To the American academic mind of 1914 defense of war was inconceivable. From Bernhardi it recoiled as from a blasphemy, little dreaming that two years later would find it creating its own cleanly reasons for imposing military service on the country and for talking of the rough rude currents of health and regeneration that war would send through the American body politic. They would have thought any one mad who talked of shipping American men by the hundreds of thousands—conscripts—to die on the fields of France...."
Plutocratic patriotism was embraced by the media, religious leaders, academia, and all other key sources of public information in the United States. Editors, ministers, professors, and lawyers endorsed it as if it were their own idea. Randolph Bourne, in a powerful article (Seven Arts, July, 1917), reminds his readers of "the virtuous horror and shock when they read the manifesto of their ninety-three German colleagues defending the war. To the American academic mindset of 1914, defending war was unimaginable. They recoiled from Bernhardi like it was blasphemy, not realizing that two years later, they would be justifying military service for the country and discussing the strong, raw forces of health and renewal that war would bring to the American political landscape. They would have considered anyone insane who talked about sending American men by the hundreds of thousands—conscripts—to die on the fields of France...."
The American plutocracy was magnified, deified, and consecrated to the task of making the world safe for democracy. Exploiters had turned saviors and were conducting a campaign to raise $100,000,000 for the Red Cross.[46] The "malefactors of great wealth," the predatory business forces, the special privileged few who had exploited the American people for generations, became the prophets and the crusaders,[Pg 148] the keepers of the ark of the covenant of American democracy.
The American wealthy elite was glorified, idolized, and dedicated to making the world safe for democracy. Exploiters had transformed into saviors and were leading a campaign to raise $100,000,000 for the Red Cross.[46] The "criminals of immense wealth," the ruthless business forces, the privileged few who had taken advantage of the American people for generations, became the prophets and the crusaders,[Pg 148] the guardians of the promise of American democracy.
Radicals who had always opposed war, ministers who had spent their lives preaching peace upon earth, scientists whose work had brought them into contact with the peoples of the whole world, public men who believed that the United States could do greater and better work for democracy by staying out of the war, were branded as traitors and were persecuted as zealously as though they had sided with Protestantism in Catholic Spain under the Inquisition.
Radicals who had always opposed war, ministers who had dedicated their lives to preaching peace on earth, scientists whose work had connected them with people from all over the world, and public figures who believed that the United States could do more to support democracy by staying out of the war were labeled as traitors and pursued just as fiercely as if they had supported Protestantism in Catholic Spain during the Inquisition.
By a clever move, the plutocrats, wrapped in the flag and proclaiming a crusade to inaugurate democracy in Germany, rallied to their support the professional classes of the United States and millions of the common people.
By a smart strategy, the wealthy elites, draped in the flag and declaring a mission to bring democracy to Germany, gained the backing of the professional classes in the United States and millions of ordinary people.
6. Business in Control
After the declaration of war, the mobilization and direction of the economic war work of the government was placed in the hands of the Council of National Defense, an organized group of the leading business men. The Council consisted of six members of the President's Cabinet, assisted by an Advisory Commission and numerous sub-committees. The "Advisory Commission" of the Council (the real working body) contained four business men, an educator, a labor leader and a medical man. ("The Council of National Defense" a bulletin issued by the Council under date of June 28, 1917.)
After the war was declared, the responsibility for mobilizing and managing the government's economic war efforts was handed over to the Council of National Defense, a coordinated group of top business leaders. The Council included six members of the President's Cabinet, supported by an Advisory Commission and several sub-committees. The "Advisory Commission" of the Council (the main operational group) comprised four business leaders, an educator, a labor leader, and a medical professional. ("The Council of National Defense" a bulletin issued by the Council on June 28, 1917.)
Each member of the Advisory Commission had a group of persons coöperating with him. The make-up of these various committees was significant. Among 706 persons listed in the original schedule of sub-committees, 404 were business men, 200 were professional men, 59 were labor men, 23 were public officials and 20 were miscellaneous. It was only in Mr. Gompers' group that labor had any representation, and even there, out of 138 persons only 59 were workers or officials of unions, while 34 were business[Pg 149] men and 33 professional men, so that among Mr. Gompers' assistants the business and professional men combined considerably outnumbered the labor men.
Each member of the Advisory Commission had a group of people working with them. The composition of these various committees was significant. Among the 706 people listed in the original schedule of sub-committees, 404 were businesspeople, 200 were professionals, 59 were laborers, 23 were public officials, and 20 were from other categories. Only in Mr. Gompers' group did labor have any representation, and even there, out of 138 people, only 59 were workers or union officials, while 34 were businesspeople and 33 were professionals, so that among Mr. Gompers' assistants, business and professional people significantly outnumbered the laborers.
The make-up of some of the sub-committees revealed the forces behind the Defense Council. Thus Mr. Willard's sub-committee on "Express" consisted of four vice-presidents, one from the American, one from the Wells-Fargo, one from the Southern and one from the Adams Express Company. His committee on "Locomotives" consisted of the Vice-President of the Porter Locomotive Company, the President of the American Locomotive Company, and the Chairman of the Lima Locomotive Corporation. Mr. Rosenwald's committee on "Shoe and Leather Industries" consisted of eight persons, all of them representing shoe or leather companies. His committee on "Woolen Manufactures" consisted of eight representatives of the woolen industry. The same business supremacy appeared in Mr. Baruch's committees. His committee on "Cement" consisted of the presidents of four of the leading cement companies, the vice-president of a fifth cement company, and a representative of the Bureau of Standards of Washington. His committee on "Copper" had the names of the presidents of the Anaconda Copper Company, the Calumet & Hecla Mining Company, the United Verde Copper Company and the Utah Copper Company. His committee on "Steel and Steel Products" consisted of Elbert H. Gary, Chairman of the United States Steel Corporation; Charles M. Schwab, of the Bethlehem Steel Company; A. C. Dinkey, Vice-President of the Midvale Steel Company; W. L. King, Vice-President of Jones & Loughlin Steel Company, and J. A. Burden, President of the Burden Steel Company. The four other members of the committee represented the Republic Iron and Steel Company, the Lackawanna Steel Company, the American Iron and Steel Institute and the Picklands, Mather Co., of Cleveland. Perhaps the most astounding of all the committees was that on "Oil." The chairman was the President of the Standard Oil Company, and the secretary of the committee gives his address as "26 Broadway," the address of the Standard Oil [Pg 150]Company. The other nine members of the committee were oil men from various parts of the country. What thinking American would have suggested, three years before, that the Standard Oil Company would be officially directing a part of the work of the Federal Government?
The makeup of some of the subcommittees showed the influences behind the Defense Council. Mr. Willard's subcommittee on "Express" included four vice presidents—one from American Express, one from Wells-Fargo, one from Southern Express, and one from Adams Express Company. His committee on "Locomotives" had the Vice President of Porter Locomotive Company, the President of American Locomotive Company, and the Chairman of Lima Locomotive Corporation. Mr. Rosenwald's committee on "Shoe and Leather Industries" had eight members, all representing shoe or leather companies. His committee on "Woolen Manufactures" consisted of eight representatives from the woolen industry. The same business dominance appeared in Mr. Baruch's committees. His committee on "Cement" included the presidents of four leading cement companies, the vice president of a fifth cement company, and a representative from the Bureau of Standards in Washington. His committee on "Copper" featured the presidents of Anaconda Copper Company, Calumet & Hecla Mining Company, United Verde Copper Company, and Utah Copper Company. His committee on "Steel and Steel Products" had Elbert H. Gary, Chairman of United States Steel Corporation; Charles M. Schwab from Bethlehem Steel Company; A. C. Dinkey, Vice President of Midvale Steel Company; W. L. King, Vice President of Jones & Loughlin Steel Company; and J. A. Burden, President of Burden Steel Company. The other four members represented Republic Iron and Steel Company, Lackawanna Steel Company, American Iron and Steel Institute, and Picklands, Mather Co. of Cleveland. Perhaps the most surprising of all the committees was the one on "Oil." The chairman was the President of Standard Oil Company, and the committee's secretary listed his address as "26 Broadway," the address of Standard Oil [Pg 150]Company. The other nine members of the committee were oil executives from various parts of the country. What rational American would have predicted, just three years earlier, that Standard Oil Company would be officially overseeing part of the Federal Government's work?
Comment is superfluous. Every great industrial enterprise of the United States had secured representation on the committees of business men that were responsible for the direction of the economic side of war making.
Comment is unnecessary. Every major industrial company in the United States had secured representation on the committees of business leaders that were in charge of managing the economic aspects of war efforts.
Then came the Liberty Loan campaigns and Red Cross drives, the direction of which also was given into the hands of experienced business men. In each community, the leaders in the business world were the leaders in these war-time activities. Since the center of business life was the bank, it followed that the directing power in all of the war-time campaigns rested with the bankers, and thus the whole nation was mobilized under the direction of its financiers.
Then came the Liberty Loan campaigns and Red Cross drives, which were also managed by experienced business people. In every community, the business leaders were at the forefront of these wartime efforts. Since banks were the center of business life, it made sense that the key decision-makers in all the wartime campaigns were bankers, and so the entire nation was mobilized under the direction of its financial leaders.
The results of these experiences were far-reaching. During two generations, the people of the United States had been passing anti-trust laws and anti-pooling laws, the aim of which was to prevent the business men of the country from getting together. The war crisis not only brought them together, but when they did assemble, it placed the whole political and economic power of the nation in their hands.
The outcomes of these experiences had significant impacts. For two generations, the people of the United States had been enacting anti-trust and anti-pooling laws, intended to prevent business leaders in the country from collaborating. The war crisis not only united them but, when they gathered, it also placed the entire political and economic power of the nation in their control.
The business men learned, by first hand experience, the benefits that arise from united effort. They joined forces across the continent, and they found that it paid. James S. Alexander, President of the National Bank of Commerce (New York), tells the story from the standpoint of a banker (Manchester Guardian, January 28, 1920. Signed Article.) In a discussion of "the experience in coöperative action which the war has given American banks" he says, "The responsibility of floating the five great loans issued by the government, together with the work of financing a production of materials speeded up to meet war necessities, enforced a unity of action and coöperation which otherwise could hardly have been obtained in many years."
The businessmen learned from firsthand experience the advantages of working together. They united their efforts across the country, and they found it beneficial. James S. Alexander, President of the National Bank of Commerce (New York), shares this perspective as a banker (Manchester Guardian, January 28, 1920. Signed Article). In a discussion about "the experience in cooperative action that the war has provided American banks," he states, "The responsibility of managing the five major loans issued by the government, along with the efforts to finance the accelerated production of materials needed for the war, created a level of unity and cooperation that would have been difficult to achieve otherwise for many years."
7. Economic Winnings
The war gains of the plutocracy in the field of public control were important, as well as spectacular. Behind them, however, were economic gains—little heralded, but of the most vital consequence to the future of plutocratic power.
The war profits of the wealthy elite in the realm of public control were significant and impressive. Yet, underlying these were economic gains—rarely acknowledged, but crucial for the future of elite power.
The war speeded production and added greatly to the national income, to investable surplus, to profits and thus to the economic power of the plutocrats.
The war accelerated production and significantly increased national income, investable surplus, profits, and consequently the economic power of the wealthy elite.
The most tangible measure of the economic advantage gained by the plutocracy from the war is contained in a report on "Corporate Earnings and Government Revenues" (Senate Document 259. 65th Congress, Second Session). This report shows the profits made by the various industries during 1917—the first war year.
The most concrete measure of the economic benefit gained by the wealthy elite from the war is found in a report titled "Corporate Earnings and Government Revenues" (Senate Document 259. 65th Congress, Second Session). This report details the profits earned by different industries during 1917—the first year of the war.
The report contains 388 large pages on which are listed the profits ("percent of net income to capital stock in 1917") made by various concerns. A typical food producing industry—"meat packing"—lists 122 firms (p. 95 and 365). Of these firms 31 reported profits for the year of less than 25 percent; 45 reported profits of 25 but under 50 percent; 24 reported profits of 50 but under 100 percent, and 22 reported profits of 100 percent or more. In this case, a third of the profits were more than 25, but less than 50 percent, and half were 50 percent or over.
The report has 388 large pages detailing the profits ("percent of net income to capital stock in 1917") earned by various businesses. A typical food production sector—"meat packing"—lists 122 companies (p. 95 and 365). Of these companies, 31 reported profits of less than 25 percent for the year; 45 reported profits between 25 and under 50 percent; 24 reported profits between 50 and under 100 percent, and 22 reported profits of 100 percent or more. In this case, a third of the profits were more than 25 but less than 50 percent, and half were 50 percent or higher.
Manufacturers of cotton yarns reported profits ranging slightly higher than those in the meat packing industry (pp. 167, 168, 379). Among the 153 firms reporting, 21 reported profits of less than 25 percent; 61 reported 25 but less than 50 per cent; 55 reported 50 but under 100 percent, and 16 reported 100 percent or more.
Manufacturers of cotton yarns reported profits that were just a bit higher than those in the meatpacking industry (pp. 167, 168, 379). Out of the 153 companies that reported, 21 had profits of less than 25 percent; 61 had profits between 25 and less than 50 percent; 55 had profits between 50 and under 100 percent, and 16 had profits of 100 percent or more.
Profits in the garment manufacturing industry were lower than those in yarn manufacturing. Among the 299 firms reporting (pp. 171, 380) 74 gave their profits as less than 25 percent; 121 gave their profits as 25 but under 50[Pg 152] percent; 65 gave profits of 50 but less than 100 percent, and 39 gave their profits as 100 percent or over.
Profits in the garment manufacturing industry were lower than those in yarn manufacturing. Out of the 299 firms reporting (pp. 171, 380), 74 reported profits of less than 25 percent; 121 reported profits between 25 and 50 percent; 65 reported profits between 50 and 100 percent; and 39 reported profits of 100 percent or more.
The profits of 49 Steel plants and Rolling Mills (pp. 100, 365) were considerably higher than profits in any of the industries heretofore discussed. Four firms reported profits of less than 25 percent; 13 reported profits of 25 but less than 50 percent; 17 reported profits of 50 but less than 100 percent, and 15 reported profits of more than 100 percent. In this instance two-thirds of the firms show profits of 50 percent or over.
The profits of 49 steel plants and rolling mills (pp. 100, 365) were significantly higher than those in any of the industries previously discussed. Four companies reported profits of less than 25 percent; 13 reported profits between 25 and 50 percent; 17 reported profits between 50 and 100 percent, and 15 reported profits of over 100 percent. In this case, two-thirds of the companies showed profits of 50 percent or more.
Bituminous Coal producers in the Appalachian field (340 in number, pp. 130 and 372) report a range of profits far higher than those secured in the manufacturing industries. Among these 340 firms, 23 reported profits of less than 25 percent; 45 reported profits of 25 but under 50 percent; 79 reported profits of 50 but under 100 percent; 135 reported profits of 100 but under 500 percent; 21 reported profits of 500 but under 1,000 percent, and 14 reported profits of 1,000 percent and over. In the case of these coal mine operators only a fourth had profits of under 50 percent and half had profits of more than 100 percent.
Bituminous coal producers in the Appalachian region (340 in total, pp. 130 and 372) are reporting profit margins that are much higher than those in manufacturing industries. Among these 340 companies, 23 reported profits of less than 25 percent; 45 reported profits between 25 and just under 50 percent; 79 reported profits between 50 and just under 100 percent; 135 reported profits between 100 and just under 500 percent; 21 reported profits between 500 and just under 1,000 percent, and 14 reported profits of 1,000 percent or more. For these coal mine operators, only a quarter had profits below 50 percent, while half had profits exceeding 100 percent.
The profits in these five industries—food, yarn, clothing, steel and coal—are quite typical of the figures for the tens of thousands of other firms listed in Senate Document 259. Profits of less than 25 percent are the exception. Profits of over 100 percent were reported by 8 percent of the yarn manufacturers, by 13 percent of the garment manufacturers, by 18 percent of the meat packers, by 31 percent of the steel plants, and by 50 percent of the bituminous coal mines. A considerable number of profits ranged above 500 percent, or a gain in one year of five times the entire capital stock.
The profits in these five industries—food, yarn, clothing, steel, and coal—are pretty typical of the figures for the tens of thousands of other companies listed in Senate Document 259. Profits of less than 25 percent are rare. Profits exceeding 100 percent were reported by 8 percent of the yarn manufacturers, 13 percent of the clothing manufacturers, 18 percent of the meat packers, 31 percent of the steel mills, and 50 percent of the bituminous coal mines. A significant number of profits were over 500 percent, meaning a gain in one year of five times the total capital stock.
When it is remembered that these figures were supplied by the firms involved; that they were submitted to a tremendously overworked department, lacking the facilities for effective checking-up; and that they were submitted for the purposes of heavy taxation, the showing is nothing less than astounding.
When you consider that these figures came from the companies involved; that they were sent to a deeply overworked department, which didn’t have the means for proper verification; and that they were provided for the purpose of significant taxation, the results are truly incredible.
8. Winnings in the Home Field
What has the American plutocracy won at home as a result of the war? In two words it has gained social prestige and internal (economic) solidarity. Both are vital as the foundation for future assertions of power.
What has the American wealthy elite gained at home because of the war? In two words, it has gained social status and internal economic unity. Both are essential for building a foundation for future claims to power.
The plutocracy has unified its hold upon the country as a result of the war. Also, it has won an important battle in its struggle with labor. The position held by the American plutocracy at the end of the Great War could hardly be stated more adequately than in a recent Confidential Information Service furnished by an important agency to American business men:
The wealthy elite have strengthened their control over the country due to the war. Additionally, they have achieved a significant victory in their conflict with labor. The status of the American elite at the end of the Great War could not be expressed better than in a recent Confidential Information Service provided by a major agency to American business leaders:
"Shall Victors Be Magnanimous?
"Should Winners Be Generous?"
"There is no doubt about it—Labor is beaten. Mr. Gompers was at his zenith in 1918. Since then he has steadily lost power. He has lost power with his own people because he is no longer able to deliver the goods. He can no longer deliver the goods for two reasons. For one thing, peace urgency has replaced war urgency and we are not willing to bid for peace labor as we were willing to bid for war labor. For another thing, the employing class is immensely more powerful than it was in 1914.
There’s no doubt about it—labor has been defeated. Mr. Gompers was at the height of his influence in 1918. Since then, he has gradually lost power. He has lost support from his own people because he can no longer meet their needs. He can’t deliver for two reasons. First, the urgency for peace has taken over from the urgency for war, and we’re not willing to pay for peace labor like we were for war labor. Second, the employers have become significantly more powerful than they were in 1914.
"We have an organized labor force more numerous than ever before. Relatively twice as many workers are organized as in 1916. But this same labor force has lost its hold on the public. Furthermore, it is divided in its own camp. It fears capital. It also fears its own factions. It threatens, but it does not dare.
"We have a more organized workforce than ever before. There are about twice as many workers organized as there were in 1916. But this same workforce has lost its grip on the public. Moreover, it is divided within itself. It fears capital. It also fears its own groups. It makes threats, but it doesn’t have the courage to follow through."
"We said that the employing class was immensely more powerful than in 1914. There is more money at its command. Eighteen thousand new millionaires are the war's legacy. This money capacity is more thoroughly unified than ever. In 1914 we had thirty-thousand banks, functioning to a great degree in independence of each other. Then came the Federal Reserve Act and gave us the [Pg 154]machinery for consolidation and the emergency of five years war furnished the hammer blows to weld the structure into one.
"We said that the employer class is much more powerful than it was in 1914. They have access to more money. Eighteen thousand new millionaires are the result of the war. This financial capacity is more unified than ever before. In 1914, we had thirty thousand banks, many of which operated independently from each other. Then the Federal Reserve Act was passed, providing us with the [Pg 154] machinery for consolidation, and the five years of war delivered the force needed to merge the structure into one."
"The war taught the employing class the secret and the power of widespread propaganda. Imperial Europe had been aware of this power. It was new to the United States. Now, when we have anything to sell to the American people we know how to sell it. We have learned. We have the schools. We have the pulpit. The employing class owns the press. There is practically no important paper in the United States but is theirs!"
"The war showed the business class the secret and strength of widespread propaganda. Imperial Europe had already recognized this power. It was new to the United States. Now, when we have something to sell to the American public, we know how to market it. We’ve learned. We have the schools. We have the pulpit. The business class owns the press. Almost every major newspaper in the United States belongs to them!"
9. The Run of the World
The war gains of the American plutocracy at home were immense. Even more significant, from an imperial standpoint, were the international advantages that came to America with the war. The events of the two years between 1916 and 1918 gave the United States the run of the world.
The war profits for the American wealthy elite were huge. Even more important, from an imperial perspective, were the global benefits that America gained from the war. The events of the two years from 1916 to 1918 gave the United States a strong foothold in the world.
Destiny seemed to be bent upon hurling the American people into a position of world authority. First, there was the matter of credit. The Allies were reaching the end of their economic rope when the United States entered the war. They were not bankrupt, but their credit was strained, their industries were disorganized, their sources of income were narrowed, and they were looking anxiously for some source from which they might draw the immense volume of goods and credit that were necessary for the continuance of the struggle.[47]
Destiny seemed determined to push the American people into a position of global leadership. First, there was the issue of credit. The Allies were reaching the end of their financial limits when the United States entered the war. They weren't bankrupt, but their credit was stretched thin, their industries were in disarray, their income sources were limited, and they were anxiously searching for a way to access the vast amounts of goods and credit needed to keep fighting.[47]
The United States was that source of supply. During the years from 1915 to 1917, the industries of the United States were shifted gradually from a peace basis to a war basis. Quantities of material destined for use in the war were shipped to the Allies. The unusual profits made on much of this business were not curtailed by heavy war taxation. Thus for more than two years the basic industries of the United States reaped a harvest in profits which were actually free of taxation, at the same time that they placed themselves on a war basis for the supplying of Europe's war demand. When the United States did enter the war, she came with all of the economic advantages that had arisen from selling war material to the belligerents during two and a half years. Throughout those years, while the Allies were bleeding and borrowing and paying, the American plutocracy was growing rich.
The United States was the main supplier. From 1915 to 1917, industries in the U.S. gradually shifted from a peacetime to a wartime focus. Large amounts of materials intended for the war were sent to the Allies. The unusually high profits from this business weren't affected by the heavy war taxes. So, for over two years, the core industries in the U.S. enjoyed a tax-free profit boom while also gearing up to meet Europe’s wartime demands. When the United States finally entered the war, it came with all the economic benefits gained from selling war supplies to the fighting nations for two and a half years. During that time, while the Allies struggled and borrowed money, the American wealthy were getting richer.
When the United States entered the war, she entered it as an ally of powers that were economically winded. She herself was fresh. With the greatest estimated wealth of any of the warring countries, she had a public national debt of less than one half of one percent of her total wealth. She had larger quantities of liquid capital and a vast economic surplus. As a consequence, she held the purse strings and was able, during the next two years, to lend to the Allied nations nearly ten billion dollars without straining her resources to any appreciable degree.
When the United States joined the war, it did so as an ally of economically strained powers. The U.S. was in a strong position. With the highest estimated wealth of any warring country, its public national debt was less than half a percent of its total wealth. It had large amounts of liquid capital and a huge economic surplus. As a result, it controlled the finances and was able to lend nearly ten billion dollars to the Allied nations over the next two years without significantly impacting its resources.
The nations of Europe had been so deeply engrossed in war-making that they had been unable to provide themselves with the necessary food. All of the warring countries, with the exception of Russia, were importers of food in normal times. The disturbances incident to the war; the insatiable army demands, and the loss of shipping all had their effect in bringing the Allied countries to a point of critical food scarcity in the Winter of 1916-1917.
The countries of Europe were so caught up in warfare that they couldn't produce enough food for themselves. All of the countries involved in the conflict, except for Russia, typically imported food during peacetime. The disruptions caused by the war, the endless demands of the military, and the loss of shipping all contributed to a severe food shortage in the Allied nations during the winter of 1916-1917.
The United States was able to meet this food shortage as easily as it met the European credit shortage—and with no greater sacrifice on the part of the American people. Then, too, with the exception of small amounts of food[Pg 156] donated through relief organizations, the food that went to Europe was sold at fancy prices. The United States was therefore in a position to lay down the basic law,—"Submit or starve."
The United States managed to handle this food shortage just as easily as it dealt with the European credit shortage—and without asking much more from the American people. Also, aside from the small amounts of food[Pg 156] given through relief organizations, the food sent to Europe was sold at high prices. This put the United States in a strong position to say, “Submit or starve.”
With the purse strings and the larder under American control, the temporary supremacy of the United States was assured. She was the one important nation (beside Japan) that had lost little and gained much during the war. She was the only great nation with a surplus of credit, of raw materials and of food.
With the financial resources and supplies under American control, the temporary dominance of the United States was guaranteed. It was the one major country (along with Japan) that lost very little and gained a lot during the war. It was the only major nation with a surplus of credit, raw materials, and food.
The prosperity incident to this period is reflected in the record of American exports, which rose from an average of about two billions in the years immediately preceding the war to more than six billions in 1917. In the same year the imports were just under three billions, leaving a trade balance—that is, a debt owing by foreign countries to the United States—of more than three billions for that one year.
The economic growth during this time is shown in the numbers for American exports, which increased from around two billion dollars in the years right before the war to over six billion in 1917. In that same year, imports were just under three billion, resulting in a trade balance—that is, a debt owed by foreign countries to the United States—of more than three billion for that year.
10. Victory
The war had been in progress for nearly three years before the United States took her stand on the side of the Allies. At that time the flower of Europe's manhood had faced, for three winters, a fearful pressure of hardship and exposure, while millions among the non-combatants had suffered, starved, sickened and died. The nerves of Europe were worn and the belly of Europe was empty when the American soldiers entered the trenches. They were never compelled to bear the brunt of the conflict. They arrived when the Central Empires were sagging. Their mere presence was the token of victory.
The war had been going on for nearly three years before the United States decided to support the Allies. By then, the best of Europe’s young men had endured, for three winters, extreme hardship and exposure, while millions of civilians had suffered, starved, fallen ill, and died. Europe was exhausted and hungry when the American soldiers arrived in the trenches. They never had to face the heaviest fighting. They showed up when the Central Empires were starting to weaken. Their mere presence signified victory.
For the first time in history the Americans were matched against the peoples of the old world on the home ground of the old world, and under circumstances that were enormously favorable to the Americans. European capitalism had weakened itself irreparably. The United States[Pg 157] entered the war at a juncture that enabled her to take the palm after she had already taken billions of profit without risk or loss. The gain to the United States was immense, beyond the possibility of present estimate. The rulers of the United States became, for the time being, at least, the economic dictators of the world.
For the first time ever, the Americans faced the nations of the old world on their own turf, and the situation was extremely advantageous for the Americans. European capitalism had seriously weakened itself. The United States[Pg 157] entered the war at a point that allowed it to come out on top after already raking in billions in profit without any risk or loss. The benefit to the United States was huge, beyond what we can currently estimate. The leaders of the United States temporarily became the economic rulers of the world.
The Great War brought noteworthy advantages to the American plutocracy. At home its power was clinched. Among the nations, the United States was elevated by the war into a position of commanding importance. In a superficial sense, at least, the Great War "made" the plutocracy at home and "made" the United States among the nations.
The Great War brought significant benefits to the American wealthy elite. Domestically, their power was solidified. Internationally, the United States rose to a position of major importance due to the war. In a superficial way, at least, the Great War "created" the elite at home and "established" the United States among other nations.
FOOTNOTES:
[46] This campaign was conducted by H. P. Davison, one of the leading members of the firm of J. P. Morgan and Co. Later a great war-fund drive was conducted by John D. Rockefeller, Jr. Cleveland H. Dodge of the Phelps-Dodge corporation was treasurer of another fund.
[46] This campaign was run by H. P. Davison, a key member of the firm J. P. Morgan and Co. Later, a major fundraising effort was led by John D. Rockefeller, Jr. Cleveland H. Dodge from the Phelps-Dodge corporation served as the treasurer for another fund.
[47] J. Maynard Keynes notes the "immense anxieties and impossible financial requirements" of the period between the Summer of 1916 and the Spring of 1917. The task would soon have become "entirely hopeless" but "from April, 1917" the problems were "of an entirely different order." "The Economic Consequences of the Peace." New York, Harcourt, Brace & Howe, 1920, p. 273.
[47] J. Maynard Keynes points out the "huge worries and unrealistic financial demands" of the time between the summer of 1916 and the spring of 1917. The situation would have quickly become "completely hopeless," but "starting in April 1917," the issues were "of a completely different nature." "The Economic Consequences of the Peace." New York, Harcourt, Brace & Howe, 1920, p. 273.
XII. THE IMPERIAL HIGHROAD
1. A Youthful Traveler
Along the highroad that leads to empire moves the American people, in the heyday of its youth, sturdy, vigorous, energy-filled, replete with power and promise—conquerors who have swept aside the Indians, enslaved a race of black men, subdued a continent, and begun the extension of territorial control beyond their own borders. More than a hundred million Americans—fast losing their standards of individualism—fast slipping under the domination of a new-made ruling class of wealth-lords and plutocrats—journey, not discontentedly, along the imperial highroad.
Along the main road to empire travels the American people, in the peak of their youth, strong, lively, full of energy, packed with power and promise—conquerors who have pushed aside the Native Americans, enslaved a race of Black people, tamed a continent, and started expanding their territorial control beyond their own borders. More than a hundred million Americans—quickly losing their sense of individualism—are rapidly falling under the rule of a new class of wealthy elites and billionaires—making their way, not unhappily, along the imperial highway.
The preliminary work of empire-building has been accomplished—territory has been conquered; peoples have been subjected and a ruling class organized. The policy of imperialism has been accepted by the people, although they have not thought seriously of its consequences. They have set out, in good faith, as they believe, to seek for life, liberty and happiness. They do not yet realize that, along the road that they are now traveling, the journey will not be ended until they have worn themselves threadbare in their efforts to conquer the earth.
The initial phase of building an empire is complete—land has been taken; communities have been controlled, and a ruling class has been established. The idea of imperialism has been embraced by the people, even though they haven’t considered its true implications. They genuinely believe they are pursuing life, freedom, and happiness. They don’t yet understand that the path they are on will only end when they have exhausted themselves in their quest to dominate the world.
The American people,—lacking in political experience and in world wisdom; ignorant of the laws of economic and social change,—have committed themselves, unwittingly, to the world old task of setting up authority over those who have no desire to accept it, and of exacting tribute from those who do not wish to pay it.
The American people—lacking political experience and global knowledge; unaware of the laws of economic and social change—have unwittingly committed themselves to the age-old task of establishing authority over those who don’t want it and demanding tribute from those who don’t want to pay it.
The early stages of the journey led across a continent. The American people followed it eagerly. Now that the trail leads to other continents they are still willing to go.
The early stages of the journey crossed a continent. The American people followed it eagerly. Now that the trail leads to other continents, they are still ready to go.
"Manifest destiny" is the cry of the leaders. "We are called," echo the followers, and the nation moves onward.
"Manifest destiny" is the rallying cry of the leaders. "We are destined," echo the followers, and the nation moves forward.
There was some hesitancy among the American people during the Spanish War. Even the leaders were not ready then. Now the leaders are prepared—for markets, for trade, for investments. They are indifferent to political conquest, but economically they are prepared to go on—into Latin America; into Asia; into Europe. The war taught them the lesson and gave them an inkling of their power. So they move along the imperial highroad—followed by a people who have not yet learned to chant the songs of victory—but who are destined, at no very distant date, to learn victory's lessons and to pay victory's price. Along the path,—far away in the distance they see the earth like a ball, rolling at their feet. It is theirs if they will but reach out their hands to grasp it!
There was some hesitancy among the American people during the Spanish War. Even the leaders weren't ready back then. Now the leaders are prepared—for markets, for trade, for investments. They're indifferent to political conquest, but economically they are ready to move forward—into Latin America; into Asia; into Europe. The war taught them a lesson and gave them a glimpse of their power. So they continue down the imperial path—followed by a people who haven't yet learned to sing the songs of victory—but who are destined, in the not-so-distant future, to learn the lessons of victory and to pay its price. Along the way,—far in the distance they see the earth like a ball, rolling at their feet. It’s theirs if they just reach out their hands to grab it!
2. An Imperial People
This is the American people—locked in the arms of mighty economic and social forces; building industrial empires; compelled, by a world war, to reach out and save "civilization,"—capitalist civilization,—a people that, by its very ancestry, seems destined to follow the course of empire.
This is the American people—caught in the grip of powerful economic and social forces; creating industrial giants; driven, by a world war, to extend a hand and protect "civilization,"—capitalist civilization,—a people that, by its very heritage, appears destined to pursue the path of empire.
The sons and daughters of the native born American stock are, in the main, the descendants of the conquering, imperial races of the modern world. During recent times, three great empires—Spain, France and Great Britain—have dominated western civilization. It was these three empires that were responsible for the settlement of America. The past generation has seen the German empire rise to a position that has enabled her to shake the security of the world. The Germans were among the earliest and most numerous settlers of the American colonies. Those who boast colonial ancestry boast the ancestry of conquerors. The Anglo-Saxon-Teutonic races, the titular masters of the[Pg 160] modern world; the races that have spread their power where-ever ships sail or trade moves or gain offers, furnished the bulk of the early immigrants to America.
The children of native-born Americans are mainly descendants of the powerful imperial races of today’s world. Recently, three major empires—Spain, France, and Great Britain—have shaped western civilization. These three were key in settling America. In the last generation, the German Empire has risen to a level that has disrupted global stability. Germans were among the earliest and most numerous settlers in the American colonies. Those who take pride in their colonial roots are claiming the lineage of conquerors. The Anglo-Saxon-Teutonic races, the proclaimed leaders of the[Pg 160] modern world; the races that have expanded their influence wherever ships travel or trade flows or resources are available, made up the majority of the early immigrants to America.
The bulk of the early immigration to the United States was from Great Britain and Germany. The records of immigration (kept officially since 1820) show that between that year and 1840 the immigrants from Europe numbered 594,504, among them there were 358,994 (over half) from the British Isles, and 159,215 from Germany, making a total from the two countries of 518,209, or 87 percent of the immigrants arriving in the twenty-year period. During the next twenty years (1840-1860) the total of immigrants from Europe was 4,050,159, of which the British Isles furnished 2,386,846 (over half) and Germany 1,386,293, making, for these two countries, 94 percent of the whole immigration. Even during the years from 1860 to 1880, 82 percent of those who migrated to the United States hailed from Great Britain and Germany. American immigration, from 1820 to 1880, might, without any violence to facts, be described as Anglo-Teutonic, so completely does the British-German immigrant dominate this period.
The majority of early immigrants to the United States came from Great Britain and Germany. Immigration records (officially maintained since 1820) indicate that between 1820 and 1840, 594,504 immigrants arrived from Europe, with 358,994 (more than half) coming from the British Isles and 159,215 from Germany. This means that together, these two countries accounted for 518,209 immigrants, or 87 percent of all arrivals during that twenty-year span. In the following twenty years (1840-1860), a total of 4,050,159 immigrants arrived from Europe, with the British Isles contributing 2,386,846 (also over half) and Germany 1,386,293, which means these two countries made up 94 percent of total immigration. Even between 1860 and 1880, 82 percent of those who moved to the United States came from Great Britain and Germany. The period of American immigration from 1820 to 1880 could accurately be described as dominated by Anglo-German influences, given how significantly British and German immigrants shaped this era.
Literally, it is true that the American people have been sired by the masters and would-be masters of the modern earth.
Literally, it's true that the American people have been fathered by the masters and aspiring masters of the modern world.
3. A Place in the Sun
The Americans, like many another growing people, have sought a place in the sun—widening their boundaries; grasping at promised riches. Unlike other peoples they have accomplished the task without any real opposition. Their "promised land" lay all about them, isolated from the factional warfare of Europe; virgin; awaiting the master of the Western World.
The Americans, like many other developing nations, have looked for their own place in the sun—expanding their borders and reaching for promised wealth. Unlike other groups, they achieved this without significant resistance. Their "promised land" was all around them, removed from the conflict of Europe; untouched; waiting for the ruler of the Western World.
The United States has followed the path of empire with a facility unexampled in recent history. When has a people, caught in the net of imperialism, encountered less difficulty[Pg 161] in making its imperial dream come true? None of the foes that the American people have encountered, in two centuries of expansion, have been worthy of the name. The Indians were in no position to withstand the onslaught of the Whites. The Mexicans were even less competent to defend themselves. The Spanish Empire crumpled, under attack, like an autumn leaf under the heel of a hunter. Practically for the taking, the American people secured a richly-stocked, compact region, with an area of three millions of square miles—the ideal site for the foundation of a modern civilization.
The United States has pursued empire-building with an ease that hasn’t been seen in recent history. When has a nation, caught up in imperialism, faced less struggle[Pg 161] in realizing its imperial ambitions? None of the adversaries that the American people have faced during two centuries of expansion have proven to be significant threats. The Native Americans were not in a position to resist the onslaught of European settlers. The Mexicans were even less capable of defending themselves. The Spanish Empire collapsed under attack like a dry leaf crushed by a hunter’s boot. Almost ripe for the taking, the American people acquired a vast, well-resourced area of three million square miles—the perfect location for building a modern civilization.
The area of the United States has increased with marvelous rapidity. At the outbreak of the Revolution (1776) the Colonies claimed a territory of 369,000 square miles. The Northwest Territory (275,000 square miles) and the area south of the Ohio River (205,000 square miles) were added largely as a result of the negotiations in 1782. The official figures for 1800 give the total area of the United States as 892,135 square miles. The Louisiana Purchase (1803) added 885,000 square miles at a cost of 15 millions of dollars. Florida, 59,600 square miles, was purchased from Spain (1819) for 5 millions of dollars; Texas, 389,000 square miles was annexed in 1845; the Oregon Country, 285,000 square miles, was secured by treaty in 1846; New Mexico and California, 529,000 square miles, were ceded by Spain (1848) and a payment of 15 millions was made by the United States; in 1853 the Gadsen Purchase added 30,000 square miles at a cost of ten millions of dollars. This completed the territorial possessions of the United States on the mainland (with the exception of Alaska) making a continental area of 3,026,798 square miles. Between 1776 and 1853 the area of the United States was increased more than eight fold. What other nation has been in a position to multiply its home territory by eight in two generations?
The area of the United States has grown incredibly fast. At the start of the Revolution (1776), the Colonies claimed a territory of 369,000 square miles. The Northwest Territory (275,000 square miles) and the land south of the Ohio River (205,000 square miles) were added mainly due to negotiations in 1782. The official numbers for 1800 show the total area of the United States as 892,135 square miles. The Louisiana Purchase (1803) added 885,000 square miles for 15 million dollars. Florida, 59,600 square miles, was bought from Spain (1819) for 5 million dollars; Texas, 389,000 square miles, was annexed in 1845; the Oregon Country, 285,000 square miles, was acquired through treaty in 1846; New Mexico and California, 529,000 square miles, were ceded by Spain (1848) for a payment of 15 million by the United States; in 1853, the Gadsden Purchase added 30,000 square miles for ten million dollars. This completed the territorial possessions of the United States on the mainland (except for Alaska), making a total continental area of 3,026,798 square miles. Between 1776 and 1853, the area of the United States increased more than eightfold. What other nation has been able to expand its home territory by eight times in just two generations?
These vast additions to the continental possessions of the United States were made as the result of a trifling outlay. The most serious losses were involved in the Mexican War when the casualties included more than 13,000 killed and[Pg 162] died of wounds and disease. The net money cost of the war did not exceed $100,000,000. In return for this outlay—including the annexation of Texas—the United States secured 918,000 square miles of land.[48]
These huge expansions of the United States' territory came with a relatively small expense. The biggest losses occurred during the Mexican War, where more than 13,000 lives were lost to combat wounds and illness.[Pg 162] The total financial cost of the war was less than $100,000,000. In exchange for this expenditure—including Texas— the United States gained 918,000 square miles of land.[48]
There is no way to estimate the loss of life or the money cost of the Indian Wars. For the most part, the troops engaged in them suffered no more heavily than in ordinary police duty, and the costs were the costs of maintaining the regular army. The total money outlay for purchases and indemnities was about 45 millions of dollars. Within a century the American people gained possession of one of the richest portions of the earth's surfaces—a portion equal in area to more than three times the combined acreage of Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Japan and the British Isles[49]—in return for an outlay in money and life that would not have provided for one first class battle of the Great War.
There’s no way to estimate the loss of life or the financial cost of the Indian Wars. Generally, the troops involved faced no greater risks than those during regular police operations, and the expenses were those of maintaining the standing army. The total financial expenditure for purchases and compensation was around 45 million dollars. Within a century, the American people acquired one of the richest areas of the planet—an area larger than three times the combined size of Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, and the British Isles[49]—for a cost in money and lives that wouldn’t have covered a single major battle of the Great War.
Additions to the territory of the country were made with equal facility during the period following the Civil War. Alaska was purchased from Russia for $7,200,000; from Spain, as a result of the War of 1898, the United States received the Philippines, Porto Rico, and some lesser islands, at the same time paying Spain $20,000,000; Hawaii was annexed and an indemnity of $10,000,000 was paid to Panama for the Canal strip. During the second half of the nineteenth century, 716,666 square miles were added to the possessions of the United States. The total direct cost of this territory in money was under forty millions. These gains involved no casualties with the exception of the small numbers lost during the Spanish-American and Philippine Wars.
Additions to the country's territory were made just as easily during the period after the Civil War. Alaska was bought from Russia for $7.2 million; following the War of 1898, the United States acquired the Philippines, Puerto Rico, and some smaller islands from Spain, while also paying Spain $20 million. Hawaii was annexed, and a payment of $10 million was made to Panama for the Canal zone. In the second half of the nineteenth century, the U.S. added 716,666 square miles to its territory. The total direct cost for this land was less than $40 million. These acquisitions resulted in no casualties, apart from the small number of lives lost during the Spanish-American and Philippine Wars.
One hundred and thirty years have witnessed an addition to the United States of more than two and a half million square miles of contiguous, continental territory, and[Pg 163] three-quarters of a million square miles of non-contiguous territory. The area of the United States in 1900 was four times as great as it was in 1800 and more than ten times as great as the area of the Thirteen Original Colonies. For the imperialist, the last century and a half of American history is a fairyland come true.
One hundred and thirty years have seen the United States grow by more than two and a half million square miles of contiguous land, along with three-quarters of a million square miles of non-contiguous territory. The area of the United States in 1900 was four times larger than it was in 1800 and more than ten times larger than the area of the original Thirteen Colonies. For those who support imperialism, the last century and a half of American history feels like a dream come true.
Other empires have been won by the hardest kind of fighting, during which blood and wealth have been spent with a lavish hand. The empire of the French, finally crushed with the defeat of Napoleon, was paid for at such a huge price. The British Empire has been established in savage competition with Holland, Spain, France, Russia, the United States, Germany and a host of lesser powers. The empires of old—Assyria, Egypt, Rome—were built at an intolerable sacrifice. So terrible has been the cost of empire building to some of these nations that by the time they had succeeded in creating an empire the life blood of the people and the resources of the country were devoured and the empire emerged, only to fall an easy prey to the first strong-handed enemy that it encountered.
Other empires have been established through the toughest battles, where blood and wealth were spent extravagantly. The French Empire, ultimately defeated with Napoleon's fall, came at an enormous cost. The British Empire was built through fierce competition with the Netherlands, Spain, France, Russia, the United States, Germany, and many other smaller powers. The ancient empires—Assyria, Egypt, Rome—were constructed at an unbearable price. The cost of building empires for some of these nations was so great that by the time they finally created an empire, the lifeblood of the people and the resources of the country were depleted, and the empire emerged, only to easily succumb to the first strong enemy it faced.
No such fate has overtaken the United States. On the contrary her path has been smoothed before her feet. Inhabiting a garden spot, her immense territory gains in the past hundred and fifty years have been made with less effort than it has cost Japan to gain and hold Korea or England to maintain her dominion over Ireland.
No such fate has befallen the United States. On the contrary, her path has been cleared ahead of her. Living in a prime location, her vast territory has expanded in the past 150 years with less effort than it took Japan to acquire and control Korea or England to maintain its rule over Ireland.
Once established, the old-world empire was not secure. If the territory that it possessed was worth having, it was surrounded by hungry-eyed nations that took the first occasion to band together and despoil the spoiler. The holding of an empire was as great a task as the building of empire—often greater because of the larger outlay in men and money that was involved in an incessant warfare. Little by little the glory faded; step by step militarism made its inroads upon the normal life of the people, until the time came for the stronger rival to overthrow the mighty one, or until the inrushing hordes of barbarians should blot[Pg 164] out the features of civilization, and enthrone chaos once more.
Once it was established, the old-world empire wasn't secure. If the territory it controlled was valuable, it was surrounded by greedy nations that jumped at the chance to unite and plunder the plunderer. Maintaining an empire was just as challenging as building one—often even more so due to the greater investment in lives and resources needed for constant warfare. Gradually, the glory faded; step by step, militarism began to invade the everyday lives of the people, until a stronger rival could overthrow the mighty or the invading hordes of barbarians could erase the signs of civilization and bring chaos back again.
How different has been the fate of the people of the United States! Possessed of what is probably the richest, for the purposes of the present civilization, of any territory of equal size in the world, their isolation has allowed them more than a century of practical freedom from outside interference—a century that they have been able to devote to internal development. The absence of greedy neighbors has reduced the expense of military preparation to a minimum; the old world has failed to realize, until within the last few years, what were the possibilities of the new country; vitality has remained unimpaired, wealth has piled up, industry has been promoted, and on each occasion when a greater extent of territory was required, it has been obtained at a cost that, compared with the experience of other nations, must be described as negligible.
How different has been the fate of the people of the United States! With what is likely the richest territory of its size in the world for the current civilization, their isolation has given them over a hundred years of practical freedom from outside interference—a century they have used for internal growth. The lack of greedy neighbors has kept military costs low; the old world failed to recognize the potential of this new country until just a few years ago. Vitality has remained strong, wealth has accumulated, industry has flourished, and each time a larger area of land was needed, it has been acquired at a cost that, compared to what other nations have faced, must be seen as negligible.
So simple has been the process of empire building for the United States; so natural have been the stages by which the American Empire has been evolved; so little have the changes disturbed the routine of normal life that the American people are, for the most part, unaware of the imperial position of their country. They still feel, think and talk as if the United States were a tiny corner, fenced off from the rest of the world to which it owed nothing and from which it expected nothing.
So easy has the process of building an empire been for the United States; so natural have been the stages through which the American Empire has grown; so little have the changes disrupted everyday life that most Americans are unaware of their country's imperial status. They still feel, think, and talk as if the United States were a small area, separate from the rest of the world to which it owes nothing and from which it expects nothing.
The American Empire has been built, as were the palaces of Aladdin, in a night. The morning is dawning, and the early risers who were not even awakened from their slumbers by the sound of hammer and engine, are beginning to rub their eyes, and to ask one another what is the meaning of this apparition, and whether it is real.
The American Empire has been created, just like Aladdin's palaces, overnight. Morning is here, and the early birds who weren't even stirred from their sleep by the noise of construction are starting to wake up, rubbing their eyes and asking each other what this sight is all about and if it’s actually real.
4. The Will to Power
The forces of America are the forces of Empire,—the geography, the economic organization, the racial qualities—all press in the direction of imperialism. There is logic[Pg 165] behind the two centuries of conquest in which the American people have been engaged; there is logic in the rise of the plutocracy. Now it remains for the rulers of America to accept the implications of imperialism,—to thrill with the will to power; to recognize and strengthen imperial purpose; to sell imperialism to the American people—in other words to follow the call of manifest destiny and conquer the earth.
The forces of America are driven by imperialism—its geography, economic structure, and cultural traits all push toward expansion. There’s a rationale[Pg 165] behind the two centuries of conquest that the American people have been involved in; there’s a logic to the rise of the wealthy elite. Now it’s up to America’s leaders to embrace the reality of imperialism—to feel the desire for power; to acknowledge and enhance their imperial goals; to present imperialism to the American public—in other words, to heed the call of manifest destiny and take over the world.
The will to power is very old and very strong. Economic and social necessity on the one hand, and the driving pressure of human ambition and the love of domination on the other, have given it a front place in human affairs. The empires of the past were driven into being by this ardent force. As far back as history bears a record, one nation or tribe has made war on its more fortunately situated neighbor; one leader has made cause against his fellow ruler. The Egyptians and Carthaginians have conquered in Africa; the Persians, Assyrians and Babylonians conquered in Asia; the Macedonians, Greeks, Romans, Spanish, Dutch, French, and British built their empires on one or more of the five continents. Conqueror has succeeded conqueror, empire has followed empire. Spoils, domination, world power, have been the objects of their campaigns.
The will to power is very old and very strong. On one hand, there’s the need for economic and social stability, and on the other, there’s the push of human ambition and the desire for control, which have placed it at the forefront of human affairs. This intense force has driven the creation of past empires. As far back as recorded history goes, one nation or tribe has waged war against a more fortunate neighbor; one leader has clashed with another ruler. The Egyptians and Carthaginians conquered in Africa; the Persians, Assyrians, and Babylonians conquered in Asia; the Macedonians, Greeks, Romans, Spanish, Dutch, French, and British built their empires across one or more of the five continents. One conqueror has followed another, and one empire has succeeded another. Loot, control, and global power have been the goals of their campaigns.
Each great nation grew from small beginnings. Each arose from some simple form of tribal or clan organization—more or less democratic in its structure; containing within itself a unified life and a simple folk philosophy.
Each great nation started from humble origins. Each emerged from some basic form of tribal or clan organization—more or less democratic in its setup; embodying a cohesive community and a straightforward worldview.
From such plain beginnings empires have developed. The peasants, tending their fertile gardens along the borders of the Nile; the vine dressers of Italy, the husbandmen and craftsmen of France and the yeomen of Merry England had no desire to subjugate the world. If tradition speaks truth, they were slow to take upon themselves anything more than the defense of their own hearthstones. It was not until the traders sailed across the seas; not until stories were brought to them of the vast spoil to be had, without work, in other lands, that the peasants and craftsmen consented to undertake the task of conquest, subjugation and empire building.
From such simple beginnings, empires emerged. The peasants tending their fertile gardens by the Nile, the vintners of Italy, the farmers and artisans of France, and the yeomen of Merry England had no desire to dominate the world. If tradition tells the truth, they were hesitant to take on anything more than protecting their own homes. It wasn’t until the traders sailed across the seas, and stories reached them about the great wealth that could be gained without labor in distant lands, that the peasants and craftsmen agreed to take on the challenge of conquest, domination, and empire building.
The plain people do not feel the will to power. They know only the necessities of self-defense. It is in the ambitions of the leisure classes that the demands of conquest have their origin. It is among them that men dream of world empire.[50]
The ordinary people don't have a desire for power. They only understand the need for self-defense. The ambitions of the wealthy and idle classes are where the idea of conquest begins. It's among them that people dream of ruling the world.[50]
The plain people of the United States have no will to power at the present time. They are only asking to be let alone, in order that they may go their several ways in peace. They are babes in the world of international politics. For generations they have been separated by a great gulf of indifference from the remainder of the human race, and they crave the continuance of this isolation because it gives them a chance to engage, unmolested, in the ordinary pursuits of life.
The ordinary people of the United States currently don’t have any desire for power. They just want to be left alone so they can live their lives in peace. They are inexperienced in the realm of international politics. For generations, they’ve been separated by a wide gap of indifference from the rest of the world, and they long for this isolation to continue because it allows them to focus on their everyday lives without interference.
The American people are not imperialists. They are proud of their country, jealous of her honor, willing to make sacrifices for their dear ones. They are to-day where the plain folk of Egypt, Rome, France and England were before the will to power gripped the ruling classes of those countries.
The American people are not imperialists. They are proud of their country, protective of her honor, and willing to make sacrifices for their loved ones. Today, they are where the common people of Egypt, Rome, France, and England were before the desire for power took hold of the ruling classes in those nations.
Far different is the position of the American plutocracy. As a ruling class the plutocracy feels the necessity of preserving and enlarging its privileges. Recently called into a position of leadership, untrained and in a sense unprepared, it nevertheless understands that its claim to consideration depends upon its ability to do what the ruling classes of Egypt, Rome, France and England have done—to build an empire.
The situation of the American wealthy elite is quite different. As a ruling class, they feel the need to protect and expand their privileges. Recently thrust into a leadership role, untrained and somewhat unprepared, they still recognize that their claim to respect relies on their ability to do what the ruling classes of Egypt, Rome, France, and England have accomplished—to create an empire.
Almost unconsciously, out of the necessities of the period, has come the structure of the American Empire. In essence it is an empire, although the plain people do not know it, and even the members of the plutocracy are in many instances unaware of its true character. Yet here, in a land dedicated to liberty and settled by men and women who sought to escape from the savage struggles of [Pg 167]empire-ridden Europe, the foundations and the superstructure of empire appear.
Almost without realizing it, out of the needs of the time, the structure of the American Empire has emerged. Essentially, it is an empire, even though average people don’t recognize it, and many in the wealthy elite are often unaware of its true nature. Yet here, in a country committed to freedom and founded by individuals who wanted to break away from the brutal conflicts of [Pg 167] empire-dominated Europe, the groundwork and the framework of empire are evident.
1. The people of the United States have conquered and now hold possession of approximately three million square miles of continental territory that has been won by armed force from Great Britain, Mexico, Spain, and the American Indians. (The entire area of Europe is only 3,800,000 square miles.)
1. The people of the United States have taken control of about three million square miles of land that was acquired through military action against Great Britain, Mexico, Spain, and the Native Americans. (The total area of Europe is only 3,800,000 square miles.)
2. The people of the United States have conquered and now hold under their sway subject people who have enjoyed no opportunity for self-determination. A whole race—the African Negroes—was captured in its native land, transported to America and there sold into slavery. The inhabitants of the Philippine Islands were conquered by the armed forces of the United States and still are subject people.
2. The people of the United States have conquered and currently control groups of people who have had no chance for self-determination. A whole race—the African Americans—was taken from their homeland, brought to America, and sold into slavery. The people of the Philippine Islands were defeated by the U.S. military and remain under their control.
3. The United States had developed a plutocracy—a property holding class, that is, to all intents and purposes, the imperialist class—controlling and directing public policy.
3. The United States had developed a plutocracy—a wealthy class that, for all practical purposes, is the ruling class—controlling and shaping public policy.
4. This plutocratic class is exploiting continental United States and its dependencies. After years of savage internal strife, it has developed a high degree of class consciousness, and led by its bankers, it is taking the fat of the land. The plutocrats, who have made the country their United States, are at the present moment busy disposing of their surplus in foreign countries. As they build their industrial empires, they broaden and deepen their power.
4. This wealthy elite is exploiting the continental United States and its territories. After years of brutal internal conflict, they have developed a strong awareness of their class identity, and with their bankers in charge, they are reaping the rewards. The plutocrats, who have made the country their own, are currently focused on investing their excess wealth in foreign markets. As they expand their industrial empires, they enhance their influence and control.
Thus is the round of imperialism complete. Here are the conquered territory, subject people, an imperial ruling class, and the exploitation, by this class, of the lands and peoples that come within the scope of their power. These are the attributes of empire—the characteristics that have appeared, in one form or another, through the great empires of the past and of the present day. Differing in their forms, they remain similar in the principles that they represent. They are imperialism.
Thus, the cycle of imperialism is complete. Here we have the conquered territory, the subjugated people, an imperial ruling class, and the exploitation of the lands and peoples under their control by this class. These are the defining features of an empire—the traits that have emerged, in various forms, throughout the great empires of both the past and the present. While they may differ in their appearances, they share similar underlying principles. They represent imperialism.
5. Imperial Purpose
The building of international industrial empires by the progressive business men of the United States lays the foundation for whatever political imperialism is necessary to protect markets, trade and investment. Gathering floods of economic surplus are the driving forces which are guided by ambition and love of gain and power.
The establishment of international industrial empires by forward-thinking American businessmen creates the groundwork for any political imperialism needed to safeguard markets, trade, and investments. The overwhelming flows of economic surplus are driven by ambition and the desire for profit and power.
The United States emerged from the Great War in a position of unquestioned economic supremacy. With vast stores of all the necessary resources, amply equipped with capital, the country has entered the field as the most dangerous rival that the other capitalist nations must face. Possessed of everything, including the means of providing a navy of any reasonable size and an army of any necessary number, the United States looms as the dominating economic factor in the capitalist world.
The United States came out of the Great War with clear economic dominance. With an abundance of all the essential resources and plenty of capital, the country has stepped onto the stage as the most formidable competitor that other capitalist nations must contend with. Equipped with everything needed, including the ability to build a navy of any substantial size and an army of any required size, the United States stands as the leading economic force in the capitalist world.
Imperial policy is frequently bold, rough and at times frankly brutal and unjust. Where subject peoples and weaker neighbors submit to the dictates of the ruling power there is no friction. But where the subject peoples or smaller states attempt to assert their rights of self-determination or of independence, the empire acts as Great Britain has acted in Ireland and in India; as Italy and France have acted in Africa; as Japan has acted in Korea; as the United States has acted in the Philippines, in Hayti, in Nicaragua, and in Mexico.
Imperial policy is often aggressive, harsh, and sometimes outright brutal and unfair. When subject populations and weaker neighboring countries comply with the demands of the dominant power, there's no conflict. However, when these groups try to assert their rights to self-determination or independence, the empire responds similarly to how Great Britain has acted in Ireland and India; how Italy and France have acted in Africa; how Japan has acted in Korea; and how the United States has acted in the Philippines, Haiti, Nicaragua, and Mexico.
Plain men do not like these things. Animated by the belief in popular rights which is so prevalent among the western peoples, the masses resent imperial atrocities. Therefore it becomes necessary to surround imperial action with such an atmosphere as will convince the man on the street that the acts are necessary or else that they are inevitable.
Plain folks don’t like these things. Driven by a widespread belief in people's rights that’s common among western societies, the masses are against imperial violence. As a result, it’s essential to create an environment around imperial actions that makes the average person feel that these actions are necessary or, at the very least, unavoidable.
When the Church and the State stood together the Czar and the Kaiser spoke for God as well as for the financial interests. There was thus a double sanction—imperial [Pg 169]necessity coupled with divine authority. Those who were not willing to accept the necessity felt enough reverence for the authority to bow their heads in submission to whatever policy the masters of empire might inaugurate.
When the Church and the State were aligned, the Czar and the Kaiser spoke for God as well as for financial interests. This created a dual justification—imperial necessity combined with divine authority. Those who weren’t willing to accept the necessity still had enough respect for the authority to bow their heads in submission to whatever policies the empire’s leaders might introduce.
The course of empire upon which the United States has embarked involves a complete departure from all of the most cherished traditions of the American people. Economic, political and social theories must all be thrust aside. Liberty, equality and fraternity must all be forgotten and in their places must be erected new standards of imperial purpose that are acceptable to the economic and political masters of present day American life.
The path of empire that the United States has taken involves completely abandoning all the most valued traditions of the American people. Economic, political, and social theories must all be set aside. Liberty, equality, and fraternity must all be overlooked, and in their place, new standards of imperial ambition must be established that align with the interests of today’s economic and political leaders in American society.
The American people have been taught the language of liberty. They believe in freedom for self-determination. Their own government was born as a protest against imperial tyranny and they glory in its origin and speak proudly of its revolutionary background. Americans are still individualists. Their lives and thoughts both have been provincial—perhaps somewhat narrow. They profess the doctrine "Live and let live" and in a large measure they are willing and anxious to practice it.
The American people have learned the language of freedom. They believe in the right to make their own choices. Their government was established as a response to oppressive rule, and they take pride in its origins and celebrate its revolutionary history. Americans remain independent thinkers. Their lives and perspectives can be somewhat limited—maybe a bit narrow-minded. They advocate the idea of "live and let live" and, for the most part, are eager and willing to put it into practice.
How is it possible to harmonize the Declaration of Independence with the subjugation of peoples and the conquest of territory? If governments "derive their just powers from the consent of the governed," and if it is the right of a people to alter or to abolish any government which does not insure their safety and happiness, then manifestly subjugation and conquest are impossible.
How can we reconcile the Declaration of Independence with the oppression of people and the takeover of land? If governments "get their just powers from the consent of the governed," and if people have the right to change or get rid of any government that doesn’t guarantee their safety and happiness, then clearly, oppression and takeover cannot be justified.
The letter and the spirit of the Declaration of Independence contradict the letter and spirit of imperial purpose word for word and line for line. There can be no harmony between these two theories of social life.
The letter and the spirit of the Declaration of Independence clash with the letter and spirit of imperial intent, word for word and line for line. There can be no harmony between these two philosophies of social life.
6. Advertising Imperialism
Since the tradition of the people of the United States and the necessities of imperialism are so utterly at variance, it becomes necessary to convince the American people that[Pg 170] they should abandon their traditions and accept a new order of society, under which the will to power shall be substituted for liberty and fraternity. The ruling class of imperial Germany did this frankly and in so many words. The English speaking world is more adroit.
Since the traditions of the people of the United States and the demands of imperialism are completely opposed, it's essential to persuade the American public that[Pg 170] they need to give up their traditions and embrace a new social order, where the desire for power replaces liberty and brotherhood. The ruling class of imperial Germany stated this openly and explicitly. The English-speaking world is more skillful.
The first step in the campaign to advertise and justify imperialism is the teaching of a blind my-country-right-or-wrong patriotism. In the days preceding the war the idea was expressed in the phrase, "Stand behind the President." The object of this teaching is to instill in the minds of the people, and particularly of the young, the principles of "Deutschland über alles," which, in translation, means "America first." There are more than twenty million children in the public schools of the United States who are receiving daily lessons in this first principle of popular support for imperial policy.
The first step in the campaign to promote and justify imperialism is teaching a blind "my country, right or wrong" patriotism. In the days leading up to the war, this idea was summed up in the phrase, "Stand behind the President." The purpose of this teaching is to instill in people's minds, especially the young, the principles of "Deutschland über alles," which translates to "America first." There are over twenty million children in the public schools of the United States who are getting daily lessons in this foundational principle of popular support for imperial policy.
Having taken this first step and made the state supreme over the individual will and conscience, the imperial class makes its next move—for "national defense." The country is made to appear in constant danger from attack. Men are urged to protect their homes and their families. They are persuaded that the white dove of peace cannot rest securely on anything less than a great navy and army large enough to hold off aggressors. The same forces that are most eager to preach patriotism are the most anxious about national preparedness.
Having taken this first step and made the state supreme over individual will and conscience, the ruling class makes its next move—for "national defense." The country is portrayed as being in constant danger of attack. People are pushed to protect their homes and families. They are convinced that the white dove of peace cannot rest securely without a powerful navy and army big enough to deter aggressors. The same groups that are most eager to promote patriotism are also the most concerned about national preparedness.
Meanwhile the plain people are taught to regard themselves and their civilization as superior to anything else on earth. Those who have a different language or a different color are referred to as "inferior peoples." The people of Panama cannot dig a canal, the people of Cuba cannot drive out yellow fever, the people of the Philippines cannot run a successful educational system, but the people of the United States can do all of these things,—therefore they are justified in interfering in the internal affairs of Panama, Cuba and the Philippines. When there is a threat of trouble with Mexico, the papers refer to "cleaning up Mexico" very much as a mother might refer to cleaning up a dirty child.
Meanwhile, regular folks are taught to see themselves and their civilization as better than anything else on the planet. Those who speak a different language or have a different skin color are called "inferior peoples." The people of Panama can’t dig a canal, the people of Cuba can’t eliminate yellow fever, the people of the Philippines can’t manage a successful education system, but the people of the United States can do all these things—so they believe they have the right to interfere in the internal matters of Panama, Cuba, and the Philippines. When there's a potential problem with Mexico, the media talks about "cleaning up Mexico" much like a parent might talk about cleaning up a messy child.
Patriotism, preparedness and a sense of general superiority lead to that type of international snobbery that says, "Our flag is on the seven seas"; or "The sun never sets on our possessions"; or "Our navy can lick anything on earth." The preliminary work of "Education" has now been done; the way has been prepared.
Patriotism, readiness, and a sense of overall superiority lead to that kind of international snobbery that says, "Our flag flies across the seven seas"; or "The sun never sets on our territories"; or "Our navy can defeat anything on the planet." The groundwork of "Education" has now been laid; the path has been set.
One more step must be taken, and the process of imperializing public opinion is complete. The people are told that the imperialism to which they have been called is the work of "manifest destiny."
One more step needs to be taken, and the process of shaping public opinion is complete. The people are told that the imperialism they've been called to is the result of "manifest destiny."
7. Manifest Destiny
The argument of "manifest destiny" is employed by the strong as a blanket justification for acts of aggression against the weak. Each time that the United States has come face to face with the necessity of adding to its territory at the expense of some weak neighbor, the advocates of expansion have plied this argument with vigor and with uniform success.
The idea of "manifest destiny" is used by the powerful as a catch-all justification for aggressive actions against the vulnerable. Whenever the United States has needed to expand its territory at the cost of a weaker neighbor, supporters of expansion have vigorously and successfully used this argument.
The American nation began its work of territorial expansion with the purchase of Louisiana. Jefferson, who had been elected on a platform of strict construction of the Constitution, hesitated at an act which he regarded as "beyond the Constitution." (Jefferson's "Works," Vol. IV, p. 198.) Quite different was the language of his more imperialistic contemporaries. Gouverneur Morris said, "France will not sell this territory. If we want it, we must adopt the Spartan policy and obtain it by steel, not by gold."[51] During February, 1803, the United States Senate debated the closing of the Mississippi to American commerce. "To the free navigation of the Mississippi we had an undoubted right from nature and from the position of the Western country,"[52] said Senator Ross (Pennsylvania)[Pg 172] on February 14. On February 23rd Senator White (Delaware) went a step farther: "You had as well pretend to dam up the mouth of the Mississippi, and say to the restless waves, 'Ye shall cease here, and never mingle with the ocean,' as to expect they (the settlers) will be prevented from descending it."[53] On the same day (February 23rd) Senator Jackson (Georgia) said: "God and nature have destined New Orleans and the Floridas to belong to this great and rising Empire."[54]
The American nation started its territorial expansion with the purchase of Louisiana. Jefferson, who had been elected on a strict interpretation of the Constitution, hesitated at an action he considered "beyond the Constitution." (Jefferson's "Works," Vol. IV, p. 198.) His more imperialistic contemporaries had a different viewpoint. Gouverneur Morris stated, "France will not sell this territory. If we want it, we must adopt the Spartan policy and obtain it by steel, not by gold."[51] In February 1803, the U.S. Senate discussed the closure of the Mississippi to American trade. "We undoubtedly have the right to free navigation of the Mississippi by nature and by virtue of the position of the Western country,"[52] Senator Ross (Pennsylvania) said on February 14. On February 23, Senator White (Delaware) went further: "You might as well try to dam up the mouth of the Mississippi and tell the restless waves, 'You shall stop here and never mingle with the ocean,' as to think that they (the settlers) will be kept from going down it."[53] That same day (February 23), Senator Jackson (Georgia) remarked: "God and nature have destined New Orleans and the Floridas to belong to this great and rising Empire."[54]
God, nature and the requirements of American commerce were the arguments used to justify the purchase, or if necessary, the seizure of New Orleans. The precedent has been followed and the same arguments presented all through the century that followed the momentous decision to extend the territory of the United States.
God, nature, and the needs of American trade were the reasons given to justify the purchase, or if needed, the takeover of New Orleans. This precedent has been followed, and the same arguments have been presented throughout the century that followed the significant decision to expand the territory of the United States.
Some reference has been made to the Mexican War and the argument that the Southwest was a "natural" part of the territory of the United States. The same argument was made in regard to Cuba and by the same spokesmen of the slave-power. Stephen A. Douglas (New Orleans, December 13, 1858) was asked:
Some reference has been made to the Mexican War and the claim that the Southwest was a "natural" part of the territory of the United States. The same argument was made about Cuba and by the same supporters of slavery. Stephen A. Douglas (New Orleans, December 13, 1858) was asked:
"How about Cuba?"
"What about Cuba?"
"It is our destiny to have Cuba," he answered, "and you can't prevent it if you try."[55]
"It is our fate to have Cuba," he replied, "and you can't stop it even if you try."[55]
On another occasion (New York, December, 1858) Douglas stated the matter even more broadly:
On another occasion (New York, December, 1858), Douglas expressed the issue even more broadly:
"This is a young, vigorous and growing nation and must obey the law of increase, must multiply and as fast as we multiply we must expand. You can't resist the law if you try. He is foolish who puts himself in the way of American destiny."[56]
"This is a young, energetic, and growing nation that must follow the law of growth; it must multiply, and as quickly as we multiply, we must also expand. You can't fight against this law if you try. It's unwise to stand in the way of America's destiny."[56]
President McKinley stated that the Philippines, like Cuba and Porto Rico, "were intrusted to our hands by the[Pg 173] Providence of God" (Boston, February 16, 1899), and one of his fellow imperialists—Senator Beveridge of Indiana—carried the argument one step farther (January 9, 1900) when he said in the Senate (Congressional Record, January 9, 1900, p. 704): "The Philippines are ours forever.... And just beyond the Philippines are China's illimitable markets. We will not retreat from either. We will not repudiate our duty to the archipelago. We will not abandon our opportunity in the Orient. We will not renounce our part in the mission of our race, trustee, under God, of the civilization of the world."
President McKinley said that the Philippines, like Cuba and Puerto Rico, "were entrusted to our hands by the[Pg 173] Providence of God" (Boston, February 16, 1899). One of his fellow imperialists—Senator Beveridge from Indiana—took the argument further (January 9, 1900) when he stated in the Senate (Congressional Record, January 9, 1900, p. 704): "The Philippines are ours forever.... And just beyond the Philippines are China's vast markets. We will not back down from either. We will not reject our duty to the archipelago. We will not miss our opportunity in the East. We will not abandon our role in the mission of our race, trustee, under God, of the civilization of the world."
Manifest destiny is now urged to justify further acts of aggression by the United States against her weaker neighbors. The Chicago Tribune, discussing the Panama Canal and its implications, says editorially (May 5, 1916): "The Panama Canal has gone a long way towards making our shore continuous and the intervals must and will be filled up; not necessarily by conquest or even formal annexation, but by a decisive control in one form or another."
Manifest destiny is now used to justify more acts of aggression by the United States against its weaker neighbors. The Chicago Tribune, discussing the Panama Canal and its implications, editorializes (May 5, 1916): "The Panama Canal has significantly contributed to making our coastline continuous, and the gaps must and will be filled; not necessarily through conquest or even formal annexation, but by decisive control in one way or another."
Here the argument of manifest destiny is backed by the argument of "military necessity,"—the argument that led Great Britain to possess herself of Gibraltar, Suez and a score of other strategic points all round the earth, and to maintain, at a ruinous cost, a huge navy; the argument that led Napoleon across Europe in his march of bloody, fatal triumph; the argument that led Germany through Belgium in 1914—one of the weakest and yet one of the most seductive and compelling arguments that falls from the tongue of man. Because we have a western and an eastern front, we must have the Panama Canal. Because we have the Panama Canal, we must dominate Central America. The next step is equally plain; because we dominate Central America and the Panama Canal, there must be a land route straight through to the Canal. In the present state of Mexican unrest, that is impossible, and therefore we must dominate Mexico.
Here, the idea of manifest destiny is supported by the idea of "military necessity"—the same reasoning that led Great Britain to take control of Gibraltar, Suez, and numerous other strategic locations around the world, and to maintain an enormous navy at great expense; the reasoning that drove Napoleon across Europe in his bloody, disastrous march to power; the reasoning that pushed Germany through Belgium in 1914—one of the weakest yet most appealing and persuasive arguments humans can make. Since we have both a western and an eastern front, we need the Panama Canal. Because we control the Panama Canal, we must dominate Central America. The next step is clear; since we control Central America and the Panama Canal, we need a land route straight to the Canal. Given the current unrest in Mexico, that isn’t possible, so we must exert control over Mexico.
The argument was stated with persuasive power by ex-Senator Albert J. Beveridge (Collier's Weekly, May 19,[Pg 174] 1917). "Thus in halting fashion but nevertheless surely, the chain of power and influence is being forged about the Gulf. To neglect Mexico is to throw away not only one link but a large part of that chain without which the value and usefulness of the remainder are greatly diminished if indeed not rendered negligible." By a similar train of logic, the entire American continent, from Cape Horn to Bering Sea can and will be brought under the dominion of the United States.
The argument was presented compellingly by former Senator Albert J. Beveridge (Collier's Weekly, May 19,[Pg 174] 1917). "In a hesitant way, but nonetheless definitely, the chain of power and influence is being formed around the Gulf. Ignoring Mexico means losing not just one link but a significant part of that chain, which diminishes the value and usefulness of the rest, if it doesn't make them worthless." Following a similar line of reasoning, the whole American continent, from Cape Horn to the Bering Sea, can and will be brought under the control of the United States.
Some destiny must call, some imperative necessity must beckon, some divine authority must be invoked. The campaign for "100 percent Americanism," carefully thought out, generously financed and carried to every nook and corner of the United States aims to prove this necessity. The war waged by the Department of Justice and by other public officers against the "Reds" is intended to arouse in the American people a sense of the present danger of impending calamity. The divine sanction was expressed by President Wilson in his address to the Senate on July 10, 1919. The President discussed the Peace Treaty in some of its aspects and then said, "It is thus that a new responsibility has come to this great nation that we honor and that we would all wish to lift to yet higher service and achievement. The stage is set, the destiny disclosed. It has come about by no plan of our conceiving but by the hand of God who has led us into this war. We cannot turn back. We can only go forward, with lifted and freshened spirit to follow the vision."
Some fate must call, some urgent necessity must draw us in, some higher authority must be acknowledged. The campaign for "100 percent Americanism," well-planned, generously funded, and taken to every corner of the United States, aims to demonstrate this necessity. The efforts by the Department of Justice and other officials against the "Reds" are meant to awaken the American people to the current threat of looming disaster. The divine approval was expressed by President Wilson in his address to the Senate on July 10, 1919. The President talked about the Peace Treaty from various angles and then stated, "It is thus that a new responsibility has come to this great nation that we honor and that we would all wish to lift to yet higher service and achievement. The stage is set, the destiny revealed. It has come about not by any plan of our own but by the hand of God who has led us into this war. We cannot turn back. We can only move forward, with renewed spirit to pursue the vision."
8. The Open Road
The American people took a long step forward on November 2, 1920. The era of modern imperialism, begun in 1896 by the election of McKinley, found its expression in the annexation of Hawaii; the conquest of Cuba and the Philippines; the seizure of Panama, and a rapid commercial and financial expansion into Latin America. In 1912 the Republicans were divided. The more conservative elements backed Taft for reëlection. The more aggressive group[Pg 175] (notably United States Steel) supported Roosevelt. Between them they divided the Republican strength, and while they polled a total vote of 7,604,463 as compared with Wilson's 6,293,910, the Republican split enabled Wilson to secure a plurality of 2,173,512, although he had less than half of the total vote.
The American people made significant progress on November 2, 1920. The era of modern imperialism, which started in 1896 with McKinley's election, was evident in the annexation of Hawaii, the takeover of Cuba and the Philippines, the acquisition of Panama, and a swift commercial and financial expansion into Latin America. In 1912, the Republicans were split. The more conservative members supported Taft for re-election, while the more aggressive faction (notably United States Steel) backed Roosevelt. This division diluted the Republican vote, and although they received a combined total of 7,604,463 votes compared to Wilson's 6,293,910, the Republican split allowed Wilson to achieve a plurality of 2,173,512, even though he received less than half of the total votes.
President Wilson entered office with the ideals of "The New Freedom." He was out to back the "man on the make," the small tradesman and manufacturer; the small farmer; the worker, ambitious to rise into the ranks of business or professional life. With the support, primarily, of little business, Wilson managed to hold his own for four years, and at the 1916 election to poll a plurality, over the Republican Party, of more than half a million votes. He won, however, primarily because "he kept us out of war." April, 1917, deprived him of that argument. His "New Freedom" doctrines, translated into international politics (in the Fourteen Points) were roughly handled in Paris. The country rejected his leadership in the decisive Congressional elections of 1918, and he and his party went out of power in the avalanche of 1920, when Harding received a plurality nearly three times as great as the highest one ever before given a presidential candidate (Roosevelt, in 1904). Every state north of the Mason and Dixon Line went Republican. Tennessee left the Solid South and joined the same party. The Democrats carried only eleven states—the traditional Democratic stronghold.
President Wilson took office with the ideals of "The New Freedom." He aimed to support the "man on the make," the small tradesman and manufacturer; the small farmer; and the worker looking to move up in business or professional life. With mainly the backing of small businesses, Wilson managed to hold his position for four years and, in the 1916 election, received a plurality of over half a million votes more than the Republican Party. He won largely because "he kept us out of war." However, in April 1917, he lost that argument. His "New Freedom" principles, translated into international politics (in the Fourteen Points), faced significant challenges in Paris. The nation rejected his leadership in the crucial Congressional elections of 1918, and he and his party were voted out of power in the landslide of 1920, when Harding received a plurality nearly three times greater than the highest ever given to a presidential candidate (Roosevelt, in 1904). Every state north of the Mason-Dixon Line went Republican. Tennessee broke from the Solid South and joined the same party. The Democrats only won in eleven states—the traditional Democratic stronghold.
The victory of Harding is a victory for organized, imperial, American business. The "man on the make" is brushed aside. In his place stands banker, manufacturer and trader, ready to carry American money and American products into Latin America and Asia.
The victory of Harding is a win for organized, imperial, American business. The "man on the make" is pushed aside. In his place stands the banker, manufacturer, and trader, prepared to take American money and American products into Latin America and Asia.
Before the United States lies the open road of imperialism. Manifest destiny points the way in gestures that cannot be mistaken. Capitalist society in the United States has evolved to a place where it must make certain pressing demands upon neighboring communities. Surplus is to be invested; investments are to be protected, American [Pg 176]authority is to be respected. All of these necessities imply the exercise of imperial power by the government of the United States.
Before the United States is the clear path of imperialism. Manifest destiny shows the way in unmistakable ways. Capitalist society in the United States has progressed to a point where it must impose certain urgent demands on neighboring communities. Surplus must be invested; investments need protection, and American [Pg 176] authority must be acknowledged. All these necessities suggest the exercise of imperial power by the U.S. government.
Capitalism makes these demands upon the rulers of capitalist society. There is no gainsaying them. A refusal to comply with them means death.
Capitalism places these demands on the leaders of a capitalist society. There's no denying this. Refusing to meet these demands equals failure.
Therefore the American nation, under the urge of economic necessity; guided half-intelligently, half-instinctively by the plutocracy, is moving along the imperial highroad, and woe to the man that steps across the path that leads to their fulfillment. He who seeks to thwart imperial destiny will be branded as traitor to his country and as blasphemer against God.
Therefore, the American nation, driven by economic need; guided somewhat thoughtfully and somewhat instinctively by the wealthy elite, is heading down the path of imperialism, and anyone who stands in the way of their goals will suffer the consequences. Anyone who tries to oppose this imperial destiny will be labeled a traitor to their country and a blasphemer against God.
FOOTNOTES:
[53] Ibid., p. 485.
Ibid., p. 485.
[54] Ibid., p. 486.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 486.
[56] Ibid., p. 339.
Ibid., p. 339.
XIII. THE UNITED STATES AS A WORLD COMPETITOR
1. A New World Power
Youngest among the great nations, the United States holds a position of immense world power. Measured in years and compared with her sister nations in Europe and Asia, she is a babe. Measured in economic strength she is a burly giant. Young America is, but mighty with a vast economic strength.
Youngest among the great nations, the United States holds a position of immense world power. Measured in years and compared with her sister nations in Europe and Asia, she is a baby. Measured in economic strength she is a burly giant. Young America is powerful, with vast economic strength.
An inexorable destiny seems to be forcing the United States into a position of international importance. Up to the time of the Spanish War, she played only a minor part in the affairs of the world. The Spanish War was the turning point—the United States as a borrowing nation gave way then, to the United States as an investing nation. Economic forces compelled the masters of economic life to look outside of the country for some of their business opportunities.
An unavoidable fate appears to be pushing the United States into a position of global significance. Until the Spanish War, it played a minor role in world affairs. The Spanish War marked a turning point—the United States transformed from a borrowing nation to an investing nation. Economic forces compelled the leaders of the economy to seek business opportunities beyond the country's borders.
Since the Civil War the United States has been preparing herself for her part in world affairs. During the thirty years that elapsed between 1870 and 1900 she emerged from a position of comparative economic inferiority to take a position of notable economic importance. Between the years 1870 and 1900 the population of the United States increased 97 per cent. During the same period the annual production of wheat increased from 236 million bushels to 522 million bushels; the annual production of corn from 1,094 to 2,105 million bushels; the annual production of cotton from 4,352 to 10,102 thousand bales; the annual production of coal from 29 to 241 million tons; the annual production of petroleum from 221 to 2,672 million gallons; the annual production of pig iron from 1,665 to 13,789 thousand tons; the annual production of steel from 68 to[Pg 178] 10,188 thousand tons; the annual production of copper from 12 to 271 thousand tons, and the production of cement (there is no record for 1870) rose from two million barrels in 1880 to 17 million barrels in 1900. Thus while the production of food more than kept pace with the increase of population, the production of those commodities upon which the new industry depends—coal, petroleum, iron, steel, copper and cement—increased many times more rapidly than the population. During one brief generation the United States, with almost unbelievable rapidity, forged ahead in the essentials for supremacy in the new world of industry.
Since the Civil War, the United States has been gearing up for its role in global affairs. In the thirty years between 1870 and 1900, it transitioned from a state of relative economic weakness to one of significant economic strength. During this period, the U.S. population grew by 97 percent. At the same time, annual wheat production increased from 236 million bushels to 522 million bushels; corn production rose from 1,094 to 2,105 million bushels; cotton production grew from 4,352 to 10,102 thousand bales; coal production jumped from 29 to 241 million tons; petroleum production went from 221 to 2,672 million gallons; pig iron production expanded from 1,665 to 13,789 thousand tons; steel production climbed from 68 to 10,188 thousand tons; copper production surged from 12 to 271 thousand tons, and cement production (with no record for 1870) increased from two million barrels in 1880 to 17 million barrels in 1900. Thus, while food production kept pace with the growing population, the production of essential commodities for the emerging industry—coal, petroleum, iron, steel, copper, and cement—increased at a rate much faster than the population growth. In just one generation, the United States rapidly advanced in the key factors needed for dominance in the new industrial world.
By the time of the Spanish War (1898) American industries had found their stride. During the next fourteen years they were overtaking their European competitors in seven league boots. Between 1900 and 1914 while the population of the United States increased by 30 per cent,—
By the time of the Spanish-American War (1898), American industries had really hit their stride. Over the next fourteen years, they were quickly outpacing their European competitors. Between 1900 and 1914, while the population of the United States grew by 30 percent,—
Wheat production increased | 70 per cent |
Corn production increased | 27 " " |
Cotton production increased | 58 " " |
Coal production increased | 90 " " |
Petroleum production increased | 317 " " |
Pig Iron production increased | 69 " " |
Steel production increased | 131 " " |
Copper production increased | 89 " " |
Cement production increased | 406 " " |
The United States was rushing toward a position of economic world power before the catastrophe of 1914 hurled her to the front, first as a producer (at immense profits) for the Allies, and later as the financier of the final stages of the War.
The United States was quickly becoming an economic superpower before the disaster of 1914 pushed it to the forefront, first as a major supplier (at huge profits) for the Allies, and later as the funder of the final stages of the War.
The economic position that is now held by the United States among the great competing nations of the world can be in some measure suggested—it cannot be adequately stated—by a comparison of the economic position of the United States and some of the other leading world empires.
The economic status that the United States holds today among the major competing nations of the world can be somewhat indicated—it can't be fully expressed—by comparing the economic position of the United States with that of some other leading global empires.
Neither the geographical area of the United States nor the numerical importance of its people justifies its present world position. The country, with 8 per cent of the area and 6 per cent of the population of the world, looms large in the world's economic affairs,—how large will appear from an examination of certain features that are considered essential to economic success, such as resources, capital, products, shipping, and national wealth and income.
Neither the geographical size of the United States nor the number of its people justifies its current standing in the world. The country, which makes up 8 percent of the land area and 6 percent of the global population, plays a significant role in global economic matters—how significant will become clear through an examination of key factors that are vital to economic success, such as resources, capital, products, shipping, and national wealth and income.
2. The Resources of the United States
The most important resource of any country is the fertile, agricultural land. Figures given in the Department of Agriculture Year Book for 1918 (Table 319) show the amount of productive land,—including, beside cultivated land, natural meadows, pastures, forests, woodlots, etc., of the various countries according to pre-war boundary lines. The total of such productive land for the 36 leading countries of the world was 4,591.7 million acres. Russia, including Siberia, had almost a third of this total (1,414.7 million acres). The United States came second with 878.8 million acres, or 19 per cent of the total available productive land. Third in the list was Argentine with 537.8 million acres. British India came fourth with 465.7 million acres. Then there followed in order Austria-Hungary, Germany, France, Australia, Spain and Japan. Austria-Hungary, Germany and France combined had almost exactly four hundred million acres of productive land or less than half the productive area of the United States.
The most important resource for any country is fertile agricultural land. Data from the Department of Agriculture Year Book for 1918 (Table 319) shows the amount of productive land—including not just cultivated land but also natural meadows, pastures, forests, woodlots, and more—for various countries based on pre-war borders. The total productive land for the 36 leading countries in the world was 4,591.7 million acres. Russia, including Siberia, had nearly a third of this total at 1,414.7 million acres. The United States was second with 878.8 million acres, making up 19 percent of the total available productive land. Argentina was third with 537.8 million acres, followed by British India in fourth with 465.7 million acres. The list continues with Austria-Hungary, Germany, France, Australia, Spain, and Japan. Together, Austria-Hungary, Germany, and France had almost exactly 400 million acres of productive land, which is less than half of the productive area of the United States.
The United States, in the area of productive land, is second only to Russia. In the area of land actually under cultivation, however, it stands first, with Russia a close second and British India a close third,—the amounts of cultivated land in each of these countries being 293.8 million acres, 279.6 million acres, and 264.9 million acres respectively. These three countries together contain 64 per cent of the 1,313.8 million acres of cultivated land of the world. The United States alone contains 22 per cent of the total cultivated land.
The United States has the second-largest amount of productive land, just behind Russia. However, it takes the lead when it comes to land actually being farmed, with Russia coming in a close second and British India not far behind in third place. The total amounts of cultivated land in these countries are 293.8 million acres, 279.6 million acres, and 264.9 million acres, respectively. Together, these three nations make up 64 percent of the world’s 1,313.8 million acres of cultivated land. The United States alone accounts for 22 percent of that total.
The total forest acreage available for commercial purposes is greatest in Russia (728.4 million acres). The United States stands second with 400 million acres and Canada third with 341 million acres. The Chief of Forest Investigations of the United States Department of Agriculture (Letter of Oct. 11, 1919) places the total forest acreage of both Brazil and Canada ahead of the United States. In the case of Brazil no figures are available showing what portion of the 988 million acres of total area is commercially available. Canada with a total forest acreage of 800 million acres has less timber commercially available than the United States with a total forest area of 500 million acres.
The total forest land available for commercial use is highest in Russia (728.4 million acres). The United States is in second place with 400 million acres, and Canada is third with 341 million acres. The Chief of Forest Investigations of the United States Department of Agriculture (Letter of Oct. 11, 1919) states that both Brazil and Canada have more total forest land than the United States. However, there are no specific figures for Brazil that show how much of its 988 million acres of total area is commercially available. Canada, with a total forest area of 800 million acres, has less commercially available timber than the United States, which has a total forest area of 500 million acres.
The iron ore reserves of the world are estimated at 91,000 million tons ("Iron Ores," Edwin C. Eckel. McGraw Hill Book Co., 1914, pp. 392-3). Of this amount 51,000 millions are placed in Asia and Africa; 12,000 million tons in Europe, and 14,800 million tons in North America. The United States alone is credited with 4,260 million tons or about 5 per cent of the world's supply. The United States Geological Survey (Bulletin 666v) estimates the supply of the United States at 7,550 million tons; the supply in Newfoundland, Mexico and Cuba as 7,000 million tons, and that in South America as 8,000 million tons as against 12,000 million tons for Europe. This estimate would give the United States alone 8 per cent of the iron ore of the world. It would give North America 15 per cent and the Western Hemisphere 25 per cent, as against 15 per cent for Europe.
The world's iron ore reserves are estimated at 91 billion tons ("Iron Ores," Edwin C. Eckel. McGraw Hill Book Co., 1914, pp. 392-3). Of this total, 51 billion tons are found in Asia and Africa; 12 billion tons in Europe; and 14.8 billion tons in North America. The United States is credited with 4.26 billion tons, or about 5 percent of the world's supply. The United States Geological Survey (Bulletin 666v) estimates the U.S. supply at 7.55 billion tons, with Newfoundland, Mexico, and Cuba contributing 7 billion tons, and South America accounting for 8 billion tons compared to Europe's 12 billion tons. This would mean the U.S. alone has 8 percent of the world’s iron ore, North America holds 15 percent, and the Western Hemisphere has 25 percent, compared to Europe’s 15 percent.
Iron ore furnishes the material out of which industrial civilization is constructed. Until recently the source of industrial power has been coal. Even to-day petroleum and water play a relatively unimportant rôle. Coal still holds the field.
Iron ore provides the material that industrial civilization is built on. Until recently, the main source of industrial power has been coal. Even today, petroleum and water play a relatively minor role. Coal still dominates the scene.
The United States alone contains 3,838,657 million tons—more than half of the total coal reserves of the world. ("Coal Resources of the World." Compiled by the Executive Committee, International Geological Congress, 1913, Vol. I, p. XVIII ff.) North America is credited with[Pg 181] 5,073,431 million tons or over two-thirds of the world's total coal reserves (7,397,553 millions of tons). The coal reserve of Europe is 784,190 million tons or about one-fifth of the coal reserves of the United States alone.
The United States alone has 3,838,657 million tons—more than half of the world's total coal reserves. ("Coal Resources of the World." Compiled by the Executive Committee, International Geological Congress, 1913, Vol. I, p. XVIII ff.) North America holds[Pg 181] 5,073,431 million tons, which is over two-thirds of the global total coal reserves (7,397,553 million tons). Europe's coal reserve is 784,190 million tons, approximately one-fifth of the reserves found in the United States alone.
Figures showing the amount of productive land and of timber may be verified. Those dealing with iron ore and coal in the ground are mere estimates and should be treated as such. At the same time they give a rough idea of the economic situation. Of all the essential resources,—land, timber, iron, copper, coal, petroleum and water-power,—the United States has large supplies. As compared with Europe, her supply of most of them is enormous. No other single country (the British Empire is not a single country) that is now competing for the supremacy of the world can compare with the United States in this regard, and if North America be taken as the unit of discussion, its preponderance is enormous.
Figures showing the amount of productive land and timber can be verified. The data related to iron ore and coal deposits are only estimates and should be viewed that way. Nonetheless, they provide a rough idea of the economic landscape. Among all essential resources—land, timber, iron, copper, coal, petroleum, and water power—the United States has significant supplies. Compared to Europe, its supply of most of these resources is vast. No other single country (the British Empire isn’t a single country) currently competing for global dominance can match the United States in this aspect, and when considering North America as a whole, its advantage is substantial.
3. The Capital of the United States
The United States apparently enjoys a large superiority over any single country in its reserves of some of the most essential resources. The same thing is true of productive machinery.
The United States clearly has a significant advantage over any single country in its reserves of some of the most essential resources. The same goes for productive machinery.
Figures showing the actual quantities of capital are available in only a small number of cases. Estimates of capital value in terms of money are useless. It is only the figures which show numbers of machines that really give a basis for judging actual differences.
Figures showing the actual amounts of capital are only available in a few cases. Estimates of capital value in monetary terms are not helpful. Only the figures that indicate the number of machines provide a reliable basis for assessing actual differences.
Live stock on farms, the chief form of agricultural capital, is reported for the various countries in the Year Book of the United States Department of Agriculture. The United States (1916) heads the list with 61.9 million cattle; 67.8 million hogs; 48.6 million sheep and goats, and 25.8 million horses and mules,—204 million farm animals in all. The Russian Empire (including Russia in Asia) is second (1914) with 52.0 million cattle; 15.0 hogs; 72.0 million sheep[Pg 182] and goats, and 34.9 horses and mules,—174 million farm animals in all. British India (1914) reports more cattle than any other country (140.5 million); she is also second in the number of sheep and goats with 64.7 millions, but she has no hogs and 1.9 million horses. Argentina (1914) reports 29.5 million cattle; 2.9 million sheep and goats; and 8.9 million horses and mules. The number of animals on European farms outside of Russia is comparatively small. Germany (1914), United Kingdom (1916), Austria-Hungary (1913), and France (1916) reported 61.8 million cattle, 46.6 million hogs, 60.8 million sheep and goats, and 11.5 million horses and mules, making a total of 180.7 million farm animals. These four countries with a population of about 206 million persons, had less live stock than the United States with its population (1916) of about 100 millions.
Livestock on farms, the main form of agricultural capital, is detailed for various countries in the Year Book of the United States Department of Agriculture. The United States (1916) leads the list with 61.9 million cattle, 67.8 million hogs, 48.6 million sheep and goats, and 25.8 million horses and mules—totaling 204 million farm animals. The Russian Empire (including Russia in Asia) comes second (1914) with 52.0 million cattle, 15.0 million hogs, 72.0 million sheep and goats, and 34.9 million horses and mules—totaling 174 million farm animals. British India (1914) reports more cattle than any other country (140.5 million); it is also second in the number of sheep and goats with 64.7 million, but has no hogs and 1.9 million horses. Argentina (1914) reports 29.5 million cattle, 2.9 million sheep and goats, and 8.9 million horses and mules. The number of animals on European farms outside of Russia is comparatively small. Germany (1914), the United Kingdom (1916), Austria-Hungary (1913), and France (1916) reported 61.8 million cattle, 46.6 million hogs, 60.8 million sheep and goats, and 11.5 million horses and mules, making a total of 180.7 million farm animals. These four countries, with a population of about 206 million, had less livestock than the United States, which had a population (1916) of about 100 million.
It would be interesting to compare the amount of farm machinery and farm equipment of the United States with that of other countries. Unfortunately no such figures are available.
It would be interesting to compare the amount of farm machinery and farm equipment in the United States with that of other countries. Unfortunately, there are no figures available for that.
The figures showing transportation capital are fairly complete. (Statistical Abstr. 1918, pp. 844-5.) The total railroad mileage of the world is 729,845. More than one-third of this mileage (266,381 miles) is in the United States. Russia (1916) comes second with 48,950 miles; Germany (1914) third, with 38,600 miles and Canada (1916) fourth with 37,437 miles.
The data on transportation infrastructure is quite comprehensive. (Statistical Abstr. 1918, pp. 844-5.) The total length of railroads worldwide is 729,845 miles. Over a third of this length (266,381 miles) is in the United States. Russia (1916) ranks second with 48,950 miles; Germany (1914) is third with 38,600 miles, and Canada (1916) is fourth with 37,437 miles.
The world's total mileage of telegraph wire (Ibid.) is 5,816,219, of which the United States has more than a fourth (1,627,342 miles). Russia (1916) is second with 537,208 miles; Germany (1914) is third with 475,551 miles; and France fourth with 452,192 miles.
The total length of telegraph wire in the world is 5,816,219 miles, with the United States having over a quarter of that at 1,627,342 miles. Russia was in second place in 1916 with 537,208 miles; Germany was third in 1914 with 475,551 miles; and France was fourth with 452,192 miles.
The Bureau of Railway Economics has published a compilation on "Comparative Railway Statistics" (Bulletin 100, Washington, 1916) from which it appears that the United States is far ahead of any other country in its railroad equipment. The total number of locomotives in the United States was 64,760; in Germany 29,520; in United[Pg 183] Kingdom 24,718; in Russia (1910) 19,984; and in France 13,828. No other country in the world had as many as ten thousand locomotives. If these figures also showed the locomotive tonnage as well as the number, the lead of the United States would be even more decided as the European locomotives are generally smaller than those used in the United States. This fact is clearly brought out by the figures from the same bulletin showing freight car tonnage (total carrying capacity of all cars). For the United States the tonnage was (1913) 86,978,145. The tonnage of Germany was 10.7 millions; of France 5.0 millions; of Austria-Hungary 3.8 millions. The figures for the United Kingdom were not available.
The Bureau of Railway Economics has published a report on "Comparative Railway Statistics" (Bulletin 100, Washington, 1916) showing that the United States has a significant lead over any other country in railroad equipment. The total number of locomotives in the United States was 64,760; in Germany, it was 29,520; in the United Kingdom, 24,718; in Russia (1910), 19,984; and in France, 13,828. No other country in the world had as many as ten thousand locomotives. If these figures included locomotive tonnage as well as the number, the U.S. would be even further ahead since European locomotives are generally smaller than those used in the United States. This is clearly illustrated by the figures from the same bulletin showing freight car tonnage (total carrying capacity of all cars). For the United States, the tonnage was (1913) 86,978,145. The tonnage for Germany was 10.7 million; for France, 5.0 million; and for Austria-Hungary, 3.8 million. The figures for the United Kingdom were not available.
The United States also takes the lead in postal equipment. (Stat. Abstr., 1918, pp. 844-5.) There are 324,869 post offices in the world; 54,257 or one-sixth in the United States. The postal routes of the world cover 2,513,997 miles, of which 450,954 miles are in the United States. The total miles of mail service for the world is 2,061 millions. Of this number the United States has 601.3 millions.
The United States also leads in postal equipment. (Stat. Abstr., 1918, pp. 844-5.) There are 324,869 post offices worldwide; 54,257 or one-sixth of them are in the United States. The postal routes around the world span 2,513,997 miles, with 450,954 miles in the United States. The total mileage of mail service worldwide is 2,061 million. Of this, the United States contributes 601.3 million.
The most extreme contrast between transportation capital in the United States and foreign countries is furnished by the number of automobiles. Facts and Figures, the official organ of the National Automobile Chamber of Commerce (April, 1919) estimates the total number of cars in use on January 1, 1917 as 4,219,246. Of this number almost six-sevenths (3,500,000) were in use in the United States. The total number of cars in Europe as estimated by the Fiat Press Bureau, Italy, was 437,558, or less than one-seventh of the number in use in the United States. Automobile distribution is of peculiar significance because the industry has developed almost entirely since the Spanish-American War and therefore since the time when the United States first began to develop into a world power.
The biggest difference between transportation in the United States and other countries is shown by the number of cars. Facts and Figures, the official publication of the National Automobile Chamber of Commerce (April, 1919), estimates that the total number of cars in use on January 1, 1917, was 4,219,246. Of that total, almost six-sevenths (3,500,000) were in use in the United States. The estimated total number of cars in Europe, according to the Fiat Press Bureau in Italy, was 437,558, which is less than one-seventh of the number in use in the United States. The way cars are distributed is particularly significant because the industry has mainly developed since the Spanish-American War, during the time when the United States began to rise as a world power.
The world's cotton spindleage in 1919 is estimated at 149.4 million spindles. (Letter from T. H. Price 10/6/19.) Of this total Great Britain has 57.0 millions; the United States 33.7 millions; Germany 11.0 millions; Russia 8.0 millions, and France and India each 7.0 millions.
The world's cotton spindle count in 1919 is estimated to be 149.4 million spindles. (Letter from T. H. Price 10/6/19.) Of this total, Great Britain has 57.0 million; the United States has 33.7 million; Germany has 11.0 million; Russia has 8.0 million, and France and India each have 7.0 million.
No effort has been made to cite figures showing the estimated value of various forms of capital, because of the necessary variations in value standards. Enough material showing actual quantities of capital has been presented to prove that in agriculture, in transportation, in certain lines of manufacturing the United States is either at the head of the list, or else stands in second place. In transportation capital (particularly automobiles) the lead of the United States is very great.
No effort has been made to cite figures showing the estimated value of various types of capital due to the necessary differences in value standards. There is enough material showing actual quantities of capital to demonstrate that in agriculture, transportation, and certain manufacturing sectors, the United States is either at the top of the list or in second place. In transportation capital (especially automobiles), the United States holds a significant lead.
If figures were available to show the relative amounts of capital used in mining, in merchandising, and in financial transactions they would probably show an equally great advantage in favor of the United States. In this connection it might not be irrelevant to note that in 1915 the total stock of gold money in the world was 8,258 millions of dollars. More than a quarter (2,299 millions) was in the United States. The total stock of silver money was 2,441 millions of dollars of which 756 millions (nearly a third) was in the United States. (Stat. Abstr., 1918, pp. 840-1.)
If data were available to show the relative amounts of capital used in mining, retail, and financial transactions, they would likely indicate a significant advantage for the United States. In this context, it might be worth noting that in 1915, the total amount of gold money in the world was $8.258 billion. Over a quarter ($2.299 billion) was in the United States. The total amount of silver money was $2.441 billion, of which $756 million (almost a third) was in the United States. (Stat. Abstr., 1918, pp. 840-1.)
4. Products of the United States
Figures showing the amounts of the principal commodities produced in the United States are far more complete than those covering the resources and capital. They are perhaps the best index of the present economic position of the United States in relation to the other countries of the world.
Figures showing the amounts of the main commodities produced in the United States are much more comprehensive than those on resources and capital. They’re probably the best indicator of the current economic standing of the United States in comparison to other countries around the world.
The wheat crop of the world in 1916 was 3,701.3 million bushels. Russia, including Siberia, was the leading producer with 686.3 million bushels. The United States was second with 636.7 million bushels or 17 per cent of the world's output. British India, the third wheat producer, had a crop in 1916 of 323.0 million bushels. Canada, with 262.8 million bushels, was fourth on the list. Thus Canada and the United States combined produced almost exactly one-fourth of the world's wheat crop.
The world's wheat crop in 1916 was 3,701.3 million bushels. Russia, including Siberia, was the top producer with 686.3 million bushels. The United States came in second with 636.7 million bushels, making up 17 percent of the world's output. British India ranked third with a crop of 323.0 million bushels in 1916. Canada, with 262.8 million bushels, was fourth on the list. Together, Canada and the United States produced nearly one-fourth of the world's wheat crop.
As a producer of corn the United States is without a peer. The world's corn crop in 1916 was 3,642.1 million bushels. Two-thirds of this crop (2,566.9 million bushels) was produced in the United States.
As a corn producer, the United States stands unmatched. The global corn crop in 1916 was 3,642.1 million bushels. The U.S. accounted for two-thirds of this crop (2,566.9 million bushels).
The position of the United States as a producer of corn is almost duplicated in the case of cotton. The Statistical Abstract published by the British Government (No. 39, London, 1914, p. 522) gives the world's cotton production as 21,659,000 bales (1912). Of this number the United States produced 14,313,000—almost exactly two-thirds. British India, which ranks second, reported a production of 3,203,000 bales. Egypt was third with 1,471,000 bales.
The United States' role as a corn producer is almost mirrored when it comes to cotton. The Statistical Abstract published by the British Government (No. 39, London, 1914, p. 522) reports the world's cotton production at 21,659,000 bales (1912). Out of that total, the United States produced 14,313,000—nearly two-thirds. British India, in second place, reported a production of 3,203,000 bales, while Egypt came in third with 1,471,000 bales.
About one-tenth of the world's output of wool is produced in the United States. World production for 1917 is placed at 2,790,000 pounds. (Bulletin, National Association of Wool Manufacturers. 1918, p. 162.) Australia heads the list with a production of 741.8 million pounds. Russia, including Siberia, comes second with 380.0 million pounds. The United States is third with 285.6 million pounds and Argentina fourth with 258.3 million pounds.
About ten percent of the world's wool production comes from the United States. World production for 1917 was reported at 2,790,000 pounds. (Bulletin, National Association of Wool Manufacturers, 1918, p. 162.) Australia leads the way with a production of 741.8 million pounds. Russia, including Siberia, is second with 380.0 million pounds. The United States ranks third with 285.6 million pounds, followed by Argentina in fourth place with 258.3 million pounds.
The United States leads the world in timber production. "Last winter we estimated that the United States has been cutting about 50 per cent of the total world's supply of lumber." (Letter from Chief of Forest Investigation. U. S. Forest Service. Oct. 11, 1919.) The same letter gives the present annual timber cut. The United States 12.5 billion cubic feet; Russia 7.1 billion cubic feet; Canada 3.0 billion cubic feet; Austria-Hungary 2.7 billion cubic feet.
The United States tops the globe in timber production. "Last winter we estimated that the United States has been cutting about 50 percent of the total world’s supply of lumber." (Letter from Chief of Forest Investigation. U. S. Forest Service. Oct. 11, 1919.) The same letter provides the current annual timber cut. The United States 12.5 billion cubic feet; Russia 7.1 billion cubic feet; Canada 3.0 billion cubic feet; Austria-Hungary 2.7 billion cubic feet.
A third of the iron ore produced in the world in 1912 came from the United States. The world's production in that year was 154.0 million tons (British Statistical Abstract, No. 39, p. 492). The United States produced 56.1 million tons or 36 per cent of the whole; Germany produced 32.7 million tons; France 19.2 million tons; the United Kingdom 14.0 million tons. No other country is reported as producing as much as ten million tons.
A third of the world's iron ore production in 1912 came from the United States. The total global production that year was 154.0 million tons (British Statistical Abstract, No. 39, p. 492). The U.S. produced 56.1 million tons, making up 36 percent of the total; Germany produced 32.7 million tons; France produced 19.2 million tons; and the United Kingdom produced 14.0 million tons. No other country is reported to have produced as much as ten million tons.
The position of the United States as a producer of iron and steel was greatly enhanced by the war. [Pg 186]The Daily Consular and Trade Reports (July 9, 1919, p. 155) give a comparison between the world's steel and iron output in 1914 and 1918. In 1914 the United States produced 23.3 million tons of pig iron; Germany produced 14.4 million tons; the United Kingdom 8.9 million tons, and France 5.2 million tons. The United States was thus producing 45 per cent of the pig iron turned out in these four countries. For 1918 the pig iron production of the United States was 39.1 million tons. That of the other three countries was 22.0 million tons. In that year the United States produced 64 per cent of the pig iron product of these four countries. An equally great lead is shown in the case of steel production. In 1914 the United States produced 23.5 million tons of steel. Germany, the United Kingdom and France produced 27.6 million tons. By 1918 the production of the United States had nearly doubled (45.1 million tons).
The United States significantly improved its position as a producer of iron and steel due to the war. [Pg 186]The Daily Consular and Trade Reports (July 9, 1919, p. 155) compares the world's steel and iron output from 1914 to 1918. In 1914, the United States produced 23.3 million tons of pig iron; Germany produced 14.4 million tons; the United Kingdom produced 8.9 million tons, and France produced 5.2 million tons. This means the United States was responsible for 45 percent of the pig iron produced in these four countries. By 1918, the U.S. pig iron production had increased to 39.1 million tons, while the other three countries produced a total of 22.0 million tons. That year, the United States accounted for 64 percent of the pig iron output from these four countries. A similar lead is evident in steel production. In 1914, the U.S. produced 23.5 million tons of steel, while Germany, the United Kingdom, and France combined produced 27.6 million tons. By 1918, U.S. production had nearly doubled to 45.1 million tons.
The total pig iron output of the world for 1917 was placed at 66.9 millions of tons. The world's production of steel in 1916 was placed at 83 million tons. The United States produced considerably more than half of both commodities. ("The Mineral Industry During 1918." New York, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1919, pp. 379-80).
The total pig iron output of the world for 1917 was around 66.9 million tons. The world's steel production in 1916 was about 83 million tons. The United States produced more than half of both of these commodities. ("The Mineral Industry During 1918." New York, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1919, pp. 379-80).
The two chief forms of power upon which modern industry depends are petroleum and coal. The United States is the largest producer of both of these commodities. The world's production of petroleum in 1917 was 506.7 million barrels (Mineral Resources, 1917, Part II, p. 867). Of this amount the United States produced 335.3 million barrels or 66 per cent of the total. The second largest producer, Russia, and the third, Mexico, are credited with 69 million barrels and 55.3 million barrels respectively.
The two main sources of power that modern industry relies on are oil and coal. The United States is the biggest producer of both of these resources. In 1917, the world produced 506.7 million barrels of oil (Mineral Resources, 1917, Part II, p. 867). Out of that, the United States produced 335.3 million barrels, which is 66 percent of the total. Russia, the second largest producer, contributed 69 million barrels, while Mexico, the third, produced 55.3 million barrels.
As a coal producer the United States stands far ahead of all other nations. The United States Geological Survey (Special Report, No. 118) placed the total coal production of the world in 1913 at 1,478 million tons. Of this amount 569.9 million tons (38.5 per cent) were produced in the United States. The production for Great Britain was 321.7 million tons; for Germany 305.7 million tons; for [Pg 187]Austria-Hungary 60.6 million tons. No other country reported a production of as much as fifty million tons. In 1915 the United States produced 40.5 per cent of the world's coal; in 1917 44.2 per cent; in 1918 46.2 per cent.
As a coal producer, the United States leads all other countries by a wide margin. The United States Geological Survey (Special Report, No. 118) estimated that the total coal production of the world in 1913 was 1,478 million tons. Of this, 569.9 million tons (38.5 percent) came from the United States. Great Britain produced 321.7 million tons; Germany produced 305.7 million tons; and Austria-Hungary produced 60.6 million tons. No other country reported a production of fifty million tons or more. In 1915, the United States accounted for 40.5 percent of the world's coal; in 1917, it was 44.2 percent; and in 1918, 46.2 percent.
Copper has become one of the world's chief metals. Two-thirds of all the copper is produced in the United States. Copper production in 1916 totaled 3,107 million pounds (Mineral Resources in the United States, 1916, part I, p. 625). The production for the United States was 1,927.9 million pounds (62 per cent of the whole). The second largest producer, Japan, turned out 179.2 million pounds.
Copper has become one of the leading metals in the world. Two-thirds of all copper is produced in the United States. In 1916, copper production totaled 3,107 million pounds (Mineral Resources in the United States, 1916, part I, p. 625). The production for the United States was 1,927.9 million pounds (62 percent of the total). The second largest producer, Japan, produced 179.2 million pounds.
The precious metals, gold and silver, are largely produced in the United States. The world's gold production for 1917 was 423.6 million dollars (Mineral Resources, 1917, p. 613). Africa produced half of this amount (214.6 million dollars). The United States was second with a production of 83.8 million dollars (20 per cent of the whole). The same publication (p. 615) gives the world's silver production in 1917 as 164 million ounces. 77.1 million ounces (43 per cent) were produced in the United States. The second largest producer was Mexico, 31.2 million ounces; and the third Canada, with 22.3 million ounces. These three North American countries produced 76 per cent of the world's output of silver.
The valuable metals, gold and silver, are mainly produced in the United States. The global gold production for 1917 totaled 423.6 million dollars (Mineral Resources, 1917, p. 613). Africa contributed half of this total (214.6 million dollars). The United States ranked second with a production of 83.8 million dollars (20 percent of the total). The same source (p. 615) reports the world's silver production in 1917 as 164 million ounces. The United States produced 77.1 million ounces (43 percent). Mexico was the second largest producer with 31.2 million ounces, followed by Canada with 22.3 million ounces. Together, these three North American countries accounted for 76 percent of the world's silver production.
Judge Gary, speaking at the Annual Meeting of the Iron and Steel Institute (1920) put the situation in this summary form:—
Judge Gary, speaking at the Annual Meeting of the Iron and Steel Institute (1920), summarized the situation like this:—
As frequently stated, notwithstanding the United States has only 6% of the world's population and 7% of the world's land, yet we produce:
As is often said, even though the United States has only 6% of the world's population and 7% of the world's land, we still produce:
20% of the world's supply of gold,
25% of the world's supply of wheat,
40% of the world's supply of iron and steel,
40% of the world's supply of lead,
40% of the world's supply of silver,
50% of the world's supply of zinc,
52% of the world's supply of coal,
[Pg 188]60% of the world's supply of aluminum,
60% of the world's supply of copper,
60% of the world's supply of cotton,
66% of the world's supply of oil,
75% of the world's supply of corn,
85% of the world's supply of automobiles.20% of the global gold supply,
25% of the global wheat supply,
40% of the global iron and steel supply,
40% of the global lead supply,
40% of the global silver supply,
50% of the global zinc supply,
52% of the global coal supply,
[Pg 188]60% of the global aluminum supply,
60% of the global copper supply,
60% of the global cotton supply,
66% of the global oil supply,
75% of the global corn supply,
85% of the global automobile supply.
With the exception of rubber, practically all of the essential raw materials and food products upon which modern industrial society depends are produced largely in the United States. With less than a sixteenth of the world's population, the United States produced from a fifth to two-thirds of most of the world's essential products.
With the exception of rubber, almost all the essential raw materials and food products that modern industrial society relies on are mainly produced in the United States. Although the U.S. has less than one-sixteenth of the world's population, it produced about one-fifth to two-thirds of most of the world's essential products.
5. Shipping
The rapid increase in the foreign trade of the United States created a demand for American shipping facilities. Before the Civil War the United States held a place as a maritime nation. Between the Civil War and the war with Spain the energies of the American people were devoted to internal improvement. With the advent of expansion that followed the Spanish-American War, came an insistent demand that the United States develop a merchant marine adequate to carry its own foreign trade.
The quick growth of foreign trade in the United States created a need for American shipping services. Before the Civil War, the United States was recognized as a maritime nation. After the Civil War and leading up to the war with Spain, the focus of the American people shifted towards internal development. With the expansion that followed the Spanish-American War, there was a pressing need for the United States to build a merchant marine capable of handling its own foreign trade.
The United States Commissioner of Navigation in his report for 1917 (p. 78) gives the net gross tonnage of steam and sailing vessels in 1914 as 45 million tons in all. The tonnage of Great Britain was 19.8 million tons; of Germany 4.9 million tons; of the United States 3.5 million tons; of Norway 2.4 million tons; of France 2.2 million tons; of Japan 1.7 million tons, and of Italy 1.6 million tons.
The United States Commissioner of Navigation in his report for 1917 (p. 78) states that the total gross tonnage of steam and sailing vessels in 1914 was 45 million tons overall. The tonnage for Great Britain was 19.8 million tons; for Germany, 4.9 million tons; for the United States, 3.5 million tons; for Norway, 2.4 million tons; for France, 2.2 million tons; for Japan, 1.7 million tons; and for Italy, 1.6 million tons.
The war brought about great changes in the distribution of the world's shipping. Germany was practically eliminated as a shipping nation. The necessity of recouping the submarine losses, and of transporting troops and supplies led the United States to adopt a ship-building program[Pg 189] that made her the second maritime country of the world. Lloyd's Register of Shipping gives the steam tonnage of the United Kingdom as 18,111,000 gross tons in June, 1920. For the same month the tonnage of the United States is given as 12,406,000 gross tons. Japan comes next with a tonnage of 2,996,000 gross tons. According to the same authority the United Kingdom had 41.6 per cent of the world's tonnage in 1914 and 33.6 per cent in 1920; while the United States had 4.7 per cent of the world's tonnage in 1914 and 24 per cent in 1920.
The war caused significant changes in global shipping. Germany was nearly wiped out as a shipping nation. The need to recover from submarine losses and to transport troops and supplies pushed the United States to launch a shipbuilding program[Pg 189] that made it the second-largest maritime country in the world. According to Lloyd's Register of Shipping, the steam tonnage of the United Kingdom was 18,111,000 gross tons in June 1920. For the same month, the United States had a tonnage of 12,406,000 gross tons. Japan followed with a tonnage of 2,996,000 gross tons. The same source indicates that the United Kingdom held 41.6 percent of the world's tonnage in 1914 and 33.6 percent in 1920, while the United States controlled 4.7 percent of the world's tonnage in 1914 and 24 percent in 1920.
6. Wealth and Income
The economic advantages of the United States enumerated in this chapter inevitably are reflected in the figures of national wealth and national income. While these figures are estimates rather than conclusive statements they are, nevertheless, indicative of a general situation.
The economic benefits of the United States outlined in this chapter are clearly seen in the numbers for national wealth and national income. Although these numbers are estimates rather than definitive figures, they still suggest a broader trend.
During the war a number of attempts were made to approximate the pre-war wealth and income of the leading nations. Perhaps the most ambitious of these efforts was contained in a paper on "Wealth and Income of the Chief Powers" read before the Royal Statistical Society. (See The London Economist, May 24, 1919, pp. 958-9.) This and other estimates were compiled by L. R. Gottlieb and printed in the Quarterly Journal of Economics for Nov. 1919. Mr. Gottlieb estimates the pre-war national wealth of Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan, Russia, Belgium, Germany, Austria-Hungary, Turkey and Bulgaria at 366,100 million dollars. At the same time the wealth of the United States was estimated at 204,400 million dollars. Thus the wealth of the United States was equal to about 36 per cent of the total wealth of the great nations in question.
During the war, several attempts were made to estimate the pre-war wealth and income of the leading nations. One of the most ambitious efforts was a paper on "Wealth and Income of the Chief Powers" presented to the Royal Statistical Society. (See The London Economist, May 24, 1919, pp. 958-9.) This and other estimates were compiled by L. R. Gottlieb and published in the Quarterly Journal of Economics for November 1919. Mr. Gottlieb estimated the pre-war national wealth of Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan, Russia, Belgium, Germany, Austria-Hungary, Turkey, and Bulgaria at 366.1 billion dollars. At the same time, the wealth of the United States was estimated at 204.4 billion dollars. Thus, the wealth of the United States was about 36 percent of the total wealth of the major nations in question.
The same article contains an estimate of pre-war national incomes for these great powers. The total is placed at 81,100 million dollars. The income for the United States is placed at 35,300 million dollars, or more than 43 per cent of the total.
The same article includes an estimate of pre-war national incomes for these major powers. The total is around $81.1 billion. The income for the United States is estimated at $35.3 billion, which is over 43% of the total.
The war has made important changes in the wealth and income of the principal powers. The wealth and income of Europe have been reduced, while the wealth and income of the United States have been greatly increased. This increase is rendered doubly emphatic by the demoralization in foreign exchange which gives the American dollar a position of unique authority in the financial world.
The war has brought significant changes to the wealth and income of the major powers. Wealth and income in Europe have decreased, while those in the United States have increased significantly. This increase is even more pronounced given the instability in foreign exchange, which has given the American dollar a unique standing in the financial world.
The latest wealth estimates (Commerce and Finance, May 26, and July 28, 1920) in terms of dollars at their purchasing-power value, makes the wealth of the whole British Empire 230 billions of dollars; of France, 100 billions; of Russia, 60 billions; of Italy, 40 billions; of Japan, 40 billions; of Germany, 20 billions, and of the United States, 500 billions. These figures are subject to alteration with the alteration of the exchange rates, but they indicate the immense advantage that is possessed by the business men of the United States over the business men of any or of all of the other nations of the world.
The latest wealth estimates (Commerce and Finance, May 26, and July 28, 1920) in terms of dollars at their purchasing power value show that the total wealth of the British Empire is 230 billion dollars; France has 100 billion; Russia has 60 billion; Italy has 40 billion; Japan has 40 billion; Germany has 20 billion; and the United States has 500 billion. These figures may change with fluctuations in exchange rates, but they highlight the significant advantage that American businesspeople have over their counterparts in any other country in the world.
Before the war, the British were the chief lenders in the international field. In 1913 Great Britain had about 20 billions of dollars of foreign investments, as compared with 9 billions for France and about 6 billions for Germany. At the end of 1920, the British foreign investments had shrunk to a fraction of their former amount, while the United States, from the position of a debtor nation, had become the leading investing nation of the world, with over 9 billions of dollars loaned to the Allied governments; with notice loans estimated at over 10 billions; with foreign investments of 8 billions, and goods on consignment to the extent of 2 billions.
Before the war, the British were the top lenders internationally. In 1913, Great Britain had around 20 billion dollars in foreign investments, compared to 9 billion for France and about 6 billion for Germany. By the end of 1920, British foreign investments had reduced to only a small fraction of what they were before, while the United States, which had previously been a debtor nation, had become the leading investing nation in the world, with over 9 billion dollars loaned to the Allied governments; notice loans estimated at over 10 billion; foreign investments of 8 billion; and goods on consignment amounting to 2 billion.
The United States therefore began the year 1921 with a greater financial lead, by several times over, than that which she held before the war, when she was credited with a greater wealth and a larger income than that of any other nation in the world. The extent of the advantage enjoyed by the United States at the end of 1920 cannot be stated with any final accuracy, but its proportions are staggering.
The United States began 1921 with a much larger financial lead than it had before the war, when it was considered wealthier and had a higher income than any other nation in the world. While we can't state the precise extent of the advantage the United States had at the end of 1920, the figures are impressive.
7. The Economic Position of the United States
Economically the United States is a world power. She occupies one of the three great geographical areas in the temperate zone. If she were to include Canada, Mexico and Central America—the territory north of the Canal Zone—she would have the greatest unified body of economic advantage anywhere in the world.
Economically, the United States is a global power. It occupies one of the three significant geographical areas in the temperate zone. If it were to include Canada, Mexico, and Central America—the land north of the Canal Zone—it would have the largest unified economic advantage anywhere in the world.
The United States is rich in practically all of the important industrial resources. She has a large, relatively homogeneous population, a great part of which is directly descended from the conquering races of the world. Almost all of the essential raw materials are produced in the United States, and in relatively large quantities. The period since the Spanish War has witnessed a rapid increase in wealth production. The war of 1914 resulted in an even greater increase in shipping. The investable surplus is greater in the United States than in any other nation, and in amount as well as in percent the national debt is less than that in any other important nation except Japan. Economically the position of the United States is unique. The masters of her industries hold a position of great advantage in the capitalist world.
The United States is abundant in nearly all important industrial resources. It has a large, relatively uniform population, a significant portion of which is directly descended from the dominant races of the world. Almost all of the necessary raw materials are produced in the United States, and in considerable quantities. The period since the Spanish-American War has seen a rapid increase in wealth production. The war of 1914 led to an even bigger rise in shipping. The amount of investable surplus is higher in the United States than in any other country, and both in absolute figures and percentage, the national debt is lower than that of any other major nation except Japan. Economically, the United States holds a unique position. The leaders of its industries have a significant advantage in the capitalist world.
XIV. THE PARTITION OF THE EARTH
1. Economic Power and Political Authority
Economically the United States is a world power. Her world position in politics follows as a matter of course.
Economically, the United States is a global power. Its position in world politics follows naturally.
While the American people were busy with internal development, they played an unimportant part in world affairs. They were not competing for world trade, because they had relatively little to export; they were not building a merchant marine because of the smallness of their trading activities; they were not engaged in the scramble after undeveloped countries because, with an undeveloped country of their own, calling continually for enlarged investments, they had little surplus capital to employ in foreign enterprises.
While Americans were focused on their own growth, they played a minor role in global affairs. They weren't competing for international trade, since they had relatively few exports. They weren't developing a merchant fleet due to their limited trading activities. They also weren't chasing after undeveloped countries because, with their own undeveloped territory that required constant investment, they had little extra capital to invest in foreign opportunities.
This economic isolation of the United States was reflected in an equally thoroughgoing political isolation. With the exception of the Monroe Doctrine, which in its original form was intended as a measure of defense against foreign political and military aggression, the United States minded its own affairs, and allowed the remainder of the world to go its way. From time to time, as necessity arose, additional territory was purchased or taken from neighboring countries—but all of these transactions, up to the annexation of Hawaii (1898) were confined to the continent of North America, in which no European nation, with the exception of Great Britain, had any imperative territorial interest.
This economic isolation of the United States also led to a significant political isolation. Aside from the Monroe Doctrine, which was originally meant as a defense against foreign political and military threats, the United States focused on its own issues and let the rest of the world go about its business. Occasionally, when the need arose, extra territory was bought or taken from nearby countries—but all of these actions, leading up to the annexation of Hawaii (1898), were limited to the continent of North America, where no European nation, except for Great Britain, had any urgent territorial interests.
The economic changes which immediately preceded the Spanish War period commanded for the United States a place among the nations. The passing of economic [Pg 193]aloofness marked the passing of political aloofness, and the United States entered upon a new era of international relationships. Possessed of abundant natural resources, and having through a long period of peace developed a large working capital with which these resources might be exploited, the United States, at the beginning of the twentieth century, was in a position to export, to trade and to invest in foreign enterprises.
The economic changes right before the Spanish War established the United States as a significant player among nations. The end of economic [Pg 193]detachment marked the end of political detachment, and the United States stepped into a new era of international relations. With plenty of natural resources and a large pool of working capital developed during a long period of peace, the United States was ready at the start of the twentieth century to export, trade, and invest in foreign ventures.
The advent of the World War gave the United States a dramatic opportunity to take a position which she must have assumed in any case in a comparatively short time. It had, however, one signal, diplomatic advantage,—it enabled the capitalist governments of Europe to accept, with an excellent grace, the newly acquired economic prominence of the United States and to recognize her without question as one of the leading political powers. The loan of ten billions to Europe; the sending of two million men at double quick time to the battle front; the immense increases in the production of raw material that followed the declaration of war by the United States; the thoroughness displayed by the American people, once they had decided to enter the war, all played their part in the winning of the victory. There were feelings, very strongly expressed, that the United States should have come in sooner; should have sacrificed more and profiteered less. But once in, there could be no question either of the spirit of her armies or of the vast economic power behind them.
The start of World War I gave the United States a major chance to take on a role it would have assumed sooner or later. It did have one notable diplomatic advantage—it allowed the capitalist governments of Europe to gracefully accept the newly risen economic status of the United States and recognize it as a leading political power. The loan of ten billion dollars to Europe, the rapid mobilization of two million soldiers to the front lines, and the huge increases in the production of raw materials that followed the U.S. declaration of war all contributed to the victory. Many strongly felt that the United States should have joined the fight earlier, made larger sacrifices, and profited less. However, once involved, there was no doubt about the determination of its forces or the immense economic support behind them.
When it came to dividing the spoils of victory, the United States held, not only the purse strings, but the largest surpluses of food and raw materials as well. Her diplomacy at the Peace Table was weak. Her representatives, inexperienced in such matters, were no match for the trained diplomats of Europe, but her economic position was unquestioned, as was her right to take her place as one of the "big five."
When it came to splitting the rewards of victory, the United States not only controlled the finances but also had the largest surpluses of food and raw materials. Her strategy at the Peace Table was lacking. Her representatives, inexperienced in these kinds of negotiations, couldn't compete with the skilled diplomats from Europe, but her economic standing was undeniable, as was her claim to take a seat among the "big five."
2. Dividing the Spoils
The Peace Conference, for purposes of treaty making, separated the nations of the world into five classes:
The Peace Conference, for the purpose of making treaties, divided the nations of the world into five categories:
1. The great capitalist nations.
2. The lesser capitalist states.
3. Enemy nations.
4. Undeveloped territories.
5. The socialist states.1. The major capitalist countries.
2. The smaller capitalist nations.
3. Opposing countries.
4. Developing regions.
5. The socialist countries.
The great capitalist states were five in number—Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan and the United States. These five states dominated the armistice commission and the Peace Conference and they were expected to dominate the League of Nations. The position of these five powers was clearly set forth in the regulations governing procedure at the Peace Conference. Rule I reads: "The belligerent powers with general interests—the United States of America, the British Empire, France, Italy and Japan—shall take part in all meetings and commissions." (New York Times, January 20, 1919.) Under this rule the Big Five were the Peace Conference, and throughout the subsequent negotiations they continued to act the part.
The major capitalist countries were five: Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan, and the United States. These five nations controlled the armistice commission and the Peace Conference and were expected to lead the League of Nations. Their position was clearly outlined in the rules governing the process at the Peace Conference. Rule I states: "The belligerent powers with general interests—the United States of America, the British Empire, France, Italy, and Japan—shall participate in all meetings and commissions." (New York Times, January 20, 1919.) According to this rule, the Big Five were the Peace Conference, and they continued to play that role throughout the negotiations.
The same concentration of authority was read into the revised covenant of the League of Nations. Article 4 provides that the Executive Council of the League "shall consist of the representatives of the United States of America, of the British Empire, of France, of Italy and of Japan, together with four other members of the League." The authority of the Big Five was to be maintained by giving them five votes out of nine on the executive council of the League, no matter how many other nations might become members.
The same concentration of authority was interpreted in the updated agreement of the League of Nations. Article 4 states that the Executive Council of the League "will consist of the representatives of the United States of America, the British Empire, France, Italy, and Japan, along with four other members of the League." The power of the Big Five was to be upheld by giving them five votes out of nine on the executive council of the League, regardless of how many other nations might join.
It was among the Big Five, furthermore, that the spoils of victory were divided. The Big Five enjoyed a full meal; the lesser capitalist states had the crumbs.
It was among the Big Five that the spoils of victory were shared. The Big Five feasted, while the smaller capitalist states got the leftovers.
The enemy nations were stripped bare. Their colonies were taken, their foreign investments were confiscated, their merchant ships were appropriated, they were loaded down with enormous indemnities, they were dismembered. In short, they were rendered incapable of future economic competition. The thoroughgoing way in which this stripping was accomplished is discussed in detail by J. M. Keynes in "The Economic Consequences of the Peace" (chapters 4 and 5).
The enemy nations were completely drained. Their colonies were seized, their foreign investments were taken, their merchant ships were confiscated, they were burdened with huge reparations, and they were broken apart. In short, they were made unable to compete economically in the future. The comprehensive manner in which this stripping occurred is explained in detail by J. M. Keynes in "The Economic Consequences of the Peace" (chapters 4 and 5).
The undeveloped territories—the economic opportunities upon which the Big Five were relying for the disposal of their surplus products and surplus capital, were carved and handed about as a butcher carves a carcass. Shantung, which Germany had taken from China, was turned over to Japan under circumstances which made it impossible for China to sign the Treaty—thus leaving her territory open for further aggression. The Near East was divided between Great Britain, France and Italy. Mexico was not invited to sign the treaty and her name was omitted from the list of those eligible to join the League. The German possessions in Africa and in the Pacific were distributed in the form of "mandates" to the Great Powers. The principle underlying this distribution was that all of the unexploited territory should go to the capitalist victors for exploitation. The proportions of the division had been established, previously, in a series of secret treaties that had been entered into during the earlier years of the war.
The undeveloped territories—the economic opportunities the Big Five were counting on for getting rid of their surplus products and capital—were divided up like a butcher carves meat. Shantung, which Germany had taken from China, was given to Japan in a way that made it impossible for China to agree to the Treaty—leaving her territory vulnerable to further attacks. The Near East was split among Great Britain, France, and Italy. Mexico wasn’t invited to sign the treaty, and her name was left off the list of those allowed to join the League. The German territories in Africa and the Pacific were handed out as "mandates" to the Great Powers. The idea behind this distribution was that all the unexploited land should go to the victorious capitalists for exploitation. The terms of the division had already been set in a series of secret treaties made during the earlier years of the war.
With the Big Five in control, with the lesser capitalist states silenced; with the border states made or in the making; with the enemy reduced to economic impotence, and the unexploited portions of the world assigned for exploitation, the conference was compelled to face still another problem—the Socialist Republic of Russia.
With the Big Five in control, the smaller capitalist states silenced; with the border states established or in the process of formation; with the enemy weakened to economic powerlessness, and the untapped regions of the world designated for exploitation, the conference had to confront yet another issue—the Socialist Republic of Russia.
Russia, Czar ridden and oppressed, had entered the war as an ally of France and Great Britain. Russia, unshackled and attempting self-government on an economic basis, was an "enemy of civilization." The Allies therefore supported counter-revolution, organized and [Pg 196]encouraged warfare by the border states, established and maintained a blockade, the purpose of which was the starvation of the Russian people into submission, and did all that money, munitions, supplies, battleships and army divisions could do to destroy the results of the Russian Revolution.
Russia, burdened by its rulers and suffering oppression, had joined the war as a partner of France and Great Britain. Russia, now liberated and trying to establish self-governance on an economic foundation, was labeled as an "enemy of civilization." Consequently, the Allies backed counter-revolution efforts, organized and[Pg 196] encouraged battles in the border states, set up and enforced a blockade aimed at starving the Russian people into submission, and utilized everything that money, weapons, supplies, battleships, and army divisions could provide to undermine the outcomes of the Russian Revolution.
The Big Five—assuming to speak for all of the twenty-three nations that had declared war on Germany—manipulated the geography of Europe, reduced their enemies to penury, disposed of millions of square miles of territory and tens of millions of human beings as a gardener disposes of his produce, and then turned their united strength to the task of crushing the only thing approaching self-government that Russia has had for centuries.
The Big Five—claiming to represent all twenty-three nations that had declared war on Germany—manipulated the geography of Europe, left their enemies in poverty, controlled millions of square miles of land and tens of millions of people like a gardener manages his crops, and then focused their combined power on destroying the only semblance of self-government Russia had experienced in centuries.
A more shameless exhibition of imperial lust is not recorded in history. Never before were five nations in a position to sit down at one table and decide the political fate of the world. The opportunity was unique, and yet the statesmen of the world played the old, savage game of imperial aggression and domination.
A more blatant display of imperial desire has never been documented in history. Never before have five nations been able to gather around one table and determine the political future of the world. The chance was one of a kind, and yet the leaders of the world resorted to the same old, ruthless game of imperialism and control.
This brutal policy of dealing with the world and its people was accepted by the United States. Throughout the Conference her representatives occupied a commanding position; at any time they would have been able to speak with a voice of almost conclusive authority; they chose, nevertheless, to play their part in this imperial spectacle. To be sure the Senate refused to ratify the Treaty,—not because of its imperial iniquities, but rather because there was nothing in it for the United States.
This harsh approach to dealing with the world and its people was embraced by the United States. Throughout the Conference, its representatives held a dominant position; they could have easily spoken with nearly final authority, but instead, they decided to play along in this imperial spectacle. Of course, the Senate declined to approve the Treaty—not due to its imperial injustices, but because there was nothing in it for the United States.
3. Italy, France and Japan
The shares of spoil falling to Italy and France as a result of the treaty are comparatively small although both countries—and particularly France—carried a terrific war burden. Japan, the least active of any of the leading participants in the war, received territory of vast importance to her future development.
The share of benefits going to Italy and France from the treaty is relatively small, even though both countries—especially France—bore a significant burden during the war. Japan, the least involved of all the major participants in the war, gained territory that is crucial for its future growth.
Italy,—under the secret treaty of London, signed April 26, 1915, by the representatives of Russia, France, Great Britain and Italy,—was to receive that part of Austria known as the Trentine, the entire southern Tyrol, the city and suburbs of Trieste, the Istrian Islands and the province of Dalmatia with various adjacent islands. Furthermore, Article IX of the Treaty stipulated that, in the division of Turkey, Italy should be entitled to an equal share in the basin of the Mediterranean, and specifically to the province of Adalia. Under Article XIII, "In the event of the expansion of French and English colonial domains in Africa at the expense of Germany, France and Great Britain recognize in principle the Italian right to demand for herself certain compensations in the sense of expansions of her lands in Erithria, Somaliland, in Lybia and colonial districts lying on the boundary, with the colonies of France and England." Substantially, this plan was followed in the Peace Treaty.
Italy—under the secret treaty of London, signed on April 26, 1915, by representatives from Russia, France, Great Britain, and Italy—was set to receive the portion of Austria known as Trentino, all of Southern Tyrol, the city and suburbs of Trieste, the Istrian Islands, and the province of Dalmatia along with several nearby islands. Additionally, Article IX of the Treaty stated that, in the division of Turkey, Italy would be entitled to an equal share in the Mediterranean region, specifically the province of Adalia. According to Article XIII, "If France and Great Britain expand their colonial territories in Africa at Germany's expense, they recognize Italy’s right to seek compensation by claiming expansions in Eritrea, Somaliland, Libya, and adjacent areas bordering the colonies of France and England." This plan was largely adhered to in the Peace Treaty.
The territorial claims of France were simple. The secret treaties include a note from the French Minister of Foreign Affairs to the French Ambassador at Petrograd, dated February 1-14, 1917, which stated that under the Peace Treaty:
The territorial claims of France were straightforward. The secret treaties include a note from the French Minister of Foreign Affairs to the French Ambassador in Petrograd, dated February 1-14, 1917, which stated that under the Peace Treaty:
"(1) Alsace and Lorraine to be returned to France.
(1) Alsace and Lorraine will be returned to France.
"(2) The boundaries will be extended at least to the limits of the former principality of Lorraine, and will be fixed under the direction of the French Government. At the same time strategic demands must be taken into consideration, so as to include within the French territory the whole of the industrial iron basin of Lorraine and the whole of the industrial coal-basin of the Saar."
(2) The borders will be expanded to at least the limits of the old principality of Lorraine and will be set under the direction of the French Government. Furthermore, strategic requirements need to be taken into account to make sure that the entire industrial iron basin of Lorraine and the complete industrial coal basin of the Saar are included within French territory.
The Peace Treaty confirmed these provisions, with the exception of the Saar Valley, which is to go to France for 15 years under conditions which will ultimately cause its annexation to France if she desires it. France also gained some slight territorial concessions in Africa. Her real [Pg 198]advantage—as a result of the peace—lies in the control of the three provinces with their valuable mineral deposits.
The Peace Treaty confirmed these provisions, except for the Saar Valley, which will belong to France for 15 years under conditions that will eventually allow it to be annexed by France if they want. France also gained a few minor territorial concessions in Africa. Her real [Pg 198]advantage—thanks to the peace—lies in controlling the three provinces with their valuable mineral deposits.
The territorial ambitions of Japan were confined to the Far East. The former Russian Ambassador to Tokio, under date of February 8, 1917, makes the statement that Japan was desirous of securing "the succession to all the rights and privileges possessed by Germany in the Shantung province and for the acquisition of the islands north of the Equator." In a secret treaty with Great Britain, Japan secured a guarantee covering such a division of the German holdings in the Pacific.
The territorial ambitions of Japan were limited to the Far East. The former Russian Ambassador to Tokyo, in a statement dated February 8, 1917, noted that Japan wanted to secure "the succession to all the rights and privileges held by Germany in the Shandong province and for the acquisition of the islands north of the Equator." In a secret treaty with Great Britain, Japan gained a guarantee for dividing the German territories in the Pacific.
These concessions are of great importance to Japan. By the terms of the Treaty one of her rivals for the trade of the East (Germany) is eliminated, and the territory of that rival goes to Japan. With the control of Port Arthur and Korea and Shantung, Japan holds the gateway to the heart of Northern China. The islands gained by Japan as a result of the Treaty give her a barrier extending from the Kurile Islands, near Kamchatka, through the Empire of Japan proper, to Formosa. Farther out in the Pacific, there are the Ladrones, the Carolines and the Pelew Islands, which, in combination, make a series of submarine bases that render attack by sea difficult or impossible, and that lie, incidentally, between the United States and the Philippine Islands. Japan came away from the Peace Conference with the key to the East in her pocket.
These concessions are really important for Japan. According to the Treaty, one of its competitors for trade in the East (Germany) is out of the picture, and that competitor's territory now belongs to Japan. With control over Port Arthur, Korea, and Shantung, Japan holds the gateway to Northern China. The islands Japan acquired from the Treaty create a defensive perimeter stretching from the Kurile Islands near Kamchatka, through Japan itself, to Formosa. Further out in the Pacific are the Ladrones, the Carolines, and the Pelew Islands, which together form a series of underwater bases that make it hard, if not impossible, for any sea attacks, and they happen to lie between the United States and the Philippine Islands. Japan left the Peace Conference with the key to the East in hand.
4. The Lion's Share
The lion's share of the Peace Conference spoil went to Great Britain. To each of the other participants, certain concessions, agreed upon beforehand, were made. The remainder of the war-spoil was added to the British Empire. This "remainder" comprised at least a million and half square miles of territory, and included some of the most important resources in the world.
The biggest portion of the Peace Conference rewards went to Great Britain. Each of the other participants received certain concessions that had been agreed upon in advance. The rest of the war rewards were added to the British Empire. This "rest" included at least one and a half million square miles of territory and contained some of the most valuable resources in the world.
The territorial gains of Great Britain cover four areas—the Near East, the Far East, Africa, and the South Pacific.
The land gains of Great Britain include four regions—the Near East, the Far East, Africa, and the South Pacific.
The gains of Great Britain in the Near East include Hedjez and Yemen, the control of which gives the British possession of virtually all of the territory bordering on the Red Sea. The Persian Gulf is likewise placed under British control, through her holding of Mesopotamia and her control over Persia and Oman. The eastern end of the Mediterranean is held by the British through their control of Palestine.
The gains of Great Britain in the Near East include the Hejaz and Yemen, which allows the British to control almost all the land along the Red Sea. The Persian Gulf is also under British control, thanks to their possession of Mesopotamia and their influence over Persia and Oman. The eastern part of the Mediterranean is held by the British through their control of Palestine.
Thus the gateway to the East,—both by land and by sea, the eastern shores of the Mediterranean, the valleys of the Tigris and the Euphrates and the basin of the Red Sea all fall into the hands of the British, who now hold the heart of the Near East. The gains of Great Britain in Africa include Togoland, German Southwest Africa and German East Africa. With these accessions of territory, Great Britain holds a continuous stretch of country from the Cape to Cairo. A British subject can therefore travel on British soil from Cape Town via the Isthmus of Suez, to Siam, covering a distance as the crow flies of something like 10,000 miles.
Thus, the gateway to the East—both over land and by sea, the eastern shores of the Mediterranean, the valleys of the Tigris and Euphrates, and the basin of the Red Sea—all fall into British control, which now holds the heart of the Near East. Britain’s gains in Africa include Togoland, German Southwest Africa, and German East Africa. With these additions to its territory, Britain spans a continuous stretch of land from Cape to Cairo. Therefore, a British citizen can travel on British territory from Cape Town via the Isthmus of Suez to Siam, covering a distance of about 10,000 miles in a straight line.
The British gains in the South Pacific include Kaiser Wilhelm Land and the German islands south of the Equator.
The British gains in the South Pacific include Kaiser Wilhelm Land and the German islands located south of the Equator.
What these territorial gains mean in the way of additional resources for the industries of the home country, only the future can decide. Certain it is, that outside of the Americas, Central Europe, Russia, China and Japan, Great Britain succeeded in annexing most of the important territory of the world.
What these territorial gains mean for additional resources for the industries of the home country is something only time will tell. It’s clear that outside of the Americas, Central Europe, Russia, China, and Japan, Great Britain managed to annex most of the significant territories in the world.
The Chicago Tribune, in one of its charmingly frank editorials, thus describes the gains to the British Empire as a result of the war. "The British mopped up. They opened up their highway from Cairo to the Cape. They reached out from India and took the rich lands of the Euphrates. They won Mesopotamia and Syria in the war. They won Persia in diplomacy. They won the east coast of the Red Sea. They put protecting territory about[Pg 200] Egypt and gave India bulwarks. They made the eastern dream of the Germans a British reality.
The Chicago Tribune, in one of its refreshingly honest editorials, describes the benefits the British Empire gained from the war. "The British took control. They established their route from Cairo to the Cape. They expanded from India and seized the wealthy lands of the Euphrates. They secured Mesopotamia and Syria through military action. They diplomatically acquired Persia. They claimed the east coast of the Red Sea. They established protective territories around[Pg 200] Egypt and strengthened India’s defenses. They turned the Germans' eastern ambitions into a British success.
"The British never had their trade routes so guarded as now. They never had their supremacy of the sea so firmly established. Their naval competitor, Germany, is gone. No navy threatens them. No empire approximates their size, power, and influence.
"The British have never had their trade routes so protected as they do now. They've never had their dominance at sea so firmly established. Their naval rival, Germany, is gone. No navy poses a threat to them. No empire comes close to their size, power, and influence."
"This is the golden age of the British Empire, its Augustan age. Any imperialistic nation would have fought any war at any time to obtain such results, and as imperialistic nations count costs, the British cost, in spite of its great sums in men and money was small." (January 4, 1920.)
"This is the golden age of the British Empire, its Augustan age. Any imperialistic nation would have fought any war at any time to achieve such results, and when imperialistic nations consider expenses, the British cost, despite the large amounts of men and money spent, was minimal." (January 4, 1920.)
5. Half the World—Without a Struggle
Two significant facts stand out in this record of spoils distribution. One is that Great Britain received the lion's share of them in Asia and Africa. The other, that there is no mention of the Americas. Outside of the Western Hemisphere, Great Britain is mistress. In the Americas, with the exception of Canada, the United States is supreme.
Two important facts stand out in this account of how the spoils were distributed. One is that Great Britain took the largest portion of them in Asia and Africa. The other is that there’s no mention of the Americas. Outside the Western Hemisphere, Great Britain is in control. In the Americas, except for Canada, the United States is in charge.
There are two reasons for this. One is that Germany's ambitions and possessions included Asia and Africa primarily—and not America. The other is that the Peace Conference recognized the right of the United States to dominate the Western Hemisphere.
There are two reasons for this. One is that Germany's ambitions and territories were mainly focused on Asia and Africa—not America. The other is that the Peace Conference acknowledged the United States' right to dominate the Western Hemisphere.
The representatives of the United States declared that their country was asking for nothing from the Peace Conference. Nevertheless, the insistent clamor from across the water led the American delegation to secure the insertion in the revised League Covenant of Article XXI which read: "Nothing in this covenant shall be deemed to affect the validity of international engagements, such as treaties of arbitration or regional understandings like the Monroe Doctrine for securing the maintenance of peace." This article coupled with the first portion of Article X, "The[Pg 201] members of the League undertake to respect and preserve as against external aggression the territorial integrity and existing political independence of all members of the League," guarantees to the United States complete authority over Latin America, reserving to her political suzerainty and economic priority.
The representatives of the United States stated that their country wasn't asking for anything from the Peace Conference. However, the persistent demands from across the ocean led the American delegation to ensure that Article XXI was added to the revised League Covenant, which said: "Nothing in this covenant shall be seen as affecting the validity of international agreements, like arbitration treaties or regional understandings such as the Monroe Doctrine for maintaining peace." This article, combined with the first part of Article X, "The[Pg 201] members of the League agree to respect and uphold the territorial integrity and existing political independence of all League members against external aggression," ensures that the United States retains complete authority over Latin America, maintaining its political control and economic preference.
The half of the earth reserved to the United States under these provisions contains some of the richest mineral deposits, some of the largest timber areas, and some of the best agricultural territory in the world. Thus at the opening of the new era, the United States, at the cost of a comparatively small outlay in men and money, has guaranteed to her by all of the leading capitalist powers practically an exclusive privilege for the exploitation of the Western Hemisphere.
The part of the earth set aside for the United States under these terms has some of the richest mineral resources, vast forest areas, and some of the best farmland in the world. So, at the start of this new era, the United States, with a relatively small investment of people and money, has secured from all the major capitalist powers almost exclusive rights to exploit the Western Hemisphere.
XV. PAN-AMERICANISM
1. America for the Americans
In the partition of the earth, one-half was left under the control of the United States. Among the great nations, parties to the war and the peace, the United States alone asked for nothing—save the acceptance by the world of the Monroe Doctrine. The doctrine, as generally understood, makes her mistress of the Western Hemisphere.
In the division of the world, one-half remained under the control of the United States. Among the major countries involved in the war and the peace, the United States was the only one that asked for nothing—other than the world's acceptance of the Monroe Doctrine. This doctrine, as it's commonly understood, positions the U.S. as the dominant power in the Western Hemisphere.
The Monroe Doctrine originated in the efforts of Latin America to establish its independence of imperial Europe, and the counter efforts of imperial Europe to fasten its authority on the newly created Latin American Republics. President Monroe, aroused by the European crusade against popular government, wrote a message to Congress (1823) in which he stated the position of the United States as follows:
The Monroe Doctrine came about from Latin America's attempts to gain independence from imperial Europe, as well as Europe's attempts to assert control over the newly formed Latin American Republics. President Monroe, alarmed by Europe's campaign against democratic governance, wrote a message to Congress in 1823 where he outlined the United States' stance as follows:
"The American continents, by the free and independent condition which they have assumed and maintained, are henceforth not to be considered as subjects for future colonization by any European powers."
"The American continents, by the free and independent status they have claimed and upkept, are no longer to be seen as territories for future colonization by any European powers."
Monroe continues by pointing out that the United States must view any act which aims to establish European authority in the Americas as "dangerous to our peace and safety."
Monroe goes on to say that the United States has to see any move to set up European control in the Americas as "dangerous to our peace and safety."
"The United States will keep her hands off Europe; she will expect Europe to keep her hands off America," was the essence of the doctrine, which has been popularly expressed in the phrase "America for the Americans." The Doctrine was thus a statement of international aloofness,—a declaration of American independence of the remainder of the world.
"The United States will stay out of Europe, and she will expect Europe to stay out of America," was the core of the doctrine, which has been commonly summarized in the phrase "America for the Americans." The Doctrine was essentially a statement of international detachment—a declaration of American independence from the rest of the world.
The Monroe Doctrine soon lost its political character. The southern statesmen who were then guiding the destinies of the United States were looking with longing eyes into Texas, Mexico, Cuba and other potential slave-holding territory. Later, the economic necessities of the northern capitalists led them in the same direction. Professor Roland G. Usher, in his "Pan-Americanism" (New York, The Century Company, 1915, pp. 391-392) insists that the Monroe Doctrine stands "First, for our incontrovertible right of self-defense. In the second place the Monroe Doctrine has stood for the equally undoubted right of the United States to champion and protect its primary economic interest against Europe or America."
The Monroe Doctrine quickly lost its political significance. The southern leaders at that time were eagerly looking toward Texas, Mexico, Cuba, and other areas that could become slave-holding territory. Later, the economic needs of northern business people led them in the same direction. Professor Roland G. Usher, in his book "Pan-Americanism" (New York, The Century Company, 1915, pp. 391-392), argues that the Monroe Doctrine represents "First, our undeniable right to self-defense. Secondly, the Monroe Doctrine has represented the equally clear right of the United States to defend and protect its primary economic interests against Europe or America."
Through the course of a century this statement of defensive policy has been converted into a doctrine of economic pseudo-sovereignty. It is no longer a case of keeping Europe out of Latin America but of getting the United States into Latin America.
Through the course of a century, this statement of defensive policy has evolved into a doctrine of economic fake sovereignty. It's no longer about keeping Europe out of Latin America, but about getting the United States into Latin America.
The United States does not fear political aggression by Europe against the Western Hemisphere. On the contrary, the aggression to-day is largely economic, and the struggle for the markets and the investment opportunities of Latin America is being waged by the capitalists of every great industrial nation, including the United States.
The United States doesn’t worry about political aggression from Europe towards the Western Hemisphere. On the contrary, today’s aggression is mostly economic, and the competition for markets and investment opportunities in Latin America is being fought by capitalists from every major industrial nation, including the United States.
2. Latin America
Four of the Latin American countries, viewed from the standpoint of population and of immediately available assets, rank far ahead of the remainder of Latin America. Mexico, with a population in 1914-1915 of 15,502,000, had an annual government revenue of $72,687,000. The population of Brazil is 27,474,000. The annual revenue (1919) is $183,615,000. Argentine, with a population of 8,284,000, reported annual revenues of $159,000,000 (1918); and Chile, with a population of 3,870,000, had an annual revenue of $77,964,000 (1917). These four states rank in political and economic importance close to Canada.
Four Latin American countries stand out significantly in terms of population and available resources compared to the rest of the region. In 1914-1915, Mexico had a population of 15,502,000 and an annual government revenue of $72,687,000. Brazil's population was 27,474,000, with an annual revenue of $183,615,000 in 1919. Argentina had a population of 8,284,000 and reported annual revenues of $159,000,000 in 1918, while Chile, with a population of 3,870,000, had an annual revenue of $77,964,000 in 1917. These four countries hold political and economic significance similar to Canada.
Great Britain holds a number of strategic positions in the West Indies. Other nations have minor possessions in Latin America. None of these possessions, however, is of considerable economic or political importance. There remain Bolivia, Uruguay, Colombia, Ecuador, Paraguay, Peru, Venezuela, and the Central American states. The most populous of these countries is Peru (5,800,000 persons). All of the Central American states combined have a population of less than 6,000,000. The annual revenues of Uruguay (population 1,407,000) are $30,453,000 (1918-19). The combined government revenues of all Central America are less than twenty-five millions. (Statistical Abstract of the U. S., 1919, p. 826ff.)
Great Britain has several strategic positions in the West Indies. Other countries have small territories in Latin America, but none of these territories is really significant in terms of economic or political value. This includes Bolivia, Uruguay, Colombia, Ecuador, Paraguay, Peru, Venezuela, and the Central American states. The most populated of these countries is Peru, with 5,800,000 people. All the Central American states together have a population of less than 6,000,000. Uruguay, which has a population of 1,407,000, has annual revenues of $30,453,000 (1918-19). The total government revenues of all Central America are below twenty-five million. (Statistical Abstract of the U. S., 1919, p. 826ff.)
Compared with the hundred million population of the United States; its estimated wealth (1918) of 250 billions; and its federal revenues of a billion and a half in 1916, the Latin American republics cut a very small figure indeed. The United States, bristling with economic surplus and armed with the Monroe Doctrine, as accepted and interpreted in the League Covenant, is free to turn her attention to the rich opportunities offered by the undeveloped territory stretching from the Rio Grande to Cape Horn. What is there to hinder her movements in this direction? Nothing but the limitation on her own needs and the adherence to her own public policies. This vast area, containing approximately nine million square miles (three times the area of continental United States), has a population of only a little over seventy millions. The entire government revenues of the territory are in the neighborhood of six hundred million, but so widely scattered are the people, so sharp are their nationalistic differences, and so completely have they failed to build up anything like an effective league to protect their common interests, that skillful maneuvering on the part of American economic and political interests should meet with no effectual or thoroughgoing opposition.
Compared to the hundred million people in the United States, its estimated wealth of $250 billion in 1918, and its federal revenues of $1.5 billion in 1916, the Latin American countries appear quite insignificant. The U.S., with its economic surplus and backed by the Monroe Doctrine as understood and applied in the League Covenant, is free to focus on the rich opportunities available in the untapped lands from the Rio Grande to Cape Horn. What could hold it back? Only its own needs and commitment to its public policies. This vast area, which covers about nine million square miles (three times the size of the continental U.S.), has a population of just over seventy million. The total government revenue in this region is around $600 million, but the people are so widely spread out, their nationalistic differences are so pronounced, and they have completely failed to form an effective alliance to safeguard their shared interests that skilled maneuvering by American economic and political interests should face little to no serious opposition.
The "hands off America" doctrine which the United States has enunciated, and which Europe has accepted,[Pg 205] means first that none of the Latin American Republics is permitted to enter into any entangling alliances without the approval of the United States. In the second place it means that the United States is free to treat all Latin American countries in the same way that she has treated Cuba, Hayti and Nicaragua during the past twenty years.
The "hands off America" policy that the United States has stated, and that Europe has agreed to,[Pg 205] means first that no Latin American countries can enter into any complicated alliances without the United States' approval. Secondly, it means that the United States can treat all Latin American countries in the same way it has treated Cuba, Haiti, and Nicaragua over the past twenty years.
3. Economic "Latin America"
The United States is the chief producer—in the Western Hemisphere—of the manufactured supplies needed by the relatively undeveloped countries of Latin America. At the same time, the undeveloped countries of Latin America contain great supplies of ores, minerals, timber and other raw materials that are needed by the expanding manufacturing interests of the United States. The United States is a country with an investible surplus. Latin America offers ample opportunity for the investment of that surplus. Surrounding the entire territory is a Chinese wall in the form of the Monroe Doctrine—intangible but none the less effective.
The United States is the main producer—in the Western Hemisphere—of the manufactured goods needed by the less developed countries of Latin America. At the same time, these underdeveloped countries in Latin America have abundant resources like ores, minerals, timber, and other raw materials that are essential for the growing manufacturing sector in the United States. The U.S. has a surplus available for investment, and Latin America presents significant opportunities for that investment. Surrounding the entire region is a figurative barrier in the form of the Monroe Doctrine—intangible but still very effective.
Before the outbreak of the Great War, European capitalists dominated the Latin American investment market. The five years of struggle did much to eliminate European influence in Latin America.
Before the start of the Great War, European capitalists controlled the Latin American investment market. The five years of conflict greatly reduced European influence in Latin America.
The situation was reviewed at length in a publication of the United States Department of Commerce "Investments in Latin America and the British West Indies," by Frederick M. Halsey (Washington Government Printing Office, 1918):
The situation was thoroughly examined in a publication from the United States Department of Commerce titled "Investments in Latin America and the British West Indies," by Frederick M. Halsey (Washington Government Printing Office, 1918):
"Concerning the undeveloped wealth of various South American countries," writes Mr. Halsey, "it may be said that minerals exist in all the Republics, that the forest resources of all (except possibly Uruguay) are very extensive, that oil deposits have been found in almost every country and are worked commercially in Argentine, Colombia, Chile, Ecuador, Peru and Venezuela, and that there[Pg 206] are lands available for the raising of live stock and for agricultural purposes" (p. 20).
"Regarding the untapped resources of different South American countries," writes Mr. Halsey, "it's clear that minerals are present in all the Republics, that the forest resources of all (except maybe Uruguay) are quite large, that oil deposits have been discovered in nearly every country and are being commercially extracted in Argentina, Colombia, Chile, Ecuador, Peru, and Venezuela, and that there[Pg 206] is land available for raising livestock and for agricultural use" (p. 20).
As to the pre-war investments, Mr. Halsey points out that "Great Britain has long been the largest investor in Latin America" (p. 20). The total of British investments he places at 5,250 millions of dollars. A third of this was invested in Argentine, a fifth in Brazil and nearly a sixth in Mexico. French investments are placed at about one and a half billions of dollars. The German investments were extensive, particularly in financial and trading institutions. United States investments in Latin America before the war "were negligible" (p. 19) outside of the investments in the mining industry and in the packing business.
As for the investments before the war, Mr. Halsey notes that "Great Britain has long been the largest investor in Latin America" (p. 20). He estimates the total British investments at 5.25 billion dollars. About a third of that was invested in Argentina, a fifth in Brazil, and nearly a sixth in Mexico. French investments are around 1.5 billion dollars. German investments were considerable, especially in financial and trading institutions. U.S. investments in Latin America before the war "were negligible" (p. 19), except for investments in the mining industry and the packing business.
Just how much of a shift the war has occasioned in the ownership of Latin American railways, public utilities, mines, etc., it is impossible to say. Some such change has occurred, however, and it is wholly in the interest of the United States.
Just how much the war has changed the ownership of Latin American railways, public utilities, mines, and more is hard to determine. Nevertheless, some change has taken place, and it clearly benefits the United States.
Generalizations which apply to Latin America have no force in respect to Canada. The capitalism of Canada is closely akin to the capitalism of the United States.
Generalizations that apply to Latin America don't really hold true for Canada. Canada's capitalism is very similar to that of the United States.
Canada possesses certain important resources which are highly essential to the United States. Chief among them are agricultural land and timber. There are two methods by which the industrial interests of the United States might normally proceed with relations to the Canadian resources. One is to attack the situation politically, the other is to absorb it economically. The latter method is being pursued at the present time. To be sure there is a large annual emigration from the United States into Canada (approximately 50,000 in 1919) but capital is migrating faster than human beings.
Canada has significant resources that are crucial for the United States. The most important of these are agricultural land and timber. There are two typical approaches for U.S. industries to engage with Canadian resources. One is to tackle the situation politically, while the other is to integrate it economically. Right now, the U.S. is focusing on the second approach. While there is a notable annual emigration from the United States to Canada (about 50,000 in 1919), capital is moving even faster than people.
The Canadian Bureau of Statistics reports (letter of May 20, 1920) on "Stocks, Bonds and other Securities held by incorporated and joint stock Companies engaged in manufacturing industries in Canada, 1918," as owned by 8,130,368[Pg 207] individual holders, distributed geographically as follows: Canada, $945,444,000; Great Britain, $153,758,000; United States, $555,943,000, and other countries, $17,221,322. Thus one-third of this form of Canadian investment is held in the United States.
The Canadian Bureau of Statistics reports (letter of May 20, 1920) on "Stocks, Bonds, and Other Securities held by incorporated and joint stock companies engaged in manufacturing industries in Canada, 1918," as owned by 8,130,368[Pg 207] individual holders, distributed geographically as follows: Canada, $945,444,000; Great Britain, $153,758,000; United States, $555,943,000; and other countries, $17,221,322. Thus, one-third of this form of Canadian investment is held in the United States.
4. American Protectorates
The close economic inter-relations that are developing in the Americas, naturally have their counter-part in the political field. As the business interests reach southward for oil, iron, sugar, and tobacco they are accompanied or followed by the protecting arm of the State Department in Washington. Few citizens of the United States realize how thoroughly the conduct of the government, particularly in the Caribbean, reflects the conduct of the bankers and the traders.
The growing economic connections in the Americas naturally have counterparts in politics. As business interests reach south for oil, iron, sugar, and tobacco, they are supported or followed by the protective measures of the State Department in Washington. Few U.S. citizens realize how closely government actions, especially in the Caribbean, reflect the interests of bankers and traders.
Professor Hart in his "New American History" (American Book Co., 1917, p. 634) writes, "In addition the United States between 1906 and 1916 obtained a protectorate over the neighboring Latin American States of Cuba, Hayti, Panama, Santo Domingo and Nicaragua. All together these five states include 157,000 square miles and 6,000,000 people." Professor Hart makes this statement under the general topic, "What America Has Done for the World."
Professor Hart in his "New American History" (American Book Co., 1917, p. 634) writes, "Additionally, between 1906 and 1916, the United States secured a protectorate over the neighboring Latin American countries of Cuba, Haiti, Panama, Santo Domingo, and Nicaragua. Together, these five countries cover 157,000 square miles and have a population of 6,000,000." Professor Hart makes this statement under the general topic, "What America Has Done for the World."
The Monroe Doctrine, logically applied to Latin America, can have but one possible outcome. Professor Chester Lloyd Jones characterizes that outcome in the following words, "Steadily, quietly, almost unconsciously the extension of international responsibility southward has become practically a fixed policy with the State Department. It is a policy which the record of the last sixteen years shows is followed, not without protest from influential factions, it is true, but none the less followed, by administrations of both parties and decidedly different shades within one of the parties.... Protests will continue but the logic of events is too strong to be overthrown by traditional [Pg 208]argument or prejudice." ("Caribbean Interests." New York, Appleton, 1916, p. 125.)
The Monroe Doctrine, when applied to Latin America, can only lead to one outcome. Professor Chester Lloyd Jones describes that outcome this way: "Slowly, quietly, almost unconsciously, the expansion of international responsibility southward has become practically a fixed policy for the State Department. This policy, as records from the past sixteen years indicate, is maintained, not without opposition from influential groups, it's true, but nonetheless upheld by administrations from both parties and notably different factions within one of the parties.... Protests will keep coming, but the logic of the situation is too strong to be undermined by traditional [Pg 208] arguments or biases." ("Caribbean Interests." New York, Appleton, 1916, p. 125.)
Latin America is in the grip of the Monroe Doctrine. Whether the individual states wish it or not they are the victims of a principle that has already shorn them of political sovereignty by making their foreign policy subject to veto by the United States, and that will eventually deprive them of control over their own internal affairs by placing the management of their economic activities under the direction of business interests centering in the United States. The protectorate which the United States will ultimately establish over Latin America was forecast in the treaty which "liberated" Cuba. The resolution declaring war upon Spain was prefaced by a preamble which demanded the independence of Cuba. Presumably this independence meant the right of self-government. Actually the sovereignty of Cuba is annihilated by the treaty of July 1, 1904, which provides:
Latin America is under the influence of the Monroe Doctrine. Whether the individual countries like it or not, they are caught in a principle that has already stripped them of political sovereignty by making their foreign policy subject to the approval of the United States, and that will eventually take away their control over their own internal matters by placing the management of their economic activities under the influence of business interests based in the United States. The protectorate that the United States will ultimately establish over Latin America was anticipated in the treaty that "freed" Cuba. The resolution declaring war on Spain included a preamble that called for Cuba’s independence. Presumably, this independence was meant to ensure the right to self-government. In reality, Cuba's sovereignty is destroyed by the treaty of July 1, 1904, which states:
"Article I. The Government of Cuba shall never enter into any treaty or compact with any foreign power or powers which will impair or tend to impair the independence of Cuba, nor in any matter authorize or permit any foreign power or powers to obtain by colonization or for military or naval purposes, or otherwise, lodgement in, or control over any portion of said island."
"Article I. The Government of Cuba will never make any treaty or agreement with any foreign country or countries that would compromise the independence of Cuba. It will also not allow any foreign country or countries to gain colonization rights, or for military or naval purposes, or in any other way, establish a presence in or control any part of the island."
The most drastic limitations upon Cuba's sovereignty are contained in Article 3 which reads, "the Government of Cuba consents that the United States may exercise the right to intervene for the preservation of Cuban independence, the maintenance of a government adequate for the protection of life, property and individual liberty, and for discharging the obligation with respect to Cuba imposed by the Treaty of Paris on the United States now to be assumed and undertaken by the Government of Cuba." Under this article, the United States, at her discretion, may intervene in Cuba's internal affairs.
The biggest restrictions on Cuba's sovereignty are found in Article 3, which states, "the Government of Cuba agrees that the United States can intervene to protect Cuban independence, ensure a government that adequately safeguards life, property, and individual freedom, and fulfill the responsibilities towards Cuba that the Treaty of Paris placed on the United States and are now to be taken on by the Government of Cuba." According to this article, the United States can choose to intervene in Cuba's internal matters as it sees fit.
Under these treaty provisions the Cuban Government is not only prevented from exercising normal governmental[Pg 209] functions in international matters, but if a change of internal government should take place which in the opinion of the United States jeopardized "life, property and individual liberty" such a government could be suppressed by the armed forces of the United States and a government established in conformity with her wishes. Theoretically, Cuba is an independent nation. Practically, Cuba has signed away in her treaty with the United States every important attribute of sovereignty.
Under these treaty provisions, the Cuban government is not only barred from performing normal government functions in international affairs, but if there’s a change in the internal government that the United States believes threatens "life, property, and individual liberty," that government could be overthrown by U.S. military forces, and a new government could be set up according to U.S. preferences. In theory, Cuba is an independent nation. In reality, Cuba has relinquished every significant aspect of sovereignty in its treaty with the United States.
The fact that Cuba was a war-prize of the United States might be advanced as an explanation of her anomalous position, were it not for the relations now existing between the Dominican Republic, Hayti and Nicaragua on the one hand and the United States on the other. The United States has never been at war with any of these countries, yet her authority over them is complete.
The fact that Cuba was a trophy of the United States could explain its unusual position, if not for the current relationships between the Dominican Republic, Haiti, and Nicaragua on one side and the United States on the other. The United States has never fought a war with any of these countries, yet its control over them is total.
The Convention between the United States and the Dominican Republic, proclaimed July 25, 1907, gave the United States the right to appoint a receiver of Dominican customs in order that the financial affairs of the Republic might be placed on a sound basis. This appointment was followed in 1916 by the landing of the armed forces of the United States in the territory of the Dominican Republic. On November 29, 1916, a military government was set up by the United States Marine Corps under a proclamation approved by the President. "This military government at present conducts the administration of the government" (Letter from State Department, September 29, 1919).
The agreement between the United States and the Dominican Republic, announced on July 25, 1907, allowed the United States to appoint a receiver for Dominican customs to put the Republic's financial situation on solid ground. This appointment was followed in 1916 by the deployment of U.S. armed forces in the Dominican Republic. On November 29, 1916, a military government was established by the United States Marine Corps under a proclamation authorized by the President. "This military government currently oversees the administration of the government" (Letter from State Department, September 29, 1919).
The proclamation issued by the Commander of the United States Marine Corps and approved by the President, cited the failure of the Dominican government to live up to its treaty obligations because of internal dissensions and stated that the Republic is made subject to military government and to the exercise of military law applicable to such occupation. Dominican statutes "will continue in effect insofar as they do not conflict with the objects of the Occupation or necessary relations established thereunder, and their lawful administration will continue in the hands of such[Pg 210] duly authorized Dominican officials as may be necessary, all under the oversight and control of the United States forces exercising Military Government." The proclamation further announces that the Military Government will collect the revenues and hold them in trust for the Republic.
The statement issued by the Commander of the United States Marine Corps and approved by the President highlighted the Dominican government's failure to meet its treaty obligations due to internal conflicts. It declared that the Republic would be placed under military government and governed by military law relevant to this occupation. Dominican laws "will remain in effect as long as they don’t contradict the goals of the Occupation or essential relationships established as a result, and their proper management will continue under the authority of such [Pg 210] duly authorized Dominican officials as needed, all under the supervision and control of the United States forces implementing Military Government." The statement also mentioned that the Military Government will collect revenues and hold them in trust for the Republic.
Following this proclamation Captain H. S. Knapp issued a drastic order providing for a press censorship. "Any comment which is intended to be published on the attitude of the United States Government, or upon anything connected with the Occupation and Military Government of Santo Domingo must first be submitted to the local censor for approval. In case of any violation of this rule the publication of any newspaper or periodical will be suspended; and responsible persons,—owners, editors, or others—will further be liable to punishment by the Military Government. The printing and distribution of posters, handbills, or similar means of propaganda in order to disseminate views unfavorable to the United States Government or to the Military Government in Santo Domingo is forbidden." (Order secured from the Navy Department and published by The American Union against Militarism, Dec. 13, 1916.)
Following this announcement, Captain H. S. Knapp issued a strict order for press censorship. "Any comments intended for publication regarding the stance of the United States Government, or anything related to the Occupation and Military Government of Santo Domingo, must first be submitted to the local censor for approval. Any violation of this rule will result in the suspension of the publication of any newspaper or periodical; responsible individuals—owners, editors, or others—will also face penalties from the Military Government. The printing and distribution of posters, flyers, or similar propaganda to spread negative views about the United States Government or the Military Government in Santo Domingo is prohibited." (Order secured from the Navy Department and published by The American Union against Militarism, Dec. 13, 1916.)
A similar situation exists in Hayti. The treaty of May 3, 1916, provides that "The Government of the United States will, by its good officers, aid the Haitian Government in the proper and efficient development of its agricultural, mineral and commercial resources and in the establishment of the finances of Hayti on a firm and solid basis." (Article I) "The President of Hayti shall appoint upon nomination by the President of the United States a general receiver and such aids and employees as may be necessary to manage the customs. The President of Hayti shall also appoint a nominee of the President of the United States as 'financial adviser' who shall 'devise an adequate system of public accounting, aid in increasing revenues' and take such other steps 'as may be deemed necessary for the welfare and prosperity of Hayti.'" (Article II.) Article III guarantees "aid and protection of both countries to[Pg 211] the General Receiver and the Financial Adviser." Under Article X "The Haitian Government obligates itself ... to create without delay an efficient constabulary, urban and rural, composed of native Haitians. This constabulary shall be organized and officered by Americans." The Haitian Government under Article XI, agrees not to "surrender any of the territory of the Republic by sale, lease or otherwise, or jurisdiction over such territory, to any foreign government or power" nor to enter into any treaty or contract that "will impair or tend to impair the independence of Hayti." Finally, to complete the subjugation of the Republic, Article XIV provides that "should the necessity occur, the United States will lend an efficient aid for the preservation of Haitian independence and the maintenance of a government adequate for the protection of life, property and individual liberty."
A similar situation exists in Haiti. The treaty of May 3, 1916, states that "The Government of the United States will, using its good offices, assist the Haitian Government in effectively and properly developing its agricultural, mineral, and commercial resources, and in establishing Haiti's finances on a solid foundation." (Article I) "The President of Haiti will appoint a general receiver and any necessary assistants and employees to manage customs, based on the nomination by the President of the United States. The President of Haiti will also appoint a nominee of the President of the United States as a 'financial adviser' who will 'create a proper public accounting system, help increase revenues,' and take any other necessary steps 'for the welfare and prosperity of Haiti.'" (Article II.) Article III guarantees "the aid and protection of both countries to[Pg 211] the General Receiver and the Financial Adviser." Under Article X, "The Haitian Government commits to quickly establishing an effective police force, both urban and rural, made up of native Haitians. This police force will be organized and led by Americans." The Haitian Government under Article XI agrees not to "give up any territory of the Republic by sale, lease, or otherwise, or jurisdiction over such territory, to any foreign government or power" nor to enter into any treaty or contract that "would impair or potentially impair the independence of Haiti." Lastly, to ensure the dominance over the Republic, Article XIV states that "if necessary, the United States will provide effective assistance to preserve Haitian independence and maintain a government capable of protecting life, property, and individual liberty."
A year later, on August 20, 1917, the New York Globe carried the following advertisement:—
A year later, on August 20, 1917, the New York Globe featured the following ad:—
Fortune in Sugar
"The price of labor in practically all the cane sugar growing countries has gone steadily up for years, except in Hayti, where costs are lowest in the world.
"Labor costs have been rising steadily for years in almost all sugar cane-growing countries, except in Haiti, where expenses are the lowest in the world."
"Hayti now is under U. S. Control.
"Haiti is currently under U.S. control."
"The Haitian-American corporation owns the best sugar lands in Hayti, owns railroads, wharf, light and power-plants, and is building sugar mills of the most modern design. There is assured income in the public utilities and large profits in the sugar business. We recommend the purchase of the stock of this corporation. Proceedings are being taken to list this stock on the New York Stock Exchange.
The Haitian-American corporation owns the top sugar plantations in Haiti, along with railroads, a wharf, power and light plants, and is building modern sugar mills. There is guaranteed income from public utilities and significant profits from the sugar industry. We recommend investing in this corporation’s stock. There are plans to list this stock on the New York Stock Exchange.
"Interesting story 'Sugar in Hayti' mailed on request.
"An interesting article titled 'Sugar in Haiti' is available upon request."
"P. W. Chapman & Co., 53 William St., N. Y. C."
"P. W. Chapman & Co., 53 William St., New York City."
Hayti remained "under United States control" until the revelations of the summer of 1920 (see The Nation, July 10 and August 28, 1920), when it was shown that the natives were being compelled, by the American forces of occupation, to perform enforced labor on the roads and to accept a rule so tyrannous that thousands had refused to obey the orders of the military authorities, and had been shot for their pains. On October 14, 1920, the New York Times printed a statement from Brigadier General George Barnett, formerly Commandant General of the Marine Corps, covering the conditions in Hayti between the time the marines landed (July, 1915) and June, 1920. General Barnett alleges in his report that there was evidence of "indiscriminate" killing of the natives by the American Marines; that "shocking conditions" had been revealed in the trial of two members of the army of occupation, and that the enforced labor system should be abolished forthwith. The report shows that, during the five years of the occupation, 3,250 Haytians had been killed by the Americans. During the same period, the losses to the army of occupation were 1 officer and 12 men killed and 2 officers and 26 men wounded.
Hayti remained "under United States control" until the revelations of the summer of 1920 (see The Nation, July 10 and August 28, 1920), when it was revealed that the local population was being forced by American occupying forces to perform mandatory labor on the roads and to accept such a harsh rule that thousands refused to follow military orders and were shot for their defiance. On October 14, 1920, the New York Times published a statement from Brigadier General George Barnett, former Commandant General of the Marine Corps, addressing the situation in Hayti from the time the marines landed (July 1915) until June 1920. General Barnett claimed in his report that there was evidence of "indiscriminate" killings of the locals by American Marines; that "shocking conditions" had been uncovered during the trial of two members of the occupying army, and that the forced labor system should be abolished immediately. The report indicated that during the five years of occupation, 3,250 Haitians had been killed by Americans. During the same period, the losses for the occupying army were 1 officer and 12 men killed and 2 officers and 26 men wounded.
The attitude of the United States authorities toward the Haytians is well illustrated by the following telegram which the United States Acting Secretary of the Navy sent on October 2, 1915, to Admiral Caperton, in charge of the forces in Hayti: "Whenever the Haytians wish, you may permit the election of a president to take place. The election of Dartiguenave is preferred by the United States."
The attitude of the United States authorities toward the Haitians is well illustrated by the following telegram that the United States Acting Secretary of the Navy sent on October 2, 1915, to Admiral Caperton, who was in charge of the forces in Haiti: "Whenever the Haitians want, you may allow the election of a president to happen. The United States prefers the election of Dartiguenave."
The Cuban Treaty established the precedent; the Great War provided the occasion, and while Great Britain was clinching her hold in Persia, and Japan was strengthening her grip on Korea, the United States was engaged in establishing protectorates over the smaller and weaker Latin-American peoples, who have been subjected, one after another, to the omnipotence of their "Sister Republic" of the North.
The Cuban Treaty set the standard; the Great War created the opportunity, and while Great Britain was solidifying its control in Persia and Japan was tightening its hold on Korea, the United States was focused on establishing protectorates over the smaller and weaker Latin American nations, which have all been dominated, one by one, by their "Sister Republic" to the North.
5. The Appropriation of Territory
Protectorates have been established by the United States, where such action seemed necessary, over some of the weaker Latin-American states. Their customs have been seized, their governments supplanted by military law and the "preservation of law and order" has been delegated to the Army and Navy of the United States. The United States has gone farther, and in Porto Rico and Panama has appropriated particular pieces of territory.
Protectorates have been created by the United States where it seemed necessary over some of the less powerful Latin American countries. Their customs have been taken over, their governments replaced by military law, and the responsibility for "maintaining law and order" has been given to the U.S. Army and Navy. The United States has gone further, and in Puerto Rico and Panama, it has claimed specific areas of land.
The Porto Ricans, during the Spanish-American War, welcomed the Americans as deliverers. The Americans, once in possession, held the Island of Porto Rico as securely as Great Britain holds India or Japan holds Korea. The Porto Ricans were not consulted. They had no opportunity for "self-determination." They were spoils of war and are held to-day as a part of the United States.
The Puerto Ricans, during the Spanish-American War, welcomed the Americans as saviors. Once in control, the Americans held the island of Puerto Rico as securely as Great Britain controls India or Japan controls Korea. The Puerto Ricans weren’t consulted. They had no chance for "self-determination." They were the spoils of war and are still held today as a part of the United States.
The Panama episode furnishes an even more striking instance of the policy that the United States has adopted toward Latin-American properties that seemed particularly necessary to her welfare.
The Panama episode provides an even more striking example of the policy that the United States has taken toward Latin American resources that seemed especially important to its well-being.
Efforts to build a Panama Canal had covered centuries. When President Roosevelt took the matter in hand he found that the Government of Colombia was not inclined to grant the United States sovereignty over any portion of its territory. The treaty signed in 1846 and ratified in 1848 placed the good faith of the United States behind the guarantee that Colombia should enjoy her sovereign rights over the Isthmus. During November 1902 the United States ejected the representatives of Colombia from what is now the Panama Canal Zone and recognized a revolutionary government which immediately made the concessions necessary to enable the United States to begin its work of constructing the canal.
Efforts to build a Panama Canal spanned centuries. When President Roosevelt took charge, he discovered that the Colombian government was not willing to give the United States control over any part of its territory. The treaty signed in 1846 and ratified in 1848 committed the United States to ensuring that Colombia would maintain its sovereign rights over the Isthmus. In November 1902, the United States removed the representatives of Colombia from what is now the Panama Canal Zone and recognized a revolutionary government that quickly granted the concessions needed for the United States to start constructing the canal.
The issue is made clear by a statement of Mr. Roosevelt frequently reiterated by him (see The Outlook, October 7, 1911) and appearing in the Washington Post of March 24,[Pg 214] 1911, as follows:—"I am interested in the Panama Canal because I started it. If I had followed the traditional conservative methods I would have submitted a dignified state paper of probably two hundred pages to the Congress and the debate would have been going on yet. But I took the Canal Zone and let the Congress debate, and while the debate goes on, the Canal does also."
The issue is made clear by a statement from Mr. Roosevelt that he often repeated (see The Outlook, October 7, 1911) and which appeared in the Washington Post on March 24, [Pg 214] 1911, as follows:—"I’m interested in the Panama Canal because I started it. If I had followed the traditional conservative methods, I would have submitted a formal document of probably two hundred pages to Congress, and the debate would still be ongoing. But I took control of the Canal Zone and let Congress debate while the Canal was being built."
Article 35 of the Treaty of 1846 between the United States and Colombia (then New Grenada) reads as follows,—"The United States guarantees, positively and efficaciously to New Grenada, by the present stipulation, the perfect neutrality of the before mentioned Isthmus ... and the rights of sovereignty which New Grenada has and possesses over said territory."
Article 35 of the Treaty of 1846 between the United States and Colombia (then New Grenada) states, "The United States guarantees, clearly and effectively to New Grenada, through this agreement, the complete neutrality of the mentioned Isthmus ... and the sovereignty rights that New Grenada has and maintains over that territory."
In 1869 another treaty was negotiated between the United States and Colombia which provided for the building of a ship canal across the Isthmus. This treaty was signed by the presidents of both republics and ratified by the Colombian Congress. The United States Senate refused its assent to the treaty. Another treaty negotiated early in 1902 was ratified by the United States Senate but rejected by the Colombian Congress. The Congress of the United States had passed an act (June 28, 1902) "To provide for the construction of a canal connecting the waters of the Atlantic and the Pacific Oceans." Under this act the President was authorized to negotiate for the building of the canal across the Isthmus of Panama. If that proved impossible within a reasonable time, the President was to turn to the Nicaragua route. The treaty prepared in accordance with this act provided that the United States would pay Colombia ten millions of dollars in exchange for the sovereignty over the Canal Zone. The Colombian Congress after a lengthy debate rejected the treaty and adjourned on the last day of October, 1902.
In 1869, another treaty was negotiated between the United States and Colombia that allowed for the construction of a ship canal across the Isthmus. This treaty was signed by the presidents of both countries and ratified by the Colombian Congress. However, the United States Senate denied approval of the treaty. Another treaty was negotiated in early 1902, which was ratified by the U.S. Senate but rejected by the Colombian Congress. The U.S. Congress had passed an act on June 28, 1902, "To provide for the construction of a canal connecting the waters of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans." Under this act, the President was authorized to negotiate for the construction of the canal across the Isthmus of Panama. If that became unfeasible within a reasonable time, the President was to consider the Nicaragua route. The treaty drafted under this act stipulated that the United States would pay Colombia ten million dollars in exchange for sovereignty over the Canal Zone. After a lengthy debate, the Colombian Congress rejected the treaty and adjourned on the last day of October 1902.
Rumor had been general that if the treaty was not ratified by the Colombian Government, the State of Panama would secede from Colombia, sign the treaty, and thus secure the ten millions. In consequence of these rumors, which[Pg 215] threatened transportation across the Isthmus, American war vessels were dispatched to Panama and to Colon.
Rumors were widespread that if the Colombian Government didn't ratify the treaty, the State of Panama would break away from Colombia, sign the treaty, and secure the ten million. As a result of these rumors, which[Pg 215] threatened transportation across the Isthmus, American warships were sent to Panama and Colon.
On November 3, 1902, the Republic of Panama was established. On November 13 it was recognized by the United States. Immediately thereafter a treaty was prepared and ratified by both governments and the ten millions were paid to the Government of Panama.
On November 3, 1902, the Republic of Panama was formed. On November 13, it was recognized by the United States. Shortly after, a treaty was drafted and approved by both governments, and ten million dollars were paid to the Government of Panama.
Early in the day of November 3, the Department of State was informed that an uprising had occurred. Mr. Loomis wired, "Uprising on Isthmus reported. Keep Department promptly and fully informed." In reply to this the American consul replied, "The uprising has not occurred yet; it is announced that it will take place this evening. The situation is critical." Later the same official advised the Department that (in the words of the Presidential message, 1904) "the uprising had occurred and had been successful with no bloodshed."
Early on November 3, the State Department was notified that an uprising had taken place. Mr. Loomis sent a message saying, "Uprising on the Isthmus reported. Keep the Department updated." In response, the American consul replied, "The uprising hasn't happened yet; it's been announced that it will take place this evening. The situation is critical." Later, the same official informed the Department that (quoting the Presidential message from 1904) "the uprising had occurred and been successful without any bloodshed."
The Colombian Government had sent troops to put down the insurrection but the Commander of the United States forces, acting under instructions sent from Washington on November 2, prevented the transportation of the troops. His instructions were as follows,—"Maintain free and uninterrupted transit if interruption is threatened by armed force with hostile intent, either governmental or insurgent, at any point within fifty miles of Panama. Government forces reported approaching the Isthmus in vessels. Prevent their landing, if, in your judgment, the landing would precipitate a conflict."
The Colombian government had dispatched troops to suppress the uprising, but the Commander of the United States forces, following orders sent from Washington on November 2, stopped the troops from being transported. His instructions were: "Ensure free and uninterrupted transit if there's a threat of interruption from armed forces with hostile intent, whether they are government or insurgent, within fifty miles of Panama. Government forces were reported to be approaching the Isthmus via ships. Prevent their landing if you believe that allowing them to land would trigger a conflict."
Thus a revolution was consummated under the watchful eye of the United States forces; the home government at Bogota was prevented from taking any steps to secure the return of the seceding state of Panama to her lawful sovereignty, and within ten days of the revolution, the new Republic was recognized by the United States Government.[57][Pg 216] (Ten days was the length of time necessary to transmit a letter from Panama to Washington. Greater speed would have been impossible unless the new state had been recognized by telegraph.)
So a revolution happened with the United States forces keeping a close watch; the government in Bogota was stopped from trying to get the seceding state of Panama back under its rightful control, and within ten days of the revolution, the new Republic was acknowledged by the United States Government.[57][Pg 216] (Ten days was the time needed to send a letter from Panama to Washington. It would have been impossible to be quicker unless the new state had been recognized by telegraph.)
6. The Logical Exploiters
The people of the United States are the logical exploiters of the Western Hemisphere—the children of destiny for one half the world. They are pressed by economic necessity. They need the oil of Mexico, the coffee of Brazil, the beef of Argentine, the iron of Chile, the sugar of Cuba, the tobacco of Porto Rico, the hemp of Yucatan, the wheat and timber of Canada. In exchange for these commodities the United States is prepared to ship manufactured products. Furthermore, the masters of the United States have an immense and growing surplus that must be invested in some paying field, such as that provided by the mines, agricultural projects, timber, oil deposits, railroad and other industrial activities of Latin-America.
The people of the United States are the natural exploiters of the Western Hemisphere—the chosen ones for half the world. They are driven by economic necessity. They need Mexico’s oil, Brazil’s coffee, Argentina’s beef, Chile’s iron, Cuba’s sugar, Puerto Rico’s tobacco, Yucatan’s hemp, and Canada’s wheat and timber. In return for these resources, the United States is ready to send manufactured goods. Additionally, the leaders of the United States have a huge and growing surplus that needs to be invested in profitable areas, like mining, agriculture, timber, oil reserves, railroads, and other industrial activities in Latin America.
The rulers of the United States are the victims of an economic necessity that compels them to seek and to find raw materials, markets and investment opportunities. They are also the possessors of sufficient economic, financial, military and naval power to make these needs good at their discretion.
The leaders of the United States are trapped by an economic necessity that forces them to look for and secure raw materials, markets, and investment opportunities. They also have enough economic, financial, military, and naval power to fulfill these needs as they see fit.
The rapidly increasing funds of United States capital invested in Latin-America and Canada, will demand more and more protection. There is but one way for the United States to afford that protection—that is to see that these countries preserve law and order, respect property, and follow the wishes of United States diplomacy. Wherever a government fails in this respect, it will be necessary for the State Department in coöperation with the Navy, to see that a government is established that will "make good."
The fast-growing investment of US capital in Latin America and Canada will require more and more protection. The only way for the US to provide that protection is to ensure these countries maintain law and order, respect property, and adhere to US diplomatic interests. Whenever a government falls short in this regard, the State Department, in coordination with the Navy, will need to ensure that a suitable government is established that will "do the right thing."
Under the Monroe Doctrine, as it has long been interpreted, no Latin-American Government will be permitted[Pg 217] to enter into entangling alliances with Europe or Asia. Under the Monroe Doctrine, as it is now being interpreted, no Latin-American people will be permitted to organize a revolutionary government that abolishes the right of private interests to own the oil, coal, timber and other resources. The mere threat of such action by the Carranza Government was enough to show what the policy of the United States must be in such an emergency.
Under the Monroe Doctrine, as it's been understood for a long time, no Latin American government will be allowed[Pg 217] to form complicated alliances with Europe or Asia. According to the current interpretation of the Monroe Doctrine, no Latin American people will be allowed to create a revolutionary government that takes away private interests' rights to own oil, coal, timber, and other resources. The mere threat of such action by the Carranza Government was enough to demonstrate what the United States' policy must be in such an emergency.
The United States need not dominate politically her weaker sister republics. It is not necessary for her to interfere with their "independence." So long as their resources may be exploited by American capitalists; so long as the investments are reasonably safe; so long as markets are open, and so long as the other necessities of United States capitalism are fulfilled, the smaller states of the Western Hemisphere will be left free to pursue their various ways in prosperity and peace.
The United States doesn't need to politically control its weaker sister republics. It doesn’t have to meddle in their "independence." As long as American capitalists can exploit their resources, as long as investments are relatively safe, as long as markets are accessible, and as long as the other needs of U.S. capitalism are met, the smaller countries in the Western Hemisphere will be free to follow their own paths toward prosperity and peace.
FOOTNOTE:
XVI. THE AMERICAN CAPITALISTS AND WORLD EMPIRE
1. The Plutocrats Must Carry On
The American plutocrats—those who by force of their wealth share in the direction of public policy—must carry on. They have no choice. If they are to continue as plutocrats, they must continue to rule. If they continue to rule, they must shoulder the duties of rulership. They may not relish the responsibility which their economic position has thrust upon them any more than the sojourners in Newfoundland relish the savage winters. Nevertheless, those who own the wealth of a capitalist nation must accept the results of that ownership just as those who remain in Newfoundland must accept the winter storms.
The American wealthy elite—those who, because of their money, influence public policy—must keep going. They have no other option. If they want to remain elite, they need to keep leading. If they keep leading, they have to take on the responsibilities that come with it. They might not enjoy the responsibilities that their financial status has forced upon them any more than travelers in Newfoundland enjoy the brutal winters. However, those who possess the wealth in a capitalist society must accept the consequences of that wealth just like those who stay in Newfoundland must deal with the winter storms.
The owners of American timber, mines, factories, railroads, banks and newspapers may dislike the connotations of imperialism; may believe firmly in the principles of competition and individualism; may yearn for the nineteenth century isolation which was so intimate a feature of American economic life. But their longings are in vain. The old world has passed forever; the sun has risen on a new day—a day of world contacts for the United States.
The owners of American timber, mines, factories, railroads, banks, and newspapers might not like the idea of imperialism; they may strongly believe in competition and individualism; they may long for the 19th-century isolation that was such a key part of American economic life. But their wishes are pointless. The old world is gone for good; a new day has dawned—a day of global connections for the United States.
Henry Cabot Lodge of Massachusetts stated the matter with rare accuracy in a speech which he made during the discussion over the conquest of the Philippines. After explaining that wars come, "never ostensibly, but actually from economic causes," Senator Lodge said (Congressional Record, 56th Congress, 2nd Session, p. 637. January 7, 1901):
Henry Cabot Lodge from Massachusetts expressed the issue with remarkable clarity in a speech he gave during the debate about the takeover of the Philippines. After pointing out that wars arise, "never on the surface, but actually from economic reasons," Senator Lodge said (Congressional Record, 56th Congress, 2nd Session, p. 637. January 7, 1901):
"We occupy a great position economically. We are marching on to a still greater one. You may impede it,[Pg 219] you may check it, but you cannot stop the work of economic forces. You cannot stop the advance of the United States.... The American people and the economic forces which underlie all are carrying us forward to the economic supremacy of the world."
"We hold a strong economic position. We're moving towards an even stronger one. You may slow it down,[Pg 219] you may hinder it, but you can't halt the work of economic forces. You can't stop the progress of the United States.... The American people and the economic forces that support everything are propelling us towards economic dominance in the world."
Senator Lodge spoke the economic truth in 1901. William C. Redfield reënforced it in an address before the American Manufacturers Export Association (Weekly Bulletin, April 26, 1920, p. 7): "We cannot be foreign merchants very much longer in this country excepting on a diminishing and diminishing scale—we have got to become foreign constructors; we have got to build with American money—foreign enterprises, railroads, utilities, factories, mills, I know not what, in order that by large ownership in them we may command the trade that normally flows from their operation." That is sound capitalist doctrine. Equally sound is the exhortation that follows: "In so doing we shall be doing nothing new—only new for us. That is the way in which Germany and Great Britain have built up their foreign trade."
Senator Lodge spoke the economic truth in 1901. William C. Redfield reinforced it in a speech before the American Manufacturers Export Association (Weekly Bulletin, April 26, 1920, p. 7): "We can’t be foreign merchants for much longer in this country except on a steadily decreasing scale—we have to become foreign builders; we need to invest American money in foreign enterprises, railroads, utilities, factories, mills, and who knows what else, so that through significant ownership in them we can control the trade that usually comes from their operation." That is solid capitalist doctrine. Equally solid is the advice that follows: "By doing this, we won’t be doing anything new—only new for us. This is how Germany and Great Britain have built their foreign trade."
New it is for America—but it is the course of empire, familiar to every statesman. The lesson which Bismarck, Palmerston and Gray learned in the last century is now being taught by economic pressure to the ruling class of the United States.
New it is for America—but it is the course of empire, familiar to every statesman. The lesson that Bismarck, Palmerston, and Gray learned in the last century is now being taught by economic pressure to the ruling class of the United States.
The elder generation of American business men was not trained for world domination. To them the lesson comes hard. The business men of the younger generation are picking it up, however, with a quickness born of paramount necessity.
The older generation of American businessmen wasn't prepared for global dominance. This lesson is difficult for them to grasp. However, the younger generation of businessmen is learning it quickly out of sheer necessity.
2. Training Imperialists
Every great imperial structure has had simple beginnings. Each imperial ruling class has doubtless felt misgivings, during the early years of its authority. Hesitating, uncertain, they have cast glances over their shoulders[Pg 220] towards that which was, but even while they were looking backward the forces that had made them rulers were thrusting them still farther forward along the path of imperial power. Then as generation succeeded generation, the rulers learned their lesson, building a tradition of rulership and authority that was handed down from father to son; acquiring a vision of world organization and world power that gave them confidence to go forward to their own undoing. The masters of public life in Rome were such people; the present masters of British economic and political affairs are such people.
Every great empire started out small. The ruling class of each empire has surely experienced doubts during the early years of their power. Hesitant and unsure, they often looked back[Pg 220] at what was, but even as they looked backward, the very forces that had made them rulers pushed them further along the path of imperial power. Over time, as generations came and went, the rulers learned from experience, creating a tradition of leadership and authority passed down from father to son; they developed a vision of global organization and power that gave them the confidence to advance, even to their own detriment. The leaders of public life in Rome were examples of this, just as the current leaders of British economic and political affairs are.
American imperialists still are in the making. Until 1900 their eyes were set almost exclusively upon empire within the United States. Those who, before 1860, dreamed of a slave power surrounding the Gulf of Mexico, were thrust down and their places taken by builders of railroads and organizers of trusts. To-day the sons and grandsons of that generation of exploiters who confined their attention to continental territory, are compelled, by virtue of the organization which their sires and grandsires established, to seek Empire outside the boundaries of North America.
American imperialists are still being formed. Until 1900, their focus was almost entirely on building an empire within the United States. Those who, before 1860, envisioned a slaveholding power surrounding the Gulf of Mexico were pushed aside, making way for railroad builders and trust organizers. Today, the sons and grandsons of that generation of exploiters, who concentrated on continental territory, are forced, due to the organizations that their ancestors established, to pursue an empire beyond the borders of North America.
During the years when the leaders of American business life were spending the major part of their time in "getting rich," the sweep of social and economic forces was driving the United States toward its present imperial position. Now the position has been attained, those in authority have no choice but to accept the responsibilities which accompany it.
During the years when American business leaders were focused mostly on "getting rich," social and economic forces were pushing the United States toward its current imperial status. Now that this position has been reached, those in power have no choice but to take on the responsibilities that come with it.
Economically the United States is a world power. The war and the subsequent developments have forced the country suddenly into a position of leadership among the capitalist nations. The law of capitalism is: Struggle to dispose of your surplus, otherwise you cannot survive. This law has laid its heavy hand upon Great Britain, upon France, upon Germany, and now it has struck with full force into the isolated, provincial life of the United States. It is the law—immutable as the system of gravitation.[Pg 221] While the present system of economic life exists, this law will continue to operate. Therefore the masters of American life have no alternative. If they would survive, they must dispose of their surplus.
Economically, the United States is a global powerhouse. The war and the following events have quickly pushed the country into a leadership role among capitalist nations. The principle of capitalism is: struggle to get rid of your surplus, or you won't survive. This principle has heavily impacted Great Britain, France, Germany, and now it has fully affected the isolated, provincial life of the United States. It is a law—unchanging like the law of gravity.[Pg 221] As long as the current economic system exists, this law will keep working. So, those in charge of American life have no choice. If they want to survive, they must get rid of their surplus.
Politically the United States is recognized as one of the leaders of the world. Despite its tradition of isolation, despite the unwillingness of its statesmen to enter new paths, despite the indifference of its people to international affairs, the resources and raw materials required by the industrial nations of Europe, the rapidly growing surplus and the newly acquired foreign markets and investments make the United States an integral part of the life of the world.
Politically, the United States is seen as one of the leaders in the world. Even with its history of isolation, the reluctance of its politicians to explore new paths, and the apathy of its citizens towards international issues, the resources and raw materials needed by the industrial nations of Europe, the fast-growing surplus, and the newly gained foreign markets and investments make the United States a vital part of global life.
The ruling class in the United States has no more choice than the rulers of a growing city whose boundaries are extending with each increment of population. If it is to continue as a ruling class, it must accept conditions as they are. The first of these conditions is that the United States is a world power neither because of its virtue nor because of its intelligence in the delicacies of the world politics, but because of the sheer might of its economic organization.
The ruling class in the United States has as little choice as the leaders of a growing city whose borders are expanding with each increase in population. If it wants to stay in power, it has to accept things as they are. The first of these realities is that the United States is a world power not because of its moral superiority or its savvy in global politics, but because of the sheer strength of its economic system.
Economic necessity has forced the United States into the front rank among the nations of the world. Economic necessity is forcing the ruling class of the United States to occupy the position of world leadership, to strengthen it, to consolidate it, and to extend it at every opportunity. The forces that played beside the yellow Tiber and the sluggish Nile are very much the same as those which led Napoleon across the wheat fields of Europe and that are to-day operating in Paris, London, and in New York. The forces that pushed the Roman Empire into its position of authority and led to the organization of Imperial Britain are to-day operating with accelerated pace in the United States. The sooner the American people, and particularly those who are directing public policy, wake up to this simple but essential fact, the sooner will doubt and misunderstanding be removed, the sooner will the issues be drawn and the nation's course be charted.
Economic necessity has pushed the United States to the forefront among the nations of the world. Economic necessity is forcing the ruling class of the United States to take on the role of global leadership, to strengthen it, to solidify it, and to expand it whenever possible. The forces that were active along the yellow Tiber and the sluggish Nile are very similar to those that led Napoleon across Europe’s wheat fields and are currently at work in Paris, London, and New York. The forces that propelled the Roman Empire to its position of power and contributed to the rise of Imperial Britain are now operating at a faster pace in the United States. The sooner the American people, especially those shaping public policy, recognize this straightforward but crucial fact, the sooner doubts and misunderstandings will be cleared up, the sooner the issues will be clarified, and the nation’s direction will be set.
3. The Logical Goal
The logical goal of the American plutocracy is the economic and incidentally the political control of the world. The rulers of Macedon and Assyria, Rome and Carthage, of Britain and France labored for similar reasons to reach this same goal. It is economic fate. Kings and generals were its playthings, obeying and following the call of its destiny.
The logical aim of the American wealthy elite is to gain economic and, incidentally, political control over the world. The rulers of Macedon and Assyria, Rome and Carthage, and of Britain and France worked towards this same objective for similar reasons. It’s economic destiny. Kings and generals were just tools, responding to and following the pull of its fate.
The rulers of antiquity were limited by a lack of transportation facilities; their "world" was small, including the basin of the Mediterranean and the land surrounding the Persian Gulf and the Indian Ocean, nevertheless, they set out, one after another, to conquer it. To-day the rapid accumulation of surplus and the speed and ease of communication, the spread of world knowledge and the larger means of organization make it even more necessary than it was of old for the rulers of an empire to find a larger and ever larger place in the sun. The forces are more pressing than ever before. The times call more loudly for a genius with imagination, foresight and courage who will use the power at his disposal to write into political history the gains that have already been made a part of economic life. Let such a one arise in the United States, in the present chaos of public thought, and he could not only himself dictate American public policy for the remainder of his life, but in addition, he could, within a decade, have the whole territory from the Canadian border to the Panama Canal under the American Flag, either as conquered or subject territory; he could establish a Chinese wall around South American trade and opportunities by a very slight extension of the Monroe Doctrine; he could have in hand the problem of an economic if not a political union with Canada, and could be prepared to measure swords with the nearest economic rival, either on the high seas or in any portion of the world where it might prove necessary to join battle.
The rulers of ancient times were limited by the lack of transportation options; their "world" was small, covering the Mediterranean Basin and the areas around the Persian Gulf and the Indian Ocean. Still, they ventured out one by one to conquer it. Today, the quick accumulation of resources and the speed and ease of communication, the spread of global knowledge, and more comprehensive organizational methods make it even more crucial than it was in the past for empire rulers to seek a bigger and bigger place in the world. The pressures are stronger than ever before. The times demand a visionary leader with imagination, foresight, and courage who will use their power to cement into political history the gains that are already part of economic life. If such a leader were to emerge in the United States, amidst the current chaos of public opinion, they could not only dictate American public policy for the rest of their life but, within a decade, have the entire area from the Canadian border to the Panama Canal under the American flag, whether as conquered or controlled territory. They could establish a protective barrier around South American trade and opportunities through a slight expansion of the Monroe Doctrine. They could address the issue of economic, if not political, union with Canada and be ready to compete with the nearest economic rival, whether on the open seas or anywhere else in the world where a conflict might be necessary.
Such a program would be a departure from the traditions of American public life, but the traditions, built by a nation of farmers, have already lost their significance. They are historic, with no contemporary justification. The economic life that has grown up since 1870 of necessity will create new public policies.
Such a program would be a break from the traditions of American public life, but those traditions, established by a nation of farmers, have already lost their relevance. They are historic and no longer have a reason to exist today. The economic landscape that has developed since 1870 will inevitably lead to new public policies.
The success of such a program would depend upon four things:
The success of this program would rely on four key factors:
1. A coördination of American economic life.
1. A coordination of American economic life.
2. A fast grip on the agencies for shaping public opinion.
2. A quick hold on the agencies that shape public opinion.
3. A body of citizens, martial, confident, restless, ambitious.
3. A group of citizens, ready for action, self-assured, eager for change, and driven by ambition.
4. A ruling class with sufficient imagination to paint, in warm sympathetic colors, the advantages of world dominion; and with sufficient courage to follow out imperial policy, regardless of ethical niceties, to its logical goal of world conquest.
4. A ruling class with enough imagination to portray, in warm and relatable terms, the benefits of global domination; and with enough bravery to pursue imperial policy, without getting caught up in ethical concerns, all the way to its ultimate goal of world conquest.
All four of these requisites exist in the United States to-day, awaiting the master hand that shall unite them. Many of the leaders of American public life know this. Some shrink from the issue, because they are unaccustomed to dream great dreams, and are terrified by the immensity of large thoughts. Others lack the courage to face the new issues. Still others are steadily maneuvering themselves into a position where they may take advantage of a crisis to establish their authority and work their imperial will. The situation grows daily more inviting; the opportunity daily more alluring. The war-horse, saddled and bridled, is pawing the earth and neighing. How soon will the rider come?
All four of these necessary elements exist in the United States today, waiting for the strong leader who will bring them together. Many leaders in American public life recognize this. Some are hesitant to tackle the issue because they aren't used to thinking big and feel overwhelmed by grand ideas. Others lack the bravery to confront new challenges. Still, some are carefully positioning themselves to take advantage of a crisis to assert their authority and push their agenda. The situation becomes more attractive every day; the opportunity grows more enticing. The war-horse, saddled and ready, is stomping its hooves and neighing. How soon will the rider arrive?
4. Eat or Be Eaten
The American ruling class has been thrown into a position of authority under a system of international economic competition that calls for initiative and courage. Under this system, there are two possibilities,—eat or be eaten!
The American ruling class has been placed in a position of power within a system of global economic competition that demands initiative and bravery. In this system, there are two options—survive or be destroyed!
There is no middle ground, no half way measure. It is impossible to stop or to turn back. Like men engaged on a field of battle, the contestants in this international economic struggle must remain with their faces toward the enemy, fighting for every inch that they gain, and holding these gains with their bodies and their blood, or else they must turn their backs, throw away their weapons, run for their lives, and then, hiding on the neighboring hills, watch while the enemy despoils the camp, and then applies a torch to the ruins.
There’s no compromise or halfway point. It’s impossible to stop or go back. Like soldiers on a battlefield, the participants in this global economic fight have to keep their eyes on the enemy, battling for every inch they gain and holding on to those gains with everything they have, or they will have to turn away, abandon their weapons, flee for their lives, and then, hiding on the nearby hills, watch while the enemy loots the camp and sets the ruins on fire.
The events of the great war prove, beyond peradventure, that in the wolf struggle among the capitalist nations, no rules are respected and no quarter given. Again and again the leaders among the allied statesmen—particularly Mr. Lloyd George and Mr. Wilson—appealed to the German people over the heads of their masters with assurances that the war was being fought against German autocracy, not against Germans. "When will the German people throw off their yoke?" asked one Allied diplomat. The answer came in November, 1918. A revolution was contrived, the Kaiser fled the country, the autocracy was overthrown. Germans ceased to fight with the understanding that Mr. Wilson's Fourteen Points should be made the foundation of the Peace. The armistice terms violated the spirit if not the letter of the fourteen points; the Peace Treaty scattered them to the winds. Under its provisions Germany was stripped of her colonies; her investments in the allied possessions were confiscated; her ships were taken; three-quarters of her iron ore and a third of her coal supply were turned over to other powers; motor trucks, locomotives, and other essential parts of her economic mechanism were appropriated. Austria suffered an even worse fate, being "drawn and quartered" in the fullest sense of the term. After stripping the defeated enemies of all available booty, levying an indeterminate indemnity, and dismembering the German and Austrian Empires, the Allies established for thirty years a Reparation Commission, which is virtually the economic dictator of Europe. Thus for a generation to come, the economic life of the vanquished[Pg 225] Empires will be under the active supervision and control of the victors. Never did a farmer's wife pluck a goose barer than the Allies plucked the Central Powers. (See the Treaty, also "The Economic Consequences of the Peace," J. M. Keynes. New York, Harcourt, Brace & Howe, 1920.)
The events of the great war clearly show that in the fierce competition among capitalist nations, no rules are followed and no mercy is granted. Time and again, the leaders of the allied states—especially Mr. Lloyd George and Mr. Wilson—reached out to the German people, promising that the fight was against German autocracy, not against the Germans themselves. “When will the German people throw off their oppression?” asked one Allied diplomat. The answer came in November 1918. A revolution took place, the Kaiser fled, and the autocracy was toppled. The Germans stopped fighting with the understanding that Mr. Wilson's Fourteen Points would form the basis of the peace agreement. However, the armistice terms went against the spirit, if not the letter, of those fourteen points; the Peace Treaty completely disregarded them. Under its terms, Germany lost her colonies; her investments in allied territories were seized; her ships were taken; three-quarters of her iron ore and a third of her coal supply were handed over to other countries; and essential components of her economy like motor trucks and locomotives were appropriated. Austria faced an even worse fate, being "drawn and quartered" in every sense of the phrase. After taking everything of value from the defeated enemies, imposing an unclear indemnity, and dismantling the German and Austrian Empires, the Allies set up a Reparation Commission that acted as the economic ruler of Europe for thirty years. Thus, for the coming generation, the economic life of the defeated Empires will be under the constant oversight and control of the victors. Never did a farmer's wife pluck a goose more thoroughly than the Allies plucked the Central Powers. (See the Treaty, also "The Economic Consequences of the Peace," J. M. Keynes. New York, Harcourt, Brace & Howe, 1920.)
Under the armistice terms and the Peace Treaty the Allies did to Germany and Austria exactly what Germany and Austria would have done to France and Great Britain had the war turned out differently. The Allied statesmen talked much about democracy, but when their turn came they plundered and despoiled with a practiced imperial hand. France and Britain, as well as Germany and Austria, were capitalist Empires. The Peace embodies the essential economic morality of capitalist imperialism, the morality of "Eat or be eaten."
Under the terms of the armistice and the Peace Treaty, the Allies treated Germany and Austria exactly how Germany and Austria would have treated France and Great Britain if the war had gone the other way. The Allied leaders talked a lot about democracy, but when their time came, they looted and stripped resources with the skill of seasoned imperialists. France and Britain, just like Germany and Austria, were capitalist empires. The Peace reflects the core economic ethics of capitalist imperialism, the ethics of "Eat or be eaten."
5. The Capitalists and War
The people and even the masters of America are inexperienced in this international struggle. Among themselves they have experimented with competitive industrialism on a national scale. Now, brought face to face with the world struggle, many of them revolt against it. They deplore the necessities that lead nations to make war on one another. They supported the late war "to end war." They gave, suffered and sacrificed with a keen, idealistic desire to "make the world safe for democracy." They might as well have sought to scatter light and sunshine from a cloudbank.
The people, including the leaders, of America are inexperienced in this global conflict. They have tried out competitive industrialism on a national level among themselves. Now, facing the world struggle, many are pushing back against it. They regret the circumstances that force nations to go to war with each other. They backed the recent war "to end all wars." They gave, endured, and sacrificed with a strong, idealistic wish to "make the world safe for democracy." They might as well have tried to spread light and sunshine from a storm cloud.
The masters of Europe, who have learned their trade in long years of intrigue, diplomacy and war, feel no such repugnance. They play the game. The American people are of the same race-stocks as the leading contestants in the European struggle. They are not a whit less ingenious, not a whit less courageous, not a whit less determined. When practice has made them perfect they too will play[Pg 226] the game just as well as their European cousins and their play will count for more because of the vast economic resources and surpluses which they possess.
The leaders of Europe, who have honed their skills over many years of intrigue, diplomacy, and conflict, don't share that aversion. They play the game. The American people come from the same backgrounds as the main players in the European struggle. They are just as clever, just as brave, and just as determined. Once they gain experience, they will also play[Pg 226] the game as well as their European counterparts, and their involvement will matter even more due to the immense economic resources and surpluses they have.
American statesmen in the field of international diplomacy are like babies, taking their first few steps. Later the steps come easier and easier, until a child, who but a few months ago could not walk, has learned to romp and sport about. The masters of the United States are untrained in the arts of international intrigue. They showed their inferiority in the most painful way during the negotiations over the Paris Treaty. They are as yet unschooled in international trade, banking and finance. They are also inexperienced in war, yet, having only raw troops, and little or no equipment, within two years they made a notable showing on the battlefields of Europe. Now they are busy learning their financial lessons with an equal facility. A generation of contact with world politics will bring to the fore diplomats capable of meeting Europe's best on their own ground. What Europe has learned, America can learn; what Europe has practiced, America can practice, and in the end she may excel her teachers.
American politicians in the realm of international diplomacy are like toddlers taking their first steps. Over time, those steps become easier and easier, until a child who just months ago couldn’t walk is now running around and playing. The leaders of the United States are inexperienced in the arts of international maneuvering. They demonstrated their shortcomings painfully during the negotiations over the Paris Treaty. They are still untrained in international trade, banking, and finance. They are also inexperienced in warfare; however, with only untrained troops and little equipment, within two years they made quite an impact on the battlefields of Europe. Now they are quickly picking up their financial skills as well. A generation of engagement with global politics will produce diplomats who can compete with Europe’s best on their own turf. What Europe has learned, America can learn; what Europe has practiced, America can practice, and ultimately she may surpass her teachers.
To-day economic forces are driving relentlessly. Surplus is accumulating in a geometric ratio—surplus piling on surplus. This surplus must be disposed of. While the remainder of the world—except Japan—is staggering under intolerable burdens of debt and disorganization, the United States emerges almost unscathed from the war, and prepares in dead earnest to enter the international struggle,—to play at the master game of "eat or be eaten."
Today, economic forces are pushing forward relentlessly. Surplus is building up at an exponential rate—surplus upon surplus. This surplus has to be dealt with. While the rest of the world—except Japan—is struggling under unbearable debt and chaos, the United States comes out of the war nearly unscathed and is gearing up seriously to engage in the international competition—to participate in the high-stakes game of "eat or be eaten."
Pride, ambition and love of gain and of power are pulling the American plutocrats forward. The world seems to be within their grasp. If they will reach out their hands they may possess it! They have assumed a great responsibility. As good Americans worthy of the tradition of their ancestors, they must see this thing through to the end! They must win, or die in the attempt; and it is in this spirit that they are going forward.
Pride, ambition, and the desire for wealth and power are driving the American plutocrats forward. The world seems to be within their reach. If they just stretch out their hands, they could have it! They’ve taken on a huge responsibility. As true Americans honoring the legacy of their forefathers, they need to see this through to the end! They must succeed, or die trying; and it’s with this mindset that they’re moving ahead.
The American capitalists do not want war with Great[Pg 227] Britain or with any other country. They are not seeking war. They will regret war when it comes.
The American capitalists don't want to go to war with Great[Pg 227] Britain or any other country. They aren't looking for conflict. They'll regret it when war happens.
War is expensive, troublesome and dangerous. The experiences of Europe in the War of 1914 have taught some lessons. The leaders and thinkers among the masters of America have visited Europe. They have seen the old institutions destroyed, the old customs uprooted, the old faiths overturned. They have seen the economic order in which they were vitally concerned hurled to the earth and shattered. They have seen the red flag of revolution wave where they had expected nothing but the banner of victory. They have seen whole populations, weary of the old order, throw it aside with an impatient gesture and bring a new order into being. They have good reasons to understand and fear the disturbing influences of war. They have felt them even in the United States—three thousand miles away from the European conflict. How much more pressing might this unrest be if the United States had fought all through the war, instead of coming in when it was practically at an end!
War is costly, problematic, and risky. The experiences of Europe during the War of 1914 have taught important lessons. The leaders and thinkers among America's elites have traveled to Europe. They’ve witnessed the destruction of old institutions, the upheaval of established customs, and the collapse of traditional beliefs. They’ve observed the economic system they were deeply tied to being thrown to the ground and shattered. They’ve seen the red flag of revolution flying where they expected nothing but the flag of victory. They’ve watched entire populations, tired of the old order, discard it with a frustrated wave and establish a new one. They have ample reasons to understand and fear the unsettling effects of war. They have felt those effects even in the United States—three thousand miles away from the European conflict. How much more urgent might this unrest be if the United States had been involved in the fighting throughout the war, instead of joining in when it was nearly over!
Then there is always the danger of losing the war—and such a loss would mean for the United States what it has meant for Germany—economic slavery.
Then there’s always the risk of losing the war—and such a loss would mean for the United States what it has meant for Germany—economic slavery.
Presented with an opportunity to choose between the hazards of war and the certainties of peace most of the capitalist interests in the United States would without question choose peace. There are exceptions. The manufacturers of munitions and of some of the implements and supplies that are needed only for war purposes, undoubtedly have more to gain through war than through peace, but they are only a small element in a capitalist world which has more to gain through peace than through war.
Presented with a choice between the dangers of war and the benefits of peace, most capitalist interests in the United States would definitely choose peace. There are exceptions. Manufacturers of weapons and some supplies that are only necessary for war clearly stand to gain more from war than from peace, but they are just a small part of a capitalist system that benefits more from peace than from war.
But the capitalists cannot choose. They are embedded in an economic system which has driven them—whether they liked it or not—along a path of imperialism. Once having entered upon this path, they are compelled to follow it into the sodden mire of international strife.
But the capitalists don't have a choice. They're stuck in an economic system that has pushed them—whether they wanted to or not—down a road of imperialism. Once they take this road, they have no choice but to follow it into the messy chaos of global conflict.
6. The Imperial Task
The American ruling class—the plutocracy—must plan to dominate the earth; to exploit it, to exact tribute from it. Rome did as much for the basin of the Mediterranean. Great Britain has done it for Africa and Australia, for half of Asia, for four million square miles in North America. If the people of one small island, poorly equipped with resources, can achieve such a result, what may not the people of the United States hope to accomplish?
The American ruling class—the wealthy elite—needs to strategize to control the planet; to take advantage of it, to demand payment from it. Rome did this for the Mediterranean region. Great Britain has done it for Africa, Australia, half of Asia, and four million square miles in North America. If the people of one small island, lacking resources, can achieve such results, what can the people of the United States aspire to accomplish?
That is the imperial task.
That is the main task.
1. American economic life must be unified. Already much of this work has been done.
1. American economic life needs to be unified. A lot of this work has already been done.
2. The agencies for shaping public opinion must be secured. Little has been left for accomplishment in this direction.
2. Organizations to influence public opinion need to be set up. There's not much left to accomplish in this area.
3. A martial, confident, restless, ambitious spirit must be generated among the people. Such a result is being achieved by the combination of economic and social forces that inhere in the present social system.
3. A strong, confident, restless, and ambitious spirit needs to be fostered among the people. This is happening through the mix of economic and social forces that are part of the current social system.
4. The ruling class must be schooled in the art of rulership. The next two generations will accomplish that result.
4. The ruling class needs to be trained in leadership skills. The next two generations will make that happen.
The American plutocracy must carry on. It must consolidate its gains and move forward to greater achievements, with the goal clearly in mind and the necessities of imperial power thoroughly mastered and understood.
The American wealthy elite must continue. They need to solidify their successes and push ahead for even greater accomplishments, with a clear goal in sight and a full understanding of what's needed for imperial power.
XVII. THE NEW IMPERIAL ALIGNMENT
1. A Survey of the Evidence
Through the centuries empires have come and gone. In each age some nation or people has emerged—stronger, better organized, more aggressive, more powerful than its neighbors—and has conquered territory, subjugated populations, and through its ruling class has exploited the workers at home and abroad.
Through the centuries, empires have risen and fallen. In every era, some nation or group has come to the forefront—stronger, better organized, more aggressive, and more powerful than its neighbors—and has conquered lands, subjugated populations, and, through its ruling class, exploited workers both at home and abroad.
Europe has been for a thousand years the center of the imperial struggle,—the struggle which called into being the militarism so hated by the European peoples. It was from that struggle that millions fled to America, where they hoped for liberty and peace.
Europe has been the center of imperial conflict for a thousand years—the conflict that gave rise to the militarism so despised by the European people. It was from that struggle that millions escaped to America, where they sought freedom and peace.
The eighteenth century witnessed the rise of Great Britain to a position of world authority. During the nineteenth century she held her place against all rivals. With the assistance of Prussia, she overthrew Napoleon at Waterloo. In the Crimean War and the Russo-Japanese War she halted the power of the Czar. Half a century after Waterloo Germany, under the leadership of Prussia won the Franco-Prussian War, and by that act became the leading rival of the British Empire. Following the war, which gave Germany control of the important resources included in Alsace and Lorraine, there was a steady increase in her industrial efficiency; the success of her trade was as pronounced as the success of her industries, and by 1913 the Germans had a merchant fleet and a navy second only to those of Great Britain.
The eighteenth century saw Great Britain rise to a position of global power. During the nineteenth century, she maintained her status against all competitors. With Prussia's help, she defeated Napoleon at Waterloo. In the Crimean War and the Russo-Japanese War, she checked the power of the Czar. Half a century after Waterloo, Germany, led by Prussia, won the Franco-Prussian War, becoming the main rival to the British Empire. After the war, which gave Germany control of the valuable resources in Alsace and Lorraine, her industrial efficiency steadily increased; the success of her trade was as significant as that of her industries, and by 1913, the Germans had a merchant fleet and a navy second only to Great Britain's.
Germany's economic successes, and her threat to build a railroad from Berlin to Bagdad and tap the riches of the East, led the British to form alliances with their traditional enemies—the French and the Russians. Russia, after the[Pg 230] breakdown of Czarism in 1917, dropped out of the Entente, and the United States took her place among the Allies of the British Empire. During the struggle France was reduced to a mere shell of her former power. The War of 1914 bled her white, loaded her with debt, disorganized her industries, demoralized her finances, and although it restored to her important mineral resources, it left her too weak and broken to take real advantage of them.
Germany's economic successes, along with the threat of building a railroad from Berlin to Baghdad to tap into the wealth of the East, prompted the British to ally with their traditional rivals—the French and the Russians. After the collapse of Czarism in Russia in 1917, the country withdrew from the Entente, and the United States stepped in to join the Allies of the British Empire. Throughout the conflict, France was diminished to a shell of its former strength. The War of 1914 drained its resources, burdened it with debt, disrupted its industries, and undermined its finances. While it regained some important mineral resources, France emerged too weak and broken to truly benefit from them.
The War of 1914 decided the right of Great Britain to rule the Near East as well as Southern Asia and the strategic points of Africa. In the stripping of the vanquished and in the division of the spoils of war the British lion proved to be the lion indeed. But the same forces that gave the British the run of the Old World called into existence a rival in the New.
The War of 1914 determined Great Britain's authority over the Near East, Southern Asia, and key areas in Africa. In the defeat of the conquered and the distribution of the war spoils, the British lion truly showed its strength. However, the same forces that allowed the British to dominate the Old World also led to the emergence of a competitor in the New World.
People from Britain, Germany and the other countries of Northern Europe, speaking the English language and fired with the conquering spirit of the motherland, had been, for three centuries, taming the wilderness of North America. They had found the task immense, but the rewards equally great. When the forces of nature were once brought into subjection, and the wilderness was inventoried, it proved to contain exactly those stores that are needed for the success of modern civilization. With the Indians brushed aside, and the Southwest conquered from Mexico, the new ruling class of successful business men established itself, and the matter of safeguarding property rights, of building industrial empires and of laying up vast stores of capital and surplus followed as a matter of course.
People from Britain, Germany, and other Northern European countries, speaking English and inspired by the conquering spirit of their homeland, had been taming the wilderness of North America for three centuries. They found the task to be immense, but the rewards were equally significant. Once nature's forces were brought under control and the wilderness was surveyed, it turned out to contain exactly what was needed for the success of modern civilization. With the Indigenous people pushed aside and the Southwest taken from Mexico, the new ruling class of successful businesspeople established itself, and the matters of protecting property rights, building industrial empires, and accumulating vast amounts of capital and surplus followed naturally.
Europe, busy with her own affairs, paid little heed to the New World, except to send to it some of her most rugged stock and much of her surplus wealth. The New World, left to itself, pursued its way—in isolation, and with an intensity proportioned to the size of the task in hand and the richness of the reward.
Europe, caught up in its own issues, paid little attention to the New World, aside from sending some of its toughest people and a lot of its excess wealth. The New World, left on its own, continued its journey—in isolation and with a focus that matched the scale of the challenge and the richness of the reward.
The Spanish War in 1898 and the performance of the Canadians in the Boer War of 1899 astounded the world,[Pg 231] but it was the War of 1914 that really waked the Europeans to the possibilities of the Western peoples. The Canadians proved their worth to the British armies. The Americans showed that they could produce prodigious amounts of the necessaries of war, and when they did go in, they inaugurated a shipping program, raised and dispatched troops, furnished supplies and provided funds to an extent which, up to that time, was considered impossible. The years from 1914 to 1918 established the fact that there was, in the West, a colossus of economic power.
The Spanish War in 1898 and the performance of Canadians in the Boer War of 1899 amazed the world,[Pg 231] but it was the War of 1914 that truly opened Europeans' eyes to the potential of Western nations. The Canadians proved their value to the British armies. The Americans demonstrated they could produce enormous amounts of war supplies, and when they joined the fight, they started a shipping program, raised and sent troops, provided supplies, and offered funding to a degree that had previously been thought impossible. The years from 1914 to 1918 confirmed that there was a massive economic powerhouse in the West.
2. The New International Line-Up
There are four major factors in the new international line-up. The first is Russia; the second is the Japanese Empire; the third is the British Empire and the fourth is the American Empire. Italy has neither the resources, the wealth nor the population necessary to make her a factor of large importance in the near future. France is too weak economically, too overloaded with debt and too depleted in population to play a leading rôle in world affairs.
There are four key players in the new international landscape. The first is Russia; the second is the Japanese Empire; the third is the British Empire, and the fourth is the American Empire. Italy lacks the resources, wealth, and population needed to be a significant factor in the near future. France is too economically weak, burdened with debt, and depleted in population to take a leading role in global affairs.
The Russian menace is immediate. Bolshevism is not only the antithesis of Capitalism but its mortal enemy. If Bolshevism persists and spreads through Central Europe, India and China, capitalism will be wiped from the earth.
The Russian threat is urgent. Bolshevism isn't just the opposite of Capitalism; it's its worst enemy. If Bolshevism continues to grow in Central Europe, India, and China, capitalism will be destroyed.
A federation of Russia, the Baltic states, the new border provinces, and the Central Empires on a socialist basis would give the socialist states of central and northern Europe most of the European food area, a large portion of the European raw material area and all of the technical skill and machinery necessary to make a self-supporting economic unit. The two hundred and fifty millions of people in Russia and Germany combined in such a socialist federation would be as irresistible economically as they would be from a military point of view.
A federation of Russia, the Baltic states, the new border provinces, and the Central Empires on a socialist basis would provide the socialist countries of central and northern Europe with most of the European agricultural land, a significant part of the European raw materials, and all the technical skills and machinery needed to create a self-sustaining economic unit. The two hundred fifty million people in Russia and Germany combined in this socialist federation would be as powerful economically as they would be militarily.
Such a Central European federation, developing as it must along the logical lines that lead into India and China[Pg 232] would be the strongest single unit in the world, viewed from the standpoint of resources, of population, of productive power or of military strength. The only possible rivals to such a combination would be the widely scattered forces of the British Empire and the United States, separated from it by the stretches of the Atlantic Ocean. Against such a grouping Japan would be powerless because it would deprive her of the source of raw materials upon which she must rely for her economic development. Great Britain with her relatively small population and her rapidly diminishing resources could make no head against such a combination even with the assistance of her colonial empire. Northern India is as logical a home for Bolshevism as Central China or South-eastern Russia. Connect European Russia, Germany, Austria-Hungary, Siberia, India and China with bonds that make effective coöperation possible and these countries—containing nearly two-thirds of the population of the world, and possessed of the resources necessary to maintain a modern civilization—could laugh at outside interference.
Such a Central European federation, developing logically toward India and China[Pg 232] would be the strongest unit in the world in terms of resources, population, productive power, and military strength. The only potential rivals to this combination would be the widely spread forces of the British Empire and the United States, separated from it by the Atlantic Ocean. Against such a coalition, Japan would be powerless because it would cut off the raw materials she needs for economic development. Great Britain, with its relatively small population and rapidly dwindling resources, wouldn't stand a chance against such a combination even with help from its colonial empire. Northern India is as suitable a base for Bolshevism as Central China or Southeast Russia. If we connect European Russia, Germany, Austria-Hungary, Siberia, India, and China with effective cooperation, these countries—home to nearly two-thirds of the world's population and holding the resources needed for a modern civilization—could easily dismiss outside interference.
Two primary difficulties confront the organizers of the Federated Socialist Republics of Europe and Asia. One is nationality, language, custom and tradition, together with the ancient antagonisms which have been so carefully nurtured through the centuries. The other is the frightful economic disorganization prevalent throughout Central Europe,—a disorganization which would be increased rather than diminished by the establishment of new forms of economic life. Even if such an organization were perfected, it must remain, for a long time to come, on a defensive basis.
Two main challenges face the organizers of the Federated Socialist Republics of Europe and Asia. One is the complexities of nationality, language, customs, and traditions, along with the deep-seated conflicts that have been cultivated over the centuries. The other is the severe economic chaos occurring throughout Central Europe—a chaos that would likely worsen rather than improve with the introduction of new economic systems. Even if such an organization were successfully established, it would need to operate defensively for a long time.
3. The Yellow Peril
The "yellow peril" thus far is little more than the Japanese menace to British and American trade in the Far East. The Japanese Archipelago is woefully deficient in coal, iron, petroleum, water power and agricultural land. The country is over-populated and must depend for its[Pg 233] supplies of food and raw materials upon continental Asia. There seems to be no probability that Japan and China can make any effective working agreement in the near future that will constitute an active menace to the supremacy of the white race. Alone Japan is too weak in resources and too sparse in population. Combined with China she would be formidable, but her military policy in Korea and in the Shantung Province have made any effective coöperation with China at least temporarily impossible.
The "yellow peril" is mostly just the threat posed by Japan to British and American trade in the Far East. The Japanese Archipelago lacks sufficient coal, iron, oil, hydroelectric power, and agricultural land. The country is overcrowded and must rely on continental Asia for its[Pg 233] food and raw materials. It's unlikely that Japan and China will be able to forge any effective partnership in the near future that would seriously threaten the dominance of the white race. On its own, Japan is too resource-poor and has too small a population. If it united with China, it could be a significant threat, but its military actions in Korea and the Shantung Province have made any real cooperation with China impossible for now.
Furthermore, the Japanese are not seeking world conquest. On the contrary, they are bent upon maintaining their traditional aloofness by having a Monroe Doctrine for the East. This doctrine will be summed up in the phrase, "The East for the Easterners,"—the easterners being the Japanese. Such a policy would prove a serious menace to the trade of the United States and of Great Britain. It would prove still more of a hindrance to the investment of American and British capital in the very promising Eastern enterprises, and would close the door on the Western efforts to develop the immense industrial resources of China. The recent "Chinese Consortium," in which Japan joined with great reluctance, suggests that the major capitalist powers have refused to recognize the exclusive right of Japan to the economic advantages of the Far East. How seriously this situation will be taken by the United States and Great Britain depends in part upon the vigor with which Japan prosecutes her claims and in part upon the preoccupation of these two great powers with Bolshevism in Europe and with their own competitive activities in ship building, trade, finance and armament.
Furthermore, the Japanese aren't looking to conquer the world. Instead, they are focused on maintaining their traditional detachment by establishing a Monroe Doctrine for the East. This doctrine can be summed up with the phrase, "The East for the Easterners," where the Easterners refers to the Japanese. Such a policy would pose a serious threat to the trade of the United States and Great Britain. It would also greatly hinder American and British investments in promising Eastern ventures and close the door on Western efforts to develop China's vast industrial resources. The recent "Chinese Consortium," in which Japan participated reluctantly, suggests that the major capitalist powers have refused to acknowledge Japan's exclusive right to the economic benefits of the Far East. How seriously the United States and Great Britain will respond to this situation depends partly on how aggressively Japan pursues its claims and partly on the preoccupations of these two powers with Bolshevism in Europe and their own competitive activities in shipbuilding, trade, finance, and armaments.
4. The British and the American Empires
The two remaining major forces in world economics and politics are the British Empire and the American Empire,—the mistress of the world, and her latest rival in the competition for world power. Between them, to-day, most of the world is divided. The British Empire includes the[Pg 234] Near East, Southern Asia, Africa, Australia and half of North America. Dogging her are Germany, France, Russia and Italy, and, as she goes to the Far East,—Japan. The United States holds the Western Hemisphere, where she is supreme, with no enemy worthy the name.
The two remaining major forces in global economics and politics are the British Empire and the American Empire—one being the dominant power in the world, and the other its newest competitor for global influence. Today, most of the world is divided between them. The British Empire covers the[Pg 234] Near East, Southern Asia, Africa, Australia, and half of North America. Close behind are Germany, France, Russia, and Italy, and as she moves towards the Far East—Japan. The United States controls the Western Hemisphere, where it is in a position of supremacy, with no significant rivals.
The British power was shaken by the War of 1914. Never, in modern times, had the British themselves, been compelled to do so much of the actual fighting. The war debt and the disorganization of trade incident to the war period proved serious factors in the curtailment of British economic supremacy. At the same time, the territorial gains of the British were enormous, particularly in the Near East.
The British power was shaken by the War of 1914. Never in modern times had the British themselves been forced to do so much of the actual fighting. The war debt and the disruption of trade during the war were significant factors in the decline of British economic dominance. At the same time, the territorial gains for the British were substantial, especially in the Near East.
The Americans secured real advantages from the war. They grew immensely rich in profiteering during the first three years, they emerged with a relatively small debt, with no great loss of life, and with the greatest economic surpluses and the greatest immediate economic advantages possessed by any nation of the world.
The Americans gained significant benefits from the war. They became very wealthy from profiteering during the first three years, came out with a relatively small debt, experienced little loss of life, and held the largest economic surpluses and immediate economic advantages of any country in the world.
The British Empire was the acknowledged mistress of the world in 1913. Her nearest rival (Germany) had one battleship to her two; one ton of merchant shipping to her three, and two dollars of foreign investments to her five. This rivalry was punished as the successive rivals of the British Empire have been punished for three hundred years.
The British Empire was recognized as the dominant power in the world in 1913. Her closest competitor, Germany, had one battleship compared to her two; one ton of merchant shipping against her three, and two dollars of foreign investments to her five. This rivalry was dealt with as the British Empire's competitors have been dealt with for the past three hundred years.
The war was won by the British Empire and her Allies, but in the hour of victory a new rival appeared. By 1920 that rival had a naval program which promised a fleet larger than the British fleet in 1924 or 1925; within three years she had increased her merchant tonnage to two-thirds of the British tonnage, and her foreign investments were three times the foreign investments of Great Britain. This new rival was the American Empire—whose immense economic strength constituted an immediate threat to the world power of Great Britain.
The British Empire and its Allies won the war, but right after their victory, a new competitor emerged. By 1920, this competitor had a naval program that promised a fleet larger than the British fleet by 1924 or 1925; within three years, it had boosted its merchant tonnage to two-thirds of Britain’s, and its foreign investments were three times those of Great Britain. This new rival was the American Empire—whose enormous economic power posed a direct threat to Britain’s status as a world power.
5. The Next Incident in the Great War
Some nation, or some group of nations has always been in control of the known world or else in active competition for the right to exercise such a control. The present is an era of competition.
Some nation, or some group of nations, has always been in control of the known world or actively competing for the right to have that control. Right now, it's a time of competition.
Capitalism has revolutionized the world's economic life. By 1875 the capitalist nations were in a mad race to determine which one should dominate the capitalist world and have first choice among the undeveloped portions of the earth. The competitors were Great Britain, Germany, France, Russia and Italy. Japan and the United States did not really enter the field for another generation.
Capitalism has transformed the global economy. By 1875, capitalist countries were in a fierce competition to see which would rule the capitalist world and get first pick among the undeveloped regions of the Earth. The main players were Great Britain, Germany, France, Russia, and Italy. Japan and the United States didn't really get involved for another generation.
The War of 1914 decided this much:—that France and Italy were too weak to play the big game in a big way, that Germany could not compete effectively for some time to come; that the Russians would no longer play the old game at all. There remained Japan, Great Britain and the United States and it is among these three nations that the capitalist world is now divided. Japan is in control of the Far East. Great Britain holds the Near East, Africa and Australia; the United States dominates the Western Hemisphere.
The War of 1914 made it clear that France and Italy were too weak to participate in global affairs on a large scale, that Germany would struggle to compete effectively for a while, and that Russia would no longer engage in the old ways. This left Japan, Great Britain, and the United States as the key players in the capitalist world. Japan controls the Far East, Great Britain oversees the Near East, Africa, and Australia, while the United States dominates the Western Hemisphere.
The Great War began in 1914. It will end when the question is decided as to which of these three empires will control the Earth.
The Great War started in 1914. It will end when it's determined which of these three empires will dominate the world.
Great Britain has been the dominant factor in the world for a century. She gained her position after a terrific struggle, and she has maintained it by vanquishing Holland, Spain, France and Germany.
Great Britain has been the leading power in the world for a hundred years. She earned this position after a fierce battle and has kept it by defeating Holland, Spain, France, and Germany.
The United States is out to capture the economic supremacy of the earth. Her business men say so frankly. Her politicians fear that their constituents are not as yet ready to take such a step. They have been reassured, however, by the presidential vote of November, 1920. [Pg 236]American business life already is imperial, and political sentiment is moving rapidly in the same direction.
The United States is aiming to achieve global economic dominance. Business leaders are openly expressing this. Politicians worry that their voters aren't prepared to make that leap yet. However, they've found some comfort in the presidential election results from November 1920. [Pg 236] American business is already operating on an imperial scale, and political attitudes are quickly shifting in that same direction.
Great Britain holds title to the pickings of the world. America wants some or all of them. The two countries are headed straight for a conflict, which is as inevitable as morning sunrise, unless the menace of Bolshevism grows so strong, and remains so threatening that the great capitalist rivals will be compelled to join forces for the salvation of capitalist society.
Great Britain controls the wealth of the world. America wants some or all of it. The two countries are headed for a conflict that is as certain as the sunrise, unless the threat of Bolshevism becomes so strong and remains so dangerous that these major capitalist rivals are forced to unite to protect capitalist society.
As economic rivalries increase, competition in military and naval preparation will come as a matter of course. Following these will be the efforts to make political alliances—in the East and elsewhere.
As economic rivalries grow, competition in military and naval readiness will naturally follow. This will be accompanied by efforts to form political alliances—in the East and beyond.
These two countries are old time enemies. The roots of that enmity lie deep. Two wars, the white hot feeling during the Civil War, the anti-British propaganda, carried, within a few years, through the American schools, the traditions among the officers in the American navy, the presence of 1,352,251 Irish born persons in the United States (1910), the immense plunder seized by the British during the War of 1914,—these and many other factors will make it easy to whip the American people into a war-frenzy against the British Empire.
These two countries have been long-time enemies. The roots of that hostility run deep. Two wars, the intense emotions during the Civil War, the anti-British propaganda spread through American schools in just a few years, the traditions among officers in the American navy, the presence of 1,352,251 Irish-born individuals in the United States (1910), and the massive plunder taken by the British during the War of 1914—these and many other factors will make it easy to stir up the American people into a war frenzy against the British Empire.
Were there no economic rivalries, such antagonisms might slumber for decades, but with the economic struggle so active, these other matters will be kept continually in the foreground.
Were there no economic rivalries, these conflicts might lie dormant for decades, but with the economic struggle so intense, these other issues will always be kept in the spotlight.
The capitalists of Great Britain have faced dark days and have surmounted huge obstacles. They are not to be turned back by the threat of rivalry. The American capitalists are backed by the greatest available surpluses in the world; they are ambitious, full of enthusiasm and energy, they are flushed with their recent victory in the world war, and overwhelmed by the unexpected stores of wealth that have come to them as a result of the conflict. They are imbued with a boundless faith in the possibilities of their country. Neither Great Britain nor the United States is[Pg 237] in a frame of mind to make concessions. Each is confident—the British with the traditional confidence of centuries of world leadership; the Americans with the buoyant, idealistic confidence of youth. It is one against the other until the future supremacy of the world is decided.
The capitalists of Great Britain have gone through tough times and have overcome significant challenges. They won't be deterred by the threat of competition. The American capitalists are supported by the largest surpluses in the world; they are ambitious, full of enthusiasm and energy, riding high from their recent victory in the world war, and flooded with unexpected wealth that came from the conflict. They have an unshakeable belief in the potential of their country. Neither Great Britain nor the United States is[Pg 237] in a mindset to make concessions. Each side is confident—the British with their long-standing confidence from centuries of global leadership; the Americans with the spirited, idealistic confidence of youth. It’s a contest between the two until the future world supremacy is determined.
6. The Imperial Task
American business interests are engaged in the work of building an international business structure. American industry, directed from the United States, exploiting foreign resources for American profit, and financed by American institutions, is gaining a footing in Latin America, in Europe and Asia.
American businesses are working on creating an international business framework. American industries, directed from the U.S., are tapping into foreign resources for American profit and supported by American financial institutions, are establishing a presence in Latin America, Europe, and Asia.
The business men of Rome built such a structure two thousand years ago. They competed with and finally crushed their rivals in Tyre, Corinth and Carthage. In the early days of the Empire, they were the economic masters, as well as the political masters of the known world.
The businessmen of Rome built this structure two thousand years ago. They competed with and ultimately defeated their rivals in Tyre, Corinth, and Carthage. In the early days of the Empire, they were the economic leaders, as well as the political leaders of the known world.
Within two centuries the business men of Great Britain have built an international business structure that has known no equal since the days of the Cæsars. Perhaps it is greater, even, than the economic empire of the Romans. At any rate, for a century that British empire of commerce and industry has gone unchallenged, save by Germany. Germany has been crushed. But there is an industrial empire rising in the West. It is new. Its strength is as yet undetermined. It is uncoördinated. A new era has dawned, however, and the business men of the United States have made up their minds to win the economic supremacy of the earth.
In just two centuries, the business leaders of Great Britain have created an international business framework that hasn't been matched since the days of the Romans. It might even surpass the economic dominance of the Roman Empire. Regardless, for the past century, this British empire of commerce and industry has faced no serious competition except from Germany. Germany has been defeated. However, a new industrial power is emerging in the West. It's still new, its strength is yet to be fully understood, and it is still not well-coordinated. A new era has begun, and the business leaders of the United States are determined to achieve economic supremacy around the world.
Already the war is on between Great Britain and the United States. The two countries are just as much at war to-day as Great Britain and Germany were at war during the twenty years that preceded 1914. The issues are essentially the same in both cases,—commercial and economic in character, and it is these economic and [Pg 238]commercial issues that are the chief causes of modern military wars—that are in themselves economic wars which may at any moment be transferred to the military arena.
Already, the war is on between Great Britain and the United States. The two countries are just as much at war today as Great Britain and Germany were during the twenty years leading up to 1914. The issues are essentially the same in both cases—commercial and economic in nature—and it is these economic and [Pg 238]commercial issues that are the main causes of modern military conflicts, which are essentially economic wars that could be shifted to the military battlefield at any moment.
British capitalists are jealously guarding the privileges that they have collected through centuries of business and military conflict. The American capitalists are out to secure these privileges for themselves. On neither side would a military settlement of the issue be welcomed. On both sides it would be regarded as a painful necessity. War is an incident in imperialist policy. Yet the position of the imperialist as an international exploiter depends upon his ability to make war successfully. War is a part of the price that the imperialist must pay for his opportunity to exploit and control the earth.
British capitalists are fiercely protecting the advantages they've gained through centuries of business and military conflict. American capitalists are trying to secure those advantages for themselves. Neither side would welcome a military solution to the issue; it would be seen as an unfortunate necessity by both. War is just one aspect of imperialist strategy. However, for the imperialist as an international exploiter, their success in making war effectively is crucial. War is part of the cost that the imperialist has to bear to seize and dominate the world.
After Sedan, it was Germany versus Great Britain for the control of Europe. After Versailles it is the United States versus Great Britain for the control of the capitalist earth. Both nations must spend the next few years in active preparation for the conflict.
After Sedan, it was Germany against Great Britain for control of Europe. After Versailles, it’s the United States against Great Britain for control of the capitalist world. Both nations need to spend the next few years actively preparing for the conflict.
The governments of Great Britain and the United States are to-day on terms of greatest intimacy. Soon an issue will arise—perhaps over Mexico, perhaps over Persia, perhaps over Ireland, perhaps over the extension of American control in the Caribbean. There is no difficulty of finding a pretext.
The governments of Great Britain and the United States are currently on very close terms. Soon, a conflict might emerge—maybe over Mexico, maybe over Persia, maybe over Ireland, or maybe concerning the expansion of American influence in the Caribbean. It won't be hard to find a reason.
Then there will follow the time-honored method of arousing the people on either side to wrath against those across the border. Great Britain will point to the race-riots and negro-lynchings in America as a proof that the people of the United States are barbarians. British editors will cite the wanton taking of the Canal Zone as an indication of the willingness of American statesmen to go to any lengths in their effort to extend their dominion over the earth. The newspapers of the United States will play up the terrorism and suppression in Ireland and there are many Irishmen more than ready to lend a hand in such an enterprise; tyranny in India will come in for a generous share of comment; then there are the relations between Great[Pg 239] Britain and the Turks, and above all, there are the evidences in the Paris Treaty of the way in which Great Britain is gradually absorbing the earth. Unless the power of labor is strong enough to turn the blow, or unless the capitalists decide that the safety of the capitalist world depends upon their getting together and dividing the plunder, the result is inevitable.
Then there will be the traditional way of stirring up anger among the people on both sides against those across the border. Great Britain will highlight the race riots and lynchings in America as evidence that Americans are uncivilized. British editors will point to the reckless acquisition of the Canal Zone as proof of American leaders’ willingness to go to any lengths to expand their control over the world. The U.S. newspapers will emphasize the terrorism and oppression in Ireland, and there will be plenty of Irish people eager to help with this effort; the tyranny in India will also receive a lot of attention; then there are the connections between Great[Pg 239] Britain and the Turks, and most importantly, there are the signs in the Paris Treaty of how Great Britain is slowly taking over the globe. Unless labor's power is strong enough to change the course, or unless the capitalists conclude that the security of the capitalist world relies on them coming together and sharing the spoils, the outcome is unavoidable.
The United States is a world Empire in her own right. She dominates the Western Hemisphere. Young and inexperienced, she nevertheless possesses the economic advantages and political authority that give her a voice in all international controversies. Only twenty years have passed since the organizing genius of America turned its attention from exclusively domestic problems to the problems of financial imperialism that have been agitating Europe for a half a century. The Great War showed that American men make good soldiers, and it also showed that American wealth commands world power.
The United States is an empire in its own right. It dominates the Western Hemisphere. Young and inexperienced, it still has the economic advantages and political influence that give it a say in all international disputes. Only twenty years have gone by since America's organizing genius shifted its focus from solely domestic issues to the financial imperialism challenges that have been stirring Europe for fifty years. The Great War demonstrated that American men make great soldiers, and it also proved that American wealth holds global power.
With the aid of Russia, France, Japan and the United States Great Britain crushed her most dangerous rival—Germany. The struggle which destroyed Germany's economic and military power erected in her stead a more menacing economic and military power—the United States. Untrained and inexperienced in world affairs, the master class of the United States has been placed suddenly in the title rôle. America over night has become a world empire and over night her rulers have been called upon to think and act like world emperors. Partly they succeeded, partly they bungled, but they learned much. Their appetites were whetted, their imaginations stirred by the vision of world authority. To-day they are talking and writing, to-morrow they will act—no longer as novices, but as masters of the ruling class in a nation which feels herself destined to rule the earth.
With help from Russia, France, Japan, and the United States, Great Britain defeated its biggest rival—Germany. The conflict that shattered Germany’s economic and military strength instead created a more powerful economic and military force—the United States. Suddenly, the untrained and inexperienced ruling class in the U.S. found itself in a leading role. America overnight has become a global empire, and overnight its leaders have been expected to think and act like global rulers. They succeeded in some areas, stumbled in others, but they gained a lot of experience. Their desires grew, and their imaginations were sparked by the idea of global authority. Today they’re discussing and writing; tomorrow they will act—not as beginners, but as leaders in a nation that believes it’s destined to dominate the world.
The imperial struggle is to continue. The Japanese Empire dominates the Far East; the British Empire dominates Southern Asia, the Near East, Africa and Australia; the American Empire dominates the Western[Pg 240] Hemisphere. It is impossible for these three great empires to remain in rivalry and at peace. Economic struggle is a form of war, and the economic struggle between them is now in progress.
The imperial struggle is set to continue. The Japanese Empire rules over the Far East; the British Empire controls Southern Asia, the Near East, Africa, and Australia; the American Empire oversees the Western[Pg 240] Hemisphere. It's impossible for these three major empires to be rivals and maintain peace. Economic competition is a type of warfare, and that economic competition among them is currently happening.
7. Continuing the Imperial Struggle
The War of 1914 was no war for democracy in spite of the fact that millions of the men who died in the trenches believed that they were fighting for freedom. Rather it was a war to make the world safe for the British Empire. Only in part was the war successful. The old world was made safe by the elimination of Britain's two dangerous rivals—Germany and Russia; but out of the conflict emerged a new rival—unexpectedly strong, well equipped and eager for the conflict.
The War of 1914 wasn't a war for democracy, even though millions of men who died in the trenches thought they were fighting for freedom. Instead, it was a war to secure the British Empire. The war was only partly successful. The old world was made safer by getting rid of Britain's two biggest rivals—Germany and Russia; but from the conflict, a new rival emerged—unexpectedly strong, well-equipped, and eager for confrontation.
The war did not destroy imperialism. It was fought between five great empires to determine which one should be supreme. In its result, it gave to Great Britain rather than to Germany the right to exploit the undeveloped portions of Asia and of Africa.
The war didn’t end imperialism. It was fought among five major empires to see which one would be dominant. In the end, it allowed Great Britain, not Germany, to exploit the undeveloped parts of Asia and Africa.
The Peace—under the form of "mandates"—makes the process of exploitation easier and more legal than it ever has been in the past. The guarantees of territorial integrity, under the League Covenant, do more than has ever been done heretofore to preserve for the imperial masters of the earth their imperial prerogatives.
The Peace—through "mandates"—makes it easier and more lawful for exploitation than ever before. The guarantees of territorial integrity, under the League Covenant, do more than has been done in the past to protect the imperial powers of the world and their imperial rights.
New names are being used but it is the old struggle. Egypt and India helped to win the war, and by that very process, they fastened the shackles of servitude more firmly upon their own hands and feet. The imperialists of the world never had less intention than they have to-day of quitting the game of empire building. Quite the contrary—a wholly new group of empire builders has been quickened into life by the experiences of the past five years.
New names are being used, but it's the same old struggle. Egypt and India contributed to winning the war, and through that process, they tightened the chains of servitude around their own hands and feet. The imperialists of the world have never been less inclined than they are today to give up on empire building. In fact, a completely new group of empire builders has emerged, energized by the experiences of the past five years.
The present struggle for the possession of the oil fields of the world is typical of the economic conflicts that are involved in imperial struggles. For years the capitalists[Pg 241] of the great investing nations have been fighting to control the oil fields of Mexico. They have hired brigands, bought governors, corrupted executives. The war settled the Mexican question in favor of the United States. Mexico, considered internationally, is to-day a province of the American Empire.
The current battle for control of the world's oil fields reflects the economic conflicts that come with imperial ambitions. For years, the capitalists[Pg 241] from major investing nations have been vying for dominance over Mexico's oil fields. They've employed mercenaries, bribed governors, and manipulated executives. The war resolved the Mexican issue in favor of the United States. Today, Mexico is seen internationally as a part of the American Empire.
During the blackest days of the war, when Paris seemed doomed, the British divided their forces. One army was operating across the deserts of the Near East. For what purpose? When the Peace was signed, Great Britain held two vantage points—the oil fields of the Near East and the road from Berlin to Bagdad.
During the darkest days of the war, when Paris appeared to be doomed, the British split their forces. One unit was operating across the deserts of the Near East. For what reason? When the Peace was signed, Great Britain held two key positions—the oil fields of the Near East and the route from Berlin to Baghdad.
The late war was not a war to end war, nor was it a war for disarmament. German militarism is not destroyed; the appropriations for military and naval purposes, made by the great nations during the last two years, are greater than they have ever been in any peace years that are known to history.
The recent war wasn't a war to end all wars, nor was it a war aimed at disarmament. German militarism isn't gone; the budgets for military and naval purposes set by major nations in the last two years are higher than they've ever been during any known peace years in history.
The world is preparing for war to-day as actively as it was in the years preceding the War of 1914. The years from 1914 to 1918 were the opening episodes; the first engagements of the Great War.
The world is gearing up for war today just as eagerly as it was in the years leading up to the War of 1914. The years from 1914 to 1918 marked the beginning events; the first battles of the Great War.
There is no question, among those who have taken the trouble to inform themselves, but that the War of 1914 was fought for economic and commercial advantage. The same rivalries that preceded 1914 are more active in the world to-day than ever before. Hence the possibilities of war are greater by exactly that amount. The imperial struggle is being continued and a part of the imperial struggle is war.
There’s no doubt, among those who have bothered to educate themselves, that the War of 1914 was fought for economic and commercial gain. The same rivalries that existed before 1914 are more intense in the world today than ever. As a result, the chances of war are higher by that same measure. The imperial struggle is ongoing, and war is a part of that struggle.
8. Again!
This monstrous thing called war will occur again! Not because any considerable number of people want it, not even because an active minority wills it, but because the present system of competitive capitalism makes war inevitable. Economic rivalries are the basis of modern wars and economic rivalries are the warp and woof of capitalism.
This horrible thing called war is going to happen again! Not because a significant number of people want it, not even because a small, active group desires it, but because the current system of competitive capitalism makes war unavoidable. Economic rivalries are the foundation of modern wars, and these rivalries are the essence of capitalism.
To-day the rivalries are economic—in the fields of commerce and industry and finance. To-morrow they will be military.
Today, the rivalries are economic—in commerce, industry, and finance. Tomorrow, they will be military.
Already the nations have begun the competition in the building of tanks, battleships and airplanes. These instruments of destruction are built for use, and when the time comes, they will be used as they were between 1914 and 1918.
Already the nations have started competing in the construction of tanks, battleships, and airplanes. These tools of destruction are made for action, and when the time comes, they will be used just like they were from 1914 to 1918.
Again there will be the war propaganda—subtle at first, then more and more open. There will be stories of atrocities; threats of world conquest. "Preparedness" will be the cry.
Again there will be war propaganda—subtle at first, then increasingly blatant. There will be stories of atrocities and threats of world domination. "Preparedness" will be the rallying call.
Again there will be the talk of "My country, right or wrong"; "Stand behind the President"; "Fall in line"; "Go over the top!"
Again there will be talk of "My country, right or wrong"; "Stand behind the President"; "Get in line"; "Go all out!"
Again fear will stalk through the land, while hate and war lust are whipped into a frenzy.
Again, fear will spread across the land, as hate and the desire for war are fueled into a frenzy.
Again there will be conscription, and the straightest and strongest of the young men will leave their homes and join the colors.
Again, there will be a draft, and the fittest and strongest young men will leave their homes to serve in the military.
Again the most stalwart men of the nations will "dig themselves in" and slaughter one another for years on end.
Again, the strongest men from the nations will "dig in" and kill each other for years on end.
Again the truth-tellers will be mobbed and jailed and lynched, while those who champion the cause of the workers will be served with injunctions if they refuse to sell out to the masters.
Again the truth-tellers will be overwhelmed and imprisoned and lynched, while those who support the workers will face legal orders if they refuse to betray their principles for the bosses.
Again the profiteers will stop at home and reap their harvests out of the agony and the blood of the nation.
Again, the profit-seekers will stay at home and take advantage of the suffering and the blood of the nation.
Again, when the killing is over, a few old men, sitting around a table, will carve the world—stripping the vanquished while they reward the victors.
Again, when the fighting is done, a few old men sitting around a table will divide up the world—taking from the defeated while they reward the winners.
Again the preparations will begin for the next war. The people will be fed on promises, phrases and lies. They will pay and they will die for the benefit of their masters, and thus the terrible tragedy of imperialism will continue to bathe the world in tears and in blood.
Again, preparations will start for the next war. People will be fed promises, phrases, and lies. They will pay and die for the benefit of their leaders, and so the awful tragedy of imperialism will keep flooding the world with tears and blood.
XVIII. THE CHALLENGE TO IMPERIALISM
1. Revolutionary Protest
Since the Franco-Prussian War the people of Europe have been waking up to the failure of imperialism. The period has been marked by a rapid growth of Socialism on the continent and of trade-unionism in Great Britain. Both movements are expressions of an increasing working-class solidarity; both voice the sentiments of internationalism that were sounded so loudly during the revolutionary period of the eighteenth century.
Since the Franco-Prussian War, the people of Europe have been realizing the shortcomings of imperialism. This time has seen a quick rise in Socialism across the continent and in trade unionism in Great Britain. Both movements represent a growing solidarity among the working class; both express the feelings of internationalism that were strongly articulated during the revolutionary period of the eighteenth century.
The rapid growth of the European labor movement worried the autocrats and imperialists. Bismarck suppressed it; the Russian police tortured it. Despite all of the efforts to check it or to crush it, the revolutionary movement in Europe gained force. The speeches and writings of the leaders were directed against the capitalist system, and the rank and file of the workers, rendered sharply class conscious by the traditions of class rule, responded to the appeal by organizing new forms of protest.
The fast growth of the European labor movement alarmed the dictators and imperialists. Bismarck tried to suppress it; the Russian police tortured it. Despite all attempts to control or destroy it, the revolutionary movement in Europe gained momentum. The speeches and writings of the leaders targeted the capitalist system, and the ordinary workers, increasingly aware of their class struggle due to longstanding class rule, answered the call by forming new ways to protest.
The first revolutionary wave of the twentieth century broke in Russia in 1905. The Russian Revolution of 1917 destroyed the old régime and replaced it first by a moderate or liberal and then by a radical communist control. Like all of the proletarian movements in Europe the Russian revolutionary movement was directed against "capitalism" and "imperialism" and despite the fact that there was no considerable development of the capitalist system in Russia, its imperial organization was so thoroughgoing, and the imperial attitude toward the working class had been so brutally revealed during the revolutionary demonstrations in 1905, that the people reacted with a true Slavic intensity against the despotism that they knew, which was that of an autocratic, feudal master-class.
The first major wave of revolution in the twentieth century hit Russia in 1905. The Russian Revolution of 1917 dismantled the old regime and was initially replaced by a moderate or liberal government, followed by radical communist rule. Like other working-class movements in Europe, the Russian revolutionaries targeted "capitalism" and "imperialism." Even though the capitalist system had not developed significantly in Russia, its imperial structure was deeply entrenched, and the brutal treatment of the working class during the 1905 protests highlighted the harsh reality. As a result, the people reacted with intense Slavic passion against the tyranny they experienced under an autocratic, feudal ruling class.
The international doctrines of the new Russian régime were expressed in the phrase "no forcible annexations, no punitive indemnities, the free development of all peoples." The keynote of its internal policy is contained in Section 16 of the Russian Constitution, which makes work the duty of every citizen of the Republic and proclaims as the motto of the new government the doctrine, "He that will not work neither shall he eat." The franchise is restricted. Only workers (including housekeepers) are permitted to vote. Profiteers and exploiters are specifically denied the right to vote or to hold office. Resources are nationalized together with the financial and industrial machinery of Russia. The Bill of Rights contained in the first section of the Russian Constitution is a pronouncement in favor of the liberty of the workers from every form of exploitation and economic oppression.
The international principles of the new Russian government were summed up in the phrase "no forced takeovers, no punitive reparations, the free development of all nations." The core of its domestic policy is found in Section 16 of the Russian Constitution, which states that work is the duty of every citizen of the Republic and declares the motto of the new government: "He who does not work shall not eat." Voting rights are limited. Only workers (including homemakers) are allowed to vote. Profiteers and exploiters are explicitly barred from voting or holding office. Resources, along with Russia's financial and industrial systems, are nationalized. The Bill of Rights in the first section of the Russian Constitution champions the freedom of workers from all forms of exploitation and economic oppression.
The Russian revolution was directed against capitalism in Russia and against imperialism everywhere. This dramatic assault upon capitalist imperialism centered the eyes of the world upon Russia, making her experiment the outstanding feature of a period during which the workers were striving to realize the possibilities of a more abundant life for the masses of mankind.
The Russian Revolution was aimed at overthrowing capitalism in Russia and fighting imperialism worldwide. This bold challenge to capitalist imperialism drew the world's attention to Russia, making its experiment a key focus during a time when workers were working hard to achieve a better quality of life for the masses.
2. Outlawing Bolshevism
Capitalist diplomats were wary of the Kerensky régime because they did not feel certain how far the Russian people intended to go. The triumph of the Bolsheviki made the issue unmistakably clear. There could be no peace between Bolshevism and capitalism. From that day forward it was a struggle to determine which of the two economic systems should survive.
Capitalist diplomats were cautious about the Kerensky government because they weren't sure how far the Russian people were willing to go. The success of the Bolsheviks made the issue crystal clear. There could be no peace between Bolshevism and capitalism. From that day on, it became a battle to decide which of the two economic systems would survive.
During the years 1918 and 1919 the capitalist world organized one of the most effective advertising campaigns that has ever been staged. Every shred of evidence that, by any stretch of the imagination, could be distorted into an attack upon the Bolshevist régime, was scattered [Pg 245]broadcast over the world. Where evidence was lacking, rumor and innuendo were employed. The leading newspapers and magazines, prominent statesmen, educators, clergymen, scientists and public men in every walk of life went out of their way to denounce the Russian experiment in very much the same manner that the propertied interests of Europe had denounced the French experiment during the years that followed 1789.
During the years 1918 and 1919, the capitalist world launched one of the most effective advertising campaigns ever. Every bit of evidence that could even remotely be twisted into an attack on the Bolshevik government was distributed and broadcast worldwide. Where evidence was lacking, rumors and innuendos were used. Leading newspapers and magazines, prominent politicians, educators, clergy, scientists, and public figures from all walks of life went out of their way to criticize the Russian experiment, much like the wealthy interests in Europe had condemned the French experiment in the years following 1789.
All of the great imperialist governments had at their disposal a vast machinery for the purveying of information—false or true as the case might demand. This public machinery like the machinery of private capitalism was turned against Bolshevism. The capitalist governments went farther by backing with money and supplies the counter revolutionary forces under Yudenich, Denekine, Seminoff, and Kolchak. Allied expeditions were landed on the soil of European and Asiatic Russia "to free the Russian people from the clutches of the Bolsheviki." A blockade was declared in which the Germans were invited to join (after the signing of the armistice), and the whole capitalist world united to starve into submission the men, women and children of revolutionary Russia.
All the major imperialist governments had access to a vast system for spreading information—whether it was true or false, depending on what was needed. This public system, much like the system of private capitalism, was used against Bolshevism. The capitalist governments went further by financing and supplying the counter-revolutionary forces led by Yudenich, Denekine, Seminoff, and Kolchak. Allied troops were sent to both European and Asian Russia "to liberate the Russian people from the grip of the Bolsheviks." A blockade was announced, with an invitation for the Germans to join (after the armistice was signed), and the entire capitalist world came together to starve the men, women, and children of revolutionary Russia into submission.
No event of recent times, not even the holy war against the autocracy of militarist Germany, had created such a unanimity of action among the Western nations. Bolshevism threatened the very existence of capitalism and as such its destruction became the first task of the capitalist world.
No recent event, not even the holy war against the authoritarian regime of militarist Germany, had generated such a unified response among Western nations. Bolshevism posed a direct threat to the very existence of capitalism, and as a result, eliminating it became the top priority for the capitalist world.
The collapse of the capitalist efforts to destroy socialist Russia reflects the power of a new idea over the ancient form. The Allied expeditions into Russia met with hostility instead of welcome. The counter-revolutionary forces were overwhelmed by the red army. The buffer states made peace. The Allied soldiers mutinied when called upon to take part in a war against the forces of revolutionary Russia. "Holy Russia" became holy Russia indeed—recognized and respected by the proletarian forces throughout Europe.
The failure of capitalist attempts to eliminate socialist Russia shows the strength of a new idea over an old system. The Allied forces that invaded Russia faced hostility rather than support. The counter-revolutionary forces were defeated by the Red Army. The buffer states reached peace agreements. Allied soldiers refused to fight against the revolutionary forces in Russia. "Holy Russia" truly became holy Russia—acknowledged and valued by the working-class movements across Europe.
3. The New Europe
Russia is the dramatic center of the European movement against capitalist imperialism, but the movement is not confined to Russia. Its activities are extended into every important country on the continent.
Russia is the dramatic center of the European movement against capitalist imperialism, but the movement isn't limited to Russia. Its activities extend into every major country on the continent.
Since March, 1917, when the first revolution occurred in Russia, absolute monarchy and divine, kingly rights have practically disappeared from Europe. Before the Russian Revolution, four-fifths of the people of Europe were under the sway of monarchs who exercised dictatorial power over the domestic and foreign affairs of their respective nations. Within two years, the Hohenzollerns, the Hapsburgs and the Romanoffs were driven from the thrones of Germany, of Austria and of Russia. Other rulers of lesser importance followed in their wake, until to-day, the old feudal power that held the political control over most of Europe in 1914 has practically disappeared.
Since March 1917, when the first revolution hit Russia, absolute monarchy and divine right of kings have nearly vanished from Europe. Before the Russian Revolution, four-fifths of Europe was under the control of monarchs who wielded dictatorial power over the internal and external affairs of their countries. Within two years, the Hohenzollerns, the Hapsburgs, and the Romanovs were ousted from the thrones of Germany, Austria, and Russia. Other less significant rulers followed, and today, the old feudal power that once dominated most of Europe in 1914 has almost completely disappeared.
This is the obvious thing—a revolution in the form of political government—the kind of revolution with which history usually deals.
This is the clear point—a revolution in political governance—the type of revolution that history typically addresses.
But there is another revolution proceeding in Europe, far more important because more fundamental—the economic and social revolution; the change in the form of breadwinning; the change in the relation between a man and the tools that he uses to earn his livelihood.
But there is another revolution happening in Europe, much more important because it's more fundamental—the economic and social revolution; the shift in how people earn a living; the change in the relationship between a person and the tools they use to make a living.
Every one knows, now, that Czars and Kaisers and Emperors did not really control Europe before 1914, except in so far as they yielded to bankers and to business men. The crown and the scepter gave the appearance of power, but behind them were concessions, monopolies, economic preferments, and special privilege. The European revolution that began in 1917 with the Czar, did not stop with kings. It began with them because they were in such plain sight, but when it had finished with them it went right on to the bankers and the business men.
Everyone knows now that Czars, Kaisers, and Emperors didn't truly control Europe before 1914, except to the extent that they submitted to bankers and businesspeople. The crown and scepter gave the illusion of power, but behind them were concessions, monopolies, economic favors, and special privileges. The European revolution that started in 1917 with the Czar didn't stop with the kings. It began with them because they were so visible, but once it was done with them, it continued on to the bankers and businesspeople.
War is destruction, organized and directed by the best brains available. It is merry sport for the organizers and for some of the directors, but like any other destructive agent, it may get out of hand. The War of 1914 was to last for six weeks. It dragged on for five years, and the wars that have grown out of it are still continuing. In the course of those five years, the war destroyed the capitalist system of continental Europe. Patches and shreds of it remained, but they were like the topless, shattered trees on the scarred battle-fields. They were remnants—nothing more. In the first place, the war destroyed the confidence of the people in the capitalist system; in the second place, it smashed up the political machinery of capitalism; in the third place, it weakened or destroyed the economic machinery of capitalism.
War is organized destruction, managed by the smartest people available. It's a thrilling game for the planners and some of the leaders, but like any destructive force, it can spiral out of control. The War of 1914 was supposed to last six weeks. Instead, it dragged on for five years, and the conflicts that emerged from it continue to this day. Over those five years, the war dismantled the capitalist system of continental Europe. Some parts of it remained, but they were like the shattered, leafless trees on the ravaged battlefields. They were just remnants—nothing more. First, the war shattered people's trust in the capitalist system; second, it broke down the political structure of capitalism; and third, it weakened or dismantled the economic framework of capitalism.
Each government, to win the war, lied to its people. They were told that their country was invaded. They were assured that the war would be a short affair. Besides that, there were various reasons given for the struggle—it was a war to end war; it was a war to break the iron ring that was crushing a people; it was a war for liberty; it was a struggle to make the world safe for democracy.
Each government, to win the war, lied to its people. They were told that their country was invaded. They were assured that the war would be a quick affair. On top of that, there were various reasons given for the fight—it was a war to end all wars; it was a war to break the oppressive grip that was crushing a people; it was a war for freedom; it was a struggle to make the world safe for democracy.
Not a single important promise of the war was fulfilled, save only the promise of victory. Hundreds of millions, aroused to the heights of an exalted idealism, came back to earth only to find themselves betrayed. With less promise and more fulfillment; with at least an appearance of statesmanship; with some respect for the simple moralities of truth-telling, fair-dealing, and common honor, there might have been some chance for the capitalist system to retain the confidence of the peoples of war-torn Europe, even in the face of the Russian Revolution; but each of these things was lacking, and as one worker put it: "I don't know what Bolshevism is, but it couldn't be any worse than what we have now, so I'm for it!"
Not a single major promise of the war was kept, except for the promise of victory. Hundreds of millions, stirred by a lofty ideal, returned to reality only to find themselves let down. If there had been less talk and more action; if there had been some semblance of leadership; if there had been a respect for basic moral principles like honesty, fairness, and common decency, there might have been a chance for the capitalist system to earn back the trust of the people in war-torn Europe, even in light of the Russian Revolution. But none of that happened, and as one worker put it: "I don’t know what Bolshevism is, but it can’t be any worse than what we have now, so I’m for it!"
Such a loss of public confidence would have proved a serious blow to any social system, even were it capable of immediately reëstablishing normal conditions of living[Pg 248] among the people. In this case, the same events that destroyed public confidence in the capitalist system, destroyed the system itself.
Such a loss of public confidence would have seriously impacted any social system, even if it could quickly restore normal living conditions[Pg 248] for the people. In this case, the same events that shattered public confidence in the capitalist system also led to the system's downfall.
The old political forms of Europe—the czars, emperors and kaisers, who stood as the visible symbols of established order and civilization, were overthrown during the war. The economic forces—the banks and business men—had used these forms for the promotion of their business enterprises. Capitalism depended on czars and kaisers as a blacksmith depends on his hammer. They were among the tools with which business forged the chains of its power. They were the political side of the capitalist system. While the people accepted them and believed in them, the business interests were able to use these political tools at will. The tools were destroyed in the fierce pressure of war and revolution, and with them went one of the chief assets of the European capitalists.
The old political structures of Europe—like the czars, emperors, and kaisers, who represented established order and civilization—were toppled during the war. Economic forces—banks and businessmen—had relied on these figures to boost their enterprises. Capitalism was as dependent on czars and kaisers as a blacksmith is on his hammer. They were part of the arsenal used by business to create their power. As long as the people accepted and believed in them, business interests could manipulate these political tools freely. The tools were destroyed under the intense pressure of war and revolution, taking with them a major asset of the European capitalists.
There was a third breakdown—far more important than the break in the political machinery of the capitalist system—and that was the annihilation of the old economic life.
There was a third breakdown—much more significant than the disruption in the political machinery of the capitalist system—and that was the destruction of the old economic life.
Economic life is, in its elements, very simple. Raw materials—iron ore, copper, cotton, petroleum, coal and wheat—are converted, by some process of labor, into things that feed, clothe and house people. There are four stages in this process—raw materials; manufacturing; transportation; marketing. If there is a failure in one of the four, all of the rest go wrong, as is very clearly illustrated whenever there is a great miners' or railroad workers' strike, or when there is a failure of a particular crop. During the war, all four of these economic stages went wrong.
Economic life is fundamentally quite simple. Raw materials—iron ore, copper, cotton, oil, coal, and wheat—are transformed through some form of labor into products that feed, clothe, and shelter people. This process has four stages: raw materials, manufacturing, transportation, and marketing. If any one of these four fails, the others are affected, as seen during major strikes by miners or railroad workers, or when a specific crop fails. During the war, all four of these economic stages fell apart.
Between the years 1914 and 1918 the people of Europe busied themselves with a war that put their economic machine out of the running.
Between 1914 and 1918, the people of Europe were occupied with a war that disrupted their economic system.
For a hundred years the European nations had been busy building a finely adjusted economic mechanism; population, finance, commerce—all were knit into the same system. This system the war demolished, and the years that have[Pg 249] followed the Armistice have not seen it rebuilt in any essential particular, save in Great Britain and in some of the neutral countries.
For a hundred years, European nations had been focused on creating a carefully calibrated economic system; population, finance, and commerce were all interconnected. The war shattered this system, and the years that have[Pg 249] followed the Armistice haven't seen it rebuilt in any significant way, except in Great Britain and a few of the neutral countries.
Not only were the European nations unable to give commodities in exchange for the things they needed but the machinery of finance, by means of which these transactions were formerly facilitated, was crippled almost beyond repair. Under the old system buying and selling were carried on by the use of money, and money ceased to be a stable medium of exchange in Europe. It would be more correct to say that money was no longer taken seriously in many parts of Europe. During the war the European governments printed 75 billions of dollars' worth of paper money. This paper depreciated to a ridiculous extent. Before the war, the franc, the lira, the mark and the crown had about the same value—20 to 23 cents, or about five to a dollar. By 1920 the dollar bought 15 francs; 23 liras; 40 marks, and 250 Austrian crowns. In some of the ready-made countries, constituted under the Treaty or set up by the Allies as a cordon about Russia, hundreds and thousands of crowns could be had for a dollar. Even the pound sterling, which kept its value better than the money of any of the other European combatants, was thirty per cent. below par, when measured in terms of dollars. This situation made it impossible for the nations whose money was at such a heavy discount to purchase supplies from the more fortunate countries. But to make matters even worse, the rate of exchange fluctuated from day to day and from hour to hour so that business transactions could only be negotiated on an immense margin of safety.
Not only were the European countries unable to provide goods in exchange for what they needed, but the financial system that used to facilitate these transactions had been severely damaged. In the past, buying and selling were done using money, but money had lost its stability as a medium of exchange in Europe. It would be more accurate to say that money was no longer taken seriously in many parts of Europe. During the war, European governments printed $75 billion worth of paper currency, which quickly lost its value. Before the war, the franc, lira, mark, and crown were roughly equivalent, valued at about 20 to 23 cents, or around five to a dollar. By 1920, a dollar could buy 15 francs, 23 liras, 40 marks, and 250 Austrian crowns. In some of the newly formed countries established under the Treaty or set up by the Allies around Russia, you could get hundreds or thousands of crowns for a dollar. Even the pound sterling, which maintained its value better than the currencies of the other European combatants, was still 30 percent below par when converted to dollars. This situation made it impossible for countries with such devalued currencies to purchase supplies from more fortunate nations. To make matters worse, the exchange rate fluctuated daily and even hourly, so business transactions could only be conducted with a significant margin of safety.
Add to this financial dissolution the mountains of debt, the huge interest charges and the oppressive taxes, and the picture of economic ruin is complete.
Add to this financial breakdown the mountains of debt, the huge interest charges, and the heavy taxes, and the picture of economic disaster is complete.
The old capitalist world, organized on the theory of competition between the business men within each nation, and between the business men of one nation and those of another nation, reached a point where it would no longer work.
The traditional capitalist world, structured around the idea of competition among entrepreneurs within each country and between the entrepreneurs of different countries, has reached a point where it can no longer function.
In Russia the old system had disappeared, and a new system had been set up in its place. In Germany, and throughout central Europe, the old system was shattered, and the new had not yet emerged. In France, Italy and Great Britain the old system was in process of disintegration—rapid in France and Italy; slower in Great Britain. But in all of these countries intelligent men and women were asking the only question that statesmanship could ask—the question, "What next?"
In Russia, the old system was gone, and a new one had taken its place. In Germany and across central Europe, the old system was broken, and the new one hadn’t yet come into being. In France, Italy, and Great Britain, the old system was falling apart—quickly in France and Italy, but more slowly in Great Britain. However, in all these countries, smart men and women were asking the only question that leaders could consider—the question, "What’s next?"
The capitalist system was stronger in Great Britain than in any of the other warring countries of Europe. Before the war, it rested on a surer foundation. During the war, it withstood better than any other the financial and industrial demands. Since the war, it has made the best recovery.
The capitalist system was more robust in Great Britain than in any of the other warring countries in Europe. Before the war, it was built on a solid foundation. During the war, it handled the financial and industrial demands better than any other system. Since the war, it has made the strongest recovery.
Great Britain is the most successful of the capitalist states. The other capitalist nations of Europe regard her as the inner citadel of European capitalism. The British Labor Movement is seeking to take this citadel from within.
Great Britain is the most successful of the capitalist countries. The other capitalist nations in Europe see it as the stronghold of European capitalism. The British Labor Movement is trying to take this stronghold from the inside.
The British Labor Movement is a formidable affair. There are not more than a hundred thousand members in all of the Socialist parties, in the Independent Labor Party and in the Communist Party combined. There are between six and seven millions of members in the trade unions.
The British Labor Movement is a powerful force. There are not more than a hundred thousand members across all Socialist parties, the Independent Labor Party, and the Communist Party combined. There are between six and seven million members in the trade unions.
Perhaps the best test of the strength of the British Labor Movement came in the summer of 1920, over the prospective war with Russia. Warsaw was threatened. Its fall seemed imminent, and both Millerand and Lloyd-George made it clear that the fall of Warsaw meant war. The situation developed with extraordinary rapidity. It was reported that the British Government had dispatched an ultimatum. The Labor Movement acted with a strength and precision that swept the Government off its feet and compelled an immediate reversal of policy.
Perhaps the best test of the strength of the British Labor Movement came in the summer of 1920, during the looming war with Russia. Warsaw was under threat. Its fall seemed unavoidable, and both Millerand and Lloyd-George made it clear that if Warsaw fell, war would follow. The situation unfolded incredibly quickly. Reports stated that the British Government had sent an ultimatum. The Labor Movement responded with such strength and precision that it caught the Government off guard and forced an immediate change in policy.
Over night, the workers of Great Britain were united in the Council of Action. As originally constituted, the "Labor and Russia Council of Action" consisted of five[Pg 251] representatives each from the Parliamentary Committee of the Trades Union Congress, the Executive Committee of the Labor Party and the Parliamentary Labor Party. To these fifteen were added eight others, among whom were representatives of every element in the British Labor Movement. This Council of Action did three things—it notified the Government that there must be no war with Russia; it organized meetings and demonstrations in every corner of the United Kingdom to formulate public opinion; it began the organization of local councils of action, of which there were three hundred within four weeks. The Council of Action also called a special conference of the British Labor Movement which met in London on August 13. There were over a thousand delegates at this conference, which opened and closed with the singing of the "Internationale." When the principal resolution of endorsement was passed, approving the formation of the Council of Action, the delegates rose to their feet, cheered the move to the echo, and sang the "Internationale" and "The Red Flag." The closing resolution authorized the Council of Action to take "any steps that may be necessary to give effect to the decisions of the Conference and the declared policy of the Trade Union and Labor Movement."
Overnight, the workers of Great Britain came together in the Council of Action. Initially formed as the "Labor and Russia Council of Action," it included five[Pg 251] representatives each from the Parliamentary Committee of the Trades Union Congress, the Executive Committee of the Labor Party, and the Parliamentary Labor Party. To these fifteen, eight more were added, representing every part of the British Labor Movement. This Council of Action did three main things: it informed the Government that there should be no war with Russia; it organized meetings and demonstrations across the United Kingdom to shape public opinion; and it started setting up local councils of action, totaling three hundred within four weeks. The Council of Action also called for a special conference of the British Labor Movement, which gathered in London on August 13. Over a thousand delegates attended this conference, which began and ended with the singing of the "Internationale." When the main resolution of support for the formation of the Council of Action was passed, the delegates stood up, cheered loudly, and sang the "Internationale" and "The Red Flag." The closing resolution allowed the Council of Action to take "any steps that may be necessary to give effect to the decisions of the Conference and the declared policy of the Trade Union and Labor Movement."
Such was the position in the "Citadel of European Capitalism." The Government was forced to deal with a body that, for all practical purposes, was determining the foreign policy of the Empire. Behind that Council was an organized group of between six and seven millions of workers who were out to get the control of industry into their own hands, and to do it as speedily and as effectually as circumstances would permit.
Such was the situation in the "Citadel of European Capitalism." The government had to deal with a group that, for all practical purposes, was shaping the foreign policy of the Empire. Behind that Council was a coordinated group of around six to seven million workers who were determined to take control of industry for themselves and to do it as quickly and effectively as the circumstances allowed.
Meanwhile, the mantle of revolutionary activity descended upon Italy, where the red flag was run up over some the largest factories and some of the finest estates.
Meanwhile, the revolutionary activity took hold in Italy, where the red flag was raised over some of the largest factories and some of the most impressive estates.
Throughout the war, the revolutionary movement was strong in Italy. The Socialist Party remained consistently an anti-war party, with a radical and vigorous propaganda. The Armistice found the Socialist and Labor Movements[Pg 252] strong in the North, with a growing movement in the South for the organization of Agricultural Leagues.
Throughout the war, the revolutionary movement was powerful in Italy. The Socialist Party consistently opposed the war, using bold and energetic propaganda. The Armistice revealed the Socialist and Labor Movements[Pg 252] were strong in the North, with an increasing movement in the South focused on organizing Agricultural Leagues.
The Socialist propaganda in Italy was very consistent and telling. The paper "Avanti," circulating in all parts of the country, was an agency of immense importance. The war, the Treaty, the rising cost of living, the growing taxation—all had prepared the ground for the work that the propagandists were doing. Their message was: "Make ready for the taking over of the industries! Learn what you can, so that, when the day comes, each will play his part. When you get the word, take over the works! There must be no violence—that only helps the other side. Do not linger on the streets, you will be shot. Remain at home or stay in the factories and work as you never worked before!"
The Socialist propaganda in Italy was very consistent and impactful. The paper "Avanti," which was distributed throughout the country, played a crucial role. The war, the Treaty, rising living costs, and increasing taxes had all created a foundation for the work the propagandists were doing. Their message was: "Get ready to take over the industries! Learn as much as you can, so that when the time comes, everyone can contribute. When you get the signal, take control of the factories! There must be no violence—that only benefits the opposition. Don’t hang around on the streets, you could get shot. Stay home or stay at the factories and work harder than you ever have!"
That, in essence, was the Italian Socialist propaganda—simple, clear and direct, and that was, in effect, what the workers did.
That was basically the Italian Socialist propaganda—simple, clear, and direct, and that's exactly what the workers did.
The returned soldiers were a factor of large importance in the Italian Revolution. They were radicals throughout the war. The peace made them revolutionists. "The Proletarian League of the Great War" was affiliated with "The International of Former Soldiers," which comprised the radical elements among the ex-service men of Great Britain, Germany, France, Austria, Italy and a number of the smaller countries. There were over a million dues-paying members in this International, and their avowed object was propaganda against war and in favor of an economic system in which the workers control the industries. It was this group in Italy—particularly in the South—that carried through the project of occupying the estates.
The returning soldiers played a crucial role in the Italian Revolution. They were radicals throughout the war, but the peace turned them into revolutionaries. "The Proletarian League of the Great War" was connected to "The International of Former Soldiers," which included the radical members among ex-service men from Great Britain, Germany, France, Austria, Italy, and several smaller countries. There were over a million dues-paying members in this International, and their stated goal was to promote anti-war propaganda and advocate for an economic system where workers control the industries. This group in Italy—especially in the South—was responsible for the campaign to occupy the estates.
The workers are in control of the whole social fabric in Russia where the revolution has gone the farthest. In Great Britain, where the labor movement is perhaps more conservative than in any of the other countries of Europe, the Government is compelled to deal with a labor movement that is strong enough to consider and to decide [Pg 253]important matters of foreign policy. The workers of Italy have the upper hand. In Czecho-Slovakia, in Bulgaria, in Germany and in the smaller and neutral countries the workers are making their voices heard in opposition to any restoration of the capitalist system; while they busy themselves with the task of creating the framework of a new society.
The workers are in control of the entire social structure in Russia, where the revolution has gone the farthest. In Great Britain, where the labor movement is probably more conservative than in any other European country, the Government must engage with a labor movement that is strong enough to address and decide [Pg 253]important foreign policy issues. The workers in Italy are in a powerful position. In Czecho-Slovakia, Bulgaria, Germany, and the smaller neutral countries, workers are making their voices heard against any return to the capitalist system, while they work on building the framework for a new society.
4. The Challenge
This is the challenge of the workers of Europe to the capitalist system. The workers are not satisfied; they are questioning. They mean to have the best that life has to give, and they are convinced that the capitalist system has denied it to them.
This is the challenge that the workers of Europe are posing to the capitalist system. The workers are not satisfied; they are questioning things. They want to have the best that life has to offer, and they believe that the capitalist system has denied them that opportunity.
The world has had more than a century of capitalism. The workers have had ample opportunity to see the system at work. The people of all the great capitalist countries—the common people—have borne the burdens and felt the crushing weight of capitalism—in its enslavement of little children; in its underpaying of women; in long hours of unremitting, monotonous toil; in the dreadful housing; in the starvation wages; in unemployment; in misery. The capitalist system has had a trial and it is upon the workers that the system has been tried out.
The world has experienced over a hundred years of capitalism. Workers have had plenty of chances to see how the system operates. The everyday people in all the major capitalist countries have shouldered the burdens and felt the heavy weight of capitalism—in the exploitation of young children; in the unfair pay for women; in the long hours of relentless, repetitive labor; in the terrible living conditions; in the meager wages; in unemployment; in suffering. The capitalist system has been tested, and it is the workers who have been the subjects of that trial.
During this experiment, the workers of the world have been compelled to accept poverty, unemployment and war.
During this experiment, people around the world have been forced to face poverty, unemployment, and war.
These terrible scourges have afflicted the capitalist world, and it is the workers and their families that have borne them in their own persons. In those countries where the capitalist system is the oldest, the workers have suffered the longest. The essence of capitalism is the exploitation of one man by another man, and the longer this exploitation is practiced the more skillful and effective does the master class become in its manipulation.
These terrible problems have affected the capitalist world, and it's the workers and their families who have felt the impact firsthand. In those countries where capitalism has existed the longest, the workers have endured the most suffering. The core of capitalism is the exploitation of one person by another, and the longer this exploitation continues, the more adept and effective the ruling class becomes at controlling it.
The workers look before them along the path of capitalist imperialism that is now being followed by the nations that are in the lead of the capitalist world. There[Pg 254] they see no promise save the same exploitation, the same poverty, the same inequality and the same wars over the commercial rivalries of the imperial nations.
The workers look ahead along the path of capitalist imperialism that is currently being pursued by the leading nations in the capitalist world. There[Pg 254] they see no hope except for the same exploitation, the same poverty, the same inequality, and the same wars fueled by the commercial rivalries of the imperial nations.
The workers of Europe have come to the conclusion that the world should belong to those who build it; that the good things of life should be the property of those who produce them. They see only one course open before them—to declare that those who will not work, shall not eat.
The workers of Europe have realized that the world should belong to those who create it; that the good things in life should be owned by those who produce them. They see only one option ahead of them—to state that those who do not work, shall not eat.
The right of self-determination is the international expression of this challenge. The ownership of the job is its industrial equivalent. Together, the two ideas comprise the program of the more advanced workers in all of the great imperial countries of the world. These ideas did not originate in Russia, and they are not confined to Russia any more than capitalism is confined to Great Britain. They are the doctrines of the new order that is coming rapidly into its own.
The right to self-determination is the global expression of this challenge. Having ownership of one’s job is its industrial equivalent. Together, these two concepts make up the agenda of the more progressive workers in all the major imperial nations around the world. These ideas didn’t start in Russia, and they’re not limited to Russia any more than capitalism is limited to Great Britain. They are the principles of the new order that is quickly establishing itself.
Capitalism has been summed up, heretofore, in the one word "profit." The capitalist cannot abandon that standard. The world has lived beyond it, however, and without it, capitalism, as a system, is meaningless. If the capitalists abandon profit, they abandon capitalism.
Capitalism has always been summarized by the word "profit." The capitalist can't let go of that standard. However, the world has moved past it, and without profit, capitalism as a system loses its meaning. If capitalists give up on profit, they give up on capitalism.
Without profit the capitalist system falls to pieces, because it is the profit incentive that has always been considered as the binder that holds the capitalist world together. Hence the abandonment of the profit incentive is the surrender of the citadel of capitalism. While profit remains, exploitation persists, and while there is exploitation of one man by another, no human being can call himself free.
Without profit, the capitalist system falls apart, because the profit motive has always been seen as the glue that holds the capitalist world together. Therefore, abandoning the profit motive is giving up the foundation of capitalism. As long as profit exists, exploitation continues, and as long as one person exploits another, no one can truly consider themselves free.
The capitalists are caught in a beleaguered fortress in which they are defending their economic lives. Profit is the key to this fortress, and if they surrender the key, they are lost.
The capitalists are trapped in a struggling fortress where they are fighting for their economic survival. Profit is the key to this fortress, and if they give up the key, they're done for.
5. The Real Struggle
This is the real struggle for the possession of the earth. Shall the few own and the many labor for the few, or the many own, and labor upon jobs that they themselves [Pg 255]possess? The struggle between the capitalist nations is incidental. The struggle between the owners of the world and the workers of the world is fundamental.
This is the true fight for control of the earth. Should a small group own everything while the majority works for them, or should the majority own what they work on? The conflict between capitalist nations is secondary. The real conflict is between those who own the world and those who work in it.
If Great Britain wins in her conflict with the United States, her capitalists will continue to exploit the workers of Lancashire and Delhi. Her imperialists will continue their policy of world domination, subjugating peoples and utilizing their resources and their labor for the enrichment.
If Great Britain wins in its conflict with the United States, its capitalists will keep exploiting the workers in Lancashire and Delhi. Its imperialists will carry on with their policy of world domination, subjugating people and using their resources and labor for their own enrichment.
If the United States wins in her struggle with Great of the bankers and traders of London. Britain, her capitalists will continue to exploit the workers of Pittsburg and San Juan. Her imperialists will continue their policy of world domination, subjugating the peoples of Latin American first, and then reaching out for the control over other parts of the earth.
If the United States succeeds in its battle against the bankers and traders of London, Britain, its capitalists will keep exploiting the workers in Pittsburgh and San Juan. Its imperialists will maintain their strategy of global domination, first subjugating the peoples of Latin America, then looking to control other regions of the world.
No matter what imperial nation may triumph in this struggle between the great nations for the right to exploit the weaker peoples and the choice resources, the struggle between capitalism and Socialism must be fought to a finish. If the capitalists win, the world will see the introduction of a new form of serfdom, more complete and more effective than the serfdom of Feudal Europe. If the Socialists win, the world enters upon a new cycle of development.
No matter which imperial power comes out on top in this conflict among the major nations over the right to exploit weaker countries and their valuable resources, the battle between capitalism and socialism must be resolved completely. If the capitalists succeed, the world will witness a new kind of serfdom, one that is more thorough and efficient than the serfdom of Feudal Europe. If the socialists prevail, the world will enter a new phase of development.
XIX. THE AMERICAN WORKER AND WORLD EMPIRE
1. Gains and Losses
The American worker is a citizen of the richest country of the world. Resources are abundant. There is ample machinery to convert these gifts of nature into the things that men need for their food and clothing, their shelter, their education and their recreation. There is enough for all, and to spare, in the United States.
The American worker is a citizen of the wealthiest country in the world. Resources are plentiful. There is plenty of machinery to turn these natural gifts into the things people need for food, clothing, shelter, education, and recreation. There's enough for everyone, and more to spare, in the United States.
But the American worker is not master of his own destinies. He must go to the owners of American capital—to the plutocrats—and from them he must secure the permission to earn a living; he must get a job. Therefore it is the capitalists and not the workers of the United States that are deciding its public policy at the present moment.
But the American worker doesn't control his own future. He has to turn to the owners of American capital—the wealthy—and get their approval to make a living; he needs to find a job. So, it’s the capitalists, not the workers in the United States, who are shaping public policy right now.
The American capitalist is a member of one of the most powerful exploiting groups in the world. Behind him are the resources, productive machinery and surplus of the American Empire. Before him are the undeveloped resources of the backward countries. He has gained wealth and power by exploitation at home. He is destined to grow still richer and more powerful as he extends his organization for the purposes of exploitation abroad.
The American capitalist is part of one of the most powerful exploiting groups in the world. Behind him are the resources, production capabilities, and surplus of the American Empire. In front of him are the untapped resources of developing countries. He has amassed wealth and power through exploitation at home. He is set to become even wealthier and more powerful as he expands his organization to exploit abroad.
The prospects of world empire are as alluring to the American capitalist as have been similar prospects to other exploiting classes throughout history. Empire has always been meat and drink to the rulers.
The idea of a global empire is just as appealing to American capitalists as it has been to other exploiting classes throughout history. Empires have always been essential to those in power.
The master class has much to gain through imperialism. The workers have even more to lose.
The upper class has a lot to gain from imperialism. The workers have even more to lose.
The workers make up the great bulk of the American people. Fully seven-eighths (perhaps nine-tenths) of the adult inhabitants of the United States are wage earners,[Pg 257] clerks and working farmers. All of the proprietors, officials, managers, directors, merchants (big and little), lawyers, doctors, preachers, teachers, and the remainder of the business and professional classes constitute not over 10 or 12 percent of the total adult population. The workers are the "plain people" who do not build empires any more than they make wars. If they were left to themselves, they would continue the pursuit of their daily affairs which takes most of their thought and energy—and be content to let their neighbors alone.
The workers make up the vast majority of the American people. Almost seven-eighths (maybe nine-tenths) of the adult population in the United States are wage earners, clerks, and working farmers. All the owners, officials, managers, directors, merchants (both big and small), lawyers, doctors, preachers, teachers, and the rest of the business and professional groups make up no more than 10 or 12 percent of the total adult population. The workers are the "ordinary people" who neither build empires nor wage wars. If left to their own devices, they would go on managing their daily lives, which occupy most of their thoughts and energy—and be happy to let their neighbors be.
2. The Workers' Business
The mere fact that the workers are so busy with the routine of daily life is in itself a guarantee that they will mind their own business. The average worker is engaged, outside of working hours, with the duties of a family. His wife, if she has children, is thus employed for the greater portion of her time. Both are far too preoccupied to interfere with the like acts of other workers in some other portion of the world. Furthermore, their preoccupation with these necessary tasks gives them sympathy with those similarly at work elsewhere.
The simple fact that workers are so caught up in their daily routines ensures that they’ll focus on their own matters. The average worker spends their time outside of work handling family responsibilities. If the wife has children, she is busy most of the time as well. Both are way too occupied to get involved in the activities of other workers in different parts of the world. Plus, their focus on these essential tasks makes them empathize with others who are working hard in the same way elsewhere.
The plain people of any country are ready to exercise even more than an ordinary amount of forbearance and patience rather than to be involved in warfare, which wipes out in a fortnight the advantages gained through years of patient industry.
The regular folks in any country are willing to show even more than usual levels of tolerance and patience instead of getting caught up in war, which can erase in just two weeks the benefits earned over years of hard work.
The workers have no more to gain from empire building than they have from war making, but they pay the price of both. Empire building and war making are Siamese twins. They are so intimately bound together that they cannot live apart. The empire builder—engaged in conquering and appropriating territory and in subjugating peoples—must have not only the force necessary to set up the empire, but also the force requisite to maintain it. Battleships and army corps are as essential to empires as[Pg 258] mortar is to a brick wall. They are the expression of the organized might by which the empire is held together.
The workers have nothing to gain from building empires any more than they do from waging wars, yet they bear the cost of both. Empire building and war making are connected at the hip. They are so closely linked that they can't exist without each other. The empire builder—focused on conquering land and dominating people—needs not just the power to establish the empire but also the force required to sustain it. Battleships and army units are just as crucial to empires as[Pg 258] mortar is to a brick wall. They represent the organized strength that holds the empire together.
The plain people are the bricks which the imperial class uses to build into a wall about the empire. They are the mortar also, for they man the ships and fill up the gaps in the infantry ranks and the losses in the machine gun corps. They are the body of the empire as the rulers are its guiding spirit.
The ordinary people are the building blocks that the ruling class uses to create a barrier around the empire. They are also the glue that holds everything together, as they serve on ships and fill the holes in the infantry and the gaps in the machine gun corps. They represent the physical foundation of the empire, while the leaders provide the direction and vision.
When ships are required to carry the surplus wealth of the ruling class into foreign markets, the workers build them. When surplus is needed to be utilized in taking advantage of some particularly attractive investment opportunity the workers create it. They lay down the keels of the fighting ships, and their sons aim and fire the guns. They are drafted into the army in time of war and their bodies are fed to the cannon which other workers in other countries, or perhaps in the same country, have made for just such purposes. The workers are the warp and woof of empire, yet they are not the gainers by it. Quite the contrary, they are merely the means by which their masters extend their dominion over other workers who have not yet been scientifically exploited.
When ships are needed to transport the excess wealth of the ruling class to foreign markets, the workers build them. When there's a need to use that surplus for a particularly appealing investment opportunity, the workers create it. They lay the foundation for warships, and their sons aim and fire the cannons. They are drafted into the army during wartime, and their lives are sacrificed to the cannons that other workers, either in different countries or even in their own, made for that very purpose. Workers are the backbone of the empire, yet they don't benefit from it. On the contrary, they are just the means through which their masters expand their control over other workers who have yet to be scientifically exploited.
The work of empire building falls to the lot of the workers. The profits of empire building go to the exploiting class.
The task of building an empire is left to the laborers. The benefits of empire building are enjoyed by the exploiting class.
3. The British Workers
What advantage came to the workers of Rome from the Empire which their hands shaped and which their blood cemented together? Their masters took their farms, converted the small fields into great, slave-worked estates, and drove the husbandmen into the alleys and tenements of the city where they might eke out an existence as best they could. The rank-and-file Roman derived the same advantage from the Roman Empire that the rank-and-file Briton has derived from the British Empire.
What benefit did the workers of Rome get from the Empire that they built with their own hands and sacrificed for with their blood? Their masters took their farms, turned the small plots into large estates run by slaves, and pushed the farmers into the streets and overcrowded buildings of the city where they struggled to survive as best they could. The average Roman gained the same benefits from the Roman Empire that the average Briton gained from the British Empire.
Great Britain has exercised more world mastery during the past hundred years than any other nation. All that Germany hoped to achieve Great Britain has realized. Her traders carry the world's commerce, her financiers clip profits from international business transactions, her manufacturers sell to the people of every country, the sun never sets on the British flag.
Great Britain has had more global influence in the past hundred years than any other country. Everything Germany wanted to accomplish, Great Britain has achieved. Her merchants handle global trade, her financiers profit from international business deals, her manufacturers sell to people in every nation, and the sun never sets on the British flag.
Great Britain is the foremost exponent and practitioner of capitalist imperialism. The British Empire is the greatest that the world has known since the Empire of Rome fell to pieces. Whatever benefits modern imperialism brings either for capitalists or for workers should be enjoyed by the capitalists and workers of Great Britain.
Great Britain is the leading proponent and practitioner of capitalist imperialism. The British Empire is the largest the world has seen since the Roman Empire collapsed. Any benefits that modern imperialism offers, whether for capitalists or workers, should be enjoyed by the capitalists and workers of Great Britain.
Until the Great World War the capitalists of Great Britain were the most powerful on earth with a larger foreign trade and a larger foreign investment than any other. At the same time the British workers were amongst the worst exploited of those in any capitalist country in Europe.
Until the Great World War, the capitalists of Great Britain were the most powerful in the world, boasting a larger foreign trade and greater foreign investment than anyone else. At the same time, British workers were among the most exploited of any capitalist country in Europe.
The entire nineteenth century is one long and terrible record of master-class exploitation inside the British Isles. The miseries of modern India have been paralleled in the lives of the workers of Ireland, Scotland, Wales and England. Gibbins, in his description of the conditions of the child workers in the early years of the nineteenth century ends with the remark, "One dares not trust oneself to try and set down calmly all that might be told of this awful page of the history of industrial England."[58]
The entire nineteenth century is a long and painful record of exploitation by the ruling class within the British Isles. The hardships faced by modern India can be compared to those of the workers in Ireland, Scotland, Wales, and England. Gibbins, when describing the conditions of child laborers in the early years of the nineteenth century, concludes by saying, "One dares not trust oneself to try and set down calmly all that might be told of this awful page of the history of industrial England."[58]
Even more revolting are the descriptions of the conditions which surrounded the lives of the mine workers in the early part of the nineteenth century. Women as well as men were taken into the mines and in some cases, as the reports of the Parliamentary investigation show, the women dragged cars through passage-ways that were too low to admit the use of ponies or mules.
Even more disturbing are the descriptions of the conditions surrounding the lives of mine workers in the early part of the nineteenth century. Both women and men were taken into the mines, and in some cases, as the reports from the Parliamentary investigation indicate, women pulled carts through passageways that were too low for ponies or mules to enter.
England, mistress of the seas, proud carrier of the traffic of the world, the center of international finance, the richest among all the investing nations—England was reeking with poverty. Beside her factories and warehouses were vile slums in which people huddled as Ruskin said, "so many brace to a garret." There in the back alleys of civilization babies were born and babies died, while those who survived grew to the impotent manhood of the street hooligan.
England, the queen of the seas, proud leader of global trade, the hub of international finance, the wealthiest of all investing nations—England was drowning in poverty. Next to her factories and warehouses were disgusting slums where people crowded together as Ruskin said, "so many brace to a garret." In the dark alleys of society, babies were born and babies died, while those who made it grew into the powerless manhood of the street thug.
The British Empire girdled the world. For a century its power had grown, practically unchallenged. Superficially it had every appearance of strength and permanence but behind it and beneath it were the hundreds of thousands of exploited factory workers, the underpaid miners, the Cannon Gate of Edinburgh and the Waterloo Junction of London.
The British Empire surrounded the globe. For a hundred years, its influence had expanded, mostly without opposition. On the surface, it looked strong and stable, but underneath were hundreds of thousands of exploited factory workers, underpaid miners, Cannon Gate in Edinburgh, and Waterloo Junction in London.
Capitalist imperialism has not benefited the British workers. Quite the contrary, the rise of the Empire has been accompanied by the disappearance of the stalwart English yeoman; by the disappearance of the agricultural population; by the concentration of the people in huge industrial towns where the workers, no longer the masters of their own destinies, must earn their living by working at machines owned by the capitalist imperialists. The surplus derived from this exploited labor is utilized by the capitalists as the means of further extending their power in foreign lands.
Capitalist imperialism hasn't helped British workers. On the contrary, the growth of the Empire has led to the decline of the strong English farmer, the vanishing of the rural population, and the concentration of people in large industrial cities where workers, no longer in control of their own futures, must make a living by working machines owned by capitalist imperialists. The profits from this exploited labor are used by the capitalists to further expand their power abroad.
Imperialism has brought not prosperity, but poverty to the plain people of England.
Imperialism hasn't brought wealth, but poverty to the everyday people of England.
There is another aspect of the matter. If these degraded conditions attach to the workers in the center of the empire, what must be the situation among the workers in the dependencies that are the objects of imperial exploitation? Let the workers of India answer for Great Britain; the workers of Korea answer for Japan, and the workers of Porto Rico answer for the United States. Their lot is worse than is the lot of the workers at the center of imperial power.
There’s another side to this issue. If these poor conditions affect the workers in the heart of the empire, then what do you think is happening with the workers in the colonies that are being exploited? Let the workers in India speak for Great Britain; let the workers in Korea speak for Japan, and let the workers in Puerto Rico speak for the United States. Their situation is worse than that of the workers in the center of imperial power.
Empires yield profits to the masters and victory and glory to the workers. Let any one who does not believe this compare the lives of the workers in small countries like Holland, Norway, Denmark and Switzerland, with the lives of the workers in the neighboring empires—Russia, Germany, France and Great Britain. The advantage is all on the side of those who live in the smaller countries that are minding their own affairs and letting their neighbors alone.
Empires bring profits to the powerful and success and recognition to the workers. Anyone who doubts this should compare the lives of workers in smaller countries like the Netherlands, Norway, Denmark, and Switzerland with those in the nearby empires—Russia, Germany, France, and Great Britain. The benefits clearly favor those living in smaller, self-sufficient nations that focus on their own issues without interfering with others.
4. The Long Trail
The workers of the United States are to-day following the lead of the most powerful group of financial imperialists in the world. The trail is a long one leading to world conquest, unimagined dizzying heights of world power, riches beyond the ken of the present generation, and then, the slow and terrible decay and dissolution that sooner or later overtake those peoples that follow the paths of empire. The rulers will wield the power and enjoy the riches. The people will struggle and suffer and pay the price.
The workers in the United States today are following the influence of the most powerful group of financial elites in the world. This path is a long one that leads to global domination, unimaginable heights of power, wealth beyond what this generation can comprehend, and then, the gradual and harsh decline that eventually affects those who pursue the paths of empire. The leaders will hold the power and enjoy the wealth, while the people will struggle, suffer, and bear the cost.
The American plutocracy is out to conquer the earth because it is to their interest to do so. The will-o'-the-wisp of world empire has captured their imaginations and they are following it blindly.
The American wealthy elite is trying to take over the world because it's in their best interest. The elusive idea of a global empire has captivated their minds, and they're pursuing it without questioning.
The American people, on November 2, 1920, gave the American imperialists a blanket authority to go about their imperial business—an authority that the rulers will not be slow to follow. First they will clean house at home—that housecleaning will be called "the campaign for the establishment of the open shop." Then they will go into Mexico, Central America, China, and Europe in search of markets, trade and investment opportunities.
The American people, on November 2, 1920, gave American imperialists full permission to pursue their imperial goals—permission that the leaders won't hesitate to use. First, they will tidy things up at home—this housecleaning will be referred to as "the campaign for the establishment of the open shop." After that, they will move into Mexico, Central America, China, and Europe looking for markets, trade, and investment opportunities.
Behind the investment will come the flag, carried by battle-ships and army divisions. That flag will be brought front to front with other flags, high words will be spoken, blood will flow, life will ebb, and the imperialists will win their point and pocket their profit.
Behind the investment will come the flag, carried by warships and army units. That flag will be confronted by other flags, lofty speeches will be made, blood will spill, lives will be lost, and the imperialists will achieve their goals and take their profits.
Behind them, in November, and at all other times of the year, there will be the will, expressed or implied, of the working people of the United States, who will produce the surplus for foreign investment; will make the ships and man them; will dig the coal and bore for the oil; will shape the machines. Their hands and the hands of their sons will be the force upon which the ruling class must depend for its power. They will produce, while the ruling class consumes and destroys.
Behind them, in November, and at all other times of the year, there will be the will, expressed or implied, of the working people of the United States, who will create the surplus for foreign investment; will build and crew the ships; will mine the coal and drill for the oil; will shape the machines. Their hands and the hands of their sons will be the force upon which the ruling class must rely for its power. They will produce, while the ruling class consumes and destroys.
The trail is a long one, but it leads none the less certainly to, isolation and death. No people can follow the imperial trail and live. Their liberties go first and then their lives pay the penalty of their rulers' imperial ambition. It was so in the German Empire. It is so to-day in the British Empire. To-morrow, if the present course is followed, it will be equally true in the American Empire.
The path is a long one, but it definitely leads to isolation and death. No one can walk the imperial path and survive. Their freedoms vanish first, and then their lives pay the price for their leaders' imperial ambitions. It was true in the German Empire. It is true today in the British Empire. Tomorrow, if things continue as they are, it will be just as true in the American Empire.
5. The New Germany
One of the chief charges against the Germans, in 1914, was that they were not willing to leave their neighbors in peace. They were out to conquer the world, and they did not care who knew it. It was not the German people who held these plans for world conquest, it was the German ruling class. The German people were quite willing to stay at home and attend to their own affairs. Their rulers, pushed by the need for markets and investment opportunities, and lured by the possibilities of a world empire, were willing to stake the lives and the happiness of the whole nation on the outcome of these ambitious schemes. They threw their dice in the great world game of international rivalries—threw and lost; but in their losing, they carried not only their own fortunes, but the lives and the homes and the happiness of millions of their fellows whose only desire was to remain at home and at peace.
One of the main accusations against the Germans in 1914 was that they weren't willing to leave their neighbors alone. They aimed to conquer the world and didn't care who knew it. It wasn't the German people who had these plans for world domination; it was the German ruling class. The German people were perfectly happy to stay at home and focus on their own lives. Their leaders, driven by the need for markets and investment opportunities, and tempted by the prospects of a world empire, were ready to risk the lives and happiness of the entire nation on these ambitious plans. They took their chances in the big international competition—rolled the dice and lost; but in their defeat, they affected not only their own futures but also the lives, homes, and happiness of millions of their fellow citizens whose only wish was to stay home and live in peace.
Germany's offense was her ambition to gain at the expense of her neighbors. Lacking a place in the sun, she proposed to take it by the strength of her good right arm.[Pg 263] This is the method by which all of the great empires have been built and it is the method that the builders of the American Empire have followed up to this point. The land which the ruling class of the United States has needed has heretofore been in the hands of weak peoples—Indians, Mexicans, a broken Spanish Empire. Now, however, the time has come when the rulers of the United States, with the greatest wealth and the greatest available resources of any of the nations, are preparing to take what they want from the great nations, and that imperial purpose can be enforced in only one way—by a resort to arms. The rulers of the United States must take what they would have by force, from those who now possess it. They did not hesitate to take Panama from Colombia; they did not hesitate to take possession of Hayti and of Santo Domingo, and they do not propose to stop there.
Germany's ambition was to gain power at the expense of her neighbors. Without a place in the sun, she planned to seize it by the strength of her own hand.[Pg 263] This is how all great empires have been built, and it’s the approach that the creators of the American Empire have followed up to now. The land that the ruling class of the United States has needed has previously been held by weaker peoples—Indians, Mexicans, a weakened Spanish Empire. However, the moment has come when the leaders of the United States, with the greatest wealth and resources of any nation, are getting ready to take what they want from the major powers, and that imperial goal can only be achieved in one way—by using military force. The leaders of the United States must seize what they desire by force from those who currently hold it. They didn't hesitate to take Panama from Colombia; they didn't hesitate to take control of Haiti and Santo Domingo, and they don’t intend to stop there.
The people of the world know these things. The inhabitants of Latin America know them by bitter experience. The inhabitants of Europe and of Asia know them by hearsay. Both in the West and in the East, the United States is known as "The New Germany."
The people of the world understand these facts. The people in Latin America know them from painful experience. Those in Europe and Asia know them through stories. In both the West and the East, the United States is referred to as "The New Germany."
That means that the peoples of these countries look upon the United States and her foreign policies in exactly the same way that the people of the United States were taught to regard Germany and her foreign policies. To them the United States is a great, rich, brutal Empire, setting her heel and laying her fist where necessity calls. Men and women inside the United States think of themselves and of their fellow citizens as human beings. The people in the other countries read the records of the lynchings, the robberies and the murders inside the United States; of the imperial aggression toward Latin America, and they are learning to believe that the United States is made up of ruthless conquerors who work their will on those that cross their path.
That means that the people in these countries see the United States and its foreign policies just like the people in the United States were taught to view Germany and its foreign policies. To them, the United States is a powerful, wealthy, brutal Empire, imposing its will wherever it sees fit. Men and women inside the United States see themselves and their fellow citizens as human beings. Meanwhile, people in other countries read about the lynchings, robberies, and murders happening in the United States, along with the aggressive actions toward Latin America, and they’re starting to believe that the United States is made up of ruthless conquerors who impose their will on anyone in their way.
The plain American men and women, living quietly in their simple homes, are none the less citizens of an aggressive, conquering Empire. They may not have a[Pg 264] thought directed against the well-being of a single human creature, but they pay their taxes into the public treasury; they vote for imperialism on each election day; they read imperialism in their papers and hear it preached in their churches, and when the call comes, their sons will go to the front and shed their blood in the interest of the imperial class.
The ordinary American men and women, living quietly in their simple homes, are still citizens of an aggressive, conquering Empire. They may not have a[Pg 264] single thought aimed at harming any human being, but they pay their taxes to the public treasury; they support imperialism with their votes every election day; they read about imperialism in their newspapers and hear it pushed in their churches. When the time comes, their sons will go to the front lines and shed their blood for the benefit of the imperial class.
The plain people of the German Empire did not desire to harm their fellows, nevertheless, they furnished the cannon-fodder for the Great War. America's plain folks, by merely following the doctrine, "My country, right or wrong—America first!" will find themselves, at no very distant date, exactly where the German people found themselves in 1914.
The everyday people of the German Empire didn't want to hurt their neighbors, yet they became the cannon fodder for the Great War. America's ordinary folks, simply by embracing the belief, "My country, right or wrong—America first!" will soon find themselves in the same situation the German people faced in 1914.
6. The Price
The historic record, in the matter of empire, is uniform. The masters gain; the workers pay.
The historical record regarding empires is consistent. The rulers benefit; the laborers suffer.
The workers of the United States will not be exempt from these inexorable necessities of imperialism. On the contrary they will be called upon to pay the same price for empire that the workers in Britain have paid; that the workers in the other empires have paid. What is the price? What will world empire cost the American workers?
The workers in the United States won’t escape the unavoidable demands of imperialism. On the contrary, they will have to pay the same price for empire that British workers have paid and that workers in other empires have faced. What is that price? What will world empire cost American workers?
1. It will cost them their liberties. An empire cannot be run by a debating society. Empires must act. In order to make this action mobile and efficacious, authority must be centered in the hands of a small group—the ruling class, whose will shall determine imperial policy. Self-government is inconsistent with imperialism.
1. It will cost them their freedom. An empire can't be managed by a debating society. Empires need to take action. To make this action quick and effective, authority has to be held by a small group—the ruling class—whose decisions will shape imperial policy. Self-governance doesn’t line up with imperialism.
2. The workers will not only lose their own liberties, but they will be compelled to take liberties away from the peoples that are brought under the domination of the Empire. Self-determination is the direct opposite of imperialism.
2. The workers will not only lose their own freedoms, but they will also be forced to take away the freedoms of the people who come under the control of the Empire. Self-determination is the complete opposite of imperialism.
3. The American workers, as a part of the price of empire, will be compelled to produce surplus [Pg 265]wealth—wealth which they can never consume; wealth the control of which passes into the hands of the imperial ruling class, to be invested by them in the organization of the Empire and the exploitation of the resources and other economic opportunities of the dependent territory.
3. American workers, as part of the cost of empire, will have to create surplus [Pg 265]wealth—wealth that they can never use; wealth that becomes controlled by the imperial ruling class, which will invest it in organizing the Empire and exploiting the resources and economic opportunities of the dependent territory.
4. The American workers must be prepared to create and maintain an imperial class, whose function it is to determine the policies and direct the activities of the Empire. This class owes its existence to the existence of empire, without which such a ruling class would be wholly unnecessary.
4. American workers need to be ready to establish and support an imperial class, whose role is to shape the policies and oversee the actions of the Empire. This class exists because of the empire; without it, such a ruling class would be completely unnecessary.
5. The American workers must be prepared, in peace time as well as in war time, to provide the "sinews of war": the fortifications, the battle fleet, the standing army and the vast naval and military equipment that invariably accompany empire.
5. American workers need to be ready, in both peacetime and wartime, to supply the "sinews of war": the fortifications, the battle fleet, the standing army, and the extensive naval and military equipment that always come with an empire.
6. The American workers must furthermore be ready, at a moment's call, to turn from their occupations, drop their useful pursuits, accept service in the army or in the navy and fight for the preservation of the Empire—against those who attack from without, against those who seek the right of self-determination within.
6. American workers must also be ready, at a moment's notice, to leave their jobs, put aside their important work, join the army or navy, and fight to protect the Empire—against those who attack from outside and against those who seek self-determination from within.
7. The American workers, in return for these sacrifices, must be prepared to accept the poverty of a subsistence wage; to give the best of their energies in war and in peace, and to stand aside while the imperial class enjoys the fat of the land.
7. American workers, in exchange for these sacrifices, must be ready to accept the hardship of a subsistence wage; to give their all in both war and peace, and to step back while the elite enjoy the benefits.
7. A Way Out
If the United States follows the course of empire, the workers of the United States have no choice but to pay the price of Empire—pay it in wealth, in misery, and in blood. But there is an alternative. Instead of going on with the old system of the masters, the workers may establish a new economic system—a system belonging to the workers, and managed by them for their benefit.
If the United States follows the path of empire, the workers will have no option but to pay the costs of empire—pay it in wealth, suffering, and lives. But there is another way. Instead of continuing with the old system of the elite, the workers can create a new economic system—a system that belongs to them and is run by them for their own benefit.
The workers of Europe have tried out imperialism and they have come to the conclusion that the cost is too high. Now they are seeking, through their own movement—the labor movement—to control and direct the economic life of Europe in the interest of those who produce the wealth and thus make the economic life of Europe possible.
The workers of Europe have experimented with imperialism and have realized that the cost is too high. Now they are striving, through their own movement—the labor movement—to take control of and guide Europe’s economic life for the benefit of those who create the wealth and make Europe’s economy work.
The American workers have the same opportunity. Will they avail themselves of it? The choice is in their hands.
The American workers have the same opportunity. Will they take advantage of it? The choice is in their hands.
Thus far the workers of the United States have been, for the most part, content to live under the old system, so long as it paid them a living wage and offered them a job. The European workers felt that too in the pre-war days, but they have been compelled—by the terrible experiences of the past few years—to change their minds. It was no longer a question of wages or a job in Europe. It was a question of life or death.
So far, the workers in the United States have mostly been okay with the old system, as long as it provided them a decent wage and a job. European workers felt the same way before the war, but they've been forced—by the awful experiences of the last few years—to rethink their stance. It was no longer just about wages or jobs in Europe; it became a matter of life or death.
Can the American worker profit by that experience? Can he realize that he is living in a country whose rulers have adopted an imperial policy that threatens the peace of the world? Can he see that the pursuit of this policy means war, famine, disease, misery and death to millions in other countries as well as to the millions at home? The workers of Europe have learned the lesson by bitter experience. Is not the American worker wise enough to profit by their example?
Can the American worker learn from that experience? Can he understand that he lives in a country whose leaders have taken on an imperial policy that jeopardizes global peace? Can he recognize that following this policy results in war, famine, disease, suffering, and death for millions abroad as well as for the millions at home? The workers in Europe have learned this lesson through painful experience. Isn’t the American worker knowledgeable enough to learn from their example?
FOOTNOTE:
THE END
INDEX.
-
- Advertising imperialism,
- America, conquest of,
- America first,
- America for Americans,
- American capitalists,
- 218
- " " program of,
- " empire, costs of,
- " " course of,
- " " development of,
- " " economic basis of,
- " " growth of,
- " imperialism,
- " Indian,
- " industries, growth of,
- " people, ancestry,
- " protectorates,
- " Republic, disappearance of,
- " tradition, failure of,
- " worker and empire,
- Anti-imperialism,
- Appropriation of territory,
- Automobile distribution,
-
- Bankers, unity of,
- Bethlehem Steel Co.,
- Business control,
-
- Canada, investments in,
- Cherokees, dealings with,
- Coal reserves,
- Competition, ferocity of,
- Competitive industry,
- Conquering peoples,
- Conquest of the West,
-
- Dictatorship, possibility of,
- Dominican Republic, relations with,
-
- Education for imperialism,
- Empire and British workers,
- Empires, the Big Four,
-
- Financial imperialism,
- Foreign investments,
- France, gains of,
-
- Government and business,
- Great Peace,
- Great War,
- Guaranty Trust Company,
-
- Hayti, conditions in,
-
- Immigrants, race of,
- Imperialism, advantages of,
- Imperialists, training of,
- Incomes, in the United States,
- Investing nations,
- Investment bankers,
- Investments in the United States,
- Italy, gains of,
-
- Job ownership,
-
- Labor, colonial shortage of,
- Landlordism,
- Latin America,
- Liberty, desire for,
-
- Manifest destiny,
- Mastery, avenues of,
- Mexico, conquest of,
-
- National City Bank,
- Navy League,
- Negroes, numbers enslaved,
- New Europe,
- New Orleans, struggle for,
-
- Ownership, advantages of,
-
- Patriotism,
- Personal incomes, sources of,
- Philippines, conquest of,
- Plutocracy,
- Popular government,
- Population, increase of,
- Preparedness,
- Press censorship,
- Product ownership,
- Profiteering,
- Property, Indian ideas of,
- Public opinion, control of,
-
- Resources of the United States,
- Revolution in Europe,
-
- Slave Coast,
- Slaves, early demand for,
- Sovereignty, source of,
- Spanish War,
- Standard Oil Co.,
-
- Teutonic peoples,
- Texas, annexation of,
- Timber reserves,
- Transportation facilities,
-
- Undeveloped countries,
-
- Western Hemisphere, and the United States,
- World conquest,
- Workers' business,
-
- Yellow peril,
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!